Service Manual Epson Aculasercx411nf

SERVICE MANUAL
Color Multi-Function Page Printer
EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F
SEOT04007
Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice : Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright 2005 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
I&I CS/Quality Management & PL Department
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. ALWAYS WEAR GLOVES FOR DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY TO AVOID INJURY FROM SHARP METAL EDGES.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECONDSOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
About This Manual

This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the
product.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling
the product.
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epsonapproved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product.
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:
System Connection Diagram and Printer System Electrical Connection
Packaging Specification
Exploded diagram & Parts List
Electrical circuit boards schematics
System Parameter/List of Error List
Symbols Used in this Manual

Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read
NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
C A U T IO N
C H E C K
P O IN T
W A R N IN G
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition

that is necessary to keep the product's quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition

that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also
provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or
comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Abbreviations
The following is a representative example of abbreviations (both original and common ones) used in this manual.
ADC............... Automatic Density Control
AG .................................... Analog Ground
APS............................... Auto Paper Select
ARC ................. Auto Registration Control
ASSY......................................... Assembly
ATS.......................... Auto Tray Switching
B .......................................................Black
BCR ............................... Bias Charge Roll
Bk .....................................................Black
BLK ..................................................Black
BLU ................................................... Blue
BRN................................................ Brown
BTR ............................. Bias Transfer Roll
(Transfer Unit)
C ........................................................Cyan
CLN ...............................................Cleaner
CRU...............Customer Replaceable Unit
CRUM .................................CRU Monitor
CTRG .........................................Cartridge
DET ...................................... Detoner Roll
DEVE. ...................................... Developer
DIAG. .......................................Diagnostic
DISP ........................................... Dispense
dpi ......................................... dots per inch
DTS.........................................Detack Saw
DUP ............................................... Duplex
ESB............................Electro Static Brush
ESS ............................. Electric Subsystem
F........................................................ Front
FEED,FDR ..................................... Feeder
FIP .....................Fault Isolation Procedure
GND ..............................................Ground
GRN................................................. Green
GRY................................................... Gray
HT..............................................Harf Tone
HUM...........................................Humidity
HVPS............ High Voltage Power Supply
ICDC ........Image Count Dispense Control
ID........................................Image Density
(or Identification)
IBT ..................Intermediate Belt Transfer
(Intermediate Transfer Unit)
INTL,INLK .................................Interlock
IOT ...................... Image Output Terminal
K .......................................................Black
L ..........................................................Left
L/H ............................................Left Hand
LD........................................... Laser diode
LDD..........................Lightly Doped Drain
LED .......................... Light-emitting diode
LEF..................................Long Edge Feed
LH..............................................Left Hand
LV......................................... Low Voltage
LVPS .............Low Voltage Power Supply
M ................................................. Magenta
MAG.......................................... Mag. Roll
MCU.......................Machine Control Unit
MOB.................................. Marks On Belt
MOT ................................................ Motor
MSI............................ Multi Sheet Inserter
N/P.............................................. No Paper
NVM.......................Non Volatile Memory
OEM ..Original Equipment Manufacturing
OHP............................... Overhead Project
(In this manual,
OHP means a transparent sheet.)
OP.............................................. Operation
OPC .................. Organic Photo Conductor
ORN ..........................................ORANGE
PC................................Personal Computer
PCDC .........Pixel Count Dispense Control
PH .................................... Paper Handling
PHD....................................... Printer Head
PNK.................................................... Pink
POP ..................... Paper On Photoreceptor
PPM............................... Prints Per Minute
PR,P/R........................................... Process
PV ........................................Print Volume
PWB(A) ................... Printed Wiring Boad
(Assembly)
R ........................................................Right
R .........................................................Rear
R/H ..........................................Right Hand
REF ............................................Refresher
REGI. .....................................Registration
RH ...........................................Right Hand
ROS....................... Raster Output Scanner
ROT.................................................Rotary
RTC.........................Rubber Tube Charger
RTN.................................................Return
SEF..................................Short Edge Feed
SG ...................................... Signal Ground
SMH .................. Special Material Handler
SNR.................................................Sensor
SOL. ............................................ Solenoid
SOS ......................................Start Of Scan
STM .......................... Single Tray Module
SW.................................................. Switch
TEMP. ................................... Temperature
TM........................................ Tray Module
TNER,TNR ......................................Toner
TP ............................................Thermopile
TR ................................................ Transfer
VIO ..................................................Violet
WHT ................................................White
XERO ....................................Xerographic
Y ....................................................Yellow
YEL................................................Yellow
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe the Warnings and Cautions and never depart from the instructions given in this document.
Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described in this manual.
In addition to the descriptions below and those given in this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that could result in serious bodily injury.
Always pay enough attention to secure safety when working with the printer.
Power Supply
Before starting any service procedure, turn the printer off and unplug the power cord
from the wall outlet. If you need to work on the printer with power applied, such as
voltage measurement, strictly follow the instructions in this manual and use extreme
caution to avoid an electric shock.
W A R N IN G
If you need to work on the printer with power applied, never

touch any electronic components other than the target
component.
The power supply switch/inlet part (MAIN POWER SWITCH
& INLET) is live even after the power switch is turned off. Use
extreme caution not to touch the live part when working on the
printer with the power supply cable connected.
Do not touch any live part unless instructed to do so.
Leg_001_002RA
Mechanical Components
High Temperature Assembly
When servicing any driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn the power off and unplug
the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly.
When working with hot parts (FUSER etc.) make sure to turn the power off, unplug the
power cable, and leave the printer until it cools down sufficiently to work on it to
prevent burn injury.
W A R N IN G
Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the assembly
(printer) is operating.
W A R N IN G
As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately

after the operation, leave it more than 30 minutes before working.
Caution Label
(Refer to Caution Label About High-temperature Surface)
FUSER Unit
Leg_001_022RA
Laser Beam
W A R N IN G
Letting a laser beam get into your eye directly could result in
Caution Label
(Refer to Caution Label About High-temperature Surface)
loss of vision.
Never open the Cover where the Warning Label About Laser
Beam is affixed.
Before disassembling or assembling, be sure to turn the power
off.
If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly
follow the instructions in this manual.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
C H E C K
P O IN T
The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more

coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light).
The beam has excellent monochromaticity and convergence,
thus it reaches long distances. Because of these characteristics,
the laser beam converges into one point, causing high density
and high temperature. And that is why a laser beam is harmful
to the human body.
The laser beam in this printer is invisible.
ROS ASSY
Leg_001_003RB
Warning label for Laser Beam
Warning/Caution Labels
Warning labels and caution labels are attached on the corresponding locations on or in
the printer.
C H E C K
P O IN T
The label is attached on the top of the laser beam emitting unit (ROS ASSY) to
alert the service personnel the danger of laser beam.
(Refer to Laser Beam)
In maintenance work, check that the labels are free from peeling
and soiling.
Caution Label About High-temperature Surface

The labels are attached on the Fuser assy and the perimeter alerting the user to
avoid burn injury.
(Refer to High Temperature Assembly)
Leg_Sec001_018EA
Leg_Sec001_020EA
Leg_Sec001_019EA
Leg_Sec001_023EA
Cautions relating to Toner cleaning
Cautions relating to Storage of Paper
To prevent ignition, explosion, burn, injury, etc., do not use a general vacuum
cleaner for cleaning dropped toner. (To do so may cause the toner to catch fire by
sparks in the vacuum cleaner.)
W A R N IN G
Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner. To

do so may cause ignition.
Leg_Sec001_014EA
To achieve the appropriate printing results, unused paper that is stored outside of the
unit should be sealed up by packing material or put into a plastic bag to prevent it from
becoming moist.
Safety Devices
Use extra care when checking or servicing the safety devices (e.g., interlock switches,
fuses, thermostat). The printer's cover, control panel and any other parts which are
directly related to the user's safety should also be observed carefully.
As the major safety devices, the printer is equipped with the following four interlock
switches:
SWITCH ASSY TOP

SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH ASSY TOP
When any one of the above interlock switches turns off, +24VDC supply to the
motors and solenoid is cut off. The SWITCH ASSY TOP turns off when the
COVER ASSY TOP is opened. The SWITCH-INLK FRONT does when the
COVER FRONT ASSY U is opened, and the SWITCH-INLK FUSER does when
the COVER FUSER is opened.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
The FUSER LOCK SWITCH turns off when the latch lever of the FUSER ASSY
is released, then AC power supply to the Heater of the FUSER ASSY is cut off.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Leg_001_024RA
Schematic Diagram of Safety System
Revision Status
Revision
Date of Issue
Descriptions
28 April, 2005
First release
13 July, 2005
<Modification>
CHAPTER 1:
Reception setup items (p.68) / New information is added.
CHAPTER 4:
4.2.3.7 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (p.341) / A caution box is added.
4.2.4.4 FRAME ASSY-PH (p.355) / New information is added.
20 January, 2006
<Modification>
CHAPTER 1:
All specifications are fixed.
Throughput (p.20) / The information is revised.
Power Consumption (p.21) / The values are revised.
Temperature and humidity (p.23) / The value in the table is revised.
1.2.3.1 Scanner basic specifications (p.41) / Scanning Resolution is added.
CHAPTER 3:
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p.149) / Controller related error codes are added.
FIP-C6 /C7 /C8 /C9 (p.248) / Controller related error FIPs are added.
CHAPTER 5:
5.2.2 Firmware Update (p.537) / A description of USB driver is added.
5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data (p.544) / A NOTE about the utility is added.
CHAPTER 7:
7.4 Parts List (p.591) / This section are fully revised.
7.5 Exploded Diagram (p.599) / This section are fully revised.
Revision C
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................
1.1.1 Printer Section ............................................................................................
1.1.2 Scanner Section ..........................................................................................
1.1.3 Fax Section .................................................................................................
1.1.4 Controller....................................................................................................
1.1.5 Software......................................................................................................
1.2 Basic Specifications.............................................................................................
1.2.1 Whole System.............................................................................................
1.2.2 Printer Section ............................................................................................
1.2.3 Scanner Section ..........................................................................................
1.2.4 ADF section ................................................................................................
1.2.5 Copy Performance ......................................................................................
1.2.6 Fax Performance.........................................................................................
1.2.7 Controller Specifications ............................................................................
1.3 Control Panel .......................................................................................................
1.3.1 Panel Specifications....................................................................................
1.3.2 Basic Functions...........................................................................................
1.3.3 Setup Functions ..........................................................................................
1.3.4 Special Operations ......................................................................................
1.4 Status Sheet .........................................................................................................
1.4.1 Printer Section ............................................................................................
1.4.2 Fax Section .................................................................................................
18
18
18
18
19
19
20
20
29
41
42
43
45
46
47
47
52
64
69
71
71
75
Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES

2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................
2.1.1 Outline Specifications.................................................................................
2.1.2 Detection Mechanisms................................................................................
2.2 Printer Section Operating Principle.....................................................................
2.2.1 Print Process ...............................................................................................
2.2.2 Flow of Print Data ......................................................................................
2.2.3 Drive Transmission Path............................................................................
78
79
82
84
84
95
96
2.2.4 Paper Feed ................................................................................................

2.2.5 Xerographic ..............................................................................................
2.2.6 Electrical...................................................................................................
2.2.7 Operating Modes ......................................................................................
2.2.8 Flying-start printing..................................................................................
2.3 Scanner Operating Principles ............................................................................
2.3.1 Scanner Mechanism Overview.................................................................
2.3.2 ADF Mechanism Overview......................................................................
102
108
120
122
123
124
124
126
Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................
3.1.1 Procedure for troubleshooting ..................................................................
3.1.2 Checking Installation Status .....................................................................
3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work...................................
3.2 Errors/Warnings Display ...................................................................................
3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode ...................................................................................
3.3.1 Self diagnosis............................................................................................
3.3.2 Fax Maintenance.......................................................................................
3.4 Printer ................................................................................................................
3.4.1 Notes on Using FIP...................................................................................
3.4.2 Warming-Up Flowchart at Power-ON .....................................................
3.4.3 FIP ............................................................................................................
3.4.4 FIP by Message Display ...........................................................................
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble ..............................................................
3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble..............................................................
3.5 Scanner/ADF Section ........................................................................................
3.5.1 FIP by Message Display ...........................................................................
3.5.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms.................................................................
3.6 Fax Function......................................................................................................
3.6.1 Troubleshooting by Panel Message..........................................................
3.6.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms.................................................................
3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies ............................................................
3.6.4 Collecting Error Information ....................................................................
129
129
129
130
131
133
133
137
143
143
144
145
146
249
281
286
286
288
290
290
291
293
295
14
Revision C
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................
4.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................
4.1.2 Before you start work ...............................................................................
4.1.3 List of Screws ...........................................................................................
4.1.4 Tools .........................................................................................................
4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures ......................................
4.2 Printer ................................................................................................................
4.2.1 SCANNER................................................................................................
4.2.2 COVER.....................................................................................................
4.2.3 MSI ...........................................................................................................
4.2.4 PH ASSY ..................................................................................................
4.2.5 TRANSFER ..............................................................................................
4.2.6 XERO .......................................................................................................
4.2.7 ROS...........................................................................................................
4.2.8 DEVE........................................................................................................
4.2.9 FUSER......................................................................................................
4.2.10 DRIVE ....................................................................................................
4.2.11 ELECTRICAL........................................................................................
4.2.12 500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER ...............................
4.3 Scanner Section .................................................................................................
4.3.1 ADF Unit ..................................................................................................
4.3.2 COVER.....................................................................................................
4.3.3 IR A Assy .................................................................................................
4.4 ADF Section ......................................................................................................
4.4.1 COVER.....................................................................................................
4.4.2 ADF BASE ASSY....................................................................................
4.4.3 ADF FRAME ASSY ................................................................................
4.4.4 ADF PCB ASSY.......................................................................................
4.4.5 PAPER GUIDE ASSY .............................................................................
303
303
305
306
307
308
309
309
311
332
352
369
390
404
407
418
423
431
445
484
484
485
488
495
495
501
512
528
529
Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................
5.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................
5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items............................................................
5.2 Printer Section ...................................................................................................
5.2.1 Writing USB ID........................................................................................
5.2.2 Firmware Update ......................................................................................
534
534
534
535
535
537
5.3 Fax Function...................................................................................................... 544

5.3.1 Fax unit Firmware Update........................................................................ 544
5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data................................................................... 544
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................
6.2 On-site Service ..................................................................................................
6.2.1 Details of On-site Servicing .....................................................................
6.3 Lubrication and Glueing....................................................................................
6.3.1 Printer Section ..........................................................................................
6.3.2 Scanner/ADF Section ...............................................................................
6.4 Printer Maintenance Function ...........................................................................
6.4.1 Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................
6.4.2 Maintenance Information Output .............................................................
6.5 Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement........................
6.5.1 Consumables.............................................................................................
6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts.......................................................................
549
550
551
554
554
554
556
556
558
565
565
566
Chapter 7 APPENDIX
7.1 System Connection Diagram.............................................................................
7.2 Printer System Electrical Connection................................................................
7.2.1 Connector Summary .................................................................................
7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams...................................................................
7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts .............................................
7.3 Packaging Specification ....................................................................................
7.4 Parts List............................................................................................................
7.5 Exploded Diagram.............................................................................................
7.6 Schematic Circuit Diagram ...............................................................................
7.7 Fax Unit System ................................................................................................
7.7.1 List of System Parameter..........................................................................
7.7.2 Error List...................................................................................................
568
569
569
574
576
589
591
599
642
649
649
673
15
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Overview
Revision C
1.1.2 Scanner Section
The AcuLaser CX11/CX11F are all-in-one host- based color laser printers, which
include scan, copy, and fax functions. (The AcuLaser CX11 does not have the fax
function.)
A4 full-color 4-cycle engine, which is the same as AcuLaser C1100, is employed. Both
of the two models have a control panel with a large LCD. As the control panel is
independently-designed for each model; AcuLaser CX11 (fax-UNinstalled model) and
AcuLaser CX11F (fax installed model), changing CX11 to CX11F or the reverse is not
available.
Color CCD
A4 compatible flatbed scanner with optical resolution of 600 dpi
Scan Speed
Color
: 5.0 PPM (for A4 size)
Monochrome
: 25.0 PPM (for A4 size)
Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Capable of loading up to 50 sheets (paper basic weight is 80g/m2).
(Fax model only)
1.1.1 Printer Section

Compact and lightweight engine, which enables True 600 dpi
Print Speed
Color
: 5.0 PPM (for A4 printing)
Monochrome
: 25.0 PPM (for A4 printing)
Manual duplex printing supported

Paper Feeder Capacity
MP cassette
: 200 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m2)
Optional lower cassette
: 500 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m2)
Paper Eject Capacity

Face-down
: 250 sheets
NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:

22 degrees C/55% RH, standard paper (simplex/duplex printing).
The print ratio is 5% for both B/W and color printing (With color
printing, 5% for each color)
1.1.3 Fax Section

High-speed operation suitable for business purposes
Super G3 compatible
Communication Speed
Supports both PSTN and PBX
: 2.4K to 33.6Kbps
Improved usability suitable for business purposes
One-touch send button
: 3 buttons
Speed dial
: Up to 60 entries
Group dial
: Up to 20 groups
Conforms to Color FAX standards

Conforms to Communication standards for each country
Supported countries
: 36 countries
Consumables
Toner Cartridge with CSIC chip (C, M, Y, K)
Photoconductor Unit with CSIC chip

(Transfer Belt and Waste Toner Box are included)
18
Revision C
1.1.4 Controller
New ASIC for controlling scanning and copying, and a FAX controller are added
to the controller for host-based printer.
CPU
: TX4955 (192MHz)
RAM
: Standard 128 MB (expandable up to 576 MB)
Network I/F board (Cobalt)

Control panel with a large LCD (with backlight)
Built-in Interfaces
USB2.0HS
Ethernet (10Base/100Base-T) (standard or option)
Fax modular (The AcuLaser CX11F only)
1.1.5 Software
ESC/PageS03 installed
A wide variety of copy modes
Copy Mode
2 in 1 copy is available
: Text, Photos, Text/Photos, and High resolution
Push-type scan (Enables to send scanned data to another PC via network)

Support both Local TWAIN and Network TWAIN
The ROM is used for all destination models
Network I/F board (Cobalt) compatible
19
Revision C
Print*6
1.2 Basic Specifications
Table 1-1. Monochrome Print Mode (Unit: PPM)
1.2.1 Whole System
Paper size*1
1.2.1.1 Outline Specifications
Standard*2
Low speed*3
LGL, GLG, F4
20.0
4.0
A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE
25.0
4.0
---
4.0
User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or less
25.0
4.0
User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or more
20.0
---
Envelopes
WARM UP TIME
(Including ESS system check and RAM check)
37 seconds or less: From turning the power on to ready-to-print status.
(22 degrees C 55 %RH, rated voltage)
Table 1-2. Color Print Mode (Unit: PPM)

Paper size*1
30 seconds or less: From standby mode to ready-to-print status.

(22 degrees C 55 %RH, rated voltage)
PRINTING MODE
Color mode (F/C)
Prints in color with Y, M, C, and K toners
Monochrome mode (B/W)
Prints in monochrome with K toner (The highest printing speed can be achieved in
this mode)
THROUGHPUT
Copy Mode
A4/300dpi
A4/600dpi
A4/300dpi
A4/600dpi
29 sec
73 sec
12 sec
18 sec
5 ppm
5 ppm
25 ppm
25 ppm
5 ppm
1.3 ppm*4
25 ppm
4.5 ppm*4
First copy
Multi
copy*1
ADF continuous copy*2

Note *1:
Monochrome*3
Makes multiple copies of one original
*2:
Makes one copy of multiple originals using ADF
*3:
Memory: Standard / Paper tray, MP tray/SC lamp

Printer:
Ready-to-print status after the warm-up
*4:
Memory: 320MB
Low speed 1*4 Low speed 2*5
LGL, GLG, F4
2.3
---
---
A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE
5.0
2.3
1.9
Envelopes
---
2.3
---
User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or less
5.0
2.3
---
User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or more
2.3
---
---
Note *1:
For details on the paper orientation, see Supported paper size, type and orientation
(p32).
*2:
Standard mode (Color) : Feeds (prints) papers at the maximum speed of the color
mode.
Standard mode (B/W) : Feeds (prints) papers at the highest speed of the product.
*3:
Low speed mode
: For thick papers that exceed 163 g/m2 (43 lb)

(including transparency/envelope)
Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation
*4:
Low speed 1 mode
: For thick papers that exceed 105g/m2 (28 lb)

(including envelope/label)
Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation
*5:
Low speed 2 mode
: Feeds papers at low speed to maintain toner fixation when

printing on transparencies.
*6:
Note that the time given in the tables above does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in Section 1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions (p39).
Copy
Color*3
Standard*2
Scan
Monochrome
Full color
: 2 sec/A4, 300dpi
: 11 sec/A4, 300dpi
20
Revision C
NOISE
1.2.1.2 Electrical Characteristics
Sound Pressure
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

Power supply operating voltage/frequency
Table 1-3. Sound Pressure

Model
During printing
Standby mode
Sleep mode
Base model
54dB
Background noise
Background noise
FAX model
57dB
Background noise
Background noise
NOTE 1: Conforms to ISO-7779 concerning measurement and calculation methods

2: Figures are actual measurement values (when copying in monochrome)
Sound Power
AC 220V/240V 10%
: 50Hz/60Hz 3Hz
Power supply for the controller
DC 5.0V 5%
: 1A or lower
DC 3.3V 5%
: AVG
: MAX
3.0 A
4.0 A or lower
DC 24.0V 10%
: MAX
1.0 A
Table 1-4. Sound Power

Model
During printing
Standby mode
Sleep mode
Base model
6.6B
Background noise
Background noise
FAX model
6.8B
Background noise
Background noise
NOTE 1: Conforms to ISO-7779 concerning measurement and calculation methods
POWER CONSUMPTION
The maximum rated current and power consumption are measured with all engine
options and controller options installed.
Base model/Fax model
2: Figures are actual measurement values (when copying in monochrome)

Maximum Rated Current
Power
Max.
Consumption Continuous copy using ADF
(average)*
Note *:
120V
240V
7.5A
4.0A
740W
790W
Color
189W
191W
Monochrome
287W
294W
Standby (average) (heater ON, scanner lamp OFF)
58W
59W
Low power consumption (average) (heater OFF)
16W
18W
Power switch OFF
0W
0W
As for the base model, the values are measured when performing printing.
Scanner consumption current

Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current
Output voltage
Without ADF
With ADF
24V
0.55A
0.83A
12V
0.07A
0.07A
21
Revision C
Table 1-5. Scanner Consumption Current

Output voltage
Without ADF
With ADF
5V
0.2A
0.2A
(3.3V)
0.15A
0.15A
CONSUMPTION CURRENT
When using 500-sheet cassette (option)
RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY

Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC610004-2 CISPR 24.
Contact electric discharge 5 kV
: No error on any device after applying
Aerial electric discharge 10 kV
: No error on any device after applying
INSULATION RESISTANCE
5 V/(0.1) A or less
24 V/(0.5) A or less
INRUSH CURRENT
1/2 cycle
: 100 A or less (0-peak)

Including heater inrush
(Conditions: 23 degrees C or above, with cold start)
10 M or more
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
There should be no break down during application of the voltages shown below.
Leak current should be 20mA or less when applying the voltage for one minute.
Table 1-6. Withstand Voltage
Between inlet and non-charged
metal parts
Between primary and secondary

supply transformers
120V
AC1000V
AC1500V
200V series
AC2000V
AC3000V
LEAK CURRENT
120V
220V series
: 3.5mA or less
: 3.5mA or less
GROUND CONDUCTION
When applying 12 V, 30 A to the products earth terminal and the metallic section
where grounding is required, ground resistance should be 0.1 or less.
FAST TRANSIENT/BURSTS (AC LINE NOISE)
Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with IEC610004-4.
1 kV
: No errors excluding insignificant dot errors
2 kV
: There should be no damaged part
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES
No effect on printing quality.
DIP
: 1 cycle 100 % (rated voltage -10 %)
22
Revision C
1.2.1.3 Environmental Specifications and Conditions
AIR PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
Table 1-8. Air Pressure (Altitude)

Status
Table 1-7. Temperature and Humidity

Status
Temperature
Humidity*1
Guaranteed period
When operating*2
10 to 32 degrees C
15 ~ 80 %
---
0 to 35 degrees C
15 to 80%RH
12 months after
manufacture
When
stored
Normal
conditions
Severe
conditions
Note *1:
*2:
High
35 to 40 High
temperature degrees C humidity
80 to 90
% RH
Low
-20 ~ 0 Low
temperature degrees C humdity
10 ~ 15
%RH
max. 48 hours
Should be no condensation.
Humidity should be 65 % or less when the temperature is 32 degrees C.
Temperature should be 26 degrees C or less when the humidity is 80 %.
VIBRATION
Operating
Altitude
Printer
65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100 m or less)
Scanner/ADF
0 to 2,500 m or less
When stored
0 to 3100 m or lower*
Note : Withstands altitude of 0 to 15, 000 m while transported by air. However, this assumes
that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.
LEVELNESS
Difference between front and back: 5 mm or less /445 mm
Difference between left and right: 10 mm or less /445 mm
ILLUMINATION
3, 000 lx or less (do not expose to direct sunlight)
There should be no damage under the following conditions

Frequency
: 5Hz to 55Hz
Acceleration
: 1.5 G (Between 5 to 10 Hz, however, constant 7.5 mm

double amplitude is assumed.)
Frequency sweep
: Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way
Direction of application
: X, Y, Z directions
Number of cycles
: 3 cycles for each X, Y, Z direction (1 hour)
SHOCK (DROPPING)
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under the
conditions below.
Main unit (ADF installed) : 460 mm
500-sheet cassette (option) : 760 mm
23
Revision C
1.2.1.4 Conformed Safety Standards

SAFETY STANDARDS
COMMUNICATION STANDARDS
Model Type
Model Type
Applicable Standards
120V
UL60950 3rd Edition

CSA C22.2 No.60950-00
21 CFR Part 1010,1040
NOM-019-SCFI-1998
230V
IEC60950 3rd
120V
230V
120V
FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040
200V series
IEC60825 Class 1 Laser Product

CE Directive
Nordic Agency Approvals
FCC Part 68
IC CS03
COFETEL
PSTN01
TBR21
SAFETY STANDARDS (LASER TRANSMISSION)

Model Type
Ministry of Telecomunication
ANATEL
CNC
IDA
SIRIM
PTD
AS/ TS001
TNA 102
HKTA 2111
MII&NAL
EMI STANDARDS
Model Type
120V
FCC Part15 Subpart B, Class B (AnSI C63.4/11.4D)
230V
EN55022 (CIRSPR Publication22), Class B

EN61000-3-2 (Harmonics) ClassA
EN61000-3-3 (Flicker)
EN55024
GB4943
GB9254 Class B,GB17625.1
KN22 Class B
KN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
AS/NZSCISPR22 Class B
24
Revision C
1.2.1.5 Environmental Characteristics

ENERGY STAR
International Energy Star Program not compliant
BAM
Not compliant
ECO MARK
Not compliant
EXHAUST GAS
Ozone concentration
: 0.02 mg/m3 or less

(measurement method conforms to BAM)
Styrene Concentration : 0.02 mg/m3 or less

Dust concentration
: 0.075 mg/m3 or less

(measurement method conforms to BAM)
TVOC
: 0.2 mg/m3 or less
MISCELLANEOUS
Toner
: should have no affect on the human body

(OSHA, TSCA, and EINECS compliant)
OPC
: should have no affect on the human body (OSHA

compliant)
Ozone evolution
: UL 478, 5th edition compliant
Materials
: should not contain any materials prohibited in each

country, nor include harmful substances greater than
accepted.
25
Revision C
Durability
Number of printable pages
Ave. : 3,000 pages/month
Max. : 45,000 pages/month (Monochrome : Color = 3 : 1)
1.2.1.6 Reliability
PRINTER SECTION
Paper Jam/ Multi-Feed Rate
SCANNER SECTION
Table 1-9. Paper Jam/Multi-sheet Feed Rate (unit: page)

Standard paper
Reliability issue
Plain paper
Special paper
MPtray
500-sheet
cassette
MPtray
500-sheet
cassette
MPtray
500-sheet
cassette
Jam rate
1/3000
1/5000
1/2000
1/3000
1/100
---
Multiple-sheet
feed rate
1/1500
1/2500
1/1000
1/1500
1/50
---
Carriage MCBF
Opening/Closing of the document cover : 30,000 times

Opening/Closing of the scanner module : 2,000 times
Light source MTTF
Note : The above rates are measured under the following conditions.
Paper size: Regular size
Newly unpackaged paper were used.
The 500-sheet cassette does not support special paper.
Multiple-sheet feed rate: Conditions when adding new paper onto remaining
paper in the tray or cassette are not considered.
ADF SECTION
MPBF
Main unit: 50,000 pages
NOTE: MIBF: 150,000 pages
Number of images: As color printing uses 4 color images (Y, M, C, K),
four images are counted per page.
For LGL size, 8 images are counted per page.
Calculated as Color : Monochrome = 2 : 1.
Monochrome : 50,000 1/3 = 16,700 images
Color
: 50,000 2/3 4 colors = 133,200 images
MIBF
: 16,700 + 133,200 = 149,900 images (approx. 150,000
images)
: 100,000 cycles or more
: 10,000 hours
Feed error
: 1/2,000 or less
Multi-sheet feed
: 1/2,000 or less
Paper jam
: 1/1,000 or less
Life of paper feed
: 100,000 pages
Life of opening/closing operation
: 15,000 times
SERVICEABILITY
MTTR (Mean Time to Repair)
: Average 30 minutes or less

(The MTTR is a time for service
personnel to locate and correct the
malfunction only, and the time for
examining malfunction is not
included.)
Mechanical Life
Printer life
: 200,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
500-sheet cassette: 200,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
Note:
Calculated as Color : Monochrome = 2 : 1

Color only
: 150,000 pages
Monochrome only: 200,000 pages
26
Revision C
Dimensions and weight when the option cassette is installed
1.2.1.7 Outside Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions and weight of base model, FAX model, and options
Table 1-11. Dimensions and Weight with Option Cassette Installed
Table 1-10. Dimensions and Weight

Product
Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)
Base model
460
467
593
30.9
FAX model
460*
467
667
33.1
500-sheet cassette
440
446
130
NOTE 1: Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight.

2: Consumables are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
*: ADF: Width becomes 494 mm when the LGL extension paper tray is opened.
460mm
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
Height
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
Main unit (Base model) +

500-sheet cassette
460
467
724
38.9
Main unit (FAX model) +

500-sheet cassette
460*
467
798
41.1
Main unit when the scanner is open

(base model) +
500-sheet cassette
460*
---
979
38.9
Main unit when the scanner is open

(FAX model) +
500-sheet cassette
460*
---
983
41.1
Combination and Condition
467mm
NOTE 1: Manufacturing tolerance is 5 mm in dimensions and 0.5 kg in weight.

2: Consumables are not included in the main unit weight (controller is included).
467mm
798mm
Base model
460mm
724mm
593mm
667mm
*: ADF: Width becomes 494 mm when the LGL extension paper tray is opened.
FAX model
Figure 1-1. Dimensional Outline Drawing
Base model
FAX model
Figure 1-2. Dimensional Outline Drawing (main unit + 500-sheet cassette)
27
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
Revision C
Top
Installation Method
Remove the hook that join the upper and the lower parts of the package.
Pull out the upper part of the package upward.
Take out the photoconductor unit and the toner cartridge boxes. *1
Hold the handles on the bottom of the main unit, lift up the printer, and place
it at the installation location (two persons are required to perform this
operation). If you lift up the printer holding its right-and-left sides, make sure
to support the backside of the LEG with your hands to keep balance.
5. Turn the printer power off.
6. Open the cover A to remove the development unit protective cover, and install
the specified toner cartridge.
7. After installing all the 4-color toner cartridges, close the cover A, lift up the
scanner section*2, and open the cover B.
8. Turn up the photoconductor insert lever.
9. Insert the photoconductor unit.
10. Close the cover B.
11. Fully extend the paper output extension on the cover B. Be sure to extend the
folded part of the paper output when printing on LGL sized papers.
12. Before scanning LGL sized papers using the ADF, extend the folded part of
the ADF paper feed tray extension, and open the LGL paper output extension.
Base Model
Fax Model
258mm
258mm
1.
2.
3.
4.
300mm
100mm
100mm
353mm
353mm
Leg_008_011RB
Front
Base Model
Fax Model
ROD-CLEANER
Note *1: The photoconductor unit for domestic FAX model is packed separately.
*2: As for FAX model, the scanner section is only lifted when the ADF is
closed.
300mm
ROD-CLEANER
251mm
251mm
Leg_008_012RB
Side
Base Model
Fax Model
1016 mm
353 mm
1005 mm
1068 mm
258 mm
353 mm
1068 mm
258 mm
Leg_008_013RB
Figure 1-3. Space Requirements
28
Revision C
1.2.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications
1.2.2.1 Process Specifications & System
RESOLUTION
Printing method
: Semiconductor laser beam scanning and dry

electrophotographic process with two ingredients
600dpi
Light source
: Semiconductor laser
FIRST PRINT TIME
Photoconductor
: Organic photoconductor
Charging
: Roller charging system
Development
: Two ingredients, None-contact developing system
Toner
: Made up of two nonmagnetic ingredients
Primary transfer
: Intermediate transfer belt method
Fixing
: Heat roller and fuser belt system
The time from receiving the Start command to when trailing edge of the paper leaves
the paper eject roller.
Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in 1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions (p39).
Table 1-12. Monochrome mode (Unit: second or less)
Simplex printing
Paper size
Standard
Low speed
A4
17
LT
17
Table 1-13. Color mode (Unit: second or less)

Simplex printing
Paper size
Low speed 1
Standard
Thick/Extra
Label/Coated Paper
Thick Paper
Envelop
Low
speed 2
A4
17
27
24
27
28
LT
17
27
24
27
28
29
Revision C
PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE
PAPER FEED
Table 1-14. Printing Mode by Paper Type

Paper Type
Table 1-15. Paper Feed
Printing Speed Mode

F/C
B/W
Plain paper 2
64 to 80g/m2 (RX-80/4024)
Standard
Standard
Plain paper 2
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Plain paper Standard

2.
Standard
High quality paper
81 to 105g/m2 (EPSON standard paper)
Standard
Standard
High quality paper

(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the High quality Standard

paper
Thick paper 1
106 to 163g/m2
Paper feeder
Paper type*2/Paper size
Available Paper
Basic Weight
64g/m2
Standard paper: RX-80
180 sheets
Standard paper: EPSON High quality Plain 82 g/m2

paper
Standard
20mm
Plain paper/Recycled paper

A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, Executive
64 to 80 g/m2
Low
speed 1
Standard
20mm
High quality paper
81 to 105 g/m2
75 sheets
Transparencies: A4, Letter
---
Thick paper 1
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Thick paper Low

1.
speed 1
Standard
75 sheets
Labels: A4, Letter
---
Thick paper 2
164 to 210g/m2
(including double postal card and 4-sided
postcard)
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
20mm
Coated paper
105 to 210 g/m2
20mm
106 to 163 g/m2

164 to 210 g/m2
Thick paper 2
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Thick paper Low

2.
speed 1
Low
speed
Thick paper:
A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, F4, LGL
(14), GLG (13), Executive
20 sheets
75 to 105 g/m2
OHP
Transparency (color, monochrome)
Low
speed 2
Low
speed
Envelopes
Yokei #0, Yokei #4, Yokei #6
Chokei # 3, Chokei #4, Kakugata #3
Label 2
Labels
Low
speed 1
Standard
20mm
User defined size:

Width 90.0 to 220.0 mm
Length 110.0 to 355.6 mm
64 to 210 g/m2
Envelopes
75 to 105g/m2Envelops for each country
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
500 sheets
56mm
A4, LT
64 to 105 g/m2
Coated paper 3
105 to 210 g/m2
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
Coated paper 3
(reverse side)
For printing on reverse side of the Coated

paper 3
Low
speed 1
Low
speed
Reverse side indicates the second print side when feeding manually to print on both
sides.
Optional Products
Standard
200 sheets
Note *:
MP tray
Sheet
capacity
*1Height
capacity
500-sheet
cassette
Note *1:
*2:
Environmental condition for the capacity: 22 C/55% RH.

Refer to 1.2.2.3 Paper Specifications (p34).
Paper feed reference

Reference position to feed paper (in any size) is always center of the feeders.
30
Revision C
COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE

An optional 500-sheet cassette can be added to the printer to feed papers as follows.
Table 1-16. Combination with Optional Cassette
Combination
Standard
MP tray
500-sheet cassette
200 sheets *1/180 sheets

*2
500 sheets*1,2
Total Number of Sheets
use
use
---
use
200*1
180*2
Note *1:
*2:
700*1
680*2
RX-80 (64 g/m2)

EPSON high quality plain paper (82 g/m2)
31
Revision C
SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION

Table 1-17. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation
Standard
Paper
Vertical (length)
Horizontal (width)
MP tray
500-sheet cassette
Paper orientaion
Manual duplex
A4
297.00
210.00
SEF
Available
A5
148.00
210.00
---
SEF
Available
Letter
279.40 (11.00)
215.90 (8.50)
SEF
Available
---
SEF
---
HALF Letter
215.90 (8.50)
139.70 (5.50)
{*3
Legal
355.60 (14.00)
215.90 (8.50)
---
SEF
Available
GLG
330.20 (13.00)
215.90 (8.50)
---
SEF
---
---
SEF
---
SEF
Available
GLT
266.70 (10.50)
203.20 (8.00)
{*3
EXECUTIVE
266.70 (10.50)
184.15 (7.25)
---
F4
330.00
210.00
{*3
---
SEF
---
User defined size:
110.00 to 355.60
90.00 to 220.00
---
Free
---
OHP
A4: 297.00
A4: 210.00
---
LT: 279.40
LT: 215.90
A4: 297.00
A4: 210.00
LT: 279.40
LT: 215.90
235.00
120.00
{*3
---
SEF
---
Label
Special paper
Paper size: unit mm (inch)
Envelop *1
SEF
-----
105.00
{*3
---
SEF
---
98.00*2
190.00
{*3
---
LEF
---
235.00
120.00
{*3
---
SEF
---
90.00
{*3
---
SEF
---
216.00
{*3
---
SEF
---
235.00
205.00
277.00
Note *1:
---
SEF
For details on orientations of envelop and postcard, refer to Envelop Orientation

(p33).
*2:
Load the envelop with its flap opened. If the length of the envelop is 110 mm or less
when the flap is opened, the envelop cannot be used.
*3:
Papers which are only supported by firmware (handled as user defined size by the
video I/F).
"{": Feeding is possible by specifying the size code with the control panel.
"SEL (Short Edge Feed)" : Set paper to be loaded from its short side.
"LEF (Long Edge Feed)" : Set paper to be loaded from its long side.
32
Revision C
Envelop Orientation
PAPER EJECT CAPACITY
Paper feed
direcction
250 sheets, Face down only
Envelopestype Yokei #0
Yokei #4
Yokei #6*4
Chokei #3
Chokei #4
Kadokei #3
NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:

22 degrees C/55% RH, standard paper (simplex/duplex printing).
The print ratio is 5% for both B/W and color printing (With color
printing, 5% for each color).
CONSUMABLES AND PERIODIC REPLACEMENT UNIT
NOTE 1: Load envelopes in the MP tray with its print surface facing up
2: Image quality and feed is not guaranteed when printing on the back side
(flap side) of envelopes.
3: Envelopes with adhesive or tape are not available.
4: Load the envelop with its flap opened. If the length of the envelop is 110
mm or less when the flap is opened, the envelop cannot be used.
Printing Surface Set Direction
Set paper with printing surface facing up. (for both MP tray and 500-sheet
cassette)
Table 1-18. List of Consumables and Periodic Replacement Unit

Classification
Consumables
Replacement unit
Toner cartridges (Black, Cyan, Yellow, Magenta)
Photoconductor Unit
(with waste toner box)
Regular Replacement
Parts
FUSER ASSY
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (Developer)
2ND BTR ASSY
Note : For detailed specifications, refer to 1.2.2.5 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit

(p37).
Paper feed direcction

Paper feed direction
Printing surface
33
Revision C
1.2.2.3 Paper Specifications
PAPER THAT MAY CAUSE PRINTING DEFECTS, PAPER JAMS OR

PRINTER MALFUNCTION
SUPPORTED PAPER TYPE
Transfer paper (carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper, impact paper,
acid paper
Standard paper
Monochrome
: RX-80 paper (monochrome), 4024 paper (20 lb)
Paper that is too thin or too thick
Color
: EPSON Color Laser Paper
Paper that is wet or damp
Plain paper
Paper with special coatings or color printer paper with processed surfaces
64g/m2 ~ 105g/m2
(Commonly used copy paper, recycled paper, high quality plain paper)
Glossy (too slick) paper, paper with too rough surface , or paper that the roughness
is significantly different between the front side and the back side.
Recommended recycled paper: Green100
Paper with punch holes or perforations
Special paper
EPSON transparency sheets (A4)
Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners
Labels
Labels that peel off easily
Thick paper (106
Envelopes
Special paper for ink jet applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy film, etc.)
EPSON coated paper (A4)
Paper previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer
C H E C K
P O IN T
Creased, curled or torn paper
lb
g/m2
~ 210
g/m2)
: ream weight = gross weight of 500 sheets of 17 x 22

sized paper
g/m2 : 1g/m2 = 0.2659763lb
Before purchasing a large amount of paper, test the paper if it
can be printed normally.
Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it
Transparencies for other color laser printers or color photocopiers

Paper that has been already printed by other color/monochrome laser printers or
photocopiers
Sheets of paper stuck together
Postcards for ink jet printers, unofficial postcards, and adhesive postcards
Iron print coated paper (for both ink jet and laser printers)
Paper that is deteriorated or discolored, due to temperatures lower than 180 C.
34
Revision C
AVAILABLE PAPER BY FEEDER
PRINTING AREA
Maximum printable area
216.00 mm (width) x 355.60 mm (length)
Table 1-19. Available Paper by Feeder

Special paper
Standar
d paper
Plain
paper
OHP
Postcar
d
Label
Thick
paper
MP tray
500-sheet
cassette
Paper Feeder
Envelo Coated
pes
paper
NOTE: Continuous printing beyond the guaranteed printing area (border 4mm)
causes soiling inside the mechanism.
Printable area
The minimum left, right, top and bottom margins are 4 mm for any type of paper.
For envelop, however, left and right margins should be 6 mm.
Note { : Paper feed and image quality is guaranteed.

: Paper feed and printing is possible. However, this is limited to types of paper
for general applications.
Image quality is not guaranteed.
4mm
4mm
4mm
X : Feed is not possible.
4mm
Printable area
Figure 1-4. Printable Area
35
Revision C
1.2.2.4 Image performance
SKEW
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY
Table 1-21. Skew

A4
Table 1-20. Printing start position accuracy

A4
Simplex printing
Main scanning direction Reference point (c)
2.5mm
2.0mm
Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a)
Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (| a-b |)
1.2mm
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |)
0.8mm
Table 1-22. Length standard of measurement

A4
Main scanning direction (e)
Printable area
Sub scanning direction (f)
Simplex printing
190mm
114.5mm
HEIGHT OF CURL OF OUTPUT PAPER

Feed direction
Table 1-23. Height of Curl of Output Paper
Paper Type
Figure 1-5. Printing start position accuracy
Curl height
Normal paper, plain paper
15mm or less
Other special papers
No regulation
Note : Measurement conditions

1. Print out 20 sheets of paper continuously in order to stabilize the fuser unit.
2. After the 20 pages are printed out, pick out the 21st to 30th pages as samples, and
wait for 5 minutes before measuring them.
3. Place those papers on a flat surface with their curls facing upward, measure the length
between the flat surface and the tip of the curl of the bottommost paper, similarly
measure the other three corners, and define the largest value of four corners as the
curl value.
36
Revision C
1.2.2.5 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit
CONDITIONS FOR STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

Temperature and humidity conditions
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1-25. Temperature and humidity conditions

Table 1-24. Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
Program
Toner Cartridge
(Y, M, C, K)
Configurations
Toner Cartridge
Heat roller
Developer unit
Development roller
Second transfer unit Transfer roller
Note *1:
*2:
1500*1
4000*1
Photoconductor Unit Transfer belt

Photoconductor with
waste toner box
Fuser unit
External
Weight
Lifetime (pages)
dimensions (mm)
(kg)
52.7 (W)
285.6 (D)
58.4 (H)
0.2
0.27
14000*2
310 (W)
B/W continuous: 280 (D)
42,000
110 (H)
F/C continuous:
10,500
2.8
100000
330 (W)
110 (D)
105 (H)
1.3
K : 100000
Y/M/C: 66700
315 (W)
75 (D)
85 (H)
0.7
100000
315 (W)
35 (D)
15 (H)
0.2
Status
Temperature
Humidity
Guaranteed period
Normal
Conditions
0 to 35 degrees C
15 to 80 % RH
Severe
High
35 to 40 degrees C High
Conditions temperature
humidity
80 to 95 % RH
Low
Low
-20 to 0 degrees C
temperature
humidity
5 to 15 % RH
24 months
(unopened)
Max. of 1 month
NOTE 1: Non-condensing
2: Storage time after opening is 12 months in the normal operating environment.
Storage altitude
65 to 101kPa (0 to 3100m)
(Withstands altitude of 0 to 15, 000 m while transported by air. However, this
assumes that the cargo compartment is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.)
Package dropping
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the listed in the
table below by drop of 91 cm.
Table 1-26. Package dropping
Approximate number of printed pages using A4 continuous printing at 5% print rate.

The cartridge lifetime varies according to the paper size and type of printing (toner
save mode etc.)
Monochrome : Color = 1 : 2, 2p/J, print rate 5% (A4)
The lifetime depends on printing method and the frequency of switching the power.
The life of the photoconductor unit is reduced by half when printing on LGL sized
paper only.
Package name
Drop
Toner Cartridge
91cm
Photoconductor unit + Transfer unit
91cm
Fuser unit
91cm
Developer unit
91cm
Second transfer unit
91cm
37
Revision C
1.2.2.6 Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional

Products
CONSUMABLES
Toner Cartridge
The power supply of the main unit should be on.
If the main unit is turned off, the cartridge that needs to be replaced does not move
to the cartridge replacement position.
Photoconductor Unit
This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on.
OPTIONAL PRODUCTS
500-sheet cassette
Turn off the main unit before installing.

If the main unit is on when the cassette is installed, it is not detected.
Secure the cassette to the main unit with the coupling part on the top surface
inside the unit.
Adding Controller Option Parts

Turn off the main unit before installing. The part will be damaged if the power is
on.
38
Revision C
1.2.2.7 Printer Engine Restrictions

FACTORS LIMITING PRINTING SPEED
Image Quality Adjustment
Table 1-27. Image Quality Adjustment
Purpose
During printing
Admix*3
(Toner Cartridge Developer)
Collection(Developer Toner To prevent excessive amount of toner in the black developer After printing in black and white continuously, the printer rotates the rotary if it
Cartridge (collection space))
when printing in black and white continuously.
detects that the toner dispense time during the job is equivalent to 30 pages.
To prevent making a density difference between input

data and output image.
To prevent toner from being stirred unequally.
To supply toner when printing an image with high print
ratio.
Time required
(sec.)
1. When printing more than 51 copies (pages) continuously*1

45 seconds
Every time the printer makes 50 copies (pages), it stops the job temporarily to
perform the ADC*2 control.
2. If the printer detect a near-end of Toner Cartridge, it changes the timing of the
ADC control to every 25 copies (pages).
Note *1:
To keep the image density at target level.
Condition and control
When the printer comes into the following conditions, it stops the job temporarily 15 seconds/
at the timing given for each condition to perform the ADC control.
color
4
1. A/C* = 100%
: 5 per page
2. 35% Average of A/C < 100% : Every 5 to 50 pages
3. Average of A/C < 35%
: Every 50 copies (pages)
12 seconds *5
Condition to print 50 copies (pages) continuously:

The average of the print ratio should be 35% or less for each color.
*2:
ADC = Automatic Density Control: A control to ensure stable print density
*3:
The printer sometimes perform the ADC control more than once. In such case, the time required can be obtained by multiplying "Time for once ADC" by "Number of executions".
*4:
A/C = Area coverage:

Print ratio of each color
*5:
3 seconds x 4 colors
Cooling down
This is performed to prevent the edges of the heat roll from rising in temperature when small-sized paper is used. If the temperature difference between the edges and the center
of the heat roll reach a certain level, the printer stops the current job to perform the cooling down operation. Time required may vary according to paper size, number of printed
pages, etc..
NOTE: Ave. : 60sec /Max. aprox.110sec
39
Revision C
FACTORS LIMITING PRINTING START

Table 1-28. Factors Limiting Printing Start
Purpose
Condition and control
Time required
(sec.)
Cycle Down
To keep the image density at target level.
When the number of printed copies (pages) becomes 20 (by both continuous or
intermittent printing) after performing the ADC, the printer performs another
ADC when the current job is finished.
Cycle Up
To correct the toner density
1. The printer performs the ADC if the SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects that the 45*1
temperature and humidity in the printer are under the following conditions at
power-on or when returning from the low-power mode.
20 degrees C/85% to 32 degrees C/42% or more
2. The SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects the temperature and humidity inside the
printer at power-on. The detected condition is compared to the condition
detected at the previous power-off, and if the difference is as shown below, the
printer performs the ADC.
Temperature : 4 degrees, Humidity : 10%RH
Photoconductor Unit
Parameter control according to the piece-to-piece variations The printer performs the ADC when replacing the Photoconductor unit with a new 74*2
of Photoconductor.
one or used one.
New Toner Cartridge
Filling toner -> Recovering from an Empty error
Prevention of color toner

concentration
To prevent the color toner from concentrating to the left side 1. When the printer have finished five B/W print jobs in a row, it rotates the
15 sec/color
in the developer, which may cause partly (right side on the
Augers of the three developers (C, M and Y) switching the rotary position to let
paper) missed printouts, after printing in black and white
the color toner in the developers spread evenly.
continuously.
2. When the printer is turned on for the first time after purchase, it does the same
operation as described above so that the toner spread evenly in the developers.
(By the rotary rotation while performing continuous black
and white printing, color toner, which is not used for the B/
W printing, is moved along the spiral of the Auger (The
Auger of the developer for colors do not rotate during black
and white printing). With the color toner concentrated to the
left side, color printing may result in missing the right side
image.)
Note *1:
*2:
The printer performs the ADC when replacing the Toner Cartridge with a new
one. (Not performed when replacing with a used one.)
45
20 ~ 85 sec
When the operation performed during the warm-up, the warm-up time becomes 74 seconds.
The warm-up time is included. (After the cover is opened and closed, the normal warm-up operation is executed.)
TONER DUTY LIMITING VALUE

240% (to prevent paper from twisting around the FUSER ASSY)
NOTE: If it exceeds 240%, the engine (Mechanical Controller) forces a hard stop.
40
Revision C
1.2.3 Scanner Section
Document Size Detection

Not available
1.2.3.1 Scanner basic specifications
ADF Detection
Available
Type
Flatbed color image scanner
Scan Pause and Resume

Available
Scanning Method
Carriage moves to read the fixed document
Lock Mechanism
Scanner unit cannot be opened when the ADF is open
Sensors
Color CCD 4 Line CCD (RGB_BW)
Weight
3.3kg
Maximum Scan Area

216mm x 297mm
Dimention (W x D x H)
460 x 348 x 65 (BOX HEIGHT)
Maximum Effective Pixels

5,100 x 7,020 pixels (600 dpi)
Read Accuracy (main scanning)

1.5 % /216mm
Maximum Document Size

A4, LT
Read Accuracy (sub scanning)

0.5 % /100mm at 600dpi
Optical Resolution
Main scan: 600 dpi
Sub scan: 600 dpi (1-2 phase)
Light Source
White cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL)
Scanning Resolution
9,600 dpi x 9,600 dpi
Gradations
16 bit input, 1/8 bit output for each pixel of each color
Scan Speed
Monochrome: 2 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Full color: 11 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Warmup Time
Within 45 sec (at 25 degrees C)
(Light intensity output reaches 95 % within 90 sec at 25 degrees C)
41
Revision C
1.2.4 ADF section
Document Size Detection

Available for A4, LT, and B5
1.2.4.1 ADF Basic Specifications
Cover Open Detection

Available
Scanning/Paper Feeding Method

Small window scanning, U-turn paper feed method
Maximum Document Size
A4, LGL, LT, B5
Width: 182 ~ 216mm
Length: 257 ~ 355.6mm
Maximum Loadable Pages
A4 (80g/m2): 50 sheets
LT (75g/m2): 50 sheets
LGL (80g/m2): 50 sheets
NOTE: Gross thickness of papers 8 mm or less

Basic Weight of Document Paper
50 ~ 124g/m2
Document Paper Type
Laser printer paper, Ink-jet paper, Plain paper, Recycled paper, etc.
Scanning Order
1 to N
Lock Mechanism
ADF cannot be opened when the scanner unit is open
Weight
2.65kg
Size
448 x 323 x 90
Registration Accuracy
Leading edge registration 0 1.5mm (sub scanning direction)
Center registration: 0 1.0 mm (main scanning direction)
Anti-Skew Accuracy
Sub-scanning direction: 0 1.5 mm/297 mm
Main-scanning direction: 0 1.0 mm/200 mm
Magnification Error
Main scanning 1.5 % /216 mm
Sub scanning 1.0% /356 mm
Document Stack
Face-down
Document Positioning
Center
Scan Speed
Monochrome: 2 sec/A4, 300 dpi
Full color: 11sec/A4, 300dpi
Detection of Paper Presence on the ADF

Available
42
Revision C
1.2.4.2 Document Specifications
1.2.5 Copy Performance
SUPPORTED PAPERS
1.2.5.1 Paper Size and Print Area
Paper type
Plain paper/Semi thick paper/Recycled paper/Laser printer paper/Ink-jet paper
Paper Type
Paper size
B5/A4/LT/LGL
Document basic weight
50 ~ 124g/m2
Table 1-29. Paper Size and Print Area (unit: mm)
(g/m2)
UNSUPPORTED PAPERS
Paper type
Tracing paper for drafting/Coated paper/Thermal paper/Paper with adhesive/
silicone oil paper/CF paper/Cut-and-patched paper/Processed paper/Thick paper
more than 125g/m2.
Document status
Curled document that are 10 mm or more in width and 20 mm or less in
length.Wrinkled or folded document that are 5 mm or more in width and 20 mm or
less in length.
Paper Size:
(H x V)
Print Area
a1
a2
c1
c2
A4
297 x 210
200
287
B5
257 x 182
172
247
LGL
215.9 x 355.6
205.9
345.6
LT
279.4 x 215.9
205.9
269.4
a1
a2
c1
Guaranteed
Printing Area
REMEDY FOR PAPER JAM

If the document is entangled with the roller inside the ADF mechanism, turn the knob
counterclockwise so that the jammed document is ejected to the document tray.
(The knob cannot be turned clockwise)
c2
Figure 1-6. Guaranteed Printing Area

NOTE: The scanned area of the original is determined based on the paper size
matching the home position of the original (origin on the document table)
with that of the paper. When the size of the original (original scan area)
exceeds the maximum scan area of the scanner, the original is copied in
the range of the maximum scan area. The scanned area is placed in the
center of the guaranteed printable area with the area beyond the
maximum range cut off.
43
1.2.5.2 Copy Accuracy
Revision C
PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY
ENLARGEMENT PERFORMANCE
Table 1-30. Printing Start Position Accuracy
Definition
Enlargement performance is obtained by multiplying magnification error of the
optical scanner read by that of the printer.
A4
Document table
ADF
Main scanning direction Reference point (c)
3.5mm
3.0mm
4.5mm
4.5mm
Sub-scanning direction Reference point (a)
Scanner: Main scanning 1.5 % /216mm

Sub scanning 0.5 % /100mm
Printer : Main scanning 100 0.5 % /190mm

Sub scanning 100 0.5 % /234mm
ADF
: Main scanning 0.5 % /216mm

Sub scanning 0.5 % /356mm
Copy using ADF
Guaranteed
Printing Area
Specification Values
: Main scanning 100 2.0% /190mm

Sub scanning 100 1.5% /277mm
Feed direction
Copy using document table: Main scanning 100 2.0% /190mm

Sub scanning 100 1.0% /277mm
Figure 1-7. Printing Start Position Accuracy

SKEW
Table 1-31. Skew
A4
Document table
ADF
Main scanning direction (| a-b |)
2.2mm
3.1mm
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |)
3.4mm
4.8mm
Table 1-32. Length standard of measurement

A4
Simplex printing
Main scanning direction (e)
190 mm
Sub scanning direction (f)
277 mm
44
Revision C
1.2.6.1 Basic Specifications
Supported lines : PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network),

PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
Earth start/Flash start compatible (For German models only)
RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION MODES
TRANSMISSION SPEED
Color
The communication speed is determined automatically by negotiating with the other

party according to the fax protocol.
1.2.6 Fax Performance
: 8 bits for each RGB
Monochrome : 1 bit
DATA COMPRESSION
Color
Transmission speed:
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200
16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
: JPEG
Monochrome : MH, MR, MMR

RECEIVING/TRANSMITTING DENSITY
Color
PROTOCOL
Protocol
Supported Countries
: 200 x 200 (dpi)
Supports the following 36 countries
Monochrome : 8 x 15.4, 8 x 7.7, 8 x 3.85 [dot/mm]
Japan
Taiwan
China
Korea
Hong Kong
Singapore
Australia
New Zealand
Thailand
Malaysia
America
Canada
PAPER SIZE
Color
: A4, LT, LGL*
Monochrome : A4, LT, LGL*

NOTE"*":
LGL sized papers only become available when using the ADF
PRINT PAPER SIZE

Color
: G3, G3ECM
: A4, B5, LT, LGL
Monochrome : A4, B5, LT, LGL

C A U T IO N
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Greek
Netherlands
Ireland
Italia
Luxembourg
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
England
Russia
Poland
Czechoslovakia
Hungary
Swiss
Norway
Argentine
Brazil
Mexico
Using the product in countries or regions other than the above

supported countries is not guaranteed.
SUPPORTED LINES
Selecting the country and the line type using the control panel enables the
communication in response to the FAX standards of each country.
45
Revision C
1.2.7 Controller Specifications
1.2.7.2 Host interface specifications
1.2.7.1 Basic Specifications
The printer provides the following host interfaces.
CPU
: TX4955 (192MHz)
Network interface
RAM
Standard
Extension
USB (Rev.2.0 HS) interface
: 128 MB (P slot= 64 MB + SO slot =64 MB)
: Up to 576 MB with additional memories as follows;

(SO slot=256MB-DIMM + S1 slot=256 MB-DIMM)
DIMM Specification: 90 pin SDRAM (128 bit)
Capacity = 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB
Program ROM
: 8 MB Flash (Mirror type)
Panel
: LCD 22 characters x 1 line

Seven LEDs
22 buttons (Base model)
32 buttons (FAX model)
Interface
Fax interface (Fax model only)
Phone line
Attached telephone
The locations of the interfaces are shown below.
Fax interface* (phone line)

Fax interface* (attached telephone)
USB interface
Host I/F
: USB 2.0 HS
Network (Cobalt)
FAX I/F
Laser-FAX
: External board compatible (manufactured by NJRC)
Scanner I/F
: CCD I/F
Moter I/F
ADF I/F
Engine I/F
: UART (same as AcuLaser C1100)
Network interface
Figure 1-8. Location of Interfaces

NOTE"*":The base model is not equipped with the fax interfaces.
46
Revision C
1.3 Control Panel

1.3.1 Panel Specifications
EXTERIOR
Buzzer
5 lines x 22 characters (132 x 65 dots)
One-Touch button A, B, C
Advanced/Menu
button
Speed dial button Redial button
Cancel button
FAX model
FAX LED (green)

Copy LED (green)
FAX button
Setup LED (green)
Scan LED (green) Data LED (Orange) Error LED (Red)
Asterisk button
Left button
Up button
Hash button
Right button
Color Start button
B/W Start button
Base model
Print LED (green)
Copy button
Scan button
Setup button
Down button
Reset button
Ten-key
Figure 1-9. External View of Control Panel
47
Revision C
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Table 1-33. LCD and LEDs
Name
Function
Liquid Crystal Display

(LCD)
LCD (132 x 65 dot matrix) allows max. 22 characters x 5 lines display

Operation mode and guidance are normally displayed on top line.
The default mode is print mode. So, displays printer status when the product is turned on.
Print LED (green)
On
Copy LED (green)
On
: Printer is in copy mode / Off: Printer is in modes other than copy mode (print, fax, scan, setup modes)
FAX LED (green)

(Fax model only)
On
Off
: Fax mode
: Other than fax mode (print, copy, scan, setup modes)
Scan LED *1 (green)
On
Off
: Scan mode (Push-scan)

: Other than scan mode (print, copy, fax, setup modes)
Setup LED *2 (green)
On
Off
: Setup mode
: Other than setup mode (print, copy, fax, scan modes)
Data LED *3 (orange)
Off
Flashing
: No print data exists.

: Currently receiving print data, copying, sending/receiving fax job, scanning, processing data, or printing.
Error LED *9 (red)
Flashing 1*4
Flashing
Flashing 2 *5
Off
: An error has occurred which permits continuing to print by pressing the B/W Start or Color Start button.*6
: An error has occurred which requires the user to remove the cause of the error.*7
: An error has occurred which requires the user to press the B/W Star or Color Start button after removing the cause of the error.*8
: Indicates no error.
Note *1:
: Printer is in print mode / Off: Printer is in modes other than print mode (copy, fax, scan, setup modes)
Once the push-scan mode is started and the local PC is selected,

the printer exits the scan mode after a certain period of time (one minute).
Wait for the printer to completely exit the scan mode before switching to any other
modes.
*2:
Setup mode doubles with engine stop mode. In the setup mode,
the engine is stopped.
*3:
The status of data LED is either OFF or flashing, not ON.
*4:
Flashing/Flashing 1 indicates 0.3 sec ON, 0.3 sec OFF
*5:
Flashing 2 indicates 0.6 sec ON, 0.6 sec OFF.
*6:
If auto error clear is set to ON, errors are automatically cleared

in a given time without pressing the Start button.
*7:
Automatically restored by clearing the error.
*8:
Not affected by auto error clear set to ON.
*9:
Error LED turns on or flashes whenever an error has occurred in any of the operation
modes. An initialization error due to printer, scanner, fax, or ADF failure disables
switching mode to the mode relating to the failured part. Errors ohter than the
initialzation errors allow to switch mode and continue operating without displaying
the error message (depends on the mode selected). If the error disables some
operation, the error message is displayed when the operation is selected.
If scanner error occurs, copy, fax and scan modes become invalid.(Receiving fax is
available). An error caused by Twain is displayed. If printer error occurs, copy and
print modes become invalid. Fax errors disables the fax mode and receiving fax also
becomes unavailable. System errors are indicated as Cxxxx Service Req (service
call error), and disables the whole operation. However, when the engine related
service call error (Exxxx) has occurred, functions except printer operation can be
used.
48
Revision C
Table 1-34. List of Button Functions

Button name
Copy button
Function
Switches the modes. Each time the button is pressed, the current mode is switched. Pressing the button twice turns the current mode to printer mode.
FAX button
Scan button
Setup button
One touch speed dial A
One touch speed dial B
One touch speed dial C
Pressing the button immediately sends the fax data to the registered fax number.
Advanced/Menu button
Displays advanced menu.
Reset button
Up/Down buttons
Used when proceeding through menu items, or selecting the parameters.
Resets the copy parameter

Resets the scan parameter.
Resets the fax transmission parameter.
Returns the menu screen on the LCD to the previous level.
Left/Right buttons
Speed dial button
Entering numbers after pressing this button immediately send the fax data to the registered fax number.
Redial button
Inserts a pause into the number or dials the number that was last entered.
Cancel button
Cancels copy, fax transmission, and print job.
Asterisk/Hash buttons
Enters numeric characters such as the number of copy, magnification, and fax number (fax model only).
Ten-key
Start Buttons
Starts monochrome/color copy, monochrome/color scan, or monochrome/color fax transmission. Also used to clear error/warning.
49
Revision C
Contents of the Initial Screen
LCD DISPLAY AFTER THE SYSTEM START-UP
Top line: Status, Guidance

Upper right: toner remaining amount, fax reception data accumulation icon
Four lines from the bottom: Messages appears as follows

1st line : Warning message
2nd line : Operation, status message
3rd line : Operator guidance, time display
4th line : Paper size, paper remaining amount
Moves to print mode initial screen after displaying start-up screen for 2 seconds.
Start-up screen
Display
Top line Left
Right
After 2 Seconds
Description
status, guidance
Displays mode and status
Toner remaining amount icon Displays 11 levels to indicate 0 to 100 % by

10% in the order of K, C, M, and Y.
Fax reception data
accumulation icon
Print mode initial

screen
Toner remaining
amount icon
Only displayed when there are received fax

jobs remaining unprinted in the memory. It is
not displayed for accumulated sending jobs.
Four
1st line Warning message
lines
2nd
Operation, status messages
from the line
bottom
3rd line Operator guidance, time
display
4th line Paper size, paper remaining
amount
Fax reception data

accumulation icon
Figure 1-10. LCD Display after the System Start-up
Alert screen
An alert screen displays warning, guidance or any other message informing
Only displayed when warnings occurred.

Statuses such as ready-to-print, unable to
print, or sleep mode are displayed.
Only displayed when the time is set.
Indicates four levels (0, 33, 66, 100 %) in the
order of MP tray and the cassette.
Only displayed when they are installed.
Size of paper loaded on the paper feeder is displayed with two or three letters
as shown in the table below.
Paper size:
Program
Paper size:
Program
A4
A4
Executive
EXE
A5
A5
F4
F4
B5
B5
Monarch
MON
Letter
LT
C10
C10
Half Letter
HLT
DL
DL
Legal
LGL
C5
C5
Government Letter
GLT
C6
C6
Government Legal
GLG
ISO B5
IB5
restricted function.
50
Displayed for certain period of time (normally three seconds) without any
user intervention.
Displayed when the status is ongoing without any user intervention.
User intervention is possible or required.
Revision C
Error Screen
If an error has occurred, error screen appears. Guidance is displayed as long as the
error can be cleared and the job is continuable.
Figure 1-11. Alert Screen

If the job cancel alert occurs, press the Cancel button again to cancel the job. Press the
Start button to void the cancel.
Figure 1-12. Error Screen

To clear the error, press the Start button. Press the Cancel button to cancel the job that
caused the error.
51
Revision C
1.3.2 Basic Functions

1.3.2.1 Print Mode
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Button name
Idling
During printing
Twain
Error*1,2
Fax printing
Copy button
Moves to copy mode
Invalid
Invalid
Warning is displayed when receiving data Unable to move to copy mode. In

from the fax board. After receiving the data, copy mode, switches to print mode.
the current mode can be switched.
FAX button
Moves to fax mode
Moves to fax mode
Invalid
Moves to fax mode
Moves to fax mode. In fax mode,

switch to print mode.
Scan button
Moves to scan mode
Moves to scan mode
Invalid
Moves to scan mode
Moves to scan mode. In scan mode,

Setup button
Moves to setup mode
Waits for the engine to stop, Invalid

and moves to setup mode.
Waits for the engine to stop, and moves to

setup mode.
Moves to setup mode. In setup mode,

One touch speed dial A/

One touch speed dial B/
Moves to fax mode,

Moves to fax mode, and
Invalid
and dials the registered dials the registered number.
number.
Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered Moves to fax mode, and dials the
number.
registered number.
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Reset button
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Multiple warnings detected
Invalid
Up button/
Down button
Multiple warnings
detected
Multiple warnings detected Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Left button/
Right button
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Speed dial button
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Redial button
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Cancel button
Invalid
1. Short press:
Cancels Job
2. Long press (hold for
more than three
seconds)Cancels all jobs
Local: Invalid
1. Short press: Cancels Job
Network: Turns the power off when scanning 2. Long press (hold for more than three
is NOT in progress. During scanning, cancels
seconds)Cancels all jobs
the scanning while keeping the power on.
When scanning and printing occur at the same
time, the former has priority.
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Ten-key
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Start Buttons
Invalid
Invalid
Local: InvalidStarts scanning when scanning is Invalid

NOT in progress. Invalid during scanning.
Note *1:
*2:
1. Recoverable error: Clears the error

2. Unrecoverable error:
Displays [Error cannot be cleared].
All the modes become inoperative when system error occurred.

If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot switch modes until they cancel the error.
If there is an error concerning device that is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
52
Revision C
Operation, status messages
STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE
Display
Guidance Message
Descriptions
Reset
---
Descriptions
Please wait
---
Print mode
---
Warming up
---
Sccanner is in use
---
Calibrating printer
---
Display
Cancel the job
Remote job cancellation
Standby
---
STATUS DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE
Ready
---
List of Warnings
Printing
Including processing the job
Display
Descriptions
Printing test sheet
---
Scanning locked
---
Could not print
---
Scanning
---
Check paper size
---
Reset all
---
Image optimum
---
Cancel all jobs
---
Check paper type
---
Cancel the job
---
Color mismatch
---
Writing to ROM module
---
CMYK toner low
---
Using fax tool
---
Worn photoconductor
---
Printing tast sheet
---
Worn fixer
---
Worn CMYK developer soon
---
Non-genuine toner
---
Operator guidance message

Display
Descriptions
Cancel to stop
---
Start to continue
---
53
Revision C
Date and Time Display

Display
Descriptions
1/23/2004 13:59
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM-Noth
American destinations
23/ 1/2004
DD/MM/YYYY HH:MMEuropean destinations
Note: Initial values for time messages depend on the destination. Products for other than Noth
America are European destination spec.
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN PRINT MODE

Display
Descriptions
Printing
Please wait
---
Scanning
Please wait
---
Manual Duplex
Manual duplex printing
Check paper
Manual feed
Using networked TWAIN

Please wait
TWAIN is being used
Cancel printing?
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancellation of print job
Cancel all print jobs?

Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancellation of all print jobs
Cancel scanning?
Cancel to stop
Start to continue
Cancellation of scan job
Scanner Trouble
Unable to Copy
Dont Change mode
Printer Error
Unable to Copy
Dont Change mode
Scanner Trouble
Unable to Scan
Dont Change mode
Fax Trouble
Unable to Fax
Dont Change mode
54
Revision C
1.3.2.2 Fax Mode

BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Button name
Idling
Scanning
FAX
Copy button
Moves to copy mode
Invalid
Moves to copy mode. In copy mode, switch to

print mode.
FAX button
Moves to print mode
Invalid
Unable to move to fax mode.

In fax mode, switch to print mode.
Scan button
Moves to print mode
Invalid
Moves to scan mode

In scan mode, switch to print mode.
Setup button
Moves to setup mode
Invalid
Moves to setup mode.

In setup mode, switch to print mode.

1. Short press: Dials the registered number.

Invalid
2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Prompts the user to register new numbers.
Does not shift to fax mode and dial
When verifying speed dial numbers: Displays details on speed dial numbers.
Invalid
Invalid
Reset button
1.
2.
3.
4.
Invalid
Invalid
Up button
/Down button
Changes setup items
Invalid
Invalid
Left button
/Right button
1. Menu: Changes setup items

2. Cursor function: Moves cursor
Invalid
Invalid
Speed dial button
Fax mode initial screen - Speed dial transmission - Group dial transmission - Fax mode initial screen Invalid
Invalid
Redial button
1. During dialing: inserts a pause

2. Before dialing: dials the number that was last entered
Invalid
Invalid
Cancel button
Invalid
When scanning is in progress, the job is Invalid

canceled and already scanned and
temporarily stored pages are deleted.
Dial setup
Invalid
Invalid
Ten-key
Dial setup
Invalid
Invalid
Start Buttons
Starts scanning. Starts receiving fax when the fax is send during using the attached phone
with the reception mode set to auto switch or phone only.
Other conditions: starts scanning
Invalid
Clears the error

Fax initialization
Note *1:
*2:
Short press: Performs initialization

Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Perform initialization for all the settings
Cursor function: Deletes one character
Selecting speed dial numbers: Moves to fax initial screen
Switching operation mode is available while sending fax, waiting for sending fax,
and polling.
Depending on the receiver, fax data transmitted in color may be converted into
monochrome.
*3:
*4:
If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot
switch modes until they cancel the error. If there is an error concerning device that
is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
55
Revision C
Fax Job Information
SETUP ITEMS
Fax Mode Setup Items
Item
Setup menu
Destination
Paper size
Density
Setup item
Remarks
Numeric values/speed dial numbers
50 digits
If the numbers are
NOT the speed dial
numbers, they can be
edited (speed dial
numbers can only be
deleted).
A4/B5/LT/LGL
LGL sized papers can

be used when the
ADF is installed.
-3 - 3
7 levels
Image quality (monochrome) Standard, Quality, High quality, Photo
Memory Info
Display
Used Memory = xxx%
Fax Transmssn Job
TT : MM
Waiting/Transmission
Dial Number/Speed Dial Address
Fax Reception Job
On, Off
---
Overseas Mode
On, Off
---
TT:MM
Receiving/Waiting/Printing
Dial Number/Speed Dial Address
Fax Transmssn Job Time = YY/MM/DD TT:MM

detailed information Sender = (Speed Dial Name)
item
Number = (Dial Number)
Monochrom only
Polling reception
Setup menu/item
Color Mode = Color/B&W

Fax Quality = Standard/Qlty/HghQ/
Photo
Pages = (number of pages)
Display Menu when Unregistered
Fax Reception Job Time = YY/MM/DD TT:MM

detailed information Destination = (Speed Dial Name)
Display
Remarks
Not Registerd
---
Advanced Fax Mode setup items

Item
Activity Report
Fax job information
Number = (Dial Number)
Setup menu/item
Fax Job deletion

Remarks
Speed Dial List
Print of Speed Dial List
Activity Report
Print of Fax Activity Report
Fax Setting List
Print of Fax Setting List
Memory Job Info
Print of Fax Memory Job Informations
Memory Info Display
Displays the amount of the memory used for the

fax module
Fax Transmssn Job
Fax transmission jobs (currently transmitted job

and stored jobs) are listed. .
Fax Reception Job
Fax reception jobs (currently received job and

stored jobs) are listed.
Remarks
xxx is 0 to 100
Start time
Status of job
--Start Time
Status of job
--Start Time
Registered Name
Dial Number
Fax mode
Monochrome only
--Start Time
Registered Name
Destination Dial Number
Color Mode = Color/B&W
Fax type
Pages = (number of pages)
Number of document pages
Delete?
No
Yes
---
56
Revision C
Operation, Status Messages
STATUS DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE

Guidance Messages
Display
Display
Remarks
Press start to transmit
---
Using external phone
Press start to receive
Polling Rcption On
---
Speed Dial
---
Group Dial
---
Speed Dial List
---
Activity Report
---
Fax Setting List
---
Memory Job Info
---
Fax Menu
Advanced Fax Menu
Reset
---
Please wait
---
Warming up
---
Calibrating printer
---
Cancel the job
Standby
---
Fax scanning
---
Transmitting Fax
Only Color Fax
Printing
Fax report printing
Control instruction Messages

Display
Cancel Fax Job Press Cancel to Canc. or Start to
Continue
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE
Remarks
Remarks
---
List of Warnings
Display
Remarks
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN FAX MODE
Check paper size
---
Image optimum
---
Check paper type
---
Receiving fax
---
Color mismatch
---
Need More Memory
---
CMKY toner low
---
Worn photoconductor
---
Worn fixer
---
Worn developer
---
Non-genuine toner
---
Display
Remarks
57
Revision C
1.3.2.3 Copy Mode
SETUP ITEMS
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Setup Items in Copy Mode
Button name
Idling
Scanning
Setup menu
Printing
Setup items
Remarks
Copy
Moves to print mode
Invalid
Moves to print mode
Copies
1 - 99
Fax
Moves to fax mode
Invalid
Moves to fax mode
Zoom
25 - 400%
In increments of 1 %
LGL>LT
A4>B5
100%
B5>A4
HLT>LGL
LGL>LT (78%)
A4>B5 (86%)
100 %
B5>A4 (115%)
HLT>LGL (154%)
Scan button
Moves to scan mode
Invalid
Moves to scan mode
Setup
Moves to setup mode
Invalid
Waits for the engine to

stop, and moves to setup
mode.

Moves to fax mode, and

Invalid
dials the registered number.
Invalid
Advanced
Shifts from scan mode

initial screen to advanced
scan menu screen
Invalid
Reset button
Invalid
Short press: Cancels the

Invalid
current setting
Long press (hold for more
than three seconds):
Returns all copy settings to
their default
Invalid
Up/Down
Scrolls up/down in the

setting items
Invalid
Scrolls up/down in the

setting items
Left/Right
Selects and changes the

setting
Invalid
Selects and changes the

setting
Speed dial
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Redial
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Stop
Invalid
Cancels the Cancels the Job

Job
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Ten-key
Enters number of pages,

magnification
Invalid
Enters number of pages,

magnification
Start
Start
Invalid
Start
---
Full Copy
On/Off
Paper Size
MP A4, MP B5, MP LGL,

MP LT, LC A4, LC LT
MP tray supports the all paper size.

Lower cassette (LC) supports
selected paper.
B&W DocType
Txt/Ph
Photo
Text
Hgh Ql
Text/Photo
Photo
Stndrd
Fine
S.Fine
This strings is used in for US
Txt/Ph
Photo
Text
Hgh Ql
Text/Photo
Photo
Stndrd
Fine
S.Fine
This strings is used in for US
Density
-3 - 3
7 levels
Contrast
-3 - 3
7 levels
-3 - 3
7 levels
-3 - 3
7 levels
-3 - 3
7 levels
ColorDocType
---
58
Revision C
Details on Monochrome/Color Copy Settings

Image data processing
Document
type
Target document
Mode characteristics
Moire
removal
Text/Photos Color documents printed by offset printing such as

Suitable for copying documents consisting black
magazines (moire normally occurs) and everyday office characters and photographic images.
documents.
Photos
Resolution
Background
Outline
Scan
Print
noise reducing emphasizing resolution resolution
Yes
Yes
Yes
300dpi
600dpi
300dpi
600dpi
Photos, printed materials that contains a lot of photos

and any other documents with images that need tone
reproduction.
Emphasizes color and density reproducibility. (High

quality mode that stresses gradation and contrast for
reproducing photo images.)
Yes
NO
Text
Documents mainly consist of black text.
Performs black text enhancement process in order to

obtain best quality for the documents.
---
Yes
---
300dpi
600dpi
High
resolution
Technical drawings or any other detailed drawings that Performs black text enhancement process reducing the
consist of a lot of fine lines.
background noise. Scan resolution is set to 600 dpi, the
maximum image quality mode for emphasis
reproducibility of the technical drawing, fine lines.
---
Yes
---
600dpi
600dpi
Details on Image Adjustment Settings
Adjustment
Item
Set contents
Description
Setup value coverage

(-) side
(+) side
-3
-3
Density
Adjust the density of whole area of the image.
Increase the density (darken the image): to + sideReduce the density (lighten the image): to - side
Contrast
Adjust the contrast (difference between lights and

darks) applied to whole area of the image
Difference is small: to + side (increases contrast) Difference is large: to - side (decreases contrast)
Fine adjusts blue (deep blue) components
Blue is weak: to - side (Increases G/B relatively by lowering R) Blue is strong: to + side (Decreases G/
B relatively by increasing R)
-3
Fine adjusts red (purplish red) components
Red is weak: to - side (Increases R/B relatively by lowering G) Red is strong: to + side (Decreases R/B
relatively by increasing G)
-3
Fine adjusts yellow components
Yellow is weak: to - side (Increases R/G relatively by lowering B)

Yellow is strong: to + side (Decreases R/G relatively by increasing B)
-3
Advanced Copy Mode Setup Items

Setup menu
Remarks
Standard copy
---
2 Pages per Sheet
---
59
Revision C
Additional Menu Items
Setup menu
Setup items
Docu size
Remarks
A4, B5, LGL, LT
---
Display
Please wait
---
Warming printer
---
Calibrating printer
---
STATUS DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
Cancel the job
Guidance message
Standby

---
Copying
Display
Remarks
Press Start to copy
---
2 Pages per Sheet
---
No matching Ppr sze
---
Copy menu
Advanced copy menu
Remarks
---
Scanning
1st
page
---
Scanning
2nd
page
---
Control instruction Messages

Display
Press Cancel to stop
Remarks
---
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE

List of Warnings
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN COPY MODE
Display
Remarks
Display
Remarks
Could not print
---
Check paper size
---
Insufficient memory
---
Image oputimum
---
Cancelling
---
Check paper type
---
---
Color mismatch
---
Copying
Please wait
CMYK toner low
---
Worn photoconductor
---
Worn fixer
---
Worn developer
---
Non-genuine toner
---
Cancel Copy Job

Press Cancel to Canc.
or Start to Cantinue
Cancellation of copy job
ScanCompletePage1
Set Page2
Press Start to Scan
Press to Finish
---
60
Revision C
1.3.2.4 Scan Mode

BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Button name
Idling
Running
Error LED
Copy
Moves to copy mode
Invalid
Unable to move to copy mode.

In copy mode, switch to print mode.
Fax
Moves to fax mode
Invalid
Moves to fax modeIn fax mode, switch to print

mode.
Scan
Moves to print mode
Invalid
Unable to move to scan mode.

In scan mode, switch to print mode.
Setup
Moves to setup mode
Invalid
Moves to setup modeIn setup mode, switch to print

mode.

Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered number.
Invalid
Does not shift to fax mode and dial
Shifts from scan mode initial screen to advanced scan menu Invalid
screen
Invalid
Reset button
1. Short press: Performs initialization

2. Long press (hold for more than three seconds): Perform
initialization for all the settings
Invalid
Invalid
Up/Down
Scrolls up/down in the setting items
Invalid
Invalid
Left/Right
Opens subsequent menus or backs to previous menu, or

exits the menu
Selects and changes the setting
Invalid
Invalid
Speed dial
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Redial
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Cancel button
Invalid
Local PC: Invalid

Network: Cancels scanner job
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Ten-key
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Start
Standard scanning using the document table: Auto select

Other than the above: Start
Invalid
Clears the errorFax initialization
Note *1:
*2:

If the error that requires user intervention to be cleared has occurred, users cannot switch modes until they cancel the error.
If there is an error concerning device that is diagnosed as device failure at start-up, switching between modes is impossible.
61
Revision C
SETUP ITEMS
STATUS DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE
Scan Mode Setup Items
Guidance Messages
Display
Remarks
Display
Remarks
Local PC
---
Scan To PC
---
Network PC
---
Press Start: scan
---
Using local PC
---
Select Network PC
---
Network PC selection items
Scan menu
Display
Remarks
PC name
Up to 10 PC names are
displayedCharacters that cannot be
displayed are replaced with blanks
(spaces).
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE

List of Warnings
Display
Push-scan Setup Items

Setup menu
File format
Advanced scan menu
Setup items
Remarks
PDF/TIFF/JPG
---
Advanced Scan Mode Setup Items

Display
Remarks
Standard scan
---
Manual scan
Not for Auto scan
Remarks
Could not print
---
Check Paper size
---
Resolution reduce
---
Check paper type
---
Check color adjustment
---
CMYK toner low
---
Replacephotoconductor soon
---
Replace fixer soon
---
Replace developer soon
---
Non-genuine toner
---
Menu added when performing manual scan

Setup menu
Paper size
Setup items
A4/B5/LT/LGL
Remarks
LGL sized papers can be
used when the ADF is
installed.
62
Revision C

Display
Remarks
Reset
---
Please wait
---
Warming up
---
Calibrating printer
---
Cancel the job
Standby
---
Scanning
---
Waiting to Connect PC
---
Control instruction messages

Display
Press Cancel to stop
Remarks
---
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN SCAN MODE

Display
Remarks
Canceling
---
Scanning
Please wait
---
Cancel Scan Job

Press Cancel to Canc.
or Start to Continue
Cancellation of scan job
PC Connection failed
---
Net Connection failed
Not concluded normally because of

the cable breakage or other reasons.
63
Revision C
1.3.3 Setup Functions
SETUP MODE SETUP ITEMS
BUTTON FUNCTIONS
Setup menu
Printer settings
Button name
Setup mode
Copy
Moves to copy mode
Fax
Moves to fax mode
Scan
Moves to scan mode
Setup
Moves to print mode

Moves to fax mode, and dials the registered number.

Host I/F settings
Remarks
Information Menu
(p65)
Tray menu
(p65)
Setup Menu
(p65)
Reset Menu
(p66)
Support Menu
When started in support mode (p66)
Printer Adjust Menu
When started in support mode (p66)
Maintenance Menu
When started in maintenance mode (p69)
USB Menu
(p66)
Network Menu
(p67)
Basic Settings
(p67)
Advanced
Invalid
Reset
Invalid
Up/Down
Transmssn Settings
(p67)
Left/Right
Reception Settings
(p68)
Speed dial button
Invalid
Speed Dial Settings
(p68)
Redial button
Invalid
Report Setup
(p68)
Cancel button
Invalid
Fax Factory settings
(p68)
Invalid
Ten-key
Invalid
Start
Invalid
Fax settings
Copy Settings
Copy Function Settings (p68)

Copy Factory Settings
Scanner settings
(p68)
Carriage lock
---
ALERT SCREEN DISPLAYED IN SETUP MODE

Display
Explanation
Clear Speed Dial

Press Cancel to Clear
or Start to Continue
---
Faxing
Please Wait
Processing Fax job
Please Wait
Processing Scanner carriage lock sequence.
64
Revision C
1.3.3.1 Print Mode
DEVICE SETUP ITEMS
PRINTER INFORMATION SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
Setup menu
Setup items
Status
Sheets
---
Network
Status Sheet*1
---
USB Ext I/F

Status Sheet*2
---
C toner =*3
E F ~ E F
M toner
=*3
E F ~ E F
Y toner
=*3
E F ~ E F
K toner
=*3
E F ~ E F
Photo con =*3
E F ~ E F
=*3
0 - 99999999
Color pages =*3
0 - 99999999
B/W pages =*3
0 - 99999999
Total pages
Note *1:
Only displayed when the network interface board is installed, and "network menu" "network I/F=ON"
Lang
MP Mode
Normal, Last
---
Size Ignore
On, Off
---
Auto Cont
On, Off
---
LCD contrast
0 - 15
YYYY/MM/DD HH/MM
For fax models only, format is as

below.
DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/
YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD
For fax models, format depends on

destination as follow:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MMDomestic destinations MM/DD/
YYYY HH:MM-North American
destinations DD/MM/YYYY
HH:MM-European destinations
*3:
This item is only for display, not changeable.
Date Format
Setup items
LT, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, C6,
ISO B5
Cassette paper size
A4/LT
MP Tray
Plain, Semithk, Letterhead, Recycled, Colored
LC Type
Plain paper, semi thick paper, letterhead, recycled paper, colored

paper
---
---
Only displayed when a D4-compliant USB external device is connected, and USB
Menu - USB I/F=On.
Setup menu
Remarks
5, 15, 30, 60, 120 and

180minutes
*2:
MP Tray size
English
Franais
Deutsch
Italiano
ESPAOL
SVENSKA
Dansk
Neder lands
SUOMI
Portugues
Time to Sleep
Time Setting
PAPER FEEDER SETUP ITEMS
Setup items
Lang
Lang
Sprache
Lingua
IDIOMA
SPRK
Sprog
Taal
Kieli
Lng.
---
65
Revision C
PRINTER RESET ITEMS
USB I/F SETUP ITEMS
Setup menu
Remarks
Setup menu
Remarks
Clear warning
---
USB I/F*1
Yes, No
Clear all warning
---
USB speed*1
HS, FS
Reset
---
Restart Unit
USB
Reboot
Get
Extl/FConfg*2
IPAddress*3
Yes, No
Panel, Auto, Ping
---
IP*3, 4, 5
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
---
SM*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
---
GW*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
Change Toner Y
---
NetWare*3
On, Off
Change Toner K
---
AppleTalk*3
On, Off
Factory Settings
Change Toner C
Change Toner M
Reset Fuser Counter
Overseas destinations only
MS
Network*3
Rendezvous*3
USB Extl/F
SUPPORT FUNCTION ITEM

Setup menu
LCD Backlight
Note *1:
Setup items
Auto, On, Off
Remarks
---
Setup items
0 - 5 - 15
---
SemiThk
0 - 5 - 15
---
Thick
0 - 5 - 15
---
ExtraThk
0 - 5 - 15
---
Card
0 - 5 - 15
---
Envelope
0 - 5 - 15
---
Feed offset
-3.5 - 0.0 - 3.5 mm
(mm) The printer reboots.
Scan offset
-3.5 - 0.0 - 3.5 mm
(mm) The printer reboots.
Calibration
---
---
After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the
power is turned on again. While it is reflected in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back,
the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected.Changed to
USB Config=No automatically when exitting the setup mode.
*3:
Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected, and USB
external device=Yes. Content of the setting depends on the USB external device
settings.
*4:
The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when Get IPAddress =
Auto.
*5:
When the IP Adress - Panel or PING is changed to Auto, the setting value of
the Panel or PING is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
when the setting is changed back to Panel or PING. The printer displays
192.168.192.168 if the settings are not made from the panel.
Remarks
Normal
On, Off
*2:
PRINTER ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION ITEMS

Setup menu
Init*3
On, Off
---
66
Revision C
1.3.3.2 Fax Mode
NETWORK SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
Network I/F*1
Network
Get
Config*2
IPAddress*3
Setup items
Remarks
On, Off
---
---
Panel, Auto, Ping
Setup menu
Line type
Setup items
PSTN, PBX, FlashStart
Remarks
FlashStart is only available in
Germany and France.
Adds the FlashStart function to
PBX to support FlashStart
Dial type
Tone, 10 pps, 20 pps
When the country setting is set to

Australia, 20 pps is not displayed.
Personal Number
User name and fax number
Numbers: 20 digits, names: 32

characters, name can only be set
with the tool.
Speaker volume
Country/Area Set.
OFF, 1, 2, 3
4 levels
Austria, Belgium, Denmark,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Holland, Ireland, Italy,
Luxemburg, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, U.K., Russia, Poland,
Czech, Hungary, Switzerland,
Norway, Argentine, Brazil,
Mexico, Taiwan, China, Korea,
Hong Kong, Singapore, Australia,
New Zealand, Thailand, Malaysia,
U.S.A., Canada
Default values vary according to

the destination.
IP*3, 4 5
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
---
SM*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
---
GW*3
0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
---
AppleTalk*3
On, Off
---
MS Network*3
On, Off
---
Rendezvous*3
On, Off
---
Link Speed*3
Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Default values vary according to

Full, 10 Half
the destination.
Note *1:
BASIC SETUP ITEMS
Only displayed when the network interface board is installed. After this item is
changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned
on again. While it is reflected in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual
change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
*2:
Only displayed when a network interface board is installed. Changed to Network

Config=No automatically when exitting the setup mode.
*3:
Only displayed when a network interface board is installed and Network Config is
set to Yes.
*4:
The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when Get IPAddress =
Auto.
*5:
When the IP Adress - Panel or PING is changed to Auto, the setting value of
the Panel or PING is memorized and it is restored and displayed on the panel
when the setting is changed back to Panel or PING. The printer displays
192.168.192.168 if the settings are not made from the panel.
Report printing Setup English, Francais, Deutsch,

Italiano, Espanol, SVENSKA,
Dansk, Nederlands, SUOMI,
,
Portugues,
Note *:
---
Default values vary according to

the country setting.
Fax basic settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the memory.
TRANSMISSION SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
Setup items
Auto Redial Tries
0 - 99
Print Sender Info.
On, Off
Note *:
Remarks
Times
It set to 14 times in Australia, and it
set to 9 times in New Zealand.
---
Fax transmission settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
memory.
67
Revision C
RECEPTION SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
FAX COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SETUP ITEMS

Setup items
Remarks
Setup menu
Setup items
Paper Cassette
Auto, MPtray, Cassette
---
Activity Report
On, Off
Incomming Mode
Auto switching, Fax only,

Phone only, TAM
---
Transmission Report
At each transmission, On error, Off
Timeout
1 - 99
Multipie Trans report
At each transmission, On error, Off
DRPD*3
Normal, All
Note *1:
unit: second(s)
---
Fax reception settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
memory.
*2:
Auto reducing function works all the time.
*3:
- DRPD=Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection

- North America only
Note *1:
Setup items
Remarks
Register, Delete
1 - 60
One-touch Dial
Register, Delete
A-C
Clear Speed Sial
No, Yes
Clears all the speed dial numbers.
*2:
FAX FACTORY DEFAULT SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
Individual Speed Dial
Note *1:
Fax communication management setting cannot be changed as long as there are jobs
stored in the memory.
Factory Settings
SPEED DIAL SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
Note *:
Displays the list of all the registered fax numbers, and indicates the speed dial
numbers not in use. If you wish to change the speed dial number, press Up/Down or
Ten-key until desired number shows up. Press the Right button to select the number.
If unregistered number is chosen, then you can register new fax number. If registered
number is selected, the registered information will be deleted. The registered
information cannot be edited nor corrected. Adding new numbers and deleting the
registered information are possible. In the speed dial register process, fax numbers
should be entered using the Ten-key. To delete the information, press the Right
button after confirmation screens appears. When the information is either deleted or
cleared, the alert screen appears for confirmation.
Fax speed dial settings cannot be changed as long as there are jobs stored in the
memory.
*2:
Setup items
---
Remarks
Returns the current settings to
factory default.
This function returns all fax settings stored on the fax board and reboots the product.
And deletes all unfinished fax jobs stored on the memory.
1.3.3.3 Copy Mode

COPY OPERATION SETUP ITEMS
Setup menu
Standard Settings
Setup items
Remarks
---
Sets the current value as a copy job

standard value.
COPY FACTORY DEFAULT SETUP ITEMS

Setup menu
Factory Settings
Setup items
---
Remarks
Returns the current settings to
factory default.
68
Revision C
1.3.4 Special Operations

1.3.4.1 Printer Related Special Operations
LIST OF OPERATING FUNCTIONS
The following is a list of the special operating functions supported by this printer.
C A U T IO N
Do not make these functions (except Support mode and panel

setting value initialization) available to users.
Table 1-35. List of Operating Functions

Function
Operating procedure
Support mode
Hold [Down
] and turn the printer ON.
Initialization of EEPROM
Hold [Color], [Reset], and [Left ] and turn the power ON (Check for all of the RAM area is performed).
Initialization of panel settings
Hold [Reset] and turn the printer ON.
Update program ROM
Hold [Color], [Reset], and [Down
Maintenance mode
Hold [Left ], [Up
Update engine program
Hold [Color], [Reset], [Up
RAM check for all areas
[Hold [Color], [Up
MFP Maintenance Mode
Hold [Color], [Up
Reset CPU when a Service Call occurs
When a service call error occurs, hold down [Reset], [Left ], [Up
Display detailed information when a Service

Call occurs
Press [Reset] , [Left ], and [Right ] when a service call error occurs.
], [Down
], and [Right ] and turn the printer ON.
], and [Down
], [Left ], and [Right ] and turn the printer ON.

], [Down
], and [Right ] and turn the printer ON.

], [Down
], and [Right ] simultaneously.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
The following are items specific to this printer.
EEPROM Initialization
The information concerning usage amount for each of the toner cartridges, photoconductor unit, and fuser unit are not cleared as they are stored on the engine controller.
69
Revision C
Maintenance mode
After entering maintenance mode, the engine process control is executed forcibly.
After the printer enters the Maintenance mode, engine process control (Calibrating
Printer) is performed after printing since the process control is a cycle process
control.
Table 1-36. Self diagnosis

Setup menu
Reference
Printer
3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis (p134)
Scanner
3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis (p134)
Fax
1.3.4.2 Other Special Operations

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION SETUP ITEMS
3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis (p135)
Panel
3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis (p135)
B unit
3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis (p136)
Table 1-37. Fax maintenance

Setup menu
Remarks
Setup menu
Engine Status Sheet
Exits setup mode and returns to printer mode.
Print Log Report
Exits setup mode and returns to printer mode.
FAX user area
Reset 2ndBTRCounter
The printer reboots.
Fax system area
Reset C DvlpCounter
Fax system counter area
Reset M DvlpCounter
Fax error history area
Reset Y DvlpCounter
Reset K DvlpCounter
Reset Fuser Counter
Memory clear
Reference
ALL
3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
Fax system parameter area

Memory check
Read data
Write data
Clear Error Log
---
MCU DATA Backup
---
MCU DATA Restore
---
Parameter check
Read data
Write data
Module check
3.3.2.2 Memory Check (p139)

Whole
Image memory
Modem
MFP MAINTENANCE MODE
Gate array
In MFP maintenance mode, self diagnosis and fax maintenance can be executed.
Initiation method and functions are described below. For details, refer to Chapter 3
Troubleshooting.
Flash memory
Signal check
Parameter
3.3.2.5 Signal Check (p142)
Initiation method
Hold [Color], [Up], [Down], and [Right] and turn the printer ON.
List of functions
70
1.4 Status Sheet
Revision C
The following consumables information is also printed on the status sheet.

Information on Consumables
This section describes Status Sheet that enables you to check current setups for printing
and faxing, and operating history.
Toner cartridge (C)
Toner cartridge (M)
STATUS SHEET
Toner cartridge (Y)
Status sheet is available in abridged and complete version.

Full Status Sheet
Printing a full status sheet is made using the printer driver. It is not printed out if
the driver fails to get information on the printer.
C A U T IO N
Aside from the printer driver for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F,

EPW!3 (EPSON Printer Window! 3) needs to be installed to print a
full status sheet.
Abridged Status Sheet

An abridged status sheet is printed under the conditions described below.
Displayed characters vary according to the language setting and are printed in
monochrome.
Selecting printer information from the control panel.
When a full status sheet cannot be printed out using the printer driver.
Example of these status sheets are shown in Figure1-14 (p73) and Figure1-13 (p72).
Toner cartridge (K)
1,500 page capacity
LP CA4ETC4C
4000 page capacity
LP CA4ETC5C
1,500 page capacity
LP CA4ETC4M
4000 page capacity
LP CA4ETC5M
1,500 page capacity
LP CA4ETC4Y
4000 page capacity
LP CA4ETC5Y
4000 page capacity
LP CA4ETC5K*
Photoconductor Unit
Note *:
Model number
LPCA4KUT3
1,500 page capacity cartridge for K toner is included with shipment and is not
available separately.
The last line printed on the status sheet contains the following information.
1.
Firmware version in DDYM format that starts with IA.
2.
Type of the device of code ROM.
Space : Mask
: F lash
3.
4-digit CMTD (Color Matching Table Data) version that starts with A.
4.
Mechanical controller version expressed by 10-digit numbers that start with MC.
(Refer to 6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet (p558))
5.
Space
6.
USB ID (31PXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX)
7.
Latest connection status of the USB communication mode.
: HS
: FS
Space : no connection with USB
71

8.
9.
Revision C
USB communication mode
D: D4 compatible device
Space:Non D4 compliant device
Number of occurrences of jams indicated by JC and 6 figures
10. Number of replacements of Toner Cartridge indicated by IC and 12 figures, and

number of recoveries from errors (Toner Cartridge) indicated by 12 figures.
Maximum number of times: 255
There is a space between the number of replacements and the number of error
recoveries.
Both numbers are indicated in order of C, M, Y, K with 3 figures for each.
When options are installed, the following information on them are added.
1.
RAM DIMM : Total amount of memory including the standard RAM is indicated
as Installed Memory.
2.
Network/IF Board
Settings in "Network Menu" - "Host I/F Settings" are listed.
"Network" is added in the "Interface"
"LAN HW Address", "LAN HW Revision", and "LAN FW Revision" are

added in the "Hardware Configuration".
NOTE: "LAN HW Address" is the Mac address.

"LAN HW Revision" is always 0 (zero).
"LAN FW Revision" is a version of the Planet.
3.
500-sheet Cassette
"Cassette" appears beside "Input Unit" under "Hardware Configuration".

(Complete status sheet and Abridged status sheet)
Figure 1-13. Full Status Sheet
72
Figure 1-14. Simplified Status Sheet (1)
Revision C
Figure 1-15. Simplified Status Sheet (2)
73
Revision C
ENGINE STATUS SHEET

C A U T IO N
Do not disclose this information to users.
It can be output from the Maintenance Menu. Refer to Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE

for the details on the Engine Status Sheet.
74
Revision C
1.4.2 Fax Section
ACTIVITY REPORT
The following information sheets are available from the "Printing Report" menu which
is activated by pressing the [Advanced] button in fax mode.
Table 1-38. Items in "Printing Report"
Menu
Printing Report
Item
The Activity Report provides a chronological history of the fax jobs stored in the
product (fax unit). The history is listed with the following items.
Information in the fax header
Information on each of the fax jobs
Speed Dial List
Start time
Fax number (sender or recipient)
Duration of the fax job
Pages
Mode
The following stored information lists can be printed out.
Result
One-Touch Dial List
Contents
Activity Report
Fax Setting List
Memory Job Info
SPEED DIAL LIST
Fax numbers assigned to the one-touch buttons (with their codes)

C H E C K
P O IN T
Speed-Dial List
Code
Name of the fax number
Fax number
If an error has occurred when starting up the product in

"Maintenance Mode", the error code (XXX-XXX) will be displayed
in the "Result" column.
Group Dial List
Group-dial code
Name of the group
Fax number (with the code)
C H E C K
P O IN T
If no numbers is stored in the above Dial Lists, the product displays

a message; "Report Print Error" on the LCD.
75
Revision C
FAX SETTING LIST
MEMORY JOB INFO
Current settings for the items shown in the table below are printed out in a list.
Information on fax jobs currently stored in the memory are printed out in a list.
Table 1-39. Fax Setting List Contents

No.
C H E C K
P O IN T
Item

Requested date/time
Line type
Sender or recipient fax number
Dial type
Status (waiting to send, waiting to print, and so on)
Personal number
Personal name
Speaker volume
Country
Auto Redial Tries
Sender Record
Reception Mode
10
Attached Phone Call Time Out
11
DRPD (US model only)
12
Activity Report
13
Transmission Report
14
Multi Trans. Report
15
Software Version
Fax
Model
Pages
C H E C K
P O IN T
"Report Print Error" message is displayed if no job is remaining in

the memory.
When the product is in "Maintenance Mode", the following items

are added in the Fax Setting List.
Job Counter Information (counts of transmitted/received
pages)
System Error History (error code and occurrence date/time)
See 3.6.4.2 Log Information (p297) for details on the Fax
Setting List.
76
CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Revision C
2.1 Overview
MAIN FEATURES
The AcuLaser CX11/CX11F is an all-in-one laser printer equipped with scanner, copy
and fax functions (The AcuLaser CX11 does not have fax function). A4 full-color 4
cycle engine and a new controller which includes control circuits for scanner, ADF and
fax are employed on this product. The main controller is incorporated in the printer
mechanism and controls all of the functions.
The diagram below shows the basic configuration of the product.
Host-based controller using ESC/Page-S Printing System

Engine specifications
A4, Color 5 ppm / Monochrome 25 ppm, 600 dpi
TOSHIBA TX4955 CPU is employed
MFC is employed as new memory, I/O, and ASIC with an image processing
function.
64 MB RAM
Can be expanded up to 512 MB with option RAM
ADF
Two Built-in Interfaces
Scanner
Panel Unit
USB2.0HS
Ethernet (10Base/100Base-T)
Fax modular (The AcuLaser CX11F only)
Contorl Panel with LCD
Printer Section
Main Controller
Fax Unit
Figure 2-1. Basic Configuration of the Product
Overview
78
Revision C
Table 2-1. List of Controller Outline Specifications
2.1.1 Outline Specifications
Item
The following shows the outline specifications of the controller.

ROM
Table 2-1. List of Controller Outline Specifications

Item
Description
Controller specifications
Host-based controller
Engine
Item
A4 4 cycles
Printing speed
5/25 ppm (Color/Monochrome)
Scanner
CPU
UA2510 Scanner (manufactured by Teco)

Item
TMPR4955BFG-200MHz
Bus frequency
96 [MHz]
192 [MHz] (96 [MHz] x 2)
Internal core frequency

ASIC
Memory+I / O
Custom I/C
ASIC for counterfeiting

prevention
Clock
8 [MB] FLASH ROM Mirror type
Configuration
C567RROG
Connector configuration
90pin DIMM
Device
Slot
MBM29PL32BM-90TN-A5E1
(FUJITSU,32[Mbit] (x16))
1 slot (fixed for standard, no vacancy)
Capacity
256[Kbit] SPI serial formula
Device
M95256-WMW6T (ST micro)
USB
Network
MFC (E05C20BA) Manufactured by NEC

484PBGA 0.13 [um]
FAX I/F
N3R (B5B-7000) manufactured by OMRON

176QFP
Scanner I/F
Clock wiring
ASIC distribution (CPU, RAM, USB, FAX, N3R)
ADF I/F
Clock frequency
96 [MHz]
24 [MHz] (distributed from ASIC)
48 [MHz]
Clock oscillating frequency
48 [MHz] (MA-406 4 [pF])
USB
Video
12 [MHz] (MA-406 10 [pF])
UA2510 (Teco) For Scanner connection

Motor
Driver
Engine I/F
Panel
RTC
USB2.0HS
E05C22AA (Manufactured by EPSON 100PQFP)
Cobalt
External board compatible (manufactured by
NJRC) Laser-FAX
CCD I/F
Moter I/F
N3R
48 [MHz]
UART (generated inside ASIC) 48 [MHz] (No SSCG modulation)
Item
Device
E05C22AA Manufactured by EPSON 100PQFP

(SIX56014F00A)
FAX
LB1946-K (SANYO,28pin-DIP)
Sheet feed type
UART(same as LP-V500)
LCD section
Backlight
RCM6106B-A (132 x 65dot)

Installed
Switch section
6 x 6 switch matrix
LED section
Seven LEDs are driven by the panel board

RTC-4543SA + Super capacitor
Configurations
Backup capability
10 days (because of restriction of the circuit

configuration specification)
24 [V]
Printer engine 1.0 [A]
3.3V (M51957BFP-C61J)
12 [V]
Series regulator (PQ12DZ5UJ00H) 0.1 [A]
128 [MB] SDRAM
5 [V]
Configuration
C567PROG 64[MB]+C585RAM 64[MB]
3.3 [V]
Connector configuration
90pin DIMM
2.5 [V]
Series regulator (PQ025EZ5MZPH) 0.5 [A]
Device
1.5 [V]
Slot
MT48LC16M16A2P-75
(Micron,256[Mbit] (x16))
2Slots (including standard one slot)
Series regulator (PQ015EZ1HZPH)

1.5 [A] (for internal MFC)
Series regulator (PQ015EZ01ZPH)
1.5 [A] (for internal CPU)
Max. capacity
576 [MB]
Reset
RAM
Host I/F
Capacity
ASIC for USB 2.0 HS
USB (Synchronized DMA

operation)
Crystal
oscillator
EEPROM
Description
Standard capacity
27.779 [MHz] (MA-406 10 [pF])
Power Supply
Debugging Tool
Overview
SIF3 Board
79
Revision C
Sensor I/F*2 Power (24V) ADF I/F*1

(2Pin)
(2Pin)
(12Pin)
CN704
CN502
CN701
CCD_B I/F
(13Pin)
Panel I/F
(30Pin)
CN405
CN702
S1 S0
CN402
IC401
IC102
C588MAIN
CN410
FAX I/F*2
(40Pin)
CN201 RAM DIMM A (90pin)
CN202 RAM DIMM B (90pin)
JP4
JP2
IC701
USB I/F
(2Pin)
IC101
JP1
CN703
Motor I/F
(4Pin)
CN300 ROM/RAM DIMM (90pin)
CN705
CCD_A I/F
(14Pin)
CN602
IC103
CN407
CN501
Cobalt I/F
(30Pin)
Power (5V, 3.3V)

(2Pin)
Viedo I/F
(2Pin)
CN601
R422
JP3
Engine I/F
(16Pin)
Figure 2-2. C588Block Diagram of the Main Board

Note *1:
*2:
Base model does not implement CN704.

Fax model does not implement CN705/CN410.
Overview
80
SSCG oscillator
48[MHz]
Other signals
Address
Power Supply
24V
3.3V
5V
Oscillator for VIDEO

27.779[MHz]
Engine
1.5V
Reg.
12V
1.5V
Reg.
Reg.
2.5V
Reg.
Pixel
count
UART
VIDEOX
Option_RAM
RAM DIMM_90pin
VIDEO
differential
operation
Adr:20bit
SDCLK[2]
96[MHz]
C585RAM (64MB)
RAM DIMM_90pin
SDCLK[0]
96[MHz]
CPUCLK
96[MHz]
Data:32bit
SDCLK[1]
96[MHz]
LVDS
C567PROG (64MB)
ROM/RAM DIMM_90pin
CN
Overview
CN
PLL frequency
multiplier
Built-in PWM
Built-in SSCG
VIP3S
MFC
32
(TX4955BFG 192MHz)
CPU
COLDRSTX
VCCOK
RSTX
Data
Driver
ADCLK
FB_CLK
48[MHz]
PCLK
24[MHz]
MCLKOUT
48[MHz]
INTX[4:0]
Motor
CCD
ADF
Panel
RTC
Fax
(External board)
Debug
Cobalt
USB
(E05C22AA)
N3R
EEPROM
Reset IC
Scanner
Section
Oscillator for USB

12[MHz]

Revision C
Figure 2-3. Block Diagram of the Controller
81
Revision C
2.1.2 Detection Mechanisms

The following shows a list of detection functions.
Table 2-2. Sensor (printer section)
Unit
MP tray
Detection Item
Paper presence detection
500-sheet cassette
Photoconductor Unit
(with Transfer Belt and Waste Toner
Box)
Life detection
Available
---
Not available
Remaining paper detection
Not available
---
Mounting detection at power ON
Not available
Electrical continuity
Unit detection
Available
Cassette presence detection
Available
Also functions as paper presence.
Paper presence detection
Available
Not available
Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor

---
Not available
---
Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver

--Not detected unless the main power is turned off and back on.
--Cassette presence and paper presence are judged by the same
sensor.
--Enter the paper size from control panel or printer driver
---
Not available
---
OHP sensor
Available
Reflective photosensor
---
Temperature detection
(reference)
Available
Environment sensor
---
Humidity detection (reference)
Available
Environment sensor
---
Density detection (reference)
Available
Reflective density sensor
---
New part detection
Available
CRUM
---
Presence Detection
Available
CRUM
---
Color detection
Available
CRUM
Remaining amount detection
Available
Software counter
---
Near-end detection
Available
Software counter
---
End detection
Available
Software counter
---
New part detection
Available
CRUM
---
Unit detection
Available
CRUM
---
Home position detection
Available
Optical type (reflective) sensor
---
Waste toner detection
Available
Optical type (interruptive) sensor
---
Near-end detection
Available
Software counter
---
End detection
Available
Software counter
---
Paper eject capacity Full detection
Toner Cartridge
Remarks
Paper size detection
Paper size detection

Others
Detection Method
Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor
---
Remaining paper detection

MAIN UNIT
Availability
Overview
Cannot be incorrectly installed as the location of the holes are

different for each color.
82
Revision C
Table 2-2. Sensor (printer section)
Unit
Fuser unit
Detection Item
Availability
Detection Method
Not available
---
Unit detection
Available
---
Near-end detection
Available
Software counter
---
End detection
Available
Software counter
---
Not available
---
Enter Reset from the control panel.
---
When not installed, Install xxxx TnrCart is displayed on the

panel.
Recognized by rib
Cannot be incorrectly installed as the location of the holes are

different for each color.
New part detection

Life detection
Developer unit
New part detection

Unit detection
Color detection
Life detection
Near-end detection
End detection
Secondary transfer unit

Life detection
Not available
Available
Available
Software counter
Remarks
Enter Reset from the control panel.
---
Available
Software counter
New part detection
Not available
---
---
Unit detection
Not available
---
---
Near-end detection
Available
Software counter
End detection
Available
Software counter
Not displayed on the panel as it is supposed to be replaced at the

same time as the Fuser unit.
Reset from the Control Panel.
Table 2-3. Sensor (Scanner/ADF)

Unit
Scanner unit
ADF unit
Detection Item
Availability
Opening/Closing of the DOC/

ADF covers
Available
CR home sensor
Available
ADF document presence

detection
Available
Detection Method
Remarks
Magnet sensor
Connected directly to the controller with a cableDetection part on

the upper housing
Magnet on the cover side
Photosensor
Photosensor+Actuator
B5/LT detection
Available
RS sensor
Available
Opening/Closing of the ADF

cover
Available
Make sure to insert papers to the correct position
Micro SW
Sets to A4 if not detected properly

Detects by the operation of the side guideSW on the backside of
the tray
Detects paper presence between the place where documents are

picked up and the separation roller
Detects paper presence on the turning roller
Available
AS sensor
CR home position detection
Micro SW
Overview
Cover sensor to be opened for clearing paper jam

No interlock function
83
Revision C
2.2 Printer Section Operating Principle

This section describes printer functions and operating principles of AcuLaser CX11/
CX11F.
2.2.1 Print Process

2.2.1.1 Print Process Overview
This printer is a "full color laser printer" that uses the principle of electrophotographic
recording. The printer contains a drum that forms toner images by four colors of toner
"Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black (simply called YMCK from here on)." The toner
image of each color is formed on the drum, and the toner images formed on the drum is
transferred to the Belt (secondary transfer roller). Full color printing is performed by
overlaying each of the colors on the belt.
The major steps of the print process are described below.
(1)
Charging
: The drum surface is charged.
(2)
Exposure
: Image areas are exposed on the drum by a laser beam.
(3)
Developing
: Image areas on the drum are developed with toner.
(4)
Primary transfer
: The toner image on the drum is transferred to the Belt.
(5)
Cleaning
: The drum is cleaned.
(6)
Repeat
: In the full color mode, steps (1) to (5) are repeated for
each toner.
(7)
Secondary transfer : The toner image on the Belt is transferred to the

paper.
(8)
Discharging
: The electrical charge of the paper is removed.
(9)
Cleaning
: The Belt is cleaned.
(10) Fusing
Figure 2-4. Print Process Overview
: Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure.
Printer Section Operating Principle
84
Revision C
2.2.1.2 Print Process Diagram

The diagram below illustrates the entire print process.
Leg_06_002RA
Figure 2-5. Total Print Process Schematic Diagram
85
Revision C
2.2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process

CHARGING
At the "Charging" process, BCR (Bias Charge Roll) applies a uniform negative
potential to the drum which rotates at a fixed speed.
BCR keeps contact with the drum and moves together with it.
BCR is a conductive roller, that is negatively charged by HVPS, applies a negative
charge to the drum.
The drum surface is uniformly charged to a negative potential with DC bias
voltage.
The drum is made of conductive material (aluminum cylinder) coated with a
photosensitive material which becomes insulating material in darkness and
becomes conductive when it is subjected to light.
Figure 2-6. Charging Process
86
Revision C
EXPOSURE
At the "Exposure" process, a laser beam is applied to the negatively charged surface of
the drum to form an invisible electrostatic latent image onto the drum.
The laser beam is emitted from a laser diode in the ROS ASSY, and directed by
the polygon mirror, fixed mirror and lens of the Scanner Assy in the ROS ASSY.
A single laser beam is output from the laser diode.
The laser beam is irradiated according to the print data (image data) from the
printer controller. The laser beam is output only when a pixel data (minute dot
composing the print data) exists. (On parts to be developed by toner, the laser
diode turns ON, and on parts not to be developed, the laser diode turns OFF.)
The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, the negative
charge on the drum flows to the positive side, and the potential on the surface of
the drum is reduced in the result. The section of the drum surface where the
potential has reduced becomes the electrostatic latent image.
Drum
Mirror SOS
PWBA LD
Window
Mirror
SOS Sensor
Lens COL
PWBA SOS
Lens CYL
Scanner Assy
Lens L1
Polygon Mirror
Leg_Sec06_008FA
Figure 2-8. Exposure Process
Figure 2-7. Path followed by the Laser Beam
87
Revision C
DEVELOPING
At the "Developing" process, toner is electrically applied to the invisible electrostatic
latent image on the drum, to form a visible image on it.
This printer uses two developing systems: a "rotary developing system" that
successively rotates four Developer Assys, and a "trickle developing system" that
uses developers composed of two components, a carrier and toner.
Developer in the Developer Assy is stirred by a spiral-shaped stirrer called
"Auger", and is supplied to the Magnet Roll located near the drum surface. The
developer is charged by the friction of stirring (toner: negative charge, carrier:
positive charge), and the charges are electrically attracted each other.
As the carrier is a magnetic body, it is attracted to the magnetized Magnet Roll,
and a uniform layer of carrier is formed on the Magnet Roll by passing through a
Trimmer Blade.
A minus voltage is applied to the Magnet Roll together with AC voltage from the
HVPS.
As the electrostatic latent image on the drum that is formed by exposure is charged
positively compared to the other sections on the drum, the toner charged
negatively on the Magnet Roll is attracted only to the image sections on the drum.
Figure 2-9. Development Process (1)
88
Revision C
Toner in the Developer Assy is consumed as the number of prints increases. To

maintain the appropriate development density, the equivalent amount of consumed
toner must be replenished to the Developer Assy from the Toner Cartridge. This
replenishment is called "toner dispense."
Two types of control ("PCDC" and "ADC") are used in combination for toner
dispense.
To obtain a full color image by the four toner colors, a toner image for each of the
Y, M, C and K colors must be formed on the drum.
On this printer, four Developer Assys are located at 90 degree intervals on the
circumference of the Rotary Frame Assy, and by rotating the Rotary Frame Assy,
the Developer Assy of each color is made to face the drum on which the toner
image of each color is formed. This is called the "rotary developing system".
The charging characteristics of the carrier is depleted due to dirt caused by the
toner or due to scratches caused by stirring.
To maintain charging characteristics, a minute amount of carrier is mixed into the
toner in the Toner Cartridge. While toner and carrier are supplied during toner
dispense, depleted carrier in the Developer Assy is collected in a separate chamber
in the Toner Cartridge. This is called the "trickle developing system". Trickle
developing is performed using the rotation of the Rotary Frame Assy during rotary
developing.
The following shows the mechanism of trickle developing.
(1) A pipe is inserted into the carrier in the Developer Assy.
(2) A minute amount of carrier is put into the pipe.
(3) The carrier is skimmed and move farther into the pipe.
(4) The carrier is collected to inside the Toner Cartridge.

89
Revision C
PRIMARY TRANSFER (DRUMBELT)

At the Primary transfer process, the toner image formed on the drum surface is
transferred to the Belt surface in Photoconductor Unit by 1st BTR (First Bias Transfer
Roll).
The 1st BTR is a conductive roller, and is positively charged by the HVPS. The 1st
BTR contacts the back side of the Belt and charge the back side to positive.
The negatively charged toner image on the drum surface is attracted to the positive
charge on the back side of the Belt, and is transferred to the Belt from the drum.
Figure 2-12. Primary transfer (DrumBelt)
90
Revision C
CLEANING (DRUM)
At the "Cleaning (drum)" process, residual toner is removed from the drum surface.
Cleaning the drum
Toner that was not transferred to the Belt at the "Primary transfer" process remains
on the drum surface. Since the remaining toner hinder subsequent processes, it is
scraped off by a Cleaning Blade that contacts with the drum, and is collected in the
Waste Toner Box.
Figure 2-13. Cleaning (drum)
91
Revision C
REPEAT (FORMATION OF COMPLETE TONER IMAGE)

At the "Repeat (formation of complete toner image)" process, the toner images of each
color formed on the drum surface are successively transferred to the Belt to form a
complete toner image composed of the four colors on the Belt surface.
Figure 2-14. Repeat (1)
Figure 2-15. Repeat (2)
92
Revision C
SECONDARY TRANSFER (BELTPAPER)

At the "Secondary transfer" process, the complete toner image formed on the Belt
surface is transferred to paper by the 2nd BTR (Second Bias Transfer Roll).
The 2nd BTR comes in contact with the Belt only when transferring the image to
paper to prevent the toner image formed on the Belt surface from being destroyed.
Normally, the 2nd BTR is located at its home position where is detected by the 2nd
BTR Retract Sensor. And the 2nd BTR Retract Motor moves the 2nd BTR to
contact with the paper.
The 2nd BTR is a conductive roller. It contacts with the back side of the paper (the
opposite side of the side to be printed), and charged positively by the HVPS.
The Back Up Roll, located on the opposite side of the Belt from the 2nd BTR, is a
conductive roller and earthed to the Frame ground.
By positively charging the back side of the paper by the 2nd BTR, the negatively
charged toner image on the Belt is attracted to the paper and the image appears on
the paper.
Figure 2-17. Secondary transfer (BeltPaper) (2)
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT

2ND BTR ASSY
MOT ASSY MICRO
Figure 2-16. Secondary transfer (BeltPaper) (1)
93
Revision C
DISCHARGING
FUSING
At the "Discharging" process, the charge on the paper is neutralized/removed by the

Detack Saw.
At the "Fusing" process, toner is fixed on paper with heat and pressure.
The Detack Saw contacts the back side of the paper. The charge created at the
"Secondary transfer" process is neutralized/removed to prevent the toner from
splattering around the metal parts.
CLEANING
At the "Cleaning (belt)" process, the toner remaining on the Belt surface is removed
after the toner image is transferred to the paper.
Fuser Assy does not have a pressure roll, but has a Fuser Belt instead.
By MOT ASSY FSR drive, Heat Roll rotates and Fuser Belt is driven by the
friction. The inner structure of the Fuser Belt is, as shown in the figure below,
designed to generate a pressure on the Belt and the Heat Roll (Nip Part) to contact
them firmly each other.
The toner melts by the Heat Roll heated by the Heater Lamp in the Fuser Assy, and
then the toner is fixed on the paper by the pressure of the Fuser Belt.
The Belt Cleaner contacts the Belt only when cleaning the Belt to prevent the toner
image formed on the Belt surface from being destroyed. The IBT Retract Motor
moves the Belt Cleaner to contact the Belt.
Toner remaining on the Belt surface is absorbed by the Cleaning Roll. Then, the
toner is absorbed by the brush and collected in the Waste Toner Box.
Figure 2-19. Fusing
Figure 2-18. Cleaning
94
Revision C
2.2.2 Flow of Print Data

2.2.2.1 Data Flow
Print data (electric signals) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown below
to become a print image.
Host (electric signal)

Printer controller (electric signal)
NOTE 1: Formation of 2-D print image:

One line of the dot image is formed by turning the laser beam from the laser
diode ON and OFF in accordance with the electric signals (VIDEO signal:
expresses the image data by voltage levels) from the printer controller.
2: A single-color image (2-D dot image) is completed by performing the
above operation repeatedly over the entire surface of the image. To
obtain a full color image, formation of 2-D dot images is performed for
each of the four colors.
Resolution is determined as follows:
Main direction : dots/inch
Sub direction : Lines/inch
ROS ASSY (laser beam)

Electrostatic latent image on drum
(invisible image)
Toner image on drum (toner image)

Toner image on Belt (secondary transfer roller)
Toner image on paper

Print image on paper
Figure 2-21. Formation of 2-D Print Image
Leg_Sec06_033FA
Figure 2-20. Overview of Producing Print Image
95
Revision C
2.2.3 Drive Transmission Path
CLUTCH ASSY FEED
GEAR FEED
2.2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY FEED

Rotation of DRIVE ASSY FEED is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY FEED
CLUTCH ASSY FEED
GEAR FEED
DRIVE ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_042EB
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
Figure 2-23. Diagram of Drive Transmission Path
500 FEEDER ASSY

Leg_Sec06_035EB
Figure 2-22. Drive Transmission Flow
96
Revision C
2.2.3.2 MOTOR ASSY P/R, DRIVE ASSY PRO

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY P/R and DRIVE ASSY PRO is transmitted as follows:
GEAR DRIVE BRUSH

GEAR DTR 23
MOT ASSY P/R
GEAR IDLE 26/40
DRIVE ASSY PRO
GEAR BRUSH 22/30
GEAR BRUSH 32
IBT ASSY
FLANGE
GEAR INPUT
GEAR-19
GEAR BRUSH 22/30
CAM ASSY-IBT CL
MOT ASSY P/R
DRUM
CAM ASSY
GEAR BRUSH 32
GEAR INPUT
GEAR-19
DRIVE ASSY PRO
GEAR DRIVE BRUSH
FRONT
ROLL ASSY BRUSH IBT
GEAR IDLE 26/40
GEAR DTR 23
Leg_Sec06_045EC
ROLL DTN
Leg_Sec06_036EB
97
Revision C
2.2.3.3 MOTOR ASSY MAG, MOTOR ASSY ROT

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY MAG and MOTOR ASSY ROT is transmitted as follows:
MOT ASSY MAG
MOT ASSY MAG
MOT ASSY ROT

INPUT GEAR(C)
INPUT GEAR(K)
GEAR IDLE DISP
GEAR IDLE DISP(K)
FRAM ASSY-ROTARY
INPUT GEAR
GEAR IDLE DISP(C)
GEAR IDLE DISP(Y)
GEAR AUGER DISPENCE
INPUT GEAR(M)
GEAR IDLE DISP(M)
AUGER DISPENCE
GEAR MAG
INPUT GEAR(Y)
GEAR IDLE
GEAR AUGER SUPPLY
ROLL MAG
FRAM ASSY-ROTARY
GEAR AUGER ADMIX
MOT ASSY ROT
AUGER SUPPLY
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_044FC
AUGER ADMIX
Developer ASSY-DEVE

GEAR AGITATOR
DEVE ASSY
AGITATOR
Leg_Sec06_037FB
98
Revision C
2.2.3.4 MOTOR ASSY DUP

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY DUP is transmitted as follows:
MOTOR ASSY DUP
INVERTER ASSY DUP
MOTOR ASSY DUP INV
GEAR 30
GEAR 48H
GEAR 48H
GEAR 36
GEAR 20/21H
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 20/21H
GEAR 30
GEAR 48H
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
MOTOR ASSY DUP INV
GEAR 40/42
GEAR 48H
GEAR 36
GEAR 36
GEAR 30
GEAR 30
ROLLER ASSY INVERTER
GEAR 36
INVERTER ASSY DUP
GEAR 36
MOTOR ASSY DUP

GEAR 40/42
GEAR 30 OW
ROLLER ASSY DUP OUT
TRANSPORT ASSY DUP
GEAR 30 OW
ROLLER ASSY DUP
TRANSPORT ASSY DUP

Leg_Sec06_038FB
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_041FC
99
Revision C
2.2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY FSR

Rotation of MOTOR ASSY FSR is transmitted as follows:
FUSER ASSY
MOTOR ASSY FSR (Fuser Motor)
GEAR EXIT
GEAR-IDLER EXIT
GEAR 2ND
DRIVE ASSY BTR
ROLL ASSY FUSER
GEAR-IDLER
GEAR 2ND
BELT ASSY
GEAR-IDLER
GEAR-27
GEAR HR
MOTOR ASSY FSR
GEAR-IDLER EXIT
GEAR HR
2ND BTR ASSY

DRIVE ASSY BTR
GEAR-28
GEAR EXIT
ROLL ASSY FUSER
GEAR-27
MOT ASSY MICRO

MOT ASSY MICRO
2ND BTR ASSY

TRANSFER ASSY
EXIT ROLLER
GEAR-28
BELT ASSY
FRONT
Leg_Sec06_043EC
FUSER ASSY
CAM ASSY-2ND
TRANSFER ASSY
Leg_Sec06_039EB
100
Revision C
2.2.3.6 MOTOR-PH
Rotation of MOTOR-PH is transmitted as follows:
PH ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
MOTOR-PH
GEAR 43
GEAR 21/104
MOTOR -PH
GEAR 28/40
GEAR 43
GEAR 43
GEAR 21/104
GEAR PICK UP
GEAR 43
CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
GEAR 28/40
FRONT
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI
MSI
Leg_Sec06_046EC
ROLL REGI METAL
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI

GEAR PICK UP

ROLL REGI RUBBER
ROLL ASSY MSI
PH ASSY
MSI
Leg_Sec06_040EB
101
Revision C
2.2.4 Paper Feed

This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the
paper feed section. The components are divided into four blocks as follows based on
the basic configuration.
MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)
Registration & FUSER
500 Paper Feeder
Leg_06_004RA
Figure 2-34. Paper Feed Path Layout
102
Revision C
2.2.4.1 MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)

ROLL MSI
MAIN FUNCTIONS
GUIDE SIDE L/GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R move crossways of the paper feed
direction, and true up the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
SOLENOID PICK UP
The SOLENOID PICK UP controls rotation of GEAR PICK UP. When the
Solenoid is excited, GEAR PICK UP is unlocked, and ROLL MSI rotates by drive
of the MOTOR-PH.
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI is normally pressed down by the Cam attached to
the shaft. During paper feed, the shaft rotates, releasing the clamping action of the
cam, and the paper is pressed against the ROLL MSI by spring pressure.
SOLENOID PICK UP
ROLL MSI
Paper that is pressed down by the PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI is fed by the
frictional force of the ROLL MSI.
Leg_Sec06_048FB
Figure 2-36. Main Components of MSI (2)
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

The SENSOR PAPER EMPTY detects the presence of paper. When the printer
runs out paper, the actuator of the sensor comes down by its own weight and
shields the sensor, and the no paper state is detected. (No paper state : Shielding
the sensor)
CAM
ROLL MSI
CAM
SOLENOID PICK UP
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
ROLL MSI
GUIDE SIDE L
Leg_Sec06_049FB
Figure 2-37. Operation of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI

GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
Leg_06_047RC
Figure 2-35. Main Components of MSI (1)
103
Revision C
2.2.4.2 Registration & FUSER
FUSER
Fuser Exit Sensor
MAIN FUNCTIONS
The drive from the MOTOR-PH is transmitted to the ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI,
and paper is fed to the registration section.
Fuser In Sensor
SENSOR OHP
This reflective sensor detects whether the print media is plain paper or
transparencies. If the light emitted from the light emitter of the sensor is reflected
by the media, the sensor judges that the media is plain paper.
SENSOR REGI
This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the Regi
Assy.(No paper state: Light enters the sensor)
Regi Clutch
Regi Sensor
CLUTCH ASSY REGI

The drive from the MOTOR-PH is transmitted to the ROLL-REGI METAL, and
paper is fed to the transfer section.
MOTOR-PH
This DC motor drives the MSI and the Rolls in the registration section.
P/H Motor
SENSOR FUSER IN
This reflective sensor detects that paper has come to just before the fusing section.
FUSER ASSY
This fixes the completed toner image that was transferred by the 2nd BTR on the
paper, and feeds the paper before and after fixing.
Fuser Exit Sensor (Inside the FUSER ASSY)
This sensor detects that paper has been ejected from the Fuser.
(No paper state : Shielding the sensor)
Pre Regi Clutch

OHP Sensor
Leg_06_050RA
Figure 2-38. Main Components of Registration & FUSER
104
Revision C
ADJUSTING THE LEADING EDGE OF THE PAPER

ROLL-REGI METAL
If paper is fed up to the toner transfer section from the tray or cassette without
adjusting the alignment of the paper, the image sometimes cannot be transferred at the
correct position. In the registration section, the leading edge of the paper is aligned to
the correct position by the "Roll Loop" system.
The paper, which has passed through the ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI, is pressed against
the stopped ROLL-REGI METAL by the "Roll Loop" system to make the paper
curved. When the ROLL-REGI METAL is rotated with the paper curved, the paper can
be fed from the ROLL-REGI METAL without displacement.
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
Leg_Sec06_051FB
Figure 2-39. Adjusting the leading edge of the paper
105
Revision C
2.2.4.3 500 Paper Feeder
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500

500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500
GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
MAIN FUNCTIONS
CONNECTOR (HARNESS-ASSY FEED1)
This is used for performing communications with the main unit and supplying
power to the Paper Feeder.
PWBA TRAY 500
Controls Motors and Sensors in the 500 Paper Feeder.
The Paper Cassette Tray can load 500 sheets of paper.
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 / GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 move crossways
of the paper feed direction, and true up the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
GUIDE END ASSY
The GUIDE END ASSY moves parallel to the paper feed direction, and true up
the top and bottom edges of sheets.
SOLENOID FEED
The SOLENOID FEED controls rotation of the Feed Gear. When the SOLENOID
FEED turns ON, the Feed Gear is unlocked and Feed Roll rotates. The
SOLENOID FEED is repeatedly turned ON/OFF each time a sheet is fed to
control the feeding timing.
The PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 locks on the bottom side when the 500 PAPER
CASETTE ASSY is drawn out of the Paper Feeder. When the 500 PAPER
CASETTE ASSY is inserted into the Paper Feeder, the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
is unlocked, and paper is pressed against the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 by the force
of the spring.
Leg_Sec06_052EB
GUIDE END ASSY
Figure 2-40. Main Components of 500 Paper Feeder (1)
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER

SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
SENSOR T/R
CONNECTOR
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
PWBA MOT
PWBA TRAY 500
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER

The MOTOR ASSY FEEDER drives the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL
ASSY TURN 500.
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
ROLL ASSY FEED 500

Paper that is pressed down by the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 is fed by the
frictional force of ROLL ASSY FEED 500. When the 500 PAPER CASETTE
ASSY is drawn out, the nip with the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 is released.
ROLL ASSY FEED 500

SOLENOID FEED
SENSOR NO PAPER
Leg_Sec06_053EB
Figure 2-41. Main Components of 500 Paper Feeder (2)
106
Revision C
ROLL ASSY TURN 500

Feeds the paper fed by the ROLL ASSY FEED 500 to the registration section.
SENSOR T/R
This sensor detects that paper is fed from the 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY.
(No paper state : Shielding the sensor)
SENSOR NO PAPERThe SENSOR NO PAPER detects the presence of paper.
When the printer runs out paper, the actuator of the sensor comes down by its own
weight to shield the sensor, and the no paper state is detected. (No paper state :
Shielding the sensor)
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR detects whether the Tray door is opened or closed.
LOCK MC TO FDR
Turn the levers on the left and right to firmly lock the 500 Paper Feeder to the
main unit.
ROLL ASSY FEED 500

SOLENOID FEED
Leg_Sec06_054FB
Figure 2-42. Operation of SOLENOID FEED
LOCK MC TO FDR
Leg_06_071RB
Figure 2-43. LOCK MC TO FDR
107
Revision C
2.2.5 Xerographic
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that consist of the
Xerographic.
The Xerographic is divided into the following four blocks based on the basic
configuration.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
Development
2nd BTR
FUSER ASSY
2nd BTR
Development
ROS ASSY
Leg_06_003RA
Figure 2-44. Xerographic Structure
108
Revision C
2.2.5.1 Main Functions

ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is the exposure unit that outputs
the laser beam to make the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. (From
here on, ROS ASSY is simply called "ROS.")
ROS consists of the components shown in Figure 2-45.
The PWBA LD (Laser Diode) converts the image data (electric signal), to
laser light ON/OFF signals.
PWBA LD constantly monitors the laser light intensity so that laser intensity
stabilizes to the appropriate level when making the electrostatic latent image.
This is called " APC (Automatic Power Control".
The Scanner Assy consists of a Scanner Motor that operates at a fixed speed
and a polygon mirror attached to the Motor's rotary shaft.
The laser beam emitted from the PWDA LD is irradiated on the polygon
mirror.
The polygon mirror has six reflecting mirror surfaces, and the angle of the
reflected laser beam changes by rotation of the Scanner Motor. This lets the
laser beam scan across on the Drum from side to side. The laser beam makes a
single line on the Drum with one reflective mirror.
The laser beam reflected by the polygon mirror passes through the lens,
mirror and window to reach the drum surface. The lens functions to
compensate for aberration, the mirror to ensure an optical path, and the
window to prevent the entry of foreign bodies into ROS.
Drum
Mirror SOS
PWBA LD
Window
Mirror
SOS Sensor
Lens COL
PWBA SOS
Lens CYL
Scanner Assy
Lens L1
Polygon Mirror
Leg_Sec06_008FA
Figure 2-45. Main Functional Components of ROS
The timing to start writing image data must synchronize exactly with the
beginning of laser scanning in order to properly form an electrostatic latent
image on the drum surface. When the SOS sensor on the PWBA SOS (Start
Of Scan) receives the laser beam, it converts the laser into an electric signal
(SOS signal) for detecting the initial position (start of scan reference point) for
scanning the various lines.
109
Revision C
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Photoconductor Unit consists of the Belt, Belt Cleaner, Drum, Drum Cleaner, 1st BTR,
and Waste Toner Boxes for each cleaner. And ANTENNA ASSY, SENSOR TR-0,
SENSOR ASSY ADC, SENSOR IBT RETRACT, SENSOR HUM & TEMP, MOT
ASSY P/R, IBT Brush Motor, and IBT Cleaner Retract Motor are installed inside the
printer for control of Photoconductor Unit operation.
Photoconductor Unit
The toner images of each color developed on the drum surface are transferred
to the IBT Belt one color at a time from 1st BTR, and the full color toner
image is formed by overlaying the four colors. The full color toner image is
transferred to paper by positively charging the paper with the 2nd BTR.
Toner remaining on the Belt surface is collected in the Waste Toner Box by
the Cleaning Blade and brush in the Belt Cleaner.
The Drum is made of conductive material (aluminum cylinder) coated with a

photosensitive material which becomes insulating material in darkness and
becomes conductive when it is subjected to light. The Drum Cleaner consists
of a Cleaning Blade and Waste Toner Box, and scrapes off toner remaining on
the drum surface by the Cleaning Blade that contacts with the drum.The
Waste Toner Box contains an actuator for SENSOR TNER FULL. This
actuator operates as the amount of collected waste toner increases to block
light entering the sensor to detect a full toner state.
The 1st BTR is a conductive roller, and is charged positively by the HVPS.
The 1st BTR contacts the back side of the belt to positively charge it.
Specific data relating to Photoconductor Unit is stored in CRUM XERO.
110
Revision C
IBT Brush Motor (DRIVE ASSY PRO)

IBT Brush Motor drives the brush in the Belt Cleaner.
Cleaning Sheet
Cleaner Brush
Cleaning Roll
IBT Cleaner Retract Motor (DRIVE ASSY PRO)

The IBT Cleaner Retract Motor drives the cam to make the Belt Cleaner to contact
with the IBT Belt.
SENSOR IBT RETRACT
The SENSOR IBT RETRACT detects the position of the cam for retracting the
Belt Cleaner.
MOT ASSY P/R
MOT ASSY P/R drives the Drum. The Motor is connected to the Drum via a
coupling.
SENSOR IBT RETRACT

1ST BTR
SENSOR TR-0
Sensor TR-0 detects the position of the Belt by reading the silver sticker on the
Belt surface outside the toner image formation area.
SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR ASSY ADC reads the toner patch densities on the Belt immediately
before secondary transfer, and converts the read densities to voltage values. These
voltage value are used for controlling toner density.
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
SENSOR HUM & TEMP detects the temperature and humidity inside the printer,
and converts these to voltage values. These voltage value are used for controlling
toner density.
ANTENNA ASSY
Belt
IBT Cleaner
Retract Motor
IBT Brush Motor
SENSOR TR-0
Drum Cleaner
MOT ASSY P/R
SENSOR HUM & TEMP

SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR TNER FULL
Drum
Leg_06_056RC
Figure 2-46. Main Functional Components of Photoconductor Unit
111
Revision C
SENSOR TNER FULL

SENSOR TNER FULL detects the full state of the Waste Toner Box. Toner
remaining on the drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade, and collected in the
Waste Toner Box. The Waste Toner Box is provided with an actuator for blocking
light entering the sensing element on the SENSOR TNER FULL. The actuator is
supported by a spring, and is designed to gradually fall by the weight of the toner.
When the actuator falls and blocks the SENSOR TNER FULL, the printer detects
that the Waste Toner Box is full.
Actuator
SENSOR TNER FULL
Leg_Sec06_068FB
Figure 2-47. SENSOR TONER FULL Mechanism
112
Revision C
DEVELOPMENT
TNR CRU
Developer
ANTENNA CTRG
The Rotary Developer consists of four (four colors) Toner Cartridges, ANTENNA
CTRG, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, and FRAME ASSY ROTARY. And Dispense
Clutch, MOT ASSY MAG, MOT ASSY ROT, and SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
are installed inside the printer for control of Rotary Developer operation.
MOT ASSY MAG
Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridge supplies toner and carrier. And it has a separate chamber for
collecting depleted carrier. This is called "Trickle Developing System".
Specific data relating to the Toner Cartridge is stored on the ANTENNA

CTRG. Writing of data to the ANTENNA CTRG is performed by wireless
communications.
MOT ASSY ROT
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
The HOUSING ASSY-DEVE is provided for each of the Y, M, C and K colors.
Each HOUSING ASSY-DEVE consists of a special Auger for stirring and
supplying Toner, a Magnet Roll for attracting magnetic carrier, forming the
development layer and supplying toner to the drum, and a Trimmer Blade for
making a uniform development layer on the Magnet Roll.
The Frame Assy-Rotary has holes for inserting the bosses of the HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE. To prevent inserting another color's by mistake, the location of the
holes are different from each other.
Dispense Clutch
SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI

Leg_06_058RA
Figure 2-48. Main Components of Development
Leg_Sec06_066FA
Figure 2-49. Structure of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent wrong insertion
113
Revision C
Dispense Clutch (Inside the MOT ASSY MAG)

The Dispense Clutch is provided to transmit the drive of MOT ASSY MAG to
rotate the Augers for supplying toner.
LATCH ROTARY
MOT ASSY MAG

The MOT ASSY MAG rotates the Magnet Roll in the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
MOT ASSY ROT
The MOT ASSY ROT rotates the FRAME ASSY ROTARY that holds the
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
The SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI detects the position of the Rotary
Developer to keep the Developer in the right position. The home position is about
10 degrees CW from the transfer position of the black toner Developer.
Acutuator
Front Cover
LATCH ROTARY
LATCH ROTARY is interlocked with movement of the Front Cover. When the
Front Cover is closed, LATCH ROTARY is pressed by the acutuator on the Front
Cover to lock the Rotary Developer. When the Front Cover is opened, LATCH
ROTARY returns to the release position to unlock the Rotary Developer.
Leg_06_059RB
Figure 2-50. LATCH ROTARY
114
Revision C
SECOND BTR
2ND BTR ASSY
The Second BTR (2ND BTR ASSY) is a conductive roll. It contacts the back of
paper (back of the side to be printed on) and a voltage is applied from the HVPS.
2nd BTR Retract Motor
Brings the BTR to contact the paper during 2nd transfer process, and moves the
BTR away from the paper after the transfer is finished. The motor drive rotates the
shaft and the eccentric cam attached on the shaft. The eccentric cam pushes the
lever for the BTR to bring it contact with the paper for transferring toner image on
the BTR to the paper. When the transferring is finished, the motor starts to rotate
again and the lever is returned to its original position by spring force, causing the
BTR to move away from the paper.
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
The position of BTR is detected by the SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. The shaft
with the cam for contacting/releasing BTR is provided with a Sensor actuator. The
non-contact state of BTR is detected by the actuator shielding the Sensor, and the
contact state of the BTR is detected when the Sensor is subjected to light.
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT

2ND BTR ASSY
MOT ASSY MICRO
Leg_Sec06_070FB
Figure 2-51. SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
Replacing the 2ND BTR is required when the life count (printed pages) exceeds
the prescribed value.
115
Revision C
FUSER ASSY
FUSER ASSY
The FUSER ASSY fixes the completed toner image transferred on the paper by
heat and pressure. It also functions to feed paper before and after fixing, and feed
paper to the eject tray or Duplex by switching the gate inside the Fuser.
The Fuser consists of the following parts:
Heat Roll
Belt
Heater Lamp
Exit Roll
Thermostat
Temp. Sensor
Exit Sensor
Exit Roll
Exit Sensor
Fuser Belt
Thermostat
Shuts off the circuit for the Heater Lamp when the temperature of the Heat Roll
exceeds a certain level.
Temp. Sensor (Contact type/Non-contact type)
Non-contact type: Monitors the surface temperature of the Heat Roll and turns the
Heat Roll on and off according to the temperature.
Contact type
: Monitors the surface temperature of the Heat Roll and shuts off
the power supply for the Heat Roll when an abnormal high
temperature is detected.
Heat Roll
Heater Lamp
Temp. Sensor
Thermostat
Leg_06_060RB
Figure 2-52. Main Components of FUSER
Replacing the FUSER ASSY is required when the life count (printed pages)
exceeds the prescribed value.
116
Revision C
2.2.5.2 Process control

To ensure a stable image quality, parameters relating to image generation need to be
corrected on a timely basis. Control of the entire print process including the correction
of parameters is called "process control."
TC (Toner Content) control
Toner patches for TC control are created on the Belt surface to measure the density
by the SENSOR ASSY ADC. According to the measured result, the amount of
toner supply, the amount of laser radiation, and the applied high voltage are
controlled. The execution sequence of the TC control is given on the next page.
1st BTR
SENSOR
ASSY ADC
BCR
Motor/
Clutch
ROS ASSY
Laser
Power
Control
LV/HVPS
Toner Dispense Control
Voltage/Current
Control
MCU PWB
Calculation of
compensation value
Life Counter
Temp.
Humidity
PWBA CRUM
Calculation of
parameters for
creating ADC toner
patches
Toner Density
SENSOR
HUM&TEMP
Leg_Sec06_064EB
Figure 2-53. Process control mechanism
117
Revision C
Execution Sequence of TC control

1.
Adjustment of SENSOR ASSY ADC

The SENSOR ASSY ADC has two LEDs, one for black and the other for color. To
read each color's patch density, the light emitted from the LED for black is
reflected directly to the Common light receiving element, and the light emitted
from the other LED for color does diffuse reflection and also received by the
element. The SENSOR ASSY ADC has a built-in solenoid which drives the
shutter of the detection window and the part for switching the optical path to the
reference plate.
2.
Adjustment according to surrounding environment and deterioration of parts

Printed image quality is adversely affected by temperature and humidity that
change daily, and deterioration of the IBT Belt, drum and other parts. For this
reason, parameters are corrected by capturing temperature/humidity data from
SENSOR HUM & TEMP and printer usage data from CRUM.
3.
Creation of toner patches

The output value of HVPS, laser light intensity value, and toner supply amount are
determined from the parameters calculated from various information sources, and
four toner patches, one for each color, are created on the Belt surface.
4.
Figure 2-54. Sensor ADC mechanism
Reading the toner patches

SENSOR ASSY ADC reads the density of the toner patches created on the Belt
surface, and compares the read values with ideal values. When there is a difference
between the read values and the ideal values, the parameters are recalculated and
toner patches are created again.When the printer judges that the toner patches
density is extremely low or high, it performs the following controls.
Admix control
When the patch density that is read by SENSOR ASSY ADC is extremely
low, the toner will be supplied into the Developer. This is called "Admix
control".
Sweep control
When the patch density that is read by SENSOR ASSY ADC is extremely
high, toner is transferred to the drum, and is scraped off in the Drum Cleaner
to forcibly discharge toner in the Developer. This is called "Sweep control".
118

5.
Adjustment during a print job

Toner in the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE is consumed as print jobs are processed. To
obtain consistent image quality during printing, toner must be supplied to the
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. The following control is performed to supply
appropriate amount of toner.
6.
Revision C
PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control)

The amount of toner that will be consumed is predicted from the count value
of the image data, that is input from the controller, to control the toner supply
amount to the Developer. The supply amount is controlled according to the
Toner Dispense time.
Adjustment after end of printing

When a total of 20 or more sheets have been printed, the image quality
adjustments in 1) to 4) are repeated after completion of printing.
Toner Cartridge
MOT ASSY MAG
Control of Toner Cartridge

7.
Near-End Detection
Counts the operating time of the Dispense Clutch that operates to supply toner
from the cartridges, and causes a Near-End warning when the counted time
exceeds the prescribed value.
8.
Detection of Empty status

The judgement of the Empty status of Toner Cartridges is made based on toner
patch density values (read by ADC sensor). When toner patch density is extremely
low, the printer executes forced supply of toner (Admix operation), and it judges
that the cartridge is empty if the density of toner patches created after the forced
supply is still low.
9.
Reset of the Empty status

The printer judges that the empty Toner Cartridge is replaced with a new one when
the power is turned off and back on, and the cover is opened and then closed
during the Empty status. Then the printer executes forced supply of toner from the
newly attached cartridge.
Dispense
Clutch
Auger
(MCU PWB)
Developer Assy
ROS ASSY
Leg_Sec06_062FB
Figure 2-55. PCDC Mechanism
119
Revision C
2.2.6 Electrical
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components making up the
Electrical system.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
MAIN FUNCTIONS
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
SWITCH 2BTR COVER

SWITCH ASSY TOP
PWBA MCU
PWBA MCU performs communication with the printer controller, and controls the
parts to perform printing operations.
LV/HVPS
LV/HVPS supplies +24 VDC, + 5VDC and +3.3 VDC to each of the parts from
the AC power supply, and supplies high voltage to the parts for transferring and
discharging.
PWBA HVPS
PWBA HVPS supplies high voltage to IBT Cleaner, 2nd BTR, and Cleaning
Sheet.
PWBA HVPS
PWBA HVPS supplies high voltage to IBT Cleaner, 2nd BTR, and Cleaning
Sheet.
PWB ASSY ROT
PWB ASSY ROT creates the pulse for the motors according to input signal from
the PWBA MCU and supplies the pulse signal to the motors.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
PWBA MCU
SWITCH-PH DOOR
Main Board
PWBA FUSER CONT
PWBA HVPS
PWB ASSY ROT
LV / HVPS
PWBA CRUM
Leg_06_061RA
Figure 2-56. Main Functional Components of Electrical
PWBA ESS
Converts print data transmitted via a network, USB, parallel port or etc., and
communicates with a host computer. The memory can be expanded up to 512 MB
with an optionally available additional memory.
OP PANEL
OP PANEL displays the printer status on the LCD or by LEDs. Printer operations
are performed by the buttons on OP PANEL.
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR detects whether the COVER FUSER is opened or
closed.
120
Revision C
SWITCH-PH DOOR
SWITCH-PH DOOR detects whether the CHUTE ASSY REAR is opened or
closed.
LATCH LEVER
FUSER ASSY
PWBA CRUM
This non-volatile memory saves printer information. (Non-Volatile Memory)
SWITCH 2BTR COVER
SWITCH 2BTR COVER detects whether the COVER-PR 2ND is opened or
closed.
SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH ASSY TOP is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER TOP is opened. Detection of opening/
closing is performed by detecting a change in voltage caused +24 VDC being
conversed to +3.3 VDD by the +24 VDC dividing circuit in MCU.
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
SWITCH-INLK FUSER is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER FUSER is opened.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FRONT is a switch to cut the +24VDC power supply for driving
motors and other parts when the COVER FRONT ASSY U is opened.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH

Leg_Sec06_072EB
Figure 2-57. FUSER LOCK SWITCH
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR detects whether the COVER FRONT ASSY is opened
or closed.
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
This printer is equipped with a FUSER LOCK SWITCH for detecting the
mounting state of the FUSER ASSY. When the FUSER ASSY is not locked or not
adequately locked by the latch lever, the FUSER LOCK SWITCH cuts the coil
power supply for the Fuser Lamp power supply relay inside PWBA FUSER
CONT. This causes the printer a service call error "E537 FUSER ASSY error" to
prevent the printer from operating.
121
Revision C
2.2.7 Operating Modes

The printer has the following six operating modes:
WARM UP mode
: The printer is warming up (until the printer is ready

for printing).
READY mode
: The printer has finished the warm-up and is ready

for printing.
PRINTING mode
: The printer is currently printing.
LIGHT SLEEP mode:FUSER is turned OFF to save power.ERROR mode:

DEEP SLEEP mode : In addition to the Fuser, +24VDC is also turned OFF to save
more power.
ERROR mode
: The printer has detected an error.

The following are not defined as the ERROR mode.
No paper
(when the printer detects there is no paper in the tray or cassette)
No paper tray
(when the printer detects there is no papercassette)
Warnings relating to service life of consumables
Figure 2-58. Operating Modes Overview
122
Revision C
2.2.8 Flying-start printing

This printer improves performance when printing full-color images by performing
flying-start printing.
Sequence
1.
The printer starts printing as soon as it finishes to receive Yellow data of one page.
2.
While the Yellow image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the
next data, Magenta, is received.
3.
While the Magenta image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the
next data, Cyan, is received.
4.
While the Cyan image is being developed and transferred to the IBT Belt, the next
data, Black, is received.
5.
When the Black image has been developed and transferred to the IBT Belt,
formation of the full color toner image is completed.
123
Revision C
2.3 Scanner Operating Principles
OTHERS
This section describes operating principles of the scanner and ADF of the AcuLaser
CX11/CX11F.
Magnet sensor
2.3.1 Scanner Mechanism Overview

The scanner is a flatbed scanner with 600 dpi optical resolution and supports up to A4
or Letter/Legal document size. The internal mechanism is broadly divided into two
parts; Carriage Unit that includes the light source and CCD sensor, and Carriage Drive
Mechanism.
CARRIAGE UNIT
CCD Sensor Board : Includes a Color CCD line sensor and a control circuit for
the sensor.
Light source
: White cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL)
Inverter Board
: Generates a voltage for the light source (Rises positive 24

VDC, and converts it to AC Voltage).
Mirror/Lens
: Leads the light reflected from document to the CCD sensor.
: Detects the open/close status of the document cover or

the ADF. It is attached on the backside of the upper
case of the scanner unit. When the sensor detects that
the document cover or the ADF is opened while the
scanner is in standby mode, the scanner lamp is turned
on and the Carriage Unit moves to its home position.
Carriage Lock Mechanism: Locks the Carriage Unit to protect it during

transportation. To lock the Carriage Unit, set the
sliding lock lever on the upper case of the scanner unit
to LOCK position.
C H E C K
P O IN T
Make sure to unlock the Carriage Unit (set the sliding lock
lever to unlock position) before turning the power on.
When the product should be transported for some reason,
move the Carriage Unit to the lock position using the control
panel Printer Engine Restrictions (p39) and then lock the
unit with the sliding lock lever.
CR Motor
Home Sensor
Timing Belt CR Guide Shaft (one-side support)
CARRIAGE DRIVE MECHANISM

CR Motor
: A four-phase pulse motor with 96 poles. Driven and

controlled by the driver circuit which uses PWM (pulsewidth modulation) current control system.
Carriage Mechanism:Moves the Carriage Unit to the sub scanning direction by

driving of the CR motor on the Carriage Shaft which
supports one side of the Carriage Unit.
Home sensor
Flag for detecting

home position
: A transparent sensor attached to the bottom of the Carriage

Unit. Detects the carriage home position by detecting the
flag located near the home position in the lower case of the
scanner unit.
Carriage Unit
Figure 2-59. Key Components of the Scanner Mechanism
Scanner Operating Principles
124
Revision C
2.3.1.1 Electric Circuit

As the scanner mechanism is powered and controlled directly by the main controller, it
does not have its own control circuit.
The power supply and the control signals to the scanner unit from the main controller
are as follows.
Power Supply
+24VDC (to drive the CR Motor and power the Inverter Circuit)
+12VDC and +5VDC (for the CCD Sensor)
+3.3VDC (for the Home Sensor and the Magnet Sensor)
Control Signals
CCD Sensor drive control
CR Motor drive control
ADF drive control
125
Revision C
2.3.2 ADF Mechanism Overview
SENSORS
The ADF of this product is designed to feed original document to be scanned by the
fixed CCD Sensor in the scanner unit and allows up to 50 sheets of document (when
the paper basic weight is 80g/m2) to be loaded and scanned automatically. The
documents are scanned in paper feed direction while they are fed by the ADF. The key
mechanisms of the ADF are as follows.
DOC Sensor
: Detects whether document is loaded on the document

tray or not. The document should be loaded with its
leading edge contacting with the guide for it, or the
sensor cannot detect the document.
AS Sensor
: Detects that document is transported to the Separation

Roller after starting scanning operation.The sensor turns
ON when it detects the leading edge of the document,
and turns OFF when it detects the posterior end of the
document. Scanning operation for the next document is
started if the DOC Sensor is ON when the AS Sensor
becomes OFF.
RS Sensor
: Detects whether document is on the Turning Roller or

not. Scanning document is started when the document is
transported by prescribed steps from when its leading
edge is detected by the RS Sensor.
ADF Cover Sensor
: Detects whether the ADF cover is opened or closed. The

sensor turns ON when the ADF Cover is opened and
stops the ADF Motor and turns off the clutch.
PAPER FEED MECHANISM

ADF Motor
: The four-phase pulse motor with 96 poles drives the paper

feed mechanism that transports document loaded on the
document tray to scanning section.
Clutch
: Switches on and off the Pick up Roller by transmitting or not

transmitting the ADF Motor drive. The clutch is turned on to
transmit the motor drive to the Pick up Roller when the DOC
sensor is ON at the point of starting scanning operation.
Pick up Roller
: Picks up document one by one and transports it to the next

mechanism.The roller lowers and contacts with document to
feed it by ADF Motor drive when scanning operation is
started with the DOC sensor ON. When the leading edge of
the document is detected by the RS Sensor, the roller moves
upward to return to its standby position.
Separation Roller
: Located under the Pick up Roller to prevent multi-feed of

documents.
Turning Roller
: Transports document fed by the Separation Roller to the

scanning position. This roller turns at a speed according to
the print resolution so that scanning in paper feed direction
can be performed properly.
Exit Roller
: Transports document that has been scanned and transported

by the Turning Roller to the eject tray. Also changes the
position of the document stopper lever inside the document
tray.
Document Width Sensor: Detects the positions of the side edge guides on the
document tray. The two Document Width Sensors,
located at the position different from each other, detects
document size (width) by combination action of them as
follows.
Table 2-4. Document Size Detection by Two Document Width Sensors
Edge Guide Position
B5 Sensor
LT Sensor
Letter size
OFF
ON
A4 size
OFF
OFF
B5 size
ON
OFF
126
Revision C
A magnet is attached on the bottom surface of the ADF Unit. The Magnet Sensor
installed in the scanner unit detects the ADF open/close status by detecting the position
of the magnet.
ADF Close Status
The sensor turns OFF upon detecting that the magnet is in close proximity to the
sensor.
Turning Roller
RS Sensor
Separation Roller
AS Sensor
DOC Sensor
Pick up Roller
ADF Open Status

The sensor turns ON upon detecting that the magnet moved away from the sensor.
When the sensor turns ON during the scanner is in standby mode, the lamp is turned on
and the Carriage Unit moves to its home position after scanner initialization operation.
ADF Open Status: The product judges that scanning operation using the document
table will be performed.
Document Stopper Lever
Exit Roller
Carriage (Scanner)
Figure 2-60. Key Components of the ADF Mechanism
127
CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Revision C
3.1 Overview
3.1.2 Checking Installation Status
For efficient troubleshooting, verify the condition of the trouble carefully using FIP
(Fault Isolation Procedures) with reference to Chapter7 Wiring Connection Diagrams
(p.574) and Chapter2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p.77).
Before starting troubleshooting, make sure that the following conditions are all met.
1.
The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits. Measure the
voltage at the wall socket.)
3.1.1 Procedure for troubleshooting
2.
The POWER CORD must be free from damage, short circuit or brokenage, or
miswiring in the POWER CORD.
Perform troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart.
3.
The printer must be grounded properly.
4.
The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to too high or
low temperature, too high or low humidity, or abrupt temperature change.
5.
The printer should not be located near waterworks, near humidifiers, near heaters
or near flames, in a dusty atmosphere, or in a place where the printer can be
exposed to air blasts from an air conditioner.
6.
The printer should not be located in a place where volatile or inflammable gases
are produced.
7.
The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to direct
sunlight.
8.
The printer must be located in a well-ventilated place.
9.
The printer must be placed on a solid, stable and flat surface.
Verify the condition

of the trouble
Preliminary Check
Start
Execute FIP
Chapter2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES (p.77)

Chapter7 Wiring Connection Diagrams (p.574)
10. The paper used must conform to the specifications.

(Standard paper is recommended.)
11. There should be no errors in handling of the printer.
Check if the trouble

returns to normal
Preventative
maintenance
12. The Regular Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their
respective specified number of sheets has been printed.
* Clean the Feed Roller. And check if there is any
other part which is likely to cause another error.
Finish
Figure 3-1. Procedure for troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Overview
129
Revision C
3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work
4.
When touching any hot surfaces, take care not to burn yourself.
1.
5.
Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from your body.
6.
When replacing the PWBA MCU in accordance with the FIP, be sure to perform
MCU DATA Backup and MCU DATA Restore operations to maintain the set
of information specific to the subject engine.
Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work except
when turning power ON is needed.
W A R N IN G
2.
C A U T IO N
Refer to 4.2.11.5 PWBA MCU (p435) for all the details about the
PWBA MCU replacement.
C A U T IO N
Extra caution is required when performing work with the scanner

or the ADF opened, as the product becomes unstable and may easily
fall over.
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be sure to disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/
J601), except when its connection is required.
W A R N IN G
3.
Never touch any live parts unnecessarily when the power is on.
The power switch/inlet part of the LVPS is alive even when the
power switch is turned OFF. Take care not to touch any live parts.
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, there is a danger
of the laser beam being emitted from ROS ASSY. Be sure to
disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/J601), except when its
connection is required.
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be careful of a high voltage from HVPS.
W A R N IN G
If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, never touch
HVPS and any other high voltage output part as a high voltage may
be output from HVPS.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Overview
130
Revision C
3.2 Errors/Warnings Display
PRINTER-DEPENDENT ERROR
As this product is an all in one printer, it is necessary to figure out which function has
caused the error or the warning displayed on the panel. This section explains principal
erros and warnings by each mechanism and function. See references for details on
errors and warnings.
Table 3-2. Printer-Dependent Error

Panel Message
Service Req Eggg
Check Transparency
SYSTEM-DEPENDENT ERROR
Papaer Jam WWWWW
Table 3-1. System-Dependent Error

Panel Message
Service Req Cffff
Irregular Density
Description
Engine related service request
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p149)

Error list related to paper jam (p146)
Error list related to paper jam (p146)
Other errors and warnings (p147)
Remove Photoconductor
Description
Install uuuu TnrCart
Controller related service request

3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p149)
Wrong Toner
Optional RAM Error
Toner Cart Error uuuu
Invalid N/W Module
Install Photoconductor
Service Req C2010
Fax uninstalled (for fax model only)
Wrong Photoconductor
Service Req C2011
ADF uninstalled (for fax model only) (p.287)
Photoconductor Trouble
Service Req C2012
N3R Asic Error
Replace Toner uuuu
ROM writing error
Failed to update the data
Replace Photoconductor
Fax Error
Start up initialization could not be performed nomally,

however, the product can recover from the error.
wwwww open
Scanner Error
Start up initialization could not be performed nomally,

however, the product can recover from the error.
(Motor error, Scanner error)
Need more Memory

Print Overrun
Invalid Data
uuuu Toner Low
Worn Photoconductor

Worn Fuser
TROUBLESHOOTING
Errors/Warnings Display
131
Revision C
SCANNER-DEPENDENT ERROR
COPY MODE-DEPENDENT ERROR
Table 3-3. Scanner-Dependent Error

Panel Message
Table 3-5. Copy mode-Dependent Error
Description
Scanner cover open error
Panel Message
(p.286)
PC connection failed
Document Error
Description
For counterfeit prevention
The computer is not connected directly to the

product.
Reauired application has not been installed.
Net connection failed

ADF Jam
(p.287)
Release Cariage Lock
(p.286)
FAX-DEPENDENT ERROR
Table 3-4. Fax-Dependent Error
Panel Message
Description
Fax error
Fax unit failure. (p.290)
Set Document to ADF
When Legal is selected by Fax mode (p.290)
Fax Communication Error
An error occurred during transitting/receiving faxes.

(p.290)
No Report Print Info.
(p.290)
Cannot Send when Receiving
Fax cannot be transmit during Fax reception. (p.290)
Unable to Transmit Color Fax
At the time of color Fax transmission, if the telephone

line is used, it decides that color transmission is
impossible. For this reason, transmitting does not
become " Cannot Send when Receiving ".
Cannot Fax cause of Power Off Report Transmitting a fax is attempted during the product is
printing out a power off report. (p.290)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Errors/Warnings Display
132
Revision C
3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode
3.3.1 Self diagnosis
To enter the MFP maintenance mode, hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down] and
[Right] buttons, and turn the printer on. There are two items in the MFP maintenance
mode; self-diagnosis and fax maintenance. Self diagnosis confirms error status, on the
other hand, fax maintenance provides maintenance for the fax unit.
In self diagnosis mode, the product automatically makes the diagnosis of each part
(scanner, printer, fax, panel, and B unit) and displays the result on the panel.
Procedures and details on the diagnosis are described below.
PROCEDURES TO ACCESS THE SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
Menu levels of the MFP maintenance mode is shown below.

1.
Hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down], and [Right] buttons and turn the
printer on. When the screen shown below appears, select (highlight) "Self
Diagnosis" and press [Start] to enter the screen for selecting tha part to be
diagnosed.
[MFP Maintenance Mode Initial Screen]
2.
The [Up] and [Down] buttons allow you to select (highlight) the part to be
diagnosed, then press [Right] to start the self diagnosis.
Upward (downward) arrow on the left of the item indicates that there are more
items on the topside (downside) to be displayed. In this case, press the [Up] and
[Down] buttons to scroll the display.
[Self Diagnosis Initial Screen]
TROUBLESHOOTING
133
Revision C
3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis
DETAILS ON SELF DIAGNOSIS ITEMS
The error that is currently happening in the scanner section and the status concerning
the ADF is displayed on the panel. When you select "Scanner Unit" and press [Right],
the result is displayed as shown below after "Running" is displayed for a while.
Diagnosed items and the descriptions are shown in Table 3-6.
Details on self diagnosis classified by item are described below.
Scanner
: 3.3.1.2 Scanner Self Diagnosis (p134)
Printer
: 3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis (p134)
Fax
: 3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis (p135)
Panel
: 3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis (p135)
B Unit
: 3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis (p136)

Diagnosed as Normal
3.3.1.1 Printer Self Diagnosis

The error code of the engine related service call error that is currently happening in the
printer section is displayed on the panel. The panel also displays if the RTC
malfunction is emerging or not. For descriptions of the service request errors, refer to
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request (p149).
When you select Printer Unit and press [Right], the result is shown as described
below after Running is displayed for a while.
Displays engine related error code
Diagnosed as Normal
Diagnosed as Abnormal
When the ADF is not installed
Note : Once displayed, press [Left] to return to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial
screen).
When the ADF is not installed, the diagnosis for "ADF cover open", "ADF jam", and
"ADF paper detection" are replaced with "-"(hyphen).
Table 3-6. Scanner Self Diagnosis Items

Displayed
Characters
(1 byte)
Displayed Characters
(1 byte)
Description
Correct
OK (Normal)
NG (Abnormal)
Origin Correction
(The difference between the actual origin position
detected when correcting it and the origin
position specified by spec is 2 mm or more.)
Warm up
Same as above
Warm up (Unable to warm up)
Motor
Same as above
Motor (motor driving failure)
Cover
OPEN (Cover is open) ADF cover open (ADF cover is open)

CLOSE (Cover is
closed)
Jam
NONE (Undetected)
ON (Detected)
ADF paper jam (ADF jam error occurred)
Paper
NONE (No paper)

ON (Paper present)
ADF paper detection

(Paper is loaded on the ADF)
Diagnosed as Normal
(Base Model)
screen).
As the base model is not equipped with the RTC, the diagnosis for the RTC is replaced
with - (hyphen).
Note : The diagnoses for ADF cover open, ADF jam, and ADF paper detection are
performed every one second and the displayed results are updated each time the
diagnoses are made. As for Origin correction, Warm up, and Motor, the statuses
diagnosed during start-up operation are always displayed.
TROUBLESHOOTING
134
Revision C
Diagnosed button names are displayed as shown in the table below.
3.3.1.3 Fax Self Diagnosis

All the modules on the fax unit listed below are checked if they are operating normally
and the results are displayed on the panel. When any abnormality is detected, NG is
displayed with an error code. For details on the error code, refer to 3.6.1
Troubleshooting by Panel Message (p290).
Image memory
Gate array
Modem
Flash memory
When you select Fax Unit and press [Right], the result is displayed as shown below
after Running is displayed for a while.
Table 3-7. Button Names Displayed in Panel Self Diagnosis

Button Name
Displayed Button Name (2 byte)
Copy
COPY
Fax
FAX
Scan
SCAN
Setup
SETUP
One Touch Dial A
ONE TOUCH A
One Touch Dial B
ONE TOUCH B
One Touch Dial C
ONE TOUCH C
Advanced/Menu
MENU
Reset
RESET
Up
UP
Numbers that indicate

the detected error
Down
DOWN
Left
LEFT
screen).
Right
RIGHT
Speed Dial
SPEED DIAL
Pause/Redial
REDIAL
Cancel
CANCEL
Asterisk
Hash
Numeric keypad
Numbers that correspond to the button

pressed
B/W Start
B&W START
Color start
COLOR START
Diagnosed as Normal
3.3.1.4 Panel Self Diagnosis

Operations for all the buttons on the control panel can be checked. Select the Panel
Unit and press the [Right] button. Within six seconds after the screen below is
displayed, press the button you wish to check. If the pressed button is working
normally, the button name is displayed with 1-byte alpha numeric characters as shown
in Table 3-7.
[Right] Button
Diagnosed as Normal
When the Button is Released
Note : The button name is displayed while pressing the button, and disappears when the button
is released. If no button is pressed for more than six seconds, the screen automatically
returns to the previous screen (Self Diagnosis initial screen).
TROUBLESHOOTING
135
Revision C
3.3.1.5 B Unit Self Diagnosis

B unit (ASIC for counterfeiting prevention) is checked if it is operating normally, and
the result is displayed on the panel.When you select B Unit and press [Right], the
diagnosed result; OK or NG will appear after Running is displayed for a whole.
Diagnosed as Normal
screen).
TROUBLESHOOTING
136
Revision C
3.3.2 Fax Maintenance
DETAILS ON FAX MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Fax Maintenance is provided for controlling memory including destination addresses

and for checking if there are any problems with the fax unit. Procedures to access the
items of the Fax Maintenance are shown below.
Details on each item in the Fax Maintenance menu are described in the following
sections.
Memory Clear
: 3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
PROCEDURES TO ACCESS THE FAX MAINTENANCE
Memory Check
: 3.3.2.2 Memory Check (p139)
1.
Parameter Check : 3.3.2.3 Parameter Check (p140)
Module Check
: 3.3.2.4 Module Check (p141)
Signal Check
: 3.3.2.5 Signal Check (p142)
Hold down the [Color Start], [Up], [Down], and [Right] buttons and turn the
printer on. Select (highlight) Fax Maintenance and press [Right] to enter the Fax
Maintenance menu screen.
C A U T IO N
Some of the functions provided in the Fax Maintenance menu

involve fax basic operation settings. Improper operation or setting
using the functions may cause fax malfunction.
Do not change the settings unless instructed to do so, or need for
doing it arises.
[MFP Maintenance Mode Initial Screen]
2.
Select (Highlight) a target item in the Fax Maintenance menu, and press [Right] to
enter the menu screen of the selected item.
[Fax Maintenance Initial Screen]
TROUBLESHOOTING
137
Revision C
3.3.2.1 Memory Clear

Address memory used for the speed dials and other information memory concerning fax transmission/reception can be cleared at once. Six items are provided and memory areas to
be cleared are preset by the items as shown in Table 3-8.
When you select Memory Clear and press [Right], the Memory Clear menu screen as shown below will be displayed. Select a target item and press [Right] to clear the memory
areas. Be sure to check which memory areas will be cleared by the selected item with reference to Table 3-8 before executing the operation.
Table 3-8. Memory Areas to be Cleared by Item in Memory Clear

Item
(Memory Area Category)
Panel Indication
Speed Dial
Group Dial
One Touch Dial
Personal Number/Name
Communication Report
Memorized Unfinished
Sending Job Info
Print Data Info
Receiving Job Info
System Counter
System Error
History
Internal Error
History
System Parameter
ALL
All area
Fax user
User area
Fax system
System area
Fax system counter
Counter area
Fax error history
Error area
Fax system parameter
Parameter area
Note O : Cleared
X : Cannot be cleared
Example of Memory Clear Screen
Processing All area Clear
Clearing User area

Completed
When Error Occurs (Failed

to clear System area)
Note : OK is displayed when the process is completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the error when failed to complete the process. Once the process is over, press [Stop]
to return to the previous screen (Memory Clear menu screen).
TROUBLESHOOTING
138
Revision C
3.3.2.2 Memory Check
MEMORY CHECK: WRITE
Memory contents of the fax unit can be displayed (Read) on the panel and can be
changed (Write).
When you select Memory Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will
be displayed. Select (Highlight) either Read or Write and press [Right] to proceed to
the entry screen.
When an address is input with the numeric keypad, current setting values in the address
are displayed beside CURRENT. When new setting values are entered beside
NEW, overwrite process is executed. OK is displayed when the process is
completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the error when
failed to overwrite the specified memory area.
Memory Check: Example of the Write Screen
Current Setting Values
Numbers that indicate

error contents
MEMORY CHECK: READ

When an address in the memory is input with the numeric keypad, 64-byte data is
retrieved from the specified address. If the data is read properly, last four digits of the
specified address and 4 byte of data set to the address are displayed in a line. When
failed to read the memory, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the error.
When Address is Entered
Display of Current Setting
Enter new setting
When Failed to Read

Current Data
Numbers that indicate the error
Memory Check: Example of the Read Screen
When New Setting is Entered
When Address is Entered
Display of the Read Data
When Failed to Read Data
Overwriting Completed
Normally
When Failed to Overwrite
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the Memory Write, the display returns to the
previous screen (Memory Write initial screen).
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the Memory Read, the display returns to the
previous screen (Memory Check initial screen).
TROUBLESHOOTING
139
Revision C
3.3.2.3 Parameter Check
PARAMETER CHECK: WRITE
Specifies main and sub codes of the system parameter for the fax unit, and reads/writes
the parameter values.
When you select Parameter Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will
be displayed.Select (Highlight) either Read or Write and press [Right] to proceed to the
entry screen.
When main/sub codes of the parameter and a new setting are entered with the
numeric keypad, the overwriting process is started. OK is displayed when the
process is completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers that indicate the
error when failed to overwrite.
Parameter Check: Example of the Write Screen
Enter new setting
When Main/Sub Codes and

New Setting is Entered
PARAMETER CHECK: READ

When the main and the sub codes of the parameter to be read are entered with the
numeric keypad, the current setting of the parameter are displayed. OK and
readout data are displayed when the process is completed normally, NG is
displayed with numbers that indicate the error when failed to read the data.
When Overwriting
Completed
When Failed to
Overwrite
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the parameter check (Write), the display
returns to the previous screen (Parameter Check initial screen).
Parameter Check: Example of the Read Screen

Current Setting
When Main/Sub Codes

are Entered
Display of Current Setting
Numbers that
indicate the error
When Failed to Read Data
Note : When the [Stop] button is pressed during the parameter check (Read), the display
returns to the previous screen (Parameter Check initial screen).
TROUBLESHOOTING
140
Revision C
3.3.2.4 Module Check

Modules on the fax unit is checked individually or all at once if they are operating
normally, and the result is displayed on the panel.
When you select Module Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will be
displayed. Select (Highlight) the module you wish to check and press [Right] to start
the diagnosis.
Example of the Module Check Screen

Numbers that indicate the error
Module Check in Progress
Diagnosed as Normal
Note : Once the process is over, press [Stop] to return to the previous screen (Module Check
initial screen).
TROUBLESHOOTING
141
Revision C
Example of Signal Check Result Screen
3.3.2.5 Signal Check

C A U T IO N
This function is intended for use in the paticular purpose; filing

application for the use of the fax machine, machine test or license
test with a common carrier present.
Relay ON/OFF test and the signal transmission test of the fax unit are performed by
entering the check code and the parameter with the numeric keypad.
When you select Signal Check and press [Right], the screen as shown below will be
displayed. Select (Highlight) Parameter and press [Right] to proceed to the entry
screen. When the check is in progress, Running is displayed on the panel. OK is
displayed when the process is completed normally, NG is displayed with numbers
that indicate the error when failed to perform the process.
When a Check Code and

Setting is Entered
Signal Check in
Progress
When the Check Result

is Normal
When the Check Result

is Abnormal
Note : For items other than Sub Code=103 (relay 1-2 setting) and Sub Code=104 (phone line
initialization), the process is continued in the fax unit until the [Stop] button is pressed.
Press the [Stop] button to cancel the process. Once the process is over, press [Stop]
button to return to the Fax Maintenance initial screen.
TROUBLESHOOTING
142
Revision C
6. When, for example, P/J1 P/J2 is indicated in FIP for the voltage
check, check for the all relating terminals between P/J1 and P/J2 with
reference to Chapter7 Wiring Connection Diagrams (p.574).
3.4 Printer
3.4.1 Notes on Using FIP
1. The troubleshooting method described here assumes that there is no
malfunction in the printer controller (PWBA ESS). If you cannot fix a
problem even by following the troubleshooting procedure, replace the
printer controller with a normal one and then follow the same procedure. If
you cannot recover the printer from the trouble even with the printer
controller replaced, replace the Possible parts that caused the error
shown in FIP and related parts with new ones in order one by one, and
repeat operation checks.
2. Some normal parts such as MCU, LV/HVPS, FUSER ASSY, 2ND BTR
ASSY may be required as FIP troubleshooting tools to identify the cause of
the trouble. So, you need to have those spares in advance.
3. Be sure to unplug the POWER CORD before starting troubleshooting work
except when turning power ON is needed. Never touch any live parts
unnecessarily with the power cord connected.
4. Conventions used to represent connectors are as follows:
P/J12 = The connector (P/J12) in a connected state.
P12 = The plug side in connector (P/J12) disconnected state.
(except when the jack is directly mounted on the board)
J12 = The jack side in connector (P/J12) disconnected state.
(except when the jack is directly mounted on the board)
5. When, for example, P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN is indicated in FIP for the
voltage check, set the plus side of a measuring tool to 2PIN on P/J1
and set the minus side of the tool to 4PIN on P/J3.
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. Taking P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN as an example, the minus side P/J34PIN is AG (Analog Ground), SG (Signal Ground), or RTN (Return).
Therefore it is possible to connect to another AG, SG, or RTN pin as the
minus side instead of P/J3-4PIN. Before doing so, check that each AGto-AG, SG-to-SG, or RTN-to-RTN has continuity properly. Be careful not
to connect to a wrong pin since the level of AG, SG and RTN are different
from each other.
8. When measuring the voltage, perform measurement with the
Photoconductor Unit, 2ND BTR ASSY, and paper cassette loaded, covers
closed, and power ON.
9. All voltage values given in the FIP are approximate values. So actually
measured values should not be completely the same as those given in the
FIP.
10. Note that FIP does not provide any description on removal of parts which
are supposed to be removed to remove the target part, and the procedures.
11. Any parts listed in Possible parts that caused the error in the FIP are
regarded as the source of the trouble and signifies that the parts or the
assemblies (HIGH ASSY) containing those parts should be replaced with
normal ones one by one, and checking should be repeated.
12. In the FIP, the optional paper feeder of the printer is called Tray1.
13. FIP may contain descriptions that distinguish between certain
specifications. Be sure to follow such instructions properly to remedy the
problem.
Printer
143
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Yes
Yes
*3 : The PLC sequence creates and reads ADC

patches to adjust toner and image density.
*2 : By ADC TC correction, the target density

value of TC is being corrected according
to the developing machine drive time.
No
Ready (ready to print)
Yes
When IBT CLN Fail occurs

Go to FIP-1.48
Error recovery processing

(See List of Errors and Warnings)
When IBT CLN Fail occurs

Go to FIP-1.52
Heater red-hot
Fuser warm-up
(time out within 45 secs)
Yes
Leg_Sec001_031FA
Total 37 to 840 seconds

(depending on ambient environment)
End of cleaning
and FUSER warm-up?
IBT Brush Motor operation
BTR/IBT cleaning
(11 secs)
No
Detected value
of temperature sensor of a fixed
difference with value at previous
printing?
No
Fuser temperature
at Power ON lower than the Fuser
temperature threshold
value?
IBT Brush Motor operation
No
Error displayed?
CRUM check and ADC TC target

density value correction*2(16 secs)
MOT ASSY ROT operation*1
Rotary operation check and

Home Position correction
(8 secs)
*1 : Rotary rotates 360 plus a little more during

Home Position correction and 720 during
execution of the PLC sequence.
MOT ASSY ROT operation*1
PLC sequence*3
(30 secs or more)
When Deve Home position

Sensor Error occurs:
Go to FIP-1.41
When an ID Error occurs:

XERO Go to FIP-1.9
Y Toner Go to FIP-1.13
M Toner Go to FIP-1.17
C Toner Go to FIP-1.21
K Toner Go to FIP-1.25
When Deve Home Position

Sensor Error occurs:
Go to FIP-1.41
Power ON

Revision C
3.4.2 Warming-Up Flowchart at Power-ON
The following flowchart (outline) shows the printers warm-up operation, from power-on to when the printer is ready to print.
Figure 3-2. Warming-up flowchart at power-on
144
3.4.3 FIP
Revision C
3.4.3.1 FIP Procedure
FIP is provided as the first step to identify the cause of trouble. FIP is a guide for
proceeding with troubleshooting while checking error codes and for various other
symptoms of trouble.
Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble.

Was the operator operating the printer correctly?
N
Y
Teach the operator the right way.
Is an error code displayed on the panel?

Y
N
Is the printer jammed?
N
Is it an image quality problem?

N
Is the printer making abnormal noise?

N
Perform troubleshooting with reference to

7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams
Fix the trouble with reference to
3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble (p.281).
Fix the trouble with reference to
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble (p.249).
Ask the operator again to verify the condition at the time of jamming, and
execute a print job in the same conditions. Is the printer jammed again?
N
Y
Recheck the trouble condition, and execute preventive maintenance
by using 7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams (p.574), doing proper
adjustment when disassembled, or according to various information.
Write the Jam code down.
Fix the trouble with reference to the FIP.
Have the F/W version of main controller and mechanical controller been updated ?
Fix the trouble with reference to the FIP.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
145
Revision C
3.4.4 FIP by Message Display
Table 3-9. List of Paper Jam Error

Panel
Message
3.4.4.1 List of Errors and Warnings
Jam LC, G
ERROR LIST RELATED TO PAPER JAM
Jam MP, E
Jam E
FUSER ASSY
EXIT SENSOR (Sensor in Fuser)
Jam E
Jammed
Location
Description
See FIP
(1)
The SENSOR T/R did not turn ON within the specified

time from SOLENOID FEED - ON.
26
(p.178)
(2)
The SENSOR REGI did not turn ON within the

specified time from SOLENOID PICK UP - ON.
27
(p.181)
(3)
The SENSOR REGI did not turn ON within the

specified time from SENSOR T/R - ON.
28
(p.183)
(3)(4)
The SENSOR REGI did not turn OFF within the

specified time from CLUTCH ASSY REGI - ON.
29
(p.186)
(4)(5)
The Exit Sensor did not turn ON and SENSOR FUSER

30
IN turned OFF within the specified time from CLUTCH
(p.188)
ASSY REGI - ON.
(4)(5)
The Exit Sensor did not turn ON and SENSOR FUSER

IN turned ON within the specified time from CLUTCH
ASSY REGI - ON.
31
(p.192)
(3)
SENSOR OHP detected media other than OHP at the

OHP setting or detected OHP at a setting other than
OHP.
32
(p.196)
(4)
The SENSOR FUSER IN did not turn ON within the

specified time from CLUTCH ASSY REGI - ON.
33
(p.197)
Exit Sensor did not turn OFF within the specified time
34
(p.200)
Jam E, F
SENSOR FUSER IN
Jam C, E, F
2ND BTR ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
Check
Transparency
Jam E
SENSOR OHP
Jam C
SENSOR REGI
SOLENOID PICK UP
SENSOR T/R
Jam LC, G
Jam E
SOLENOID FEED
Jam E
Jam C, E, F
Leg_001_040FA
Figure 3-3. Jammed Location
TROUBLESHOOTING
Jam C
Printer
(4)(5)(6) from SENSOR REGI - OFF.

---
SENSOR T/R was ON at Power ON or when I/L was

closed. (Static Jam)
---
SENSOR OHP was ON at Power ON or when I/L was

---
SENSOR REGI was ON at Power ON or when I/L was

---
SENSOR FUSER IN was ON at Power ON or when I/L

was closed. (Static Jam)
---
Exit Sensor was ON at Power ON or when I/L was

35
(p.202)
146
Revision C
OTHER ERRORS AND WARNINGS

Table 3-10. List of Errors and Warnings
Warning
Class
Panel Message
Y Toner Low
Error LED
Description
See FIP
---
The toner supply time of the Yellow toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
64 (p.237)
M Toner Low
---
The toner supply time of the Magenta toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
65 (p.238)
C Toner Low
---
The toner supply time of the Cyan toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
66 (p.239)
K Toner Low
---
The toner supply time of the Black toner cartridge has reached the preset time. The printer, however, can be operated.
67 (p.240)
---
SENSOR TNER FULL of the Waste Toner Box has detected a toner full state. The printer, however, can operated.
68 (p.241)
---
The number of drum rotations has exceeded the specified value. The printer, however, can be operated.
69 (p.242)
Install Y TnrCart
ON
The Yellow toner cartridge is not mounted.
1 (p.153)
Install M TnrCart
ON
The Magenta toner cartridge is not mounted.
2 (p.154)
Install C TnrCart
ON
The Cyan toner cartridge is not mounted.
3 (p.155)
Install K TnrCart
ON
The Black toner cartridge is not mounted.
4 (p.156)
Install Photocondctr
ON
The photoconductor unit is not mounted.
5 (p.157)
A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA ASSY (CRUM XERO).
6 (p.158)
An error occurred when writing data to ANTENNA ASSY (CRUM XERO).
7 (p.159)
A photoconductor unit with a memory of different specification device is attached.
8 (p.160)
A drum cartridge of a different specification is attached.
9 (p.161)
A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG).
10 (p.162)
An error occurred when writing data to ANTENNA CTRG (CRUM CTRIG).
11 (p.163)
A Yellow toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
12 (p.164)
A Yellow toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
13 (p.165)
Worn Photoconductor
Error
Photocondctr Trouble
ON
Wrong Photocondctr
ON
TonerCart Error Y
ON
Wrong Toner Y
TROUBLESHOOTING
ON
Printer
147
Revision C
Table 3-10. List of Errors and Warnings
Class
Panel Message
Error LED
TonerCart Error M
ON
Wrong Toner M
ON
TonerCart Error C
ON
Wrong Toner C
ON
TonerCart Error K
Error
ON
Description
See FIP
14 (p.166)
15 (p.167)
A Magenta toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
16 (p.168)
A Magenta toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
17 (p.169)
18 (p.170)
19 (p.171)
A Cyan toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
20 (p.172)
A Cyan toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
21 (p.173)
22 (p.174)
23 (p.175)
A Black toner cartridge with a memory of different specification device is attached.
24 (p.176)
25 (p.177)
Wrong Toner K
ON
A Black toner cartridge of a different specification is attached.
Irregular Density
ON
The Coverage for 500msec of the image exceeds the limit.
45 (p.215)
Replace Toner Y
ON
It is time to replace the Yellow toner cartridge.
53 (p.225)
Replace Toner M
ON
It is time to replace the Magenta toner cartridge.
54 (p.226)
Replace Toner C
ON
It is time to replace the Cyan toner cartridge.
55 (p.227)
Replace Toner K
ON
It is time to replace the Black toner cartridge.
56 (p.228)
Replace Photocondctr
ON
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
57 (p.229)
The number of drum rotations has exceeded the specified value.
69 (p.242)
58 (p.230)
Blink
A Open
ON
COVER FRONT ASSY U is open.
E Open
ON
CHUTE ASSY-REAR is open.
59 (p.231)
F Open
ON
CHUTE ASSY-FSR is open.
60 (p.232)
C Open
ON
COVER FUSER is open.
61 (p.233)
G Open
ON
The Cover of Tray 1 is open.
62 (p.234)
B Open
ON
COVER TOP is open.
63 (p.235)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
148
Revision C
3.4.4.2 List of Service Request

Table 3-11. List of Service Request
Class
Panel Messaeg
Service Req E510
Description
ROS Motor Failure
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from SOS Sensor in ROS within the specified time.
Service Req E511
TR0 Failure
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from SENSOR TR-0 (TR0 Sensor) at the specified timing.
Service Req E513
NVRAM Error
Engine Related (E)
PAGE Timeout
The PAGEC/PAGE signal was not received within 60sec after transmitting PFA.
Service Req E517
Communication Error Feeder

A communication error occurred between PWBA MCU and Feeder.
Service Req E520
BTR 2 Advance Error

The 2nd BTR Retract Sensor does not turn ON within the specified time.
Service Req E521
BTR 2 Error
The input of 2nd BTR Retract Sensor does not change when 2nd BTR is initialized.
Service Req E524
Low Density
The output value of SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) is below the specified value.
Service Req E525
High Density
The output value of SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) exceeds the specified value.
Service Req E526
ADC Contamination
39 (p.206)
37 (p.204)
36 (p.203)
47 (p.217)
46 (p.216)
44 (p.213)
43 (p.211)
42 (p.210)
SENSOR ASSY ADC (ADC Sensor) error
TROUBLESHOOTING
40 (p.208)
38 (p.205)
An error occurred in NVRAM on PWBA MCU.

Service Req E514
See FIP
Printer
149
Revision C
Class
Panel Messaeg
Service Req E527
Description
Deve Home Position Sensor Error
PWBA MCU could not receive signals output from Rotary Home Position Sensor within the specified time after rotation of Rotary
Developer.
Service Req E530
Humidity Sensor Error

When the Input from SENSOR HUM & TEMP is out of specification.
Service Req E533
Temp Sensor Error

SENSOR HUM & TEMP detected a temperature below -7C or over 55C.
Engine Related (E)
Service Req E537
IBT CLN Fail

SENSOR IBT RETRACT cannot detect Advance/Retract of CAM ASSY-IBT CL.
Service Req E547
Feed Motor Failure

DRIVE ASSY FEED (Feed Motor) of the Feeder is not rotating at the specified speed.
Service Req E998
Engine Communication Error

Acommunication error between the controller and the PWBA MCU via the video I/F occured
TROUBLESHOOTING
41 (p.209)
50 (p.221)
49 (p.221)
Fuser Fail
Control Thermistor detected a temperature exceeding the specified temperature.
Safety Thermistor detected a temperature exceeding the specified temperature.
The Control Thermistor did not detect a Ready even though the specified time elapsed from Main Lamp ON at Warm Up.
The Main Lamp continues to stay lit even after time specified for the Main Lamp elapsed after the Control Thermistor detected a
Ready.
The Control Thermistor detected a temperature below the specified temperature even after the specified time elapsed from Main
Lamp ON at Warm Up.
The latch lever of FUSER ASSY is set incorrectly.
Service Req E542
See FIP
Printer
48 (p.219)
52 (p.224)
51 (p.222)
70 (p.243)
150
Revision C
Controller Related (C)
Class
Panel Messaeg
Description
Service Req C0017
CPU error (undefined interruption)
Service Req C0081
CPU error (TLB modification exception)
Service Req C0082
CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch])
Service Req C0083
CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store])
Service Req C0084
CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch])
Service Req C0085
CPU error (address error exception [Store])
Service Req C0086
CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch])
Service Req C0087
CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store])
Service Req C0088
CPU error (SYSCALL exception)
Service Req C0089
CPU error (Break exception)
Service Req C0090
CPU error (reserving command exception)
Service Req C0091
CPU error (unused coprocessor exception)
Service Req C0092
CPU error (FPU exception)
Service Req C0093
CPU error (TLB exception)
Service Req C0094
CPU error (XTLB exception)
Service Req C0095
CPU error (cache exception)
Service Req C0096
CPU error (Trap exception)
Service Req C0097
CPU error (FPU exception)
Service Req C0098
CPU error (watch exception)
Service Req C0128 ~ 0254
CPU error (undefined trap)
Service Req C0255
CPU error (NMI exception)
TROUBLESHOOTING
See FIP
C1 (p.245)
Printer
151
Revision C
Controller Related (C)
Class
Panel Messaeg
Description
See FIP
Service Req C0256
CPU error (divide by 0)
Service Req C0257
CPU error (arithmetic overflow)
Service Req C0258
CPU error (break occurrence)
Service Req C0800
IPL error (controller defect)
Service Req C0998
Engine communication error (only when power-on)
Service Req C0999
Engine flash ROM has no program data
Service Req C1002
Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.)
Service Req C1010
Verification error
Service Req C1020
RAM error (slot 0)
Service Req C1021
RAM error (slot 1)
Service Req C1120
ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program)
Service Req C1121
Service Req C1122
Service Req C1123
Service Req C1200
EEPROM writing error
Service Req C1210
EEPROM writing times limit
Service Req C1400
Engine initialization error
Service Req C1500
CCNV hardware error
Service Req C1550
Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression
Service Req C1600
Video series hardware error (including PWM IC calibration error)
Service Req C1610
Video series hardware error (VCNV error)
Service Req C1700
Built-in network board hardware error
Service Req C1702
Network board is not installed
Service Req C1800
Illegal SPD
Service Req C1999
Other hardware errors
Service Req C2000
Software error
C5 (p.247)
Service Req C2010
Fax module is not installed
C7 (p.248)
Service Req C2011
ADF unit is not installed
C8 (p.248)
Service Req C2012
Image processing unit B ASIC error
C9 (p.248)
TROUBLESHOOTING
C1 (p.245)
C2 (p.246)
C3 (p.246)
C4 (p.247)
C1 (p.245)
C6 (p.248)
C1 (p.245)
Printer
152
Revision C
3.4.4.3 Error Code FIP
Step
3.4.4.3.1 Engine related error
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step[9].

Disconnect the P/J415 from PWBA MCU.
Do all of the wiring below have normal
continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Check after replacement of HOUSING

ASSY-DEVE Y
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y. (p.413)
Does the error recur when the power is turned
ON?
Go to Step[10].
End of procedure
10
Check after replacement of ANTENNA

ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA CTRG
Replace ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or
ANTENNA CTRG. (p.408) or (p.410)
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Possible parts that caused the error

Toner Cartridge Y
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y
ANTENNA CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Model check of Toner Cartridge Y

Is a Toner Cartridge Y that complies with the
specifications attached?
Go to Step[2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge Y

Is the Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
Go to Step[3].
After reattachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4
Does the error recur even if the power is

turned ON/OFF several times?
Go to Step[4].
End of procedure
Attachment check of HOUSING ASSYDEVE Y

Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y attached
correctly?
Go to Step[5].
After reattachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6

Go to Step[6].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Y Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge Y.
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Go to Step[8].
No
Panel Message
Install Y TnrCart
Yes
FIP-1
Check
ANTENNA CTRG operation check
Disconnect and then re-connect P/J415 on
PWBA MCU.
ON?
Go to Step[9].
153
Revision C
FIP-2
Step
Panel Message
ANTENNA CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.

ASSY-DEVE M
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M. (p.413)
ON?
Go to Step[10].
End of procedure
10

ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Model check of Toner Cartridge M
Is a Toner Cartridge M that complies with the
Yes
Go to Step[2].
No
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge M

Is the Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
Go to Step[3].
After reattachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4

Go to Step[4].
End of procedure
Attachment check of HOUSING ASSYDEVE M

Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M attached
correctly?
Go to Step[5].
After reattachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6

Go to Step[6].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge M Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge M.
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Go to Step[8].
No

HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
Yes
Install M TnrCart
Toner Cartridge M
Check
PWBA MCU.
ON?
Go to Step[9].
154
Revision C
FIP-3
Step
Panel Message
ANTENNA CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.

ASSY-DEVE C
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C. (p.413)
ON?
Go to Step[10].
End of procedure
10

ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Model check of Toner Cartridge C
Is a Toner Cartridge C that complies with the
Yes
Go to Step[2].
No
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge C

Is the Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
Go to Step[3].
After reattachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4

Go to Step[4].
End of procedure
Attachment check of HOUSING ASSYDEVE C

Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C attached
correctly?
Go to Step[5].
After reattachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6

Go to Step[6].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge C Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge C.
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Go to Step[8].
No

HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
Yes
Install C TnrCart
Toner Cartridge C
Check
PWBA MCU.
ON?
Go to Step[9].
155
Revision C
FIP-4
Step
Panel Message
ANTENNA CTRG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
PWBA MCU

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.

ASSY-DEVE K
Replace HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K. (p.413)
ON?
Go to Step[10].
End of procedure
10

ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Model check of Toner Cartridge K
Is a Toner Cartridge K that complies with the
Yes
Go to Step[2].
No
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.
Attachment check of Toner Cartridge K

Is the Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
Go to Step[3].
After reattachment
Go to Step[3].
3
4

Go to Step[4].
End of procedure
Attachment check of HOUSING ASSYDEVE K

Is the HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K attached
correctly?
Go to Step[5].
After reattachment
Go to Step[5].
5
6

Go to Step[6].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge K Go to Step[7].

Replace Toner Cartridge K.
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Go to Step[8].
No

HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
Yes
Install K TnrCart
Toner Cartridge K
Check
PWBA MCU.
ON?
Go to Step[9].
156
Revision C
FIP-5
Step
Panel Message
GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY PWBA MCU

Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
Check after replacement of GUIDE CRU

Replace PWBA
ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
MCU. (p.435)
Replace GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA
ASSY. (p.391) or (p.394)
ON?
End of procedure
No
Model check of Photoconductor Unit

Go to Step[2].
Is a Photoconductor Unit that complies with the
Replace with a
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.
Attachment check of Photoconductor Unit

Re-attach Photoconductor Unit.
ON?
Go to Step[3].
End of procedure

Disconnect and the re-connect P/J416 on
PWBA MCU.
ON?
Go to Step[4].
Go to Step[5].
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY

XERO
continuity?
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
Go to Step[5].
Replace
HARNESSASSY XERO.
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

HARNESS-ASSY
XERO
Yes
End of procedure
Photoconductor Unit
Check
Check after replacement of Photoconductor Go to Step [6].

Unit
Replace Photoconductor Unit.
ON?
Printer
157
Revision C
FIP-6
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS-ASSY XERO
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

Go to Step [8].
ASSY. (p.391) or (p.394)
ON?
End of procedure
Power supply check to PWBA MCU

Are the following power voltages being
supplied to PWBA MCU from LV/HVPS?
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [9].
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace LV/

Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/ HVPS. (p.438)
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.

ON?
End of procedure
Go to Step [3].

Unit
ON?
End of procedure
Check of ANTENNA ASSY

Is ANTENNA ASSY dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
ASSY, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Go to Step [6].
Does the error recur when the power is

turned ON?
Go to Step [6].
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Go to Step [7].
No

GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
Yes
Photoconductor Unit
Check
XERO
Disconnect P/J416 from PWBA MCU.
continuity.
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Replace
HARNESSASSY XERO.
Repair broken or
shorted part.
158
Revision C
FIP-7
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS-ASSY XERO
PWBA MCU

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [8].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

Unit
ON?
End of procedure
Check of ANTENNA ASSY

Is ANTENNA ASSY dirty and damaged?
Clean
ANTENNA
ASSY, and then
proceed to step
[4].
Go to Step [5].
4
5

turned ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure

XERO
continuity?
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
Go to Step [6].
Replace
HARNESSASSY XERO.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No

GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA
ASSY
Yes
End of procedure
Photoconductor Unit
Check

Go to Step [7].
ASSY. (p.391) or (p.394)
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
159
Revision C
FIP-8
Step
Panel Message

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8

PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.

ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

Unit
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Yes
Photoconductor Unit
Check
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Go to Step [5].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
160
Revision C
FIP-9
Step
Panel Message
Wrong Photocondctr

Photoconductor Unit
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Photoconductor
Unit that
complies with the
specifications.

Unit
ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
161
Revision C
FIP-10
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN PWBA MCU

ON?
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.

Re-attach Toner Cartridge Y.
ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Y Go to Step [4].

ON?
End of procedure
Check of ANTENNA CTRG

Is ANTENNA CTRG dirty and damaged?
Clean
Go to Step [6].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

turned ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA
CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error Y
Toner Cartridge Y
Check
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Go to Step [7].

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
End of procedure
Printer
162
Revision C
FIP-11
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [8].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
4
5

turned ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Go to Step [7].
TonerCart Error Y
Toner Cartridge Y
Check
ON?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
163
Revision C
FIP-12
Step
Panel Message

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8

PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.

ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Yes
TonerCart Error Y
Toner Cartridge Y
Check
J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Go to Step [5].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
164
Revision C
FIP-13
Step
Panel Message
Wrong Toner Y

Toner Cartridge Y
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes


ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
No
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
Y that complies
with the
specifications.
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
165
Revision C
FIP-14
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

ON?
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.

Re-attach Toner Cartridge M.
ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge M Go to Step [4].

ON?

Clean
Go to Step [6].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

turned ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
End of procedure
End of procedure
Printer
No

ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG or ANTENNA CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error M
Toner Cartridge M
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
166
Revision C
FIP-15
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [8].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
4
5

turned ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Go to Step [7].
TonerCart Error M
Toner Cartridge M
Check
ON?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
167
Revision C
FIP-16
Step
Panel Message
TonerCart Error M

Toner Cartridge M
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.

ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [5].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
168
Revision C
FIP-17
Step
Panel Message
Wrong Toner M

Toner Cartridge M
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes


ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
No
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
M that complies
with the
specifications.
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
169
Revision C
FIP-18
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

ON?
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.

Re-attach Toner Cartridge C.
ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge C Go to Step [4].

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [6].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

turned ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error C
Toner Cartridge C
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
End of procedure
Printer
170
Revision C
FIP-19
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [8].
Continuity check between PWBA MCU and Replace LV/

LV/HVPS of HARNESS ASSY MAIN
HVPS. (p.438)
Disconnect P/J410 from PWBA MCU and P/
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
4
5

turned ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Go to Step [7].
TonerCart Error C
Toner Cartridge C
Check
ON?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
171
Revision C
FIP-20
Step
Panel Message
TonerCart Error C

Toner Cartridge C
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.

ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [5].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
172
Revision C
FIP-21
Step
Panel Message
Wrong Toner C

Toner Cartridge C
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes


ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
No
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
C that complies
with the
specifications.
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
173
Revision C
FIP-22
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY
PWBA MCU

ON?
Go to Step [8].
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.

Re-attach Toner Cartridge K.
ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge K Go to Step [4].

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [6].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

turned ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TonerCart Error K
Toner Cartridge K
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
End of procedure
Printer
174
Revision C
FIP-23
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [8].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[4].
4
5

turned ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Go to Step [7].
TonerCart Error K
Toner Cartridge K
Check
ON?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
175
Revision C
FIP-24
Step
Panel Message
TonerCart Error K

Toner Cartridge K
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [2].
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.

ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [5].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
176
Revision C
FIP-25
Step
Panel Message
Wrong Toner K

Toner Cartridge K
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes


ON?
End of procedure

J410-1 J410-2: 3. 3 VDC
J410-3 J410-4: 5 VDC
J410-5/6 J410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
No
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Replace with a
Toner Cartridge
K that complies
with the
specifications.
Printer
Check
Yes

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
177
Revision C
FIP-26
Step
Panel Message
Jam LC, G

ROLL ASSY TURN 500
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
SOLENOID FEED
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
DRIVE ASSY FEED
PWBA TRAY 500
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
ACTUATOR T/R
SENSOR T/R
HARNESS ASSY FEED 3
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
CLUTCH ASSY FEED
HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
DRIVE ASSY FEED
Check
Yes
No
Check of the paper

Replace with
Is the paper loaded in the paper tray wrinkled or new, dry paper.
torn?
Go to Step [2].
Paper size setting check

Go to Step [4].
Does the size of the paper in use match the size
of the paper set on the control panel?
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
4
Does the error recur when a test print is

made?
End of procedure
Go to Step [4].
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY Go to Step [5].

of Feeder section
Open COVER-REAR 500 of Feeder.
Are ROLL ASSY TURN 500, HOLDER ASSY
RETARD 500, ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and
other parts attached correctly?
Also, do these parts rotate smoothly without
any dirt or damage?
Turn by hand to check.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace the
ROLL in
question.
Printer
Yes
No
5
6
Go to Step [6].
End of procedure
Operation check of SOLENOID FEED

Does SOLENOID FEED operate correctly?
Make a test print and confirm.
Go to Step [12].
Go to Step [7].
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED Go to Step [8].

MAIN
Disconnect P/J437 from PWBA TRAY 500.
continuity?
J437-16 P610-2
J437-17 P610-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED
MAIN.
Check after replacement of DRIVE ASSY

Go to Step [9].
FEED
Replace DRIVE ASSY FEED 250. (p.457)
Does the error recur when a test print is made?
End of procedure
Check after replacement of PWBA TRAY 500 Go to Step [10].

Replace PWBA TRAY 500. (p.455)
End of procedure
10
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step [11].

Disconnect P/J435 from PWBA TRAY CONT.
continuity?
J435-2 P608-9
J435-3 P608-8
J435-4 P608-7
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED 1.
(p.461)
11
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace PWBA

MCU. (p.435)
continuity?
J421-7 J608-4
J421-8 J608-3
J421-9 J608-2
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
made?
178
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
12
Operation check of ACTUATOR T/R

Go to Step [13].
Does ACTUATOR T/R move smoothly
without any damage? Does it leave the sensing
area of Tray Path Sensor when there is paper?
Does it enter the sensing area when there is no
paper?
Replace
ACTUATOR
T/R. (p.480)
13
Operation check of SENSOR T/R

Go to Step [22].
The voltage of P437-15 P437-14 on PWBA
TRAY CONT is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR T/
R enters the sensing area of SENSOR T/R, and
is 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
Go to Step [14].
14
5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR T/R Go to Step [15].

Remove COVER LEFT 500.
TRAY 500 is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [17].

MAIN
Disconnect P/J437 and P/J618 from PWBA
TRAY CONT.
continuity?
J437-13 J618-3
J437-14 J618-2
J437-15 J618-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED
MAIN.
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY FEED 3 Replace

SENSOR
Disconnect P/J618.
T/R. (p.481)
continuity?
P618-4 J120-3
P618-5 J120-2
P618-6 J120-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
5 VDC power supply check to PWBA TRAY Go to Step [9].

500
TRAY 500 is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [18].
15
16
17
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Printer
Check
Yes
No
18
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 Go to Step[19].

continuity?
J435-6 P608-5
J435-5 P608-6
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED 1.
(p.461)
19

continuity?
J421-5 J608-6
J421-6 J608-5
Repair broken or
shorted part.
20
5 VDC power supply check to PWBA MCU Replace PWBA

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [21].
21

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
22
Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY FEED Go to Step [30].

Does CLUTCH ASSY FEED operate
normally?
Make a test print and confirm by the operating
noise.
Go to Step [23].
23

MAIN
continuity?
J437-6 P609-2
J437-7 P609-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED
MAIN.
179
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
24
Check of resistance value of CLUTCH ASSY Go to Step [25].

FEED
The winding resistance between the terminals
of CLUTCH ASSY FEED is 144 10%
(20C)?
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
FEED. (p.460)
25
24 VDC power supply check to PWBA

TRAY 500
The voltage of P435-9/10 435-7/8 on
PWBA TRAY 500 is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [26].
26

continuity?
J435-7 P608-4
J435-8 P608-3
J435-9 P608-2
J435-10 P608-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED 1.
(p.461)
27

continuity?
J421-1 J608-10
J421-2 J608-9
J421-3 J608-8
J421-4 J608-7
Repair broken or
shorted part.
28

MCU. (p.435)
The voltage of P410-5/6 P410-7/8 P410-7/8
on PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [29].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [9].
Step
Printer
Check
Yes
No
29

MAIN
J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
30
Check of 24 VDC power supply to DRIVE

ASSY FEED
TRAY CONT is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [31].
Go to Step [25].
31

MAIN
continuity?
J437-5 CN1-1
J437-4 CN1-2
J437-2 CN1-4
J437-1 CN1-5
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED
MAIN.
180
Revision C
FIP-27
Step
Panel Message
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
ROLL-PINCH
ACTUATOR-REGI.
SENSOR REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
MOTOR-PH
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
6
7

made?
End of procedure
Check of the paper position

Go to Step [8].
Is the leading edge of the paper passing through
PRE REGI ROLL?
Go to Step [20].
Operation check of ACTUATOR-REGI

Go to Step [9].
Does ACTUATOR-REGI move smoothly
without any damage? Does it enter the sensor
sensing area when there is paper? Does it leave
the sensor sensing area when there is no paper?
Replace
ACTUATORREGI. (p.363)
Operation check of SENSOR REGI

Go to Step [15].
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR REGI
enters the sensor sensing area, and is 5 VDC
when it leaves the sensing area?
Go to Step [10].
10
5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR

Go to Step [11].
REGI
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [13].
11
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step [12].

continuity?
J408-10 J603-3
J408-11 J603-2
J408-12 J603-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
No
Check of the paper

Replace with
torn?
Go to Step [2].

Go to Step [4].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].

made?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY

of MSI section
Remove MSI. (p.332)
Are ROLL MSI, HOLDER ASSY RETARD
MSI, CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE, and
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [5].
Replace ROLL
ASSY in
question.
3
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No

Yes
Replace ROLL in
question.
Jam MP, E
ROLL MSI
Check
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY- Go to Step [6].

PRE REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Open CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
Are ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI and ROLLPINCH attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [7].
181
Step
12
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
13

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [14].
14

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
15
24 VDC power supply check to P/H MOTOR Go to Step [16].

MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [18].
16

continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
Check after replacement of MOTOR-PH

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Replace MOTOR-PH. (p.365)
End of procedure
17
Step
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace

Replace
SENSOR
REGI.
HARNESSDisconnect P/J603 and P/J102 from PWBA
(p.364)
ASSY P/H2.
MCU.
continuity.
P603-10 J102-3
P603-11 J102-2
P603-12 J102-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Check
Yes
No
18

MCU. (p.435)
The voltage of P410-5/6 P410-7/8 on
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [19].
19

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
20

continuity?
J408-1 J603-12
J408-2 J603-11
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
21

Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-1 P202-2
P603-2 P202-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.
22

PRE REGI
Disconnect P/J202.
of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI is 144 10%
(20C)?
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
PRE REGI.
(p.366)
182
Revision C
FIP-28
Step
Panel Message
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
ROLL PINCH A
ROLL PINCH B
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
ROLL-PINCH
ACTUATOR-REGI
SENSOR REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
MOTOR-PH
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Shape and operation check of ROLL PINCH Go to Step [7].

A and ROLL PINCH B of Tray1 Feeder
Open COVER-REAR 500.
Are ROLL PINCH A and ROLL PINCH B
attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Replace ROLL
PINCH in
question.
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY- Go to Step [8].

PRE REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Are ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI and ROLLPINCH attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Replace ROLL in
question.
8
9

made?
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Feeder attachment on printer

Go to Step [2].
Remove the Feeder and re-attach, then made a
test print.
Does the error recur?
End of procedure
Check of the paper

Replace with
torn?
Go to Step [3].

Go to Step [5].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[4].

made?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [5].
10
Printer
No

Yes
Replace ROLL
ASSY in
question.
Jam E
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
Check
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY Go to Step [6].

of Feeder section
Open COVER-REAR 500 of Feeder.
Are ROLL ASSY TURN 500, HOLDER ASSY
RETARD 500, ROLL ASSY FEED 500 and
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [9].
Check of paper position

Go to Step [10].
PRE REGI ROLL?
Go to Step [22].

Go to Step [11].
without any damage? Does it enter the sensor
sensing area when there is paper? Does it leave
the sensor sensing area when there is no paper?
Replace
183
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No

Go to Step [17].
enters the sensor sensing area, and is 5 VDC
Go to Step [12].
12

Go to Step [13].
REGI
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [15].
13

continuity?
J408-10 J603-3
J408-11 J603-2
J408-12 J603-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
11
14
Step

Replace
SENSOR REGI. HARNESSDisconnect P/J603 and P/J102 from PWBA
(p.364)
ASSY P/H2.
MCU.
continuity?
P603-10 J102-3
P603-11 J102-2
P603-12 J102-1
15

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [16].
16

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Check
Yes
No
17
24 VDC power supply check to P/H MOTOR Go to Step [18].

MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [20].
18

continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
19

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
20

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [21].
21

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
22

continuity?
J408-1 J603-12
J408-2 J603-11
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
184
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
23

Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-1 P202-2
P603-2 P202-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.
24

PRE REGI
Disconnect P/J202.
of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
is 144 10% (20C)?
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
PRE REGI.
(p.366)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
185
Revision C
FIP-29
Step
Panel Message
ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER
ACTUATOR-REGI
SENSOR REGI
MOTOR-PH
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Troubleshooting
Step
1
2
3
4
Check
Paper size check
Is the paper size compliant with the
specifications?
Yes
Go to Step[2].

Go to Step[7].
without any damage? Does ACTUATORREGI enter the sensor sensing area when there
is paper? Does it leave the sensor sensing area
when there is no paper?
Replace

Go to Step[8].
enters the sensing area of SENSOR REGI, and
is 5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
Go to Step[11].
24 VDC power supply check to MOTOR-PH Go to Step[9].

MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step[14].
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H1 Go to Step[10].

MCU.
continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.

ON?
End of procedure
No
Use paper of size
compliant with
the
specifications.

Go to Step[4].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].

made by dialog operations?
Go to Step[4].
End of procedure
Shape and operation check of ROLL ASSY

PRE-REGI and ROLL-PINCH
Are ROLL ASSY PRE-REGI and ROLLPINCH attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step[5].
Replace or reattach ROLL in

question.
TROUBLESHOOTING
10
Printer
No

ROLL-PINCH
Yes
Replace or reattach ROLL in

question.
Jam E
ROLL ASSY PRE-REGI
Check
Shape and operation check of ROLL-REGI Go to Step[6].

METAL and ROLL REGI RUBBER
Are the ROLL-REGI and ROLL REGI
RUBBER attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
186
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
11

Go to Step[12].
REGI
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step[16].
12

continuity?
J408-10 J603-3
J408-11 J603-2
J408-12 J603-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
13
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY P/H2 Replace SENSOR Replace

REGI. (p.364)
HARNESSDisconnect the P/J603 from PWBA MCU.
ASSY P/H2.
continuity?
P603-10 J102-3
P603-11 J102-2
P603-12 J102-1
14

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [15].
15

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Printer
Check
Yes
No
16

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [17].
17

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
187
Revision C
FIP-30
Step
Panel Message
Jam E, F
W A R N IN G

FUSER ASSY
ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
MOTOR-PH
PWBA MCU
2ND BTR ASSY
SHAFT-CENT 2ND
FRAME ASSY BTR
BEARING-BRUSH CAM
Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR FUSER IN
HARNESS ASSY ADC
HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
CAM ASSY-2ND
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
MOT ASSY MICRO
MOT ASSY FSR
LV/HVPS
HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
Check
Yes
No
Check of the paper

Replace with
torn?
Go to Step [2].

Go to Step [4].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].

made?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [4].
Allow FUSER ASSY to cool down

before performing work.
Yes
No
Remove the
remaining paper
and proceed to
step [5].
Go to Step [6].
Go to Step[6].
End of procedure
Remove FUSER ASSY. (p.418)

Is there any paper remaining at the Gate section
inside FUSER ASSY.
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Paper check at Gate section inside FUSER
ASSY
Printer
5
6

turned ON?
Shape and operation check of ROLL-REGI Go to Step [7].

METAL
Is ROLL REGI RUBBER attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Replace ROLL in
question.
7
8

made?
End of procedure

Go to Step [10].
Is the leading edge of the paper stopping before
REGI-ROLL?
Go to Step [9].

Go to Step [17].
Has the leading edge of the paper passed
through REGI-ROLL, and stopped before Fuser
Roll inside FUSER ASSY?
Go to Step [30].
10
Operation check of CLUTCH ASSY REGI Go to Step [14].

Does CLUTCH ASSY REGI operate normally?
noise.
Go to Step [11].
11

continuity?
J408-3 J603-10
J408-4 J603-9
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
Go to Step [8].
188
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No

Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-3 P203-2
P603-4 P203-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.

REGI
Disconnect P/J203.
of CLUTCH ASSY REGI is 144 10%
(20C)?
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI. (p.357)
14
Check of 24 VDC power supply to MOTOR- Go to Step [15].

PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [36].
15
Continuity check HARNESS-ASSY P/H1

continuity?
Is the continuity normal between all terminals
of J409 P604?
Go to Step [16].
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
16

Replace MOTOR-PH.
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
17
Shape and operation check of 2ND BTR

ASSY
Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p.377)
Is 2ND BTR ASSY damaged?
Are the SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY
BTR and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged?
Does any of them operate abnormally?
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
other relevant
parts.
Go to Step [18].
18

Unit
12
13
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Check
Yes
No
19
Operation check of SENSOR FUSER IN

Go to Step [23].
MCU is 5 VDC when white paper is brought to
the sensor sensing area, and is 0 VDC when
paper is removed?
Go to Step [20].
20

FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [39].
21
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC Go to Step [22].

MCU.
continuity?
J418-1 J620-3
J418-2 J620-2
J418-3 J620-1
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
22
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR

SENS
Disconnect P/J620 from HARNESS ASSY
2BTR SENS.
continuity?
P620-1 J111-3
P620-2 J111-2
P620-3 J111-1
Replace
SENSOR
FUSER IN.
(p.372)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SENS.
23
Shape and operation check of CAM ASSY2ND

Does CAM ASSY-2ND move smoothly
without any damage, and does it enter the
sensor sensing area?
Go to Step [24].
Replace CAM
ASSY-2ND.
(p.379)
Go to Step [21].
End of procedure
Printer
189
Step
24
25
26
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
Operation check of SENSOR 2BTR

Go to Step [27].
RETRACT
MCU is 0 VDC when CAM ASSY-2ND enters
the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT, and is 5 VDC when it leaves the
sensing area?
Go to Step [25].

2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [26].
Go to Step [39].
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY ADC

continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
(p.385)
Check
Repair broken or
shorted part.
28
24 VDC power supply check to MOT ASSY Go to Step [29].

MICRO (2ND BTR Retract Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [36].
29
Check after replacement of MOT ASSY

Replace PWBA
MICRO
MCU. (p.438)
Replace MOT ASSY MICRO. (p.430)
End of procedure
No
30
Go to Step [33].
Go to Step [31].
31
5 VDC power supply check to EXIT

SENSOR in FUSER ASSY
Go to Step [32].
Go to Step [38].


The voltage of connector J614A-7 J614A-6
that connects FUSER ASSY on the printer is 5
VDC?
32
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY

Replace EXIT
FUSER SENS and HARNESS ASSY FUSER SENSOR.
in FUSER ASSY
W A R N IN G

continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
Yes
Operation check of EXIT SENSOR in

FUSER ASSY
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR enters the
sensing area of EXIT SENSOR, and is
5 VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
W A R N IN G
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
27
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)


Disconnect P/J619 and P/J110 in FUSER
ASSY.
continuity?
P619-1 J110-3
P619-2 J110-2
P619-3 J110-1
J619-3 P614A-7
J619-2 P614A-8
J619-1 P614A-9
Printer
190
Step
33
Check
Revision C
Yes
Shape and operation check of FUSER ASSY Go to Step [34].

parts
W A R N IN G
No
Step
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)
38

W A R N IN G

Are the gears, FUSER ROLL, EXIT ROLL,
PINCH ROLL and other parts in FUSER ASSY
attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [36].
35
Check after replacement of MOT ASSY FSR Replace PWBA

MCU. (p.435)
Replace MOT ASSY FSR. (p.425)
ON?
End of procedure
36

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [37].
37

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.


continuity?
J417-6 J614A-7
J417-7 J614A-6

FSR (Fuser Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
34
Check
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MCU Go to Step [39].

C/L
Printer
39

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [40].
40

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
191
Revision C
FIP-31
Step
Panel Message
Jam C, E, F
W A R N IN G

ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
MOTOR-PH
PWBA MCU
2ND BTR ASSY
SHAFT-CENT 2ND
FRAME ASSY BTR
BEARING-BRUSH CAM
Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR FUSER IN
HARNESS ASSY ADC
CAM ASSY-2ND
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
MOT ASSY MICRO
MOT ASSY FSR
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Check
Yes
No
Check of the paper

Replace with
torn?
Go to Step [2].

Go to Step [4].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].

made?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [4].

Yes
No
Remove the
remaining paper
and proceed to
step [5].
Go to Step [6].
Go to Step[6].
End of procedure

inside FUSER ASSY.
FUSER ASSY
Step
Check
ASSY
Printer
5
6

turned ON?

METAL
any dirt or damage?
Replace ROLL in
question.
7
8

made?
End of procedure

Go to Step [10].
Is the leading edge of the paper stopping before
REGI-ROLL?
Go to Step [9].

Go to Step [17].
Has the leading edge of the paper passed
through REGI-ROLL, and stopped before Fuser
Roll inside FUSER ASSY?
Go to Step [30].
10

noise.
Go to Step [11].
11

continuity?
J408-3 J603-10
J408-4 J603-9
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
Go to Step [8].
192
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No

Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-3 P203-2
P603-4 P203-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.

REGI
Disconnect P/J203.
Is the winding resistance between the terminals
(20C)?
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
(p.357)
14

PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [36].
15
Continuity check HARNESS-ASSY P/H1

continuity?
of J409 P604?
Go to Step [16].
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
16

Replace MOTOR-PH.
ON?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
17

ASSY
Are SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY BTR
and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged? Does
any of them operate abnormally?
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
other relevant
parts.
Go to Step [18].
18

Unit
12
13
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Check
Yes
No
19

Go to Step [23].
the sensor sensing area, and is
0 VDC when paper is removed?
Go to Step [20].
20

FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [39].
21

MCU.
continuity?
J418-1 J620-3
J418-2 J620-2
J418-3 J620-1
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
22

SENS
2BTR SENS.
continuity?
P620-1 J111-3
P620-2 J111-2
P620-3 J111-1
Replace
SENSOR
FUSER IN.
(p.372)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SENS.
23

Does CAM ASSY-2ND move smoothly
Go to Step [24].
Replace CAM
ASSY-2ND.
(p.379)
Go to Step [21].
End of procedure
Printer
193
Step
24
25
26
Check
Revision C
Yes
No

Go to Step [27].
RETRACT
MCU is 0 VDC when CAM ASSY-2ND enters
the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
sensing area?
Go to Step [25].

2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [26].
Go to Step [39].

continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
(p.385)
Check
Repair broken or
shorted part.
28

MICRO (2ND BTR Retract Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [36].
29

Replace PWBA
MICRO
MCU. (p.438)
End of procedure
No
30
Go to Step [31].
31

Go to Step [38].
Go to Step [32].


that connects FUSER ASSY on the printer is 5
VDC?
32

Replace EXIT
in FUSER ASSY
W A R N IN G

continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
Yes

Go to Step [33].
FUSER ASSY
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR enters the
sensing area of EXIT SENSOR, and is 5 VDC
W A R N IN G
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
27
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)


ASSY.
continuity?
P619-1 J110-3
P619-2 J110-2
P619-3 J110-1
J619-3 P614A-7
J619-2 P614A-8
J619-1 P614A-9
Printer
194
Step
33
Check
Revision C
Yes

parts
W A R N IN G
No
Step
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)
38

W A R N IN G

Are the gears, FUSER ROLL, EXIT ROLL,
PINCH ROLL and other parts in FUSER ASSY
attached correctly?
any dirt or damage?
Go to Step [36].
35

MCU. (p.435)
ON?
End of procedure
36

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [37].
37

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.


continuity?
J417-6 J614A-7
J417-7 J614A-6

FSR (Fuser Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
34
Check

C/L
Printer
39

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [40].
40

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
195
Revision C
FIP-32
Step
Panel Message
SENSOR OHP
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
Check
Check of transparency setting
Does the transparency in use match the
NVRAM setting (which type of transparency
(with or without white margin) is enabled or
disabled.)
Yes
Go to Step [3].
No
Replace the
transparency in
use with a one
that matches the
NVRAM
settings, or
change the
NVRAM setting
and go to [2].
2
3

made?
Go to Step[3].

continuity?
J408-7 J603-6
J408-8 J603-5
J408-9 J603-4
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.

SENSOR OHP.
(p.362)
continuity?
P603-7 J101-3
P603-8 J101-2
P603-9 J101-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [10].
10

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Check of dirt and foreign bodies on surface

of SENSOR OHP
Open COVER-P/H.
Are there any dirt or foreign bodies on the
SENSOR surface?
Clean to remove Go to Step [5].

any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[4].
4
5

made?
Go to Step[5].
Operation check of SENSOR OHP

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
the sensor sensing area (transparency must not
be used), and becomes 0 VDC when paper is
removed?
TROUBLESHOOTING
End of procedure
End of procedure
Go to Step [7].
No
Troubleshooting
Step
Yes
Check Transparency
Check
Power supply check to SENSOR OHP
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [9].
Go to Step [6].
Printer
196
Revision C
FIP-33
Step
Panel Message
Jam E

ROLL-REGI METAL
ROLL REGI RUBBER
2ND BTR ASSY
SHAFT-CENT 2ND
FRAME ASSY BTR
BEARING-BRUSH CAM
Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR FUSER IN
HARNESS ASSY ADC
CAM ASSY-2ND
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
LV/HVPS
MOT ASSY MICRO
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
MOTOR-PH
Check
Yes
Yes

Go to Step [7].
REGI ROLL?
Go to Step [24].

ASSY
Are SHAFT-CENT 2ND, FRAME ASSY BTR
and BEARING-BRUSH CAM damaged? Does
any of them operate abnormally?
Go to Step [8].

Unit
End of procedure

Go to Step [13].
the sensor sensing area, and becomes 0 VDC
when paper is removed?
Go to Step [10].
Go to Step [17].
No
Go to Step [6].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY and
other relevant
parts.
Check of the paper

Replace with
torn?
Go to Step [2].
10

Go to Step [4].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].

FUSER IN
MCU is 5 VDC?
11
3
4

made?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure

METAL
Also, does this part rotate smoothly without any
dirt or damage?
Replace ROLL in
question.

MCU.
continuity?
J418-1 J620-3
J418-2 J620-2
J418-3 J620-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
5
6
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
made?
Go to Step [11].
End of procedure
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
197
Revision C
Step
Check
12

SENS
2BTR SENS.
continuity?
P620-1 J111-3
P620-2 J111-2
P620-3 J111-1
Replace
SENSOR
FUSER IN.
(p.372)
13

Does CAM ASSY 2ND move smoothly
Go to Step [14].
14

Go to Step [19].
RETRACT
MCU is 0 VDC when Actuator of CAM ASSY2ND enters the sensing area of SENSOR 2BTR
sensing area?
Go to Step [15].
15

2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [16].
Go to Step [17].
16

continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
(p.385)
17

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No
Step
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SENS.
Go to Step [18].
Printer
Yes
No
18
Repair broken or
shorted part.
19

continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
20

MICRO (2nd BTR Retract Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [22].
21

Replace PWBA
MICRO
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
22

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [23].
23

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace CAM
ASSY-2ND.
(p.379)
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
Check

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
198
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
24

noise.
Go to Step [25].
25

continuity?
J408-3 J603-10
J408-4 J603-9
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
26

Disconnect P/J603.
continuity?
P603-3 P203-2
P603-4 P203-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.
27

REGI
Disconnect P/J203.
(20C)?
Replace
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
(p.357)
28

PH
MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [22].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Printer
Check
Yes
No
29

continuity?
J409-1 P604-6
J409-2 P604-5
J409-3 P604-4
J409-4 P604-3
J409-5 P604-2
J409-6 P604-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
30

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
199
Revision C
FIP-34
Step
Panel Message
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
MOT ASSY FSR

Go to step [10]
Troubleshooting
Step
Yes

on the printer (connected to FUSER ASSY) is 5
VDC?
No
Check of the paper

Replace with
torn?
Go to Step [2].

Go to Step [4].
Change the paper

size setting, and
proceed to step
[3].
3
4

made?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure

ASSY
Remove the
paper, and go to
[5].
Go to Step [6].
Go to Step [6].
End of procedure


made?
Shape and operation check of ACTUATOR Go to Step [7].

in EXIT SENSOR
Does ACTUATOR move smoothly and enter
the sensing area of EXIT SENSOR?
TROUBLESHOOTING

Replace EXIT
in FUSER ASSY
W A R N IN G
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)


ASSY.
continuity?
P619-1 J110-3
P619-2 J110-2
P619-3 J110-1
J619-3 P614A-7
J619-2 P614A-8
J619-1 P614A-9

inside FUSER ASSY.
5
6
Go to Step [9].
W A R N IN G
Check
W A R N IN G
No

FUSER ASSY
Yes
Go to Step [8].
Jam C
Check

Go to Step [13].
FUSER ASSY
The voltage of P417-8 P417-7 on PABW
MCU is 0 VDC when ACTUATOR on EXIT
SENSOR is moved and entered the sensing area
of EXIT SENSOR (when there is no paper),
and is 5 VDC when the actuator leaves the
sensing area (when there is paper)?
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)
Printer
200
Step
10
Check
Revision C
Yes

C/L
W A R N IN G
No
Step
Repair broken or
shorted part.
11

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [12].
12

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
13

parts
Replace FUSER
ASSY. (p.418)
W A R N IN G
Yes
No
14
Go to Step [16].
15

MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
16

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [17].
17

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.


continuity?
J417-6 J614A-7
J417-7 J614A-6
Check

FSR (Fuser Motor)
MCU is 24 VDC?


Are the gears, Fuser Roll, Exit Roll, Pinch Roll
and other parts in FUSER ASSY attached
correctly?
any dirt or damage?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
201
Revision C
Troubleshooting
FIP-35
Panel Message
Jam C
Jam LC, G
Jam E
Jam C, E, F
Step
Check
Yes
Check of error/status code

Specify the problem Sensor by the error/status
code:
Jam LC, G:
SENSOR T/R
Jam E:
SENSOR OHP
Jam E:
REGI
Jam C, E, F:
SENSOR FUSER IN
Jam C:
Is there paper remaining on the problem
Sensor?
Remove the
remaining paper
and proceed to
Step [2].
Go to Step [3].
2
3

made?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Operation check (1) of problem Sensor

Go to Step [4].
Does the ACTUATOR move smoothly without
any damage?
Or, is the light emitter of the Sensor clean?
Re-attach or
replace the
actuator, or clean
the light emitter.
Operation check (2) of problem Sensor

Replace PWBA
The voltage of the common line and signal line MCU. (p.435)
to each Sensor on PWBA MCU is 0 VDC in a
sensor detecting state, or is 5 VDC in a sensor
non-sensing state?
Replace the
problem Sensor.

SENSOR T/R
SENSOR OHP
SENSOR REGI
SENSOR FUSER IN
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
202
Revision C
FIP-36
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
PWBA TRAY 500
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Yes
No
Go to Step [6].
End of procedure

J502 from LV/HVPS.
of J410 J502?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Service Req E517
Check
Check after replacement of PWBA MCU
Replace PWBA MCU. (p.435)
ON?
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Feeder attachment on printer

Remove and re-attach Feeder.
ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

Remove Feeder from the printer.
of J421 J608 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)?
Repair broken or
shorted part.

1 of Feeder
Remove Feeder.
of J435 P608 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)?
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED 1.
(p.461)
Check after replacement of PWBA TRAY 500 Go to Step [5].

Replace PWBA TRAY 500. (p.455)
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
203
Revision C
FIP-37
Panel Message
Service Req E514

FFC-ASSY ESS
PWBA MCU
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of connection of FFC-ASSY ESS

Go to Step [2].
Re-connect FFC-ASSY ESS of PWBA ESS to
PWBA MCU. Does the error recur when a test
print is made?
End of procedure
Check of connection of FFC-ASSY ESS

Is FFC-ASSY ESS damaged or broken?
Go to Step [3].

Replace PWBA
ESS. (p.440)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace FFCASSY ESS.

(p.440)
End of procedure
Printer
204
Revision C
FIP-38
Panel Message
Service Req E513

PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
1
2
3
4

turned off and back on?
Go to Step [4].
Go to Step [2].
Does the error recur even when the power Go to Step [4].
is turned off and back on again?
Go to Step [3].
Does the error recur even after the power Go to Step[4].

has been switched several times?
End of
procedure*
Disconnect and re-connect all connectors

connected to PWBA MCU.
turned ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure

turned ON?
Go to FIP-71
End of procedure
Electrical Noise.
(p.244)
NOTE: It is assumed to be due to external noise.

Proceed to FIP-71 Electrical Noise to check to be sure.
C A U T IO N
If NVRAM Error (Service Req E513) occurs soon after replacing

the PWBA MCU, the installed PWBA MCU may be previously used
for another product.
Be sure to replace it with a new one.
Note that once the PWBA MCU is installed and the product is
turned on, the PWBA MCU cannot be used for another product
anymore.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
205
Revision C
FIP-39
Step
Panel Message
Service Req E511

Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR TR-0
HARNESS-ASSY XERO
MOTOR ASSY P/R
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Check
Yes
No
Check of Photoconductor Unit attachment

ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure
Operation check of Photoconductor Unit

Is the Drum of Photoconductor Unit rotating?
Go to Step [3].
Go to Step [10].
Check for dirt on silver seal on Belt in

Photoconductor Unit
Remove Photoconductor Unit.
Turn gear of Photoconductor Unit until silver
seal attached to Belt can be seen.
Is silver seal dirty?
Replace
Photoconductor
Unit.
Go to Step [4].
Check of SENSOR TR-0 (TR0 Sensor)

attachment
Is SENSOR TR-0 attached securely?
Go to Step [5].
Re-attach
the SENSOR TR0, and go to step
[5].

of SENSOR TR-0
SENSOR TR-0 surface?

any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Yes
Go to Step [7].
No
6
7
Operation check of SENSOR TR-0

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC when silver paper or other
reflective object comes close to the sensing area
of SENSOR TR-0, and is 0 VDC when the
object is released?
Go to Step [8].
Check of 5 VDC power supply to SENSOR

TR-0
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [9].
Go to Step [14].

XERO
continuity?
J416-1 J108-3
J416-2 J108-2
J416-3 J108-1
Replace
SENSOR TR-0.
(p.390)
Replace
HARNESSASSY XERO.
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
turned ON?
End of procedure
10
Check after replacement of MOTOR ASSY Go to Step [11].

P/R
Replace MOTOR ASSY P/R. (p.429)
ON?
End of procedure
11
24 VDC power supply check to MOTOR

ASSY P/R
Disconnect P/J201 from MOTOR ASSY P/R.
The voltage of J201-1 J201-2 is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [13].
12

MCU. (p.435)
of J403 J200?
Go to Step [12].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
206
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
13

HVPS. (p.438)
Disconnect P/J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J502-9 J201-1
J502-10 J201-2
Repair broken or
shorted part.
14

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [15].
15

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
207
Revision C
FIP-40
Step
Panel Message
ROS ASSY
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
6
7

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
No
Check of ROS ASSY attachment

Re-attach ROS ASSY. (p.404)
ON?
Go to Step [2].
End of procedure

Remove ROS ASSY. (p.404)
of J407 J601?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
5 VDC power supply check to ROS and

Go to Step [4].
PWB SOS
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [6].

ON?
Go to Step [5].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of ROS ASSY

Replace ROS ASSY. (p.404)
ON?
Go to FIP-1 81
Electrical noise.
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
Go to Step [7].
Service Req E510
Check

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Printer
208
Revision C
FIP-41
Panel Message
Step
Check
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY MAIN

continuity?
J413-5 J105-3
J413-6 J105-2
J413-7 J105-1

MCU. (p.435)
The voltage of J410-3 J410-4 on PWBA
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [8].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Service Req E527

MOTOR ASSY MAG
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and

MOTOR ASSY MAG attachment
Are FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and MOTOR
ASSY MAG attached correctly?
Go to Step [2].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
Rotation check of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY Go to Step [3].

and MOTOR ASSY MAG
Do FRAME ASSY-ROTARY and MOTOR
ASSY MAG rotate smoothly?
Remove any
items that hinder
rotation.
Check of SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI Go to Step [4].

attachment
Is SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI attached
correctly?
Re-attach, and go
to step [4].
Operation check of SENSOR ROTARY

HOME POSI
MCU is 0 VDC when FRAME ASSY
ROTARY enters the sensing area, and is 5
VDC when it leaves the sensing area?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Go to Step [5].

ROTARY HOME POSI
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [6].
Go to Step [7].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Yes
Replace
SENSOR
ROTARY
HOME POSI.
(p.412)
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.
209
Revision C
FIP-42
Step
Panel Message
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

Replace PWBA
Are each of the power voltages being supplied MCU. (p.435)
to the following terminals on PWBA MCU
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [8].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

of SENSOR ASSY ADC
SENSOR ASSY ADC surface?

any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[2].
Check of SENSOR ASSY ADC attachment

Is SENSOR ASSY ADC attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [3].
3
4

turned ON?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
5 VDC and 24 VDC power supply check to

SENSOR ASSY ADC
MCU is 24 VDC?
And the voltage of P422-8 P422-4 is 5
VDC?
Go to Step [5].
Go to Step [7].

continuity?
J422-8 J431-1
J422-4 J431-5
J422-2 J431-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

HARNESS ASSY ADC
Yes
End of procedure
Service Req E526
SENSOR ASSY ADC
Check
Check after replacement of SENSOR ASSY Go to Step [7].

ADC
Replace SENSOR ASSY ADC. (p.382)
ON?
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
Printer
210
Revision C
FIP-43
Step
Panel Message
Toner Cartridge K
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
HARNESS ASSY ADC
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

SENSOR ASSY ADC
MCU is 24 VDC?
VDC?
Go to Step [14].

continuity?
J422-8 J431-1
J422-4 J431-5
J422-2 J431-7
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.

ADC
ON?
End of procedure
Check of 5 VDC power supply to SENSOR

ASSY HUM & TEMP
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [14].
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of connection between

Photoconductor Unit and CONDUCTOR
attached to frame
Is the contact surface of Photoconductor Unit
and CONDUCTOR attached to the frame
deformed or are there foreign objects on the
surface?
Clean, and go to
Step [2].

of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean, and go to
Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
3
4

turned ON?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge Go to Step [5].

Replace Toner Cartridge of each color.
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
10
Printer
No

SENSOR ASSY ADC
Yes
End of procedure
Service Req E525
Photoconductor Unit
Check

Unit
ON?
Go to Step [7].
Go to Step [10].

continuity?
J413-1 J104-4
J413-2 J104-3
J413-3 J104-2
J413-4 J104-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
211
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
11
Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM Go to Step [12].

& TEMP
Replace SENSOR HUM & TEMP. (p.431)
ON?
End of procedure
12

ON?
Go to Step [13].
End of procedure
13

ON?
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
End of procedure
14

Replace PWBA
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [15].
15

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
212
Revision C
FIP-44
Step
Panel Message
Toner Cartridge K
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
HARNESS ASSY ADC
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

SENSOR ASSY ADC
MCU is 24 VDC?
VDC?
Go to Step [14].

continuity?
J422-8 J431-1
J422-4 J431-5
J422-2 J431-7
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.

ADC
ON?
End of procedure

HUM & TEMP
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [14].
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of connection between

Photoconductor Unit and CONDUCTOR
attached to frame
and CONDUCTOR attached to the frame
deformed or are there foreign objects on the
surface?
Clean, and go to
Step [2].

of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Clean, and go to
Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
3
4

turned ON?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure

Replace Toner Cartridge of each color.
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
10
Printer
No

SENSOR ASSY ADC
Yes
End of procedure
Service Req E524
Photoconductor Unit
Check

Unit
ON?
Go to Step [7].
Go to Step [10].

continuity?
J413-1 J104-4
J413-2 J104-3
J413-3 J104-2
J413-4 J104-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
213
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
11
Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM Go to Step [12].

& TEMP
ON?
End of procedure
12

ON?
Go to Step [13].
End of procedure
13

ON?
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
End of procedure
14

Replace PWBA
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [15].
15

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
214
Revision C
FIP-45
Step
Panel Message
SENSOR ASSY ADC
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA MCU
Toner Cartridge K
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
ROS ASSY
Step
Check
Yes
No

of SENSOR ASSY ADC

any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[2].
Check of SENSOR ASSY ADC attachment

Is SENSOR ASSY ADC attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [3].
3
4

turned ON?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure

ADC
ON?
End of procedure

Unit
ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
End of procedure

Replace Toner Cartridge K/Y/M/C.
ON?
End of procedure

ON?
Go to Step [9].
End of procedure
Check after replacement of LV/HVPS

Replace LV/HVPS. (p.438)
ON?
Go to FIP-71
End of procedure
Electrical Noise.
(p.244)
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Yes
Go to Step [7].
Irregular Density
Check
ON?
215
Revision C
FIP-46
Step
Panel Message
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
HARNESS ASSY ADC
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Check after replacement of SENSOR 2BTR Go to Step [9].

RETRACT
Replace SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
Does the error recur when restarting the
printer?
End of procedure

printer?
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of 2ND BTR ASSY attachment

Is 2ND BTR ASSY attached correctly?
Go to Step [2].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

printer?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.

MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [10].

MICRO
printer?
Go to Step [6].
End of procedure

2BTR RETRACT.
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [7].
Go to Step [10].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No

MOT ASSY MICRO
Yes
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
Service Req E521
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Check

continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Go to Step [11].
10

Replace PWBA
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24VDC
Go to Step [11].
11

Are each of the power voltages being supplied HVPS. (p.438)
from LV/HVPS?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
216
Revision C
FIP-47
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
MOT ASSY MICRO
SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
HARNESS ASSY ADC
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Check
Yes
No
Check of DRIVE ASSY BTR attachment

Is the DRIVE ASSY BTR attached correctly?
Go to Step [2].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
Check of 2ND BTR ASSY attachment

Is 2ND BTR ASSY attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [3].
3
4

made?
Go to Step [4].
End of procedure

continuity?
J403-1 J600-3
J403-2 J600-2
J403-3 J600-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.

MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [11].

Go to Step [7].
MICRO
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Go to Step [8].
No

continuity?
J418-4 J112-3
J418-5 J112-2
J418-6 J112-1
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
Check after replacement of SENSOR 2BTR Go to Step [10].

RETRACT
Replace SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p.385)
End of procedure
10

Go to Step [12].
End of procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
Yes
Service Req E520
Check
2BTR RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [11].
217
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
11

Replace PWBA
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [12].
12

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
218
Revision C
FIP-48
Step
Panel Message
FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
HARNESS ASSY AC
PWBA FUSER CONT
LV/HVPS
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Check after replacement of the FUSER

ASSY
Replace FUSER ASSY. (p.418)
ON?
Go to Step [6].
End of procedure

C/L
FUSER LOCK SWITCH

Troubleshooting
Step
2
3
Check
Yes
No
Check of FUSER ASSY attachment

Go to Step [3].
Is the FUSER ASSY attached correctly to the
printer?
In particular, is the connector connected firmly
to the printer?
Is the connector latched normally?
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Operation Check of the FUSER LOCK

SWITCH
Disconnect P/J128 from the FUSER LOCK
SWITCH
Is there continuity on P128-1 P128-2 when
FUSER LOCK SWITCH is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when FUSER LOCK
SWITCH is released?
Go to Step [4].
Replace FUSER
LOCK SWITCH
TROUBLESHOOTING
No
Repair broken or
shorted part.

Yes
Go to Step [5].
Service Req E537
FUSER ASSY
Check
Operation Check of the HARNESS ASSY
MAIN
continuity?
J410-10 J1-1
J410-9 J128-1
J1-3 J128-2
W A R N IN G

Replace
HARNESS
ASSY MCU
C/L.

of J614A J417 and J614 J3?
Printer
Continuity check of FFC-ASSY LV/MCU

J500 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
P401-21 J500-2
P401-22 J500-1
Go to Step [8].
Replace FFCASSY LV/MCU.
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY AC

Disconnect P/J503 from LV/HVPS and P/J2
from PWBA FUSER CONT.
continuity?
J503-5 J2-5
J503-6 J2-6
Go to Step [9].
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY AC.
219
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
Check after replacement of PWBA FUSER Go to Step [10].

CONT
Replace PWBA FUSER CONT. (p.442)
Does the error occur when the power is turned
ON?
End of procedure
10

Go to Step [11].
ON?
End of procedure
11

Disconnect P/J1 from PWBA FUSER CONT, MCU. (p.435)
and P/J410 from PWBA MCU.
continuity?
P/J1-1 P/J410-10
P/J1-3 P/J410-9
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY MAIN
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
220
Revision C
FIP-49
FIP-50
Panel Message
Panel Message
Service Req E533

SENSOR HUM & TEMP
Service Req E530

HARNESS ASSY MAIN
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Temperature check of printer installation site

Has the ambient temperature where the printer
is installed fallen to -7C or below or reached or
risen to 55C or more.
Ask the customer Go to Step [2].

to improve the
installation
environment for
the printer.
Check of SENSOR HUM & TEMP

thermistor resistance value
The resistance value of P104-4 P104-3 is
10k 1k (approx. 20C)?
Go to Step [3].

MCU. (p.435)
of J413 J104?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No
Step
Replace
SENSOR HUM
& TEMP.
(p.431)
Check
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
Yes
No

of J413 J104?
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Check after replacement of SENSOR HUM Replace PWBA

& TEMP
MCU. (p.435)
ON?
End of procedure
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Printer
221
Revision C
FIP-51
Step
Panel Message
PWBA TRAY 500
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

continuity?
J421-1 J608-10 (connector on the printer
to connect Feeder)
J421-2 J608-9
J421-3 J608-8
J421-4 J608-7
Repair broken or
shorted part.

MCU. (p.435)
PWBA MCU is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
10
5 VDC power supply check to PWBA TRAY Replace PWBA

500
TRAY 500.
(p.455)
TRAY CONT is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [11].
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
1
2

MAIN
continuity?
J437-1 CN1-5
J437-2 CN1-4
J437-4 CN1-2
J437-5 CN1-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED
MAIN.
24 VDC power supply check to DRIVE

ASSY FEED
FEED DRV is 24 VDC?
Go to Step [4].
Go to Step [5].
Check of FEED MOTOR START signal

FEED DRV is xx VDC when FEED MOTOR
START signal is ON?
Replace DRIVE
ASSY FEED.
(p.457)
Go to Step [10].
24 VDC power supply check to PWBA

TRAY 500
PWBA TRAY 500 is 24 VDC?
Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
(p.455)
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
No
Check of DRIVE ASSY FEED attachment

Is DRIVE ASSY FEED attached correctly?
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
Printer
No

DRIVE ASSY FEED
Yes
Replace PWBA
TRAY 500.
(p.455)
Service Req E547
Check

continuity?
J435-10 P608-1 (connector on Feeder to
be connected to the printer)
J435-9 P608-2
J435-8 P608-3
J435-7 P608-4
222
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
11

continuity?
J435-6 P608-5 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)
J435-5 P608-6
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED 1.
(p.461)
12

continuity?
J421-5 J608-6 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)
J421-6 J608-5
Repair broken or
shorted part.
13

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [14].
14

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
223
Revision C
FIP-52
Step
Panel Message
DRIVE ASSY PRO
SENSOR IBT RETRACT
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Check
Yes

Go to Step [9].
End of procedure

Replace PWBA
from LV/HVPS?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Repair broken or
shorted part.
No
Check of connection of DRIVE ASSY PRO Go to Step [2].

(IBT Cleaner Retract Motor)
Is connector P/J414 connected firmly to PWBA
MCU?
Re-connect the
connector.
24 VDC power supply check to DRIVE

ASSY PRO (IBT Cleaner Retract Motor)
MCU 2 is 4 VDC?
Go to Step [8].
Check after replacement of DRIVE ASSY

Go to Step [4].
PRO
Replace DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p.424)
End of procedure
5 VDC power supply check to SENSOR IBT Go to Step [5].

RETRACT
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [8].

continuity?
J415-3 J107-3
J415-4 J107-2
J415-5 J107-1
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY MAIN.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [3].
Printer
No
Troubleshooting
Step
Yes
End of procedure
Service Req E542
Check
Check after replacement of SENSOR IBT

Go to Step [7].
RETRACT
Replace SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p.386)
224
Revision C
FIP-53
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Toner Cartridge Y attachment

Is Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].
Operation check of ANTENNA CTRG

Disconnect the P/J415 from PWBA MCU and
reconnect it.
ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ON?
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner Y
Toner Cartridge Y
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Printer
225
Revision C
FIP-54
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Toner Cartridge M attachment

Is Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ON?
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner M
Toner Cartridge M
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Printer
226
Revision C
FIP-55
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Toner Cartridge C attachment

Is Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ON?
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner C
Toner Cartridge C
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Printer
227
Revision C
FIP-56
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Toner Cartridge K attachment

Is Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ON?
End of procedure

CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace Toner K
Toner Cartridge K
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of procedure
Printer
228
Revision C
FIP-57
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY TNR

FULL
Disconnect P/J617.
continuity?
P617-1 J126-3
P617-2 J126-2
P617-3 J126-1

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Is Photoconductor Unit attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

Unit
ON?
End of procedure
Operation check of SENSOR TNER FULL Replace PWBA

(Toner Full Sensor)
MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 0 VDC when the sensor sensing area is
blocked, and is 5 VDC when the sensing area is
not blocked?
Go to Step [5].

Go to Step [6].
TNER FULL
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [8].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No

SENSOR TNER FULL
Yes
Photoconductor Unit
Check

continuity?
J413-10 J617-3
J413-11 J617-2
J413-12 J617-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace
Repair broken or
SENSOR TNER shorted part.
FULL. (p.403)
229
Revision C
FIP-58
Step
Panel Message
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

Is the specified DC voltage being supplied to
the following terminals on PWBA MCU?
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [7].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of open/close state of COVER

Is COVER FRONT ASSY U closed?
Go to Step [3].
Close the cover.

Go to Step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Shape check of COVER FRONT ASSY U

Is the actuator of COVER FRONT ASSY U
that presses SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
deformed or damaged?
Replace COVER Go to Step [4].

FRONT
ASSY U. (p.321)
Actuator
Operation check of SWITCH-FRONT DOOR Go to Step [5].

Disconnect SWITCH-FRONT DOOR P/J125.
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when SWITCH-FRONT
DOOR is released?
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
A Open
COVER FRONT ASSY U
Check

continuity?
J415-10 J125-2
J415-11 J125-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace
SWITCHFRONT DOOR.
(p.328)
Printer
230
Revision C
FIP-59
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
HARNESS-ASSY P/H2
PWBA MCU
HARNESS ASSY MAIN

P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [6].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
Shape check of CHUTE ASSY-REAR

Replace CHUTE Go to Step [2].
ASSY-REAR.
Is the actuator of CHUTE ASSY-REAR that
presses SWITCH I/L CAB (P/H Cover Switch) (p.353)
damaged?
Actuator
Operation check of SWITCH-PH DOOR

Disconnect the P/J408 from the PWBA MCU.
Is there continuity on J408-5 J408-6 when
SWITCH-I/L CAB is pressed, and does the
continuity stop when the switch is released?

continuity?
J408-5 J603-8
J408-6 J603-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [5].
Go to Step [3].
No

SWITCH-PH DOOR
Yes
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H2.
E Open
CHUTE ASSY-REAR
Check

SWITCH-PH
Disconnect P/J603.
DOOR. (p.367)
continuity?
P603-5 J100-2
P603-6 J100-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace
HARNESSASSY P/H1.
Printer
231
Revision C
FIP-60
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY ADC
HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS

P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [6].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Shape check of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
Is the actuator of CHUTE ASSY-FSR that
presses SWITCH 2BTR COVER damaged?
Yes
No

ASSY-FSR.
(p.369)
Actuator
Operation check of SWITCH 2BTR COVER Go to Step [5].

SWITCH 2BTR COVER is pressed, and does
the continuity stop when the switch is released?
Go to Step [3].

continuity?
J418-7 J621-2
J418-8 J621-1
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY ADC.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No

SWITCH 2BTR COVER
Yes
Replace
HARNESS
ASSY 2BTR
SW.
F Open
CHUTE ASSY-FSR
Check
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY 2BTR Replace

SW
SWITCH 2BTR
Disconnect the P/J418 from the PWBA MCU. COVER. (p.381)
continuity?
P621-1 J113-2
P621-2 J113-1
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
232
Revision C
FIP-61
Step
Panel Message

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8

SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Is COVER FUSER closed?
Go to Step [3].
Close the cover.

Go to Step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Shape check of COVER FUSER

Is the actuator of COVER FUSER that presses FUSER. (p.314)
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR deformed or
damaged?
Yes
C Open
COVER FUSER
Check
P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Go to Step [7].
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Actuator
Operation check of SWITCH-FUSER DOOR Go to Step [5].

Disconnect SWITCH-FUSER DOOR P/J114.
SWITCH-FUSER DOOR is pressed, and does
Replace
SWITCHFUSER DOOR.
(p.326)

continuity?
J403-11 J114-2
J403-12 J114-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
233
Revision C
FIP-62
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
PWBA MCU

of J421 J608 (connector on the printer to
connect Feeder)?
Repair broken or
shorted part.

P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [7].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Shape check of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
Is the actuator of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 that
presses SWITCH FEEDER DOOR damaged?
Yes
No

FDR ASSY 500.
(p.453)
Actuator
Operation check of SWITCH FEEDER DOOR Go to Step [4].

SWITCH FEEDER DOOR is pressed, and does
Go to Step [3].
Continuity check of HARNESS-ASSY FEED

MAIN
continuity?
J437-8 J121-2
J437-9 J121-1
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED
MAIN.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace
SWITCH
FEEDER DOOR.
(p.463)
Printer
No

SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
Yes
Replace
HARNESSASSY FEED 1.
(p.461)
G Open
CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
Check

of J435 P608 (connector on Feeder to be
connected to the printer)?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
Repair broken or
shorted part.
234
Revision C
FIP-63
Step
Panel Message
B Open
Check
Yes
No
Shape check of COVER FRONT ASSY U

FRONT
Is the actuator of COVER FRONT ASSY U
that presses SWITCH-INLK FRONT deformed ASSY U. (p.321)
or damaged?
Actuator
COVER TOP
COVER FRONT ASSY U
COVER FUSER
SWITCH ASSY TOP
SWITCH-INLK FRONT
SWITCH-INLK FUSER
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
5
Check
Yes
No

Are all the COVER TOP, COVER FRONT
ASSY U, and COVER FUSER closed?
Go to Step [3].
Close the cover.

Go to Step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
Shape check of COVER TOP

Is the actuator of COVER TOP that presses
SWITCH ASSY TOP deformed or damaged?

ASSY TOP.
(p.311)
Go to Step [6].
Actuator
Actuator
TROUBLESHOOTING
Shape check of COVER FUSER

Replace COVER
Is the actuator of COVER FUSER that presses FUSER. (p.314)
SWITCH-INLK FUSER deformed or
damaged?
Printer
Operation check of SWITCH ASSY TOP

Go to Step [7].
Disconnect P/J116 from SWITCH ASSY TOP.
SWITCH ASSY TOP is pressed, and does the
continuity stop when the switch is released?
Replace
SWITCH ASSY
TOP. (p.317)
Operation check of SWITCH-INLK FRONT Go to Step [8].

Disconnect P/J115 from SWITCH-INLK
FRONT.
SWITCH-INLK FRONT is pressed, and does
Replace
SWITCH-INLK
FRONT. (p.328)
235
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
Operation check of SWITCH-INLK FUSER Go to Step [9].

Disconnect P/J117 from SWITCH-INLK
FUSER.
SWITCH-INLK FUSER is pressed, and does
Replace
SWITCH-INLK
FUSER. (p.331)

P410-1 P410-2: 3. 3 VDC
P410-3 P410-4: 5 VDC
P410-5/6 P410-7/8: 24 VDC
Go to Step [10].
10
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-1 J502-1
J410-2 J502-2
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
J410-5 J502-5
J410-6 J502-6
J410-7 J502-7
J410-8 J502-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Printer
236
Revision C
FIP-64
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA CTRG
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes

ON?
End of procedure
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Check of Toner Cartridge Y attachment

Is Toner Cartridge Y attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Y Toner Low
Toner Cartridge Y
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
End of procedure
Printer
237
Revision C
FIP-65
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA CTRG
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes

ON?
End of procedure
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Check of Toner Cartridge M attachment

Is Toner Cartridge M attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
M Toner Low
Toner Cartridge M
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
End of procedure
Printer
238
Revision C
FIP-66
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA CTRG
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes

ON?
End of procedure
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Check of Toner Cartridge C attachment

Is Toner Cartridge C attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
C Toner Low
Toner Cartridge C
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
End of procedure
Printer
239
Revision C
FIP-67
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
ANTENNA CTRG
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes

ON?
End of procedure
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
No
Check of Toner Cartridge K attachment

Is Toner Cartridge K attached correctly?
Go to Step [4].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure

Clean
Go to Step [5].
ANTENNA
CTRG, and then
proceed to step
[5].

reconnect it.
ON?
Go to Step [6].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No

ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Yes
Repair broken or
shorted part.
K Toner Low
Toner Cartridge K
Check

continuity?
J415-1 J106-2
J415-2 J106-1
End of procedure
Printer
240
Revision C
FIP-68
Step
Panel Message
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
HARNESS-ASSY TNER FULL
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY TNR

FULL
Disconnect P/J617.
continuity?
P617-1 J126-3
P617-2 J126-2
P617-3 J126-1

MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [9].

J502 from LV/HVPS.
continuity?
J410-3 J502-3
J410-4 J502-4
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [3].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

Unit
ON?
End of procedure
Operation check of SONSOR TNER FULL Replace PWBA

(Toner Full Sensor)
MCU. (p.435)
MCU is 0 VDC when the sensor sensing area is
blocked, and is 5 VDC when the sensing area is
not blocked?
Go to Step [5].

Go to Step [6].
TNER FULL
MCU is 5 VDC?
Go to Step [8].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No

SENSOR TNER FULL
Yes
Worn Photoconductor
Photoconductor Unit
Check

continuity.
J413-10 J617-3
J413-11 J617-2
J413-12 J617-1
Repair broken or
shorted part.
Replace
Repair broken or
SENSOR TNER shorted part.
FULL. (p.403)
241
Revision C
FIP-69
Step
Panel Message

Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
ASSY. (p.391) or (p.394)
ON?

GUIDE CRU ASSY D or ANTENNA ASSY
HARNESS-ASSY XERO
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Go to Step [3].
Re-attach, and go
to step [2].
2
3

turned ON?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure

Unit
ON?
End of procedure

ON?
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [6].
Printer
Yes
Worn Photoconductor
Photoconductor Unit
Check
XERO
Disconnect the J416 from PWBA MCU.
continuity?
J416-4 J109-2
J416-5 J109-1
Go to Step [6].
No
Replace
HARNESSASSY XERO.
End of procedure
242
Revision C
FIP-70
Panel Message
Service Req E998
FFC-ASSY ESS
BOARD ASSY., MAIN
PWBA MCU
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Check if the firmware version of the PWBA

MCU
Check the firmware version of the PWBA
MCU.
Is the version latest ?
Go to Step [2].
Update the
firmware.
Check if the firmware version of the printer

controller
Check the firmware version of the printer
controller
Is the version latest ?
Go to Step [3].
Update the
firmware.
Continuity check of FFC-ASSY ESS

1. Disconnect the P/J400 on the PWBA
MCU.
2. Disconnect the CN601 on the BOARD
ASSY., MAIN
3. Check each wiring for continuity.
Do all of the wiring have continuity ?
Go to Step [4].
Replace the
FFC-ASSY
ESS.
Replacement of the BOARD ASSY., MAIN

Replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
Does the error occur ?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)
End of
procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No
Printer
243
FIP-71
Revision C
ELECTRICAL NOISE
Step

Photoconductor Unit
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
FUSER ASSY
PWBA MCU
Step
Yes
Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY
End of procedure
No
Check of external noise

Go to Step [2].
Are there any other electrical apparatus (e. g.
generators, wireless transmitters, or equipment
that use motors) within 3 m of the printer?
Either turn the other electrical apparatus OFF,
or reposition the printer at least 6 m away from
other electrical apparatus.
Does the electrical noise problem still
continue?
End of procedure
Check of AC ground
Is the AC power outlet wired and grounded
correctly?
Go to Step [3].
Ask the customer

to repair the AC
power outlet.

Unit
Replace DRU ASSY.
Does the electrical noise problem still continue
after replacement?
End of procedure
Check of contact between Photoconductor

Unit and HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD
and CONDUCTOR attached to HOUSING
ASSY-GUIDE AD deformed or are there
foreign objects on the surface?
Replace
HOUSING
ASSY-GUIDE
AD.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [5].
No
W A R N IN G
Check
Yes
Tighten the
screws.
LV/HVPS
Troubleshooting
Check
Check of grounding of boards

Go to Step [6].
Are all screws fastening PWBA MCU and LV/
HVPS to the frame tightened firmly?
Also, are all screws fastening the PWBA
TRAY 500 of Feeder to the frame tightened
firmly?
Go to Step [7].

Replace FUSER. (p.418)

after replacement?
Printer

Replace all
related parts.
after replacement?
End of procedure
244
Revision C
3.4.4.3.2 Controller related error

C H E C K
P O IN T
Since a controller-related service call error may occur due to the

print data structure sent by the host/application, make operation
check while simultaneously changing the operating environment,
print data, etc.
Troubleshooting
Step
1
FIP-C1
Panel Message
Service Req C0017
Service Req C0097
Service Req C0081
Service Req C0098
Service Req C0082
Service Req C0128-0254
Service Req C0083
Service Req C0255
Service Req C0084
Service Req C0256
Service Req C0085
Service Req C0257
Service Req C0086
Service Req C0258
Service Req C0087
Service Req C0800
Service Req C0088
Service Req C0998
Service Req C0089
Service Req C1400
Service Req C0090
Service Req C1500
Service Req C0091
Service Req C1550
Service Req C0092
Service Req C1600
Service Req C0093
Service Req C1610
Service Req C0094
Service Req C1800
Service Req C0095
Service Req C1999
PWBA ESS
Check
External noise
1. Check the surrounding of the printer for
electrical equipment.
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the
printer, except the AC cable, and make
operation check.
Does the error occur?
Yes
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.440)
No
End of procedure
Service Req C0096
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
245
Revision C
FIP-C2
FIP-C3
Panel Message
Panel Message
Service Req C0999
Service Req C1121
Service Req C1002
Service Req C1122
Service Req C1010
Service Req C1123
Service Req C1020

Service Req C1120
PWBA ESS

PWBA ESS
Standard ROM-DIMM
Step
Check
Yes
End of procedure
Replace the Standard ROM-DIMM

1. Replace the Standard ROM-DIMM.
To Step [3]
End of procedure
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.440)
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
Check
Yes
No
Check of RAM-DIMM
To Step [2]
1. Check whether the installed RAM-DIMM is
the specified one and is securely connected.
(Remove it once and reinstall it again.)
End of procedure
Replace the RAM-DIMM

1. Replace the Standard RAM-DIMM.
To Step [3]
End of procedure
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.440)
End of procedure
No
Check of Standard ROM-DIMM

To Step [2]
1. Check whether the installed ROM-DIMM is
the specified one and is securely connected.
(Remove it once and reinstall it again.)
RAM-DIMM
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step
Service Req C1021
246
Revision C
FIP-C4
FIP-C5
Panel Message
Panel Message
Service Req C1200
Service Req C1210
Service Req C2000
PWBA ESS
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step
Step
1
2
Check
Yes
No
Check of EEPROM
To Step [2]
Initialize the EEPROM. Refer to Initialization
of EEPROM (p.69)
End of procedure
External noise
operation check.
End of procedure
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
(p.440)
Printer
Check
Yes
No
Check of host PC
Restart the host PC.
To Step [2]
End of procedure
Check of Printer Driver

Reinstall the Printer Driver.
To Step [3]
End of procedure
External noise
operation check.
Replace the
End of procedure
PWBA ESS.
(p.440)
247
Revision C
FIP-C6
FIP-C8
Panel Message
Panel Message
Service Req C1700
Service Req C11702
Service Req C2011
Network Board
ADF unit
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Check if the network board is installed
correctively
1. Remove the network board from the
controller board.
2. Reinstall the network board correctively.
Dose the error occur?
Yes
Replace the
network board.
No
End of procedure
Step
Check
Yes
No
Continuity check between the ADF unit and

scanner unit
Connect the ADF connector to the scanner unit
correctively.
---
---
Yes
No
FIP-C9
Panel Message
FIP-C7
Panel Message
Service Req C2010
Fax module
Step
Troubleshooting
Step
1
Check
Check if the fax module is installed

correctively
1. Remove the fax board from the controller
board.
2. Reinstall the fax board correctively.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PWBA ESS
Troubleshooting
Service Req C2012
Yes
Replace the fax
module.
No
Check
Restart the printer
Turn the printer off and back on the power.
Replace the
PWBA ESS.
---
End of procedure
Printer
248
Revision C
3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble

Perform troubleshooting for print quality troubles following the flow chart below.
START
Make a sample test print
Is there an applicable FIP?
No
Yes
Replace Photoconductor Unit and
FUSER ASSY in that order
Perform the appropriate troubleshooting
No
No
Trouble restored?
Yes
END
Trouble restored?
Yes
END
Leg_Sec001_001FA
Figure 3-4. Printing-quality troubleshooting Entry Chart

The printing-quality troubleshooting described here is based on a condition that the
printer controller has no problems.
However, making a test print with only the engine side, allows you to find out roughly
which side (controller side or engine side) is causing the trouble, except for cases that
cannot be checked by the test print.
Test print with the engine alone is normal Printer controller trouble
Test print on engine alone is abnormal Printer engine trouble
If the probable cause is printer controller trouble, replace with a normal printer
controller and interface cable, and check.
If the trouble recurs after replacing with the normal parts, check on the host side, and
use the printer quality FIPs to perform efficient troubleshooting.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
249
Revision C
3.4.5.1 Engine Test Print

To check the IOT operation, it is possible to print PWBA MCU built-in sample
continuously without being routed through the controller. If the problem does not occur
on the PWBA MCU built-in sample, the cause of the problem may be controller.
PRINTING METHOD
PWBA MCU
C A U T IO N
The test print cannot be made if an engine-related error has

occurred.
1. Remove the COVER ASSY LH. (p.324)

W A R N IN G
Never touch the energized or driving part when performing the

following procedure.
2. Set paper into MSI and turn the power on.

3. In Ready mode, short-circuit the pad for test print on the PWBA MCU with
a small screwdriver or a similar tool. The pad is located at upper right of
the interface connector .
W A R N IN G
When short-circuiting the pad, be careful not to contact the other

elements by hand or tool.
Leg_002_003RB
Figure 3-5. The Pad for Test Print
C A U T IO N
1 sheet of test print is printed out by 1 time of short-circuiting.

As for Ready mode, refer to 2.2.7 Operating Modes (p.122)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
250
Revision C
TEST PRINT PATTERN
400 dot line

(400dpi)
1 dot line
127 dot
508 dot
(400dpi)
Figure 3-6. Test Print Pattern
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
251
Revision C
3.4.5.2 Print Quality-related FIP Table
Table 3-12. Print Quality-related FIP Table
To reliably judge and understand the details of trouble, and perform the correct remedy
efficiently when printing quality-related trouble occurs, make a test print, and use the
FIP tables corresponding to the phenomena.
When trouble cannot be restored by the printing quality-related FIP, check again using
the FIP, and then replace all parts indicated in the ESS and possible parts that caused
the error one by one to check the parts and perform troubleshooting.
The printing quality-related FIPs describe typical troubles as below.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
See FIP
Printing is Faint (Weak Tones)
FIP-P1
Blank Print
FIP-P2
Solid Black Print
FIP-P3
Vertical White Bands or Lines
FIP-P4
Horizontal White Bands or Lines
FIP-P5
Vertical Black Lines
FIP-P6
Horizontal Black Lines
FIP-P7
Image is Partially Not Printed
FIP-P8
Toner Smudges
FIP-P9
Residual Image
FIP-P10
Dark or Dirty Background
FIP-P11
Skew Print
FIP-P12
Print Paper Damage
FIP-P13
Image Not Fixed
FIP-P14
Color Shift
FIP-P15
Uneven Density/Thin-Spot
FIP-P16
Entirely Faint
FIP-P17
Entirely Fogged in Black
FIP-P18
Entirely Thin
FIP-P19
Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction
FIP-P20
Vertical White Lines (Location of the lines are same between Y, M, C and K)
FIP-P21
Vertical White Lines (Locations of the lines are different between Y, M, C and K)
FIP-P22
Horizontal Lines
FIP-P23
Stain
FIP-P24
Colored Dots at 150mm Pitch
FIP-P25
Vertical Two Lustered Streaks on the Center of OHP
FIP-P26
5mm-width Horizontal Bands at 84.5mm Intaervals
FIP-P27
Printer
252
Revision C
3.4.5.3 Uniformly Spaced Print Troubles (bands, smudges, etc.)

When horizontal stripes and spots appear at fixed intervals, it is highly possible that a
specific roll has caused the trouble. If this happens, you might be able to easily solve
the problem by measuring the interval between the stripes or spots on a test print, and
checking the relationship between the pitches shown in the table below (note that the
pitch does not necessarily match the perimeter of the roller).
Part (Roller) Name
FUSER
FUSER ASSY
XERO CRU Photoconductor Unit
TRANSFER
DEVE
PR MOTER
Outside Diameter Pitch (mm)

15.6
49.1
PINCH ROLL
8.0
25.1
H/R
26.2
84.5
EXIT ROLL
BELT
30.1
94.5
DRUM
47.0
147.7
BCR
12.0
37.7
1st BTR
10.0
31.4
BUR
15.7
49.3
IDLE ROLL
11.8
36.9
CNL BRUCH
19.0
24.1
2ND BTR ASSY
2nd BTR
16.3
51.1
HOUSING ASSYDEVE
MAG ROLL
16.0
24.9
AUGGER SUPPLY
17.0
38.1
AUGGER ADMIX
17.0
38.1
7.5
MOT ASSY P/R
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
253
Revision C
3.4.5.4 Printing quality-related FIP
Step
FIP-P1 Printing is Faint (Weak Tones)
Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
Toner Cartridge K
2ND BTR ASSY
MOT ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
500 FEEDER ASSY OPTION
Before starting troubleshooting, inspect the feed path of the printer paper. Check the
paper feed path for metal staples, paper clips, paper scraps, and other foreign matter.
Step
Check
Yes
Check of 2ND BTR ASSY

Is 2ND BTR ASSY normal without any dirt,
damage or wear?
Go to Step [6].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
(p.377)

Unit and frame
Are the contacts of Photoconductor Unit and
HOUSING ASSY-GUIDE AD dirty or
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [7].
Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Go to Step [8].

Unit
Make a test print of the problem image.
Is the image printed normally?
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge End of procedure Go to Step [9].

Replace Toner Cartridge Y/M/C/K.

End of procedure Go to Step [10].
10

11
Check after replacement of the MOT ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [12].
MAG
Replace MOT ASSY MAG. (p.426)
No
Check of Paper
Load new, dry recommended paper, and
execute a test print.
Check of laser beam path

Remove
Are there any obstructions between ROS ASSY obstacles.
and Photoconductor Unit?
Go to Step [3].
Check of ROS window

Is ROS window dirty?
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Clean the ROS

window with
CLEANER
ASSY.
Printer
No
ESS and possible parts that caused the error
Yes
Problems
Overall density of image is too weak.
Check
Check of toner cartridge attachment
Re-attach the toner cartridge, and make a test
print of the problem image.
254
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
12
Check of image primary transfer process

Go to Step [13].
Is the toner image on the drum transferred
normally to IBT BELT?
Execute a test print, turn the power OFF when
you think that the primary transfer process is in
progress during printing, and check the toner
image on IBT BELT.
13
Check of image secondary transfer process

Is the toner image on IBT BELT transferred
normally to the paper?
you think that the image transfer process is in
progress during printing, and check the paper.
TROUBLESHOOTING
No
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
Replace ESS and Replace LV/

possible parts that HVPS. (p.438)
caused the error.
Printer
255
Revision C
FIP-P2 Blank Print
Step
Problems
Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
Toner Cartridge Y
Toner Cartridge M
Toner Cartridge C
Toner Cartridge K
2ND BTR ASSY
MOTOR ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
Check
Yes
No

Remove
Are there any obstructions between ROS ASSY obstacles.
and Photoconductor Unit?
Go to Step [2].
Is ROS window completely covered by

obstacles, or is it dirty?
Remove
obstacles, and
clean ROS
window with
CLEANER
ASSY.
Go to Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
Connect the
connector.
Check connection of ROS ASSY connector

Is the connector firmly connected to ROS
ASSY?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
No
4
5

damage or wear?
Go to Step [6].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
(p.377)

Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [7].

Unit
Check after replacement of Toner Cartridge End of procedure Go to step [9]

Replace Toner Cartridge Y/M/C/K.

10

11

MAG
Replace MOT ASSY MAG. (p.426)
Step
Yes
Completely blank pages are printed.

Check
Check of toner cartridge attachment
Re-attach the toner cartridge, and make a test
print of the problem image.
256
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
No
12

Go to Step [13].
image on IBT BELT.
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
13

Go to Step [14].
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
14
Check after replacement of ESS

Replace ESS.
End of procedure Replace ESS

and possible parts
that caused the
error.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
257
Revision C
FIP-P3 Solid Black Print

Problems
Completely black pages are printed.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check connection of ROS ASSY connector

ASSY?
Go to Step [2].
Connect the
connector.

Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [3].
Cover the entire window of ROS ASSY and Replace LV/

HVPS. (p.438)
Is the print completely black?
Go to Step [4].
Cover half of the window of ROS ASSY and Go to Step [5].

Is the print, half white and half black?
Replace PWBA
MCU. (p.435)

TROUBLESHOOTING
End of procedure Replace ESS and

possible parts that
caused the error.
Printer
258
Revision C
FIP-P4 Vertical White Bands or Lines
Step
Problems
Vertical (along the paper feed direction) white
bands or lines appear almost all over the
printout. Some bands or lines are extremely
faint and some are completely white (blank)
missing the part of the image which should be
printed.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Step
Check
Yes
Check of Paper
execute a test print of the problem image.
Check of the paper feed path

Remove
Are there any dirt or obstacles on the paper feed obstacles.
path from feeding section to the ejecting
section?
Go to Step [3].
Go to Step [4].
Are there any obstructions between ROS

ASSY and Photoconductor Unit?
TROUBLESHOOTING
No
Go to Step [5].

damage or wear?
Go to Step [6].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY
(p.377)

Unit

Check of Heat Roll and Pressure Roll
Replace FUSER Replace ESS

ASSY. (p.418)
and possible parts
that caused the
error.


Turn the Gear by hand, and inspect Heat Roll
and Pressure Roll.
Are Heat Roll and Pressure Roll scratched or
dirty and damaged?
Remove
obstacles.
Yes
Clean the ROS
window with
CLEANER
ASSY.
W A R N IN G
No
Check
Check of ROS window
Is ROS window dirty?
Printer
259
Revision C
FIP-P5 Horizontal White Bands or Lines
Step
Problems
Horizontal (vertical to the paper feed
direction) white bands or lines appear almost
all over the printout. Some bands or lines are
extremely faint and some are completely white
(blank) missing the part of the image which
should be printed.
ROS ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Paper
execute a test print of the problem image.
Check of Rollers on the paper feed path

Are Rollers on the paper feed path normal
without any dirt, damage or wear?
Go to Step [4].
Execution of a test print

TROUBLESHOOTING
After cleaning or
replacing the
relevant Rollers,
go to step [3].
Printer
Check
Yes
No
Connection check of ROS ASSY connector

damage or wear?

Unit



Go to Step [10].
normally to IBT BELT? Also, are there any
horizontal white bands?
image on IBT BELT.

ASSY?
Go to Step [5]. Connect the

connector.
Go to Step [6].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
(p.377)
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
260
Revision C
Step
Check
10

Go to Step [11].
11
Replace FUSER Replace ESS and

ASSY. (p.418)
possible parts that
caused the error.
W A R N IN G

Yes
No
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)

and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
261
Revision C
FIP-P6 Vertical Black Lines
Step
Problems
2ND BTR ASSY

Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
PWBA MCU
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Check
Yes


ASSY. (p.418)
possible parts that
caused the error.

Go to Step [3].

damage or wear?

Unit

Go to Step [6].

and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
No
No
End of
procedure
W A R N IN G
Step
Yes
Vertical (along the paper feed direction) black

lines appear on printout.
Check
After cleaning or
replacing the
relevant Rollers,
go to step [2].

TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [4].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY
(p.377)
Printer
262
Revision C
FIP-P7 Horizontal Black Lines
Step
Problems
ROS ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA MCU
PWBA ESS
Step
Check
Yes

ASSY?
Go to Step [2].

Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to step [3]

damage or wear?
Go to Step [4].
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY
(p.377)

Unit
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connect the
connector.
No

Go to Step [7].
image on IBT BELT.
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)

Go to Step [8].
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)

ASSY. (p.418)
possible parts that
caused the error.
W A R N IN G
No
Yes
Horizontal (vertical to the paper feed

direction) black lines appear on printout.
Check


and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
Printer
263
Revision C
FIP-P8 Image is Partially Not Printed
Step
Problems

Go to Step [6].
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
Replace FUSER Go to Step [7].

ASSY. (p.418)
W A R N IN G
Step
Check
Yes

damage or wear?
Go to Step [3].

Unit
TROUBLESHOOTING


and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
No
Check of Paper
No

2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA MCU
ROS ASSY
PWBA ESS
Yes
Replace LV/
HVPS. (p.438)
Some areas of the printed image are missing or

extremely faint.
Check

Go to Step [5].
image on IBT BELT.
7
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY
(p.377)
Printer


possible parts that
caused the error.
264
Revision C
FIP-P9 Toner Smudges
Step
Problems
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step
Check
Yes



ASSY. (p.418)
possible parts that
caused the error.

Go to Step [2].
After cleaning
and replacing the
relevant Rollers,
go to step [2].

ASSY?
Go to Step [3].
Connect the
connector.

Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or
Go to Step [4].
replace relevant
parts.

damage or wear?
Go to Step [5].
TROUBLESHOOTING


and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
No
No
W A R N IN G
Yes
Toner smudges appear randomly over the

entire surface of the paper.
Check

Unit
Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
(p.377)
Printer
265
Revision C
FIP-P10 Residual Image
Step
Problems
Photoconductor Unit
HOUSING ASSY- GUIDE AD
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
ROS ASSY
MOT ASSY MAG
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
LV/HVPS
Check
Yes

damage or wear?
Go to Step [6].

ASSY. (p.418)
possible parts that
caused the error.

Replace 2ND
BTR ASSY.
(p.377)

and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
No
Check of repeated printing

Check the residual image
Is the customer printing lots of the same
images?
Go to Step [2].
Go to Step [3].
Check of the residual image.

Print out 30 pages of various images.
Did any residual images appear?
Go to Step [3].
End of procedure
(Advise the
customer not to
print same image
in large quantities
at a time.)

Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.$
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
No
W A R N IN G
Step
Yes
A ghost image appears on the printout. An

image of the previous page or part of the
currently printing page lap over like a ghost.
Check

Unit
Printer
266
Revision C
FIP-P11 Dark or Dirty Background
Step
Problems
The entire page or part of the page is dirtied
with toner. It appears as extremely light gray
dirt.
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
SENSOR ASSY ADC
LV/HVPS
2ND BTR ASSY
PWBA MCU
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Check
Yes
No

of SENSOR ASSY ADC

any dirt or
foreign bodies,
and go to step
[5].

Check after replacement of SENSOR ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [7].

ADC


possible parts that
caused the error.
Step
Check
Yes
No

ASSY?
Go to Step [2].
Connect the
connector.

Unit and frame
deformed?
Clean or replace
relevant parts.
Go to Step [3].
Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of

Unit
procedure
Go to Step [4].

TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
267
Revision C
FIP-P12 Skew Print
Step
Problems

Photoconductor Unit
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Photoconductor Unit attachment

Go to Step [6].
Re-attach, and go
to step [6].

Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Replace ESS and

Unit
possible parts that
caused the error.
No
Check of printer installation surface

Is the printer installed on level surface?
Also, are the printer's feet attached correctly?
Go to Step [2].
Check of paper feed

Remove the Paper Cassette, and load paper
correctly.
Attach the Paper Cassette correctly into the
printer.
Operation check of PLATE ASSY

BOTTOM 500 in the Paper Cassette
Remove the Paper Cassette.
Does the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 in the
Paper Cassette rise up correctly without any
inclination on the left or right sides?
Go to Step [4].
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
Clean and reattach, or replace

the Roller in
question, and go
to Step [5].
The printed image is not parallel to both sides

of the paper.
Check
Check the Rollers on the paper feed path for Go to Step [5].
damage and wear, and check attachment.
Also, are those Rollers attached correctly?
Correct the
inappropriate
installation.
Re-attach
PLATE ASSY
BOTTOM.
(p.447)
Printer
268
Revision C
FIP-P13 Print Paper Damage
Step
Problems
Is the printed out paper wrinkled, folded or
frayed?
FUSER ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
ROS ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
PWBA ESS
Yes
No
Go to Step [5].

possible parts that
caused the error.
W A R N IN G
Check
Attachment check of FUSER ASSY
Is FUSER ASSY attached correctly?

Re-attach.

Step
Check
Yes
No
Check of Paper
Check of paper feed path

Remove dirt and Go to Step [3].
Are there any dirt or obstacles on the paper feed obstacles.
path from the paper feed tray to the output
section?
Check of all Rollers on the paper feed path

Are all Rollers on the paper feed path normal
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [4].
Clean the
relevant Rollers.
Printer
269
Revision C
FIP-P14 Image Not Fixed
Step
Problems
Check
W A R N IN G
The printed image is not sufficiently fixed to

the paper. The image is easily removed by
rubbing it with your fingers.
Yes
No



FUSER ASSY
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU


possible parts that
caused the error.
Step
Check
Yes
Check of Paper
Check of print setup mode

Go to Step [3].
Is the printer set to a Transfer Voltage suited to
the type of paper in use?

W A R N IN G

No
Adjust the
Transfer Voltage.

ASSY. (p.418)

and Pressure Roll.
dirty and damaged?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
270
Revision C
FIP-P15 Color Shift

Problems
The printed Yellow or Black image does not
accurately overlap the Cyan or Magenta
image, and is out of position.
SENSOR TR-0
Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY P/R
PWBA ESS
Step
Check
Yes
Check of SENSOR TR-0 attachment

Is SENSOR TR-0 attached correctly?

Unit
Check after replacement of MOT ASSY P/R End of procedure Go to Step [4].
Replace MOT ASSY P/R. (p.429)
Check after replacement of PWBA ESS

Replace PWBA ESS. (p.440)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
No
Re-attach, and go
to step [3].

possible parts that
caused the error.
Printer
271
Revision C
Connecting location of the connectors
FIP-P16 Uneven Density/Thin-Spot

Problems
Uneven density/thin-spots appear on entire
surface. This occurs due to disconnection of
connector (D) from LV/HVPS.
WIRE ASSY BTR

LV/HVPS
P/J512
(1BTR)
Step
Check
Check the connectors for LV/HVPS.
Make sure that the connector (P/J504) on LV/
HVPS and the connector (P/J512) on 1st BTR
are connected properly.
Print the problem image. Or, execute the test
print.
Was the trouble fixed?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No

possible parts that
caused the error.
Printer
272
Revision C
FIP-P17 Entirely Faint

Problems
The color over the entire surface is faint. This
occurs due to disconnection of connector (C)
from LV/HVPS.
WIRE ASSY DEVE

LV/HVPS
P/J510
(DEVE)
Step
Check
Yes
No

possible parts that
caused the error.
HVPS and the connector (P/J510) on DEVE are
connected properly.
print.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
273
Revision C
FIP-P18 Entirely Fogged in Black

Problems
All of the four colors are printed all over the
page resulting in completely black printout.
This occurs due to disconnection of connector
(A) from LV/HVPS.

WIRE ASSY BCR
LV/HVPS
P/J514
(BCR)
Step
Check
HVPS and connector (P/J514) on BCR are
connected properly.
print.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No

possible parts that
caused the error.
Printer
274
Revision C
FIP-P19 Entirely Thin
T2
(2BTR)
Problems
Strong faintness occurs on entire surface. This
occurs due to disconnection of connector
(F) from PWBA HVPS.
WIRE ASSY 2BTR
PWBA HVPS
Step
Check
Yes
No
Check connector of PWBA HVPS.

possible parts that
Check connection of connector (P/J505) of
caused the error.
PWBA. Also, make sure that 2ND BTR ASSY
that contacts with T2 shown in the figure left is
correctly attached.
print.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
275
Revision C
FIP-P20 Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction

Problems
Uneven density in the horizontal direction in
high-density color areas (color is faint in a
stripe pattern) is occurring. This occurs due to
disconnection of connector (G) from PWBA
HVPS.
WIRE ASSY IBT
PWBA HVPS
P/J513
(IBT)
Step
Check
Check the connectors for PWBA HVPS.
Make sure that the connector (P/J506) on
PWBA and the connector (P/J513) on IBT are
connected properly.
print.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No

possible parts that
caused the error.
Printer
276
Revision C
FIP-P21 Vertical White Lines

(Location of the lines are same between Y, M, C and K)
Step
Check
Yes
No

Unit .
Replace the Photoconductor Unit.
Print the problem image, or execute a test print.

possible parts that
Replace the ROS ASSY
caused the error.
Problems
Vertical white lines appear on each of C, M and Y printout printed in solid 30%
half tone, and the location of the lines are same between the three printouts.
It is caused by dirt on the ROS ASSY window, dust or foreign material inside the
ROS ASSY, or a scratch on the Photoconductor drum.
1.
2.
Photoconductor Unit
ROS ASSY
Step
Check
Yes
No
Clean the ROS ASSY window.

Clean ti using ROS-CLEANER.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
277
Revision C
FIP-P22 Vertical White Lines

(Locations of the lines are different between Y, M, C and K)
FIP-P23 Horizontal Lines
Problems
Vertical white lines appear on each of C, M and Y printout printed in solid 30%
half tone, and the location of the lines are different between the three printouts.
Problems
Horizontal lines appear on the same position every time a color print is made. On a
B/W print, the position is different from a color print. It is caused by dirt on the
Photoconductor Unit.
1.
1.
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (Y, M, C, K)
Step
Check
Yes
Step
No
Check of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE

End of procedure Replace "ESS and
possible parts that
Replace the corresponding HOUSING ASSYcaused the error".
DEVE.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Photoconductor Unit
Printer
Check
Yes
No
Check after replacement of Photoconductor End of procedure Replace "ESS and

Unit .
possible parts that
caused the error".
278
Revision C
FIP-P24 Stain
FIP-P25 Colored Dots at 150mm Pitch
Problems
Stains appear on the same position every time a color print is made.
The position changes when a B/W print is made.
It is caused by dirt on the Photoconductor Unit.
Problems
Colored dots appear spacing 150mm between them.
On a color printout, all the Y, M, C and K colored dots appear in a line and
position of them shift by page.
It is caused by a scratch on the Photoconductor Unit.

1.
Photoconductor Unit
Step
Check
Yes
1.
No
Step

Unit .
possible parts that
caused the error".
TROUBLESHOOTING
Photoconductor Unit
Printer
Check
Yes
No

Unit .
possible parts that
caused the error".
279
Revision C
FIP-P26 Vertical Two Lustered Streaks on the Center of OHP
FIP-P27 5mm-width Horizontal Bands at 84.5mm Intaervals
Problems
On a printed tranceparency two vertical white lines appear on a printed
tranceparency.
It is caused by Kick Roll failure in the FUSER ASSY.
Problems
When the product has not been used for a month or longer, 5mm-width lustered
vertical bands appear especially when printing a high resolution image on a
trasparency or coated paper.

1.
NOTE: Do not replace the FUSER ASSY immediately.

The symptom may disappear as the printer is used for while.
FUSER ASSY
Step
Check
Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY.
W A R N IN G

Yes
1.
No

possible parts that
caused the error".
FUSER ASSY
Step
1
Replace the FUSER ASSY.
Check
Check after replacement of FUSER ASSY.
W A R N IN G

Yes
No

possible parts that
caused the error".
Replace the FUSER ASSY.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
280
Revision C
3.4.6 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble

3.4.6.1 Abnormal noise-related troubleshooting entry chart
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
281
Revision C
3.4.6.2 Abnormal Noise-ralated FIP
Step
FIP-N1 At Power On
10
MOT ASSY ROT
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
MOT ASSY MICRO
2ND BTR ASSY
Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY P/R
FRAME ASSY-PH
ROLL MSI
Check
Is abnormal noise being generated from
ROLL REGI RUBBER in FRAME ASSYPH that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
Yes
Clean or replace
ROLL ASSYREGI.
No
Go to Step [10].

Clean or replace
ROLL MSI that is driven by MOTOR-PH? ROLL MSI.
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No
1
2
Is abnormal noise being generated by MOT Replace MOT

ASSY ROT?
ASSY ROT.
3
4

ASSY MICRO?
ASSY MICRO.
Go to Step [4].
Is abnormal noise being generated by 2ND

BTR ASSY that is driven by MOT ASSY
MICRO?
Go to Step [5].
5
6

ASSY P/R?
ASSY P/R.
Go to Step [6].

inside Photoconductor Unit?
Replace
Photoconductor
Unit.
Go to Step [7].
7
8
Is abnormal noise being generated by

MOTOR-PH inside FRAME ASSY-PH?
Replace FRAME Go to Step [8].

ASSY-PH.

FRAME ASSY-ROTARY that is driven by
MOT ASSY ROT?
Clean or replace Go to Step [3].

FRAME ASSYROTARY.
Clean or replace
2ND BTR
ASSY.

Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI in FRAME ASSY- ROLL ASSYPH that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
PRE REGI.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Go to Step [2].
Go to Step [9].
Printer
282
Revision C
FIP-N2 At Standby
MOT ASY FSR
FUSER ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY

Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

MOT ASSY FSR?
(It rotates when the temperature of FUSER
ASSY reaches the specified value)
Replace MOT
ASSY FSR.
Go to Step [2].

FUSER ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is
driven by MOT ASSY FSR?
Clean or replace
FUSER ROLL.
Go to Step [3].
Is abnormal noise being generated from 2ND Clean or replace

2ND BTR
FSR?
ASSY.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Printer
283
Revision C
FIP-N3 At Printing (One Side)
Step
7
8

FRAME ASSY-PH
ROLL MSI
MOT ASY FSR
FUSER ASSY
2ND BTR ASSY
MOT ASSY P/R
Photoconductor Unit
MOT ASSY MAG
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
MOT ASSY ROT
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
MOT ASSY MICRO
FRAME ASSY-2ND
ROS ASSY
Troubleshooting
Step
Check
Yes
No

Replace 500
Go to Step [2].
DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY FEEDER ASSY
OPTION?
OPTION.

Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 that is driven by
ROLL ASSY
DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY TURN 500.
OPTION?
Go to Step [3].

Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY FEED 500 that is driven by
ROLL ASSY
DRIVE ASSY FEED in 500 FEEDER ASSY FEED 500.
OPTION?
Go to Step [4].
4
5

MOTOR-PH inside FRAME ASSY-PH?
Go to Step [6].

ROLL REGI RUBBER in FRAME ASSYPH that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
Go to Step [7].
Clean or replace
ROLL REGI
RUBBER.
Printer
Yes
No
Go to Step [8].

GEAR ASSY DRIVE that is driven by
MOTOR-PH?

ASSY-PH.
9
10

MOT ASSY FSR?
Replace MOT
ASSY FSR.

FUSER ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is
driven by MOT ASSY FSR?

ASSY.
11
Is abnormal noise being generated from 2ND Clean or replace

2ND BTR
FSR?
ASSY.
Go to Step [12].
12
Is abnormal noise being generated by EXIT Clean or replace

ROLL in FUSER ASSY that is driven by
FUSER ASSY.
MOT ASSY FSR?
Go to Step [13].
13
14

ASSY P/R?
ASSY P/R.
Go to Step [14].

inside Photoconductor Unit?
Go to Step [15].
15
16

ASSY MAG?
ASSY MAG.
17
18

ASSY ROT?
ASSY ROT.

HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K, HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE Y, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
M, or HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C that are
driven by MOT ASSY MAG?

ASSY-PH.

Clean or replace
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI in FRAME ASSY- ROLL ASSYPH that is driven by MOTOR-PH?
PRE REGI.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check

Clean or replace
ROLL MSI that is driven by MOTOR-PH? ROLL MSI.

FRAME ASSY-ROTARY that is driven by
MOT ASSY ROT?
Replace
Photoconductor
Unit.
Go to Step [10].
Go to Step [16].
Replace
Go to Step [17].
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE K,
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE Y,
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE M,
or HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE C.
Go to Step [18].

ASSYROTARY.
284
Step
Check
Revision C
Yes
19
20

ASSY MICRO?
ASSY MICRO.
21
Is abnormal noise being generated by ROS

ASSY?
No
Go to Step [20].

FRAME ASSY-2ND that is driven by MOT ASSY-2ND.
ASSY MICRO?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace ROS
ASSY.
Printer
285
Revision C
3.5 Scanner/ADF Section
FIP-2
This section explains about troubleshooting concerning scanner/ADF sections by

dividing them into two categories; error messages and surface phenomena.
Panel Message
3.5.1 FIP by Message Display
Table 3-13. List of Scanner/ADF Section Errors

Panel Message
Description
FIP
The carriage does not move to the predefined

position when turning on the scanner or performing
initialization to start scanning.
1 (p.286)
1.
ADF cover
2.
Cover open sensor
Troubleshooting
Step
Cover Open Error
2 (p.286)
ADF Jam
Paper loaded in the ADF could not be fed properly.
3 (p.287)
Service Req C2011
The ADF is not installed (Fax model only).
4 (p.287)
FIP-1
1.
Carriage Lock Lever for transportation
Yes
No
Close the cover and

follow the description
displayed on the panel.
Go to Step [2].
If the error still occurs even after

closing the cover, start the MFP
maintenance mode and perform
Self Diagnos - Scanner. Does
opening/closing the cover change
the status (OPEN/CLOSE)
indicated beside the Cover:?
End of procedure
Go to Step [3].
Is the ADF cover protrusion

(designed to activate the Cover
Open sensor) damaged?
Replace the ADF cover Replace the Cover Open

(p.495)
sensor incorporated in
the ADF unit.
Point to be checked
Is the ADF cover of the ADF
section open?
Panel Message
Cover Open Error
Troubleshooting
Step
Point to be checked
Yes
Is the Carriage Unit in the scanner

still locked by the Carriage Lock
Lever?
Is the Carriage Lock Lever in the

Move the lever to
lock position despite the carriage unlock position and
is not in the position to be locked? follow the description
TROUBLESHOOTING
Move the lever to

unlock position and
follow the description
No
Go to Step [2].
Scanner/ADF Section
286
Revision C
FIP-3
FIP-4
Panel Message
Panel Message
ADF Jam
Service Req C2011
1.
Edge guide
1.
The cable that connects ADF unit to the scanner main unit.
2.
Pick-up roller
2.
FFC cable
Troubleshooting
Step
Point to be checked
Troubleshooting
Yes
No
Is the document skewed because the Place the edge guide in

edge guide is not set along the paper the right position.
correctly?
Is the document nonstandard?
3
4
Are there any paper dust, labels, or Remove the foreign

foreign materials in the paper path? materials.
Go to Step [4].
Is there any accumulation of paper Clean the roller surface

dust on the Pick-up roller surface of (wipe the roller surface
the ADF?
with soft cloth wrung
out of water).
Go to Step [5].
Does the paper slip when being

transferred because the Pick-up
roller of the ADF is worn out?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Step
Point to be checked
Yes
Go to Step [2].
Is the cable that connects ADF unit Connect the cable

to the scanner main unit
correctly.
disconnected?
If possible, place the

Go to Step [3].
document not in the
ADF but on the
document glass directly
and start scanning.
Is the FFC cable disconnected from Connect the cable

CN704 connector on the main
correctly.
board?
No
Go to Step [2].
Replace the Pick-up

roller (p.507)
Scanner/ADF Section
287
Revision C
3.5.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms
SCANNER/ADF SECTION DOES NOT OPERATE
This section explains about troubleshooting for typical troubles relating to the scanner/
ADF sections.

1.
HP detection plate
2.
Carriage motor
Table 3-14. Troubleshooting for Scanner/ADF by Symptom

Trouble
Operation failure
Description
Scanner/ADF section does not
operate
Image is not scanned Vertical bands appear when

correctly
scanning the document on the
document glass.
(vertical=carriage scanning
direction)
Vertical bands (paper feeding
direction) appear when scanning
the document using the ADF.
Remedy
Troubleshooting
(p.288)
Clean the reflecting light receiving

window on the carriage removing
dust or any foreign material on it. If
the foreign materials are inside the
carriage and cannot be removed,
replace the carriage itself.
Clean the ADF scanning window
located beside the document table
and remove dust or any foreign
material on it. If the foreign
materials are inside the carriage and
cannot be removed, replace the
carriage itself.
Step Point to be checked
Image failure as shown below

occurs
Too light or dark
(too much density)
Odd colors
Dark/Too bright
Letters and figures cannot be
copied clearly
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the panel settings below and

change them according to the paper
characteristics.
Document type
Density
Contrast
R/G/B
Refer to 1.2.2.5 Consumables/
Periodic Replacement Unit (p37)
Remedy
Warm up operation The possible cause of this error may be fluorescent lamp trouble
failure
and the steps below should be followed.
Is NG displayed
1. Confirm if CN702 connector on the main board is connected
beside Warm up:?
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
2. Confirm if the FFC cable is connected to the CCD sensor
board on the carriage unit properly (reconnect the cable as
necessary).
Origin correction
failure
Is NG displayed
beside Correct:?
Scanner carriage
The possible cause of this error may be carriage motor operation
motor driving failure trouble and the steps below should be followed.
Is NG displayed
1. Confirm if the timing belt is strained correctly as well as the
beside Motor:?
carriage moves smoothly (Fix them as necessary)
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
3. Confirm if there are any problems with the carriage motor
(replace the motor if a defect is found) Motor coil resistance
value: 10.9 7% (10.1-11.7 ).
Black dots and white dots appear

Clean the document glass surface
when scanning the document on the (both front and back side) and
document glass.
remove the foreign materials.
Image is not copied
correctly
Start the MFP Maintenance mode, and perform Self diagnosis Scanner to see if there are any problems with the listed items below.
Scanner/ADF Section
The possible cause of this error may be home position detection

trouble and the steps below should be followed.
1. Confirm if there are any problems with the HP detection board
that is mounted on the HP side of the scanner unit lower case
(displacement, damage), and replace the HP detection board if a
defect is found .
2. Confirm if the cable is connected to the HP sensor board on the
carriage unit properly (reconnect the cable as necessary).
properly (reconnect the cable as necessary)*.
288

Note *:
Revision C
If CN701 connection failure occurs, NG is displayed for Motor:. (Due to the

connection failure, the carriage motor does not operate, and the carriage cannot
move and failed to detect its home position during HP seek operation. As a result, the
malfunction is judged as motor failure.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Scanner/ADF Section
289
Revision C
3.6 Fax Function

3.6.1 Troubleshooting by Panel Message
Table 3-15. Fax Error Messages and the Remedies
Error Message
Description
Remedy
Fax Error
Fax unit failure

Reboot the product to check if the error recurs. If the error recurs, the fax unit is faulty and servicing
An error occurs while performing R/W check of SDRAM at power-on is required.
Failed to write into Flash Memory for fax unit.
An error occurs while performing SUM check of Flash Memory at
power-on
Detects an error in MODEM of fax unit
Fax Communication
Error
This message is displayed when the product failed to send/receive a fax Check the followings for any problem and perform corrective actions if required.
normally for some reason.
Connection status of the telephone line
Current Fax Settings in Setup Mode
If the error still occurs frequently even after checking and performing corrective actions for the above
items, reboot the product in "Maintenance mode" with reference to 3.6.4.2 Log Information
(p297), and print "Activity Report" or "Fax Setting List". Check the error code printed on the report
or list. See Section 7.7.2 Error List (p673) for the information on the error, and perform
corresponding corrective actions.
Set Document to ADF This error occurs if paper size is set to "Legal" when sending a fax with Check the condition of the ADF Unit, or load the document on the ADF and resume the sending
the ADF is in the conditions listed below. Because feeding/scanning the operation.If the error occurs even when the ADF unit condition and paper setting are correct, it may
"Legal" size is available only with the ADF due to the specification.
be caused by sensor failure. Check the following sensors and replace them if necessary.
No document is loaded on the ADF
ADF COVER Sensor
The ADF is open
ADF Sensor
The ADF Cover is open
DOC Sensor
Report Print Error
When one of the following items in "Printing Report" menu, which is

activated by pressing [Advanced] button in fax mode, is executed, the
message is displayed if no corresponding information exist.
Speed Dial List
Memory Job Info
Cannot Send when

Receiving
This message is displayed when attempting to send a fax during receiving Send the fax after the receiving job is finished.
a fax is in progress.
Cannot Fax cause of

Power Off Report
This message is displayed if an unprinted power-off report exists when

attempting to send a fax.
TROUBLESHOOTING
---
Wait for the power-off report to be printed out and then resume the sending operaion.
C H E C K
P O IN T
If the power is turned off with unprinted data stored in the memory, a power-off report is
printed out automatically the next time the power is turned on.
Fax Function
290
Revision C
Communication errors occur
3.6.2 Troubleshooting by Symptoms
Communication errors occur frequently regardless of recipient or destination
This section describes troubleshooting for fax function troubles by symptom.

Dialing is not performed
Check Point
The product does not start to dial by pressing [Color Start] or [B/W Start] after
specifying the recipient.
Check Point
Corrective Action
Check the setting of phone line type

Correct the setting.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] - [Basic PBX (Private Branch Exchange):
Settings] - [Line type] in Setup mode.
Accesses to public line via private
branch exchange
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network): Accesses to public line
directly
Check the setting of dial type

Correct the dial type setting.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] - [Basic Tone: Push-button (digital phone
Settings] - [Dial type] in Setup mode.
signal)
10 pps or 20 pps: Dial pulse (analog
phone signal)
Check the GND connection status.

Check if the product is properly grounded
(GND connection).
Correct the GND connection properly.
Check the signal output level.

Check if changing the following system
parameter setting works.
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL (300-006)
Reboot the product in MFP Maintenance

mode, and change the settings using the
[Fax Maintenance] - [Parameter Check][Parameter write] function.
-10dBm (default) => XX
Changing the following parameter settings
also may work.
COM_TX_CABLE_EQU (310-056)
COM_RX_CABLE_EQU (310-057)
Cannot receive a fax

The product does not receive faxes at all.
Check Point
Corrective Action
Check the setting of reception mode.

Change the setting to auto switch or fax
only.
Check the setting of [Fax Settings] [Reception Settings] - [Reception mode] in
Setup mode if it is set to phone only.
Check the ring frequency setting.

When using PBX, check if the minimum/
maximum setting values for ring frequency
is appropriate.
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN (300-015)
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX (300-016)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Corrective Action
Communication errors occur with a specific recipient or destination.

Check Point
Corrective Action
Collect information on the

communication errors.
1. Print an Activity Report using [Printing
Report] menu (In fax mode, press
[Advanced] button to access the menu).
2. Get the backup data (retrieve it using
Fax Maintenance Tool).
Report the collected information to the

predetermined contact point to be analyzed.
See 3.6.4.1 MFP Maintenance Tool
(p295)
Reboot the product in MFP Maintenance

mode, and change the settings using the
[Fax Maintenance] - [Parameter Check][Parameter write] function.
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN:
14 mx (default) => XX
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX:
100 ms (default) => XX
Fax Function
291
Revision C
Fax function operation is unstable.
Check Point
Corrective Action
Unstable operation of fax function may be

caused by improper system parameter
settings (they might have been overwritten
incorrectly).
Initialize the system parameter settings. Be

sure to follow the procedure given below
not to erase the user-defined information.
1. Backup the information set by the user
using the Fax Maintenance Tool.
2. Initialize the system parameter settings
using the menu in the MFP Maintenance
mode.
3. Download the backup copy of the user
information.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
292
Revision C
3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies

Table 3-16. List of Troubles and Remedies
Trouble
Dialing troubles using
PBX system
Symptom
Possible Cause
The product does not start dialing.
The dial tone setting is not appropriate.
The product fails to dial despite the fact

there is no trouble on the receiving end.
The parameter settings for pulse dialing (Make

time/Break time) to be recognized by a PBX are
not appropriate.
The parameter settings for tone dialing (Tone time)
to be recognized by a PBX are not appropriate.
The product does not receive a fax.
The parameter settings relating to Ring (frequency,

cadence, etc.) are not appropriate.
The product cannot achieve high-speed

communication.
It is attributed to the PBX characteristic.
Communication errors and incorrect

printing of faxes occur frequently.
Occurrence of a specific tone at regular intervals

by the PBX causes the symptom.
Communication errors Communication errors and incorrect

with overseas recipient printing of faxes occur frequently.
Transmitting troubles Cannot establish the communication with

from other fax
the product.
machines to the product
Multiple pages cannot be transmitted at a
time (one page only)
Troubles depend on
environment
configurations
Check Point
Remedy
Check the PBX setup and system

Change the corresponding system
parameter setting of the product.
parameter settings according to the
(To see the system parameter setting, PBX setup.
execute Read backup data using the
Fax Maintenance Tool.)
It is attributed to the line quality.

(echo, noise)
Call the recipient to check the line

quality.
(Use another communication

method)
The fax-signal level is too low.
Get the communication protocols log

and analyze it.

parameter settings.
The protocols do not meet the ITU-T standard.

and analyze it.

parameter settings.

and analyze it.

parameter settings.
Check the connection status.
Correct the improper connection

method.
Occurrence of a particular tone

A complex fax, such as one with many

graphics, cannot be transmitted.
Cannot establish the communication.
The recipient is using a signal analyzer, coder, or

any other special devices to receive a fax.
Abnormal operation occurs when receiving A phone/fax auto switch device is used.
faxes and dialing.
Troubles depend on the Abnormal operation occurs when receiving Too many devices are parallel-connected.
installation status
faxes and dialing.
Accessing to phone line cannot be made.
The interior wiring is not correct (improper

connection).
The product gets disconnected upon starting The LINE/TEL is connected reversely.
to receive a fax.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
293
Revision C
Table 3-16. List of Troubles and Remedies
Trouble
Symptom
Troubles depend on the When receiving a fax from a certain fax

printer/scanner section machine, one page of the fax is always
divided into two or more pages.
Possible Cause
The sending fax machine has trouble to feed the
documents.
(miss-feed, skew-feed)
Check Point
Remedy
Confirm the condition of the sending

fax machine.
Ask the sender to fix the trouble.
Check the scanner and ADF if they

operate normally.
If any problems are found, fix them.
The document scanning range of the sending fax

machine is too wide.
Number of lines/page setting of the sending fax
machine exceeds a standard level due to additional
header.
Regular-sized one page transmitted from
the product is divided into two or more
pages on the receiving fax machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The product has trouble to feed the documents.

(miss-feed, skew-feed)
Fax Function
294
Revision C
3.6.4 Collecting Error Information

The AcuLaser CX11F has functions to monitor fax jobs and store detailed job and error
histories that are important to analyze fax-relating troubles. The stored information can
be printed out in a variety of forms using the menu function and can be retrieved using
a special tool. According to the facing trouble, select the functions to be used to get
enough information to analyze the trouble.
3.6.4.1 MFP Maintenance Tool
When fax troubles especially due to environment configuration occur, get the error
information using [Trouble Info Collection] function to provide it to the analyzing
department. For details on the tool, refer to 5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data
(p544). The table below shows the information that can be obtained using the function.
Table 3-17. List of Information Obtained by the Tool
Info Name
Description
System error history
Date and time of error occurrence and the error codes (Hex).
Internal error history
Date and time of error occurrence and the error codes (Hex).
The MFP Maintenance Tool allows fax-relating user-established data stored on the
product to be retrieved and stored into a computer and rewritten into the product. The
intended purpose of the tool is to backup the user data in case of product failure which
requires a replacement unit.
System parameter settings
Prints out a list of current system parameter settings.
Communication jobs
Fax jobs stored in the backup data (up to 54 jobs) are sorted by
the parameter and printed out as a list.
Counter
Prints out a list of counter label names and counter settings
TOOL FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW
SW version
The current S/W version installed on the fax unit is displayed.
[User data] Menu
Downloads the user data into a computer.

Retrieves the user-established setups and data stored on the product and writes
them into a computer.
Uploads the user data into the product (fax unit).

Rewrites the user data into the product.
[Trouble Info Collection] Menu
Retrieves a backup data.

This function is intended to collect error information on the product. The error
information can be retrieved and stored into a computer as a file.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
295
Revision C
TROUBLE INFO COLLECTION (OBTAINING BACKUP DATA)

PROCEDURE
1.
Click on the Trouble Info Collection tab and click the [Start] button.
2.
Specify the destination to save and enter a name for the file.
3.
When retrieving the backup data is finished, a message notifying the completion of
the task is displayed.
A backup data file is stored on the specified destination when the process is completed
normally.
Specify the
destination to save
and file name
Repeats number of
times same as the
number of fax jobs
Figure 3-7. Trouble Info Collection Screen
Figure 3-8. Backup Data
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
296
Revision C
3.6.4.2 Log Information
Table 3-18. Contents of the Fax Setting List (in fax mode)
NO.
Detailed information about troubles on transmitting/receiving faxes also can be

obtained by the following method.
FAX SETTING LIST
In fax mode, press the [Advanced] button to enter the Printing Report menu. Select
the Fax Setting List in the menu and execute it. Current fax settings for the items
indicated in Table 3-18 are listed and printed out.
The product (fax unit) can be started up in Maintenance Mode by changing a certain
parameter setting. If the above operation is performed in Maintenance Mode, the
following items are added to the Fax Setting List. See 3.6.4.3 System Parameter
Settings (p301) on how to change the parameter setting.
Item
Line Type
Dial Mode
Personal Number
Personal Name
Speaker Volume
Country
Auto Redialing Times
Sender Record
Answering Mode
10
Ring Response Time
11
Activity Report
12
Transmission Report
Total counts of transmitted pages
13
Multi. Trans. Report
Total counts of received pages
14
Total counts of transmitted pages in G3 mode (successful jobs)
Software Version
Fax
Modem
Total counts of transmitted pages in G3 mode (Unsuccessful jobs)
Total counts of received pages in G3 mode (successful jobs)
Total counts of received pages in G3 mode (Unsuccessful jobs)
Job Counter Information
System Error History
Number of error occurrences
Date and time of error occurrence
Error code
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
297
Revision C
The product can be started up in [Maintenance Mode] by changing the parameter

setting as follows.
The system parameter:
Maintenance code (Main-Sub):
Setting value:
TROUBLESHOOTING
SYS_MACHINE_MODE
300-028
0 = Normal mode (default)
1 = Maintenance mode
Fax Function
298
Revision C
Note : The Job Counter and the Error History are added in the Maintenance Mode.
Fax Setting List

Fax/Report Settings
Line Type
Dial Mode
Personal Number
Personal Name
Speaker Volume
Country
Auto Redialing Times
Sender Record
Answering Mode
Ring Response Time
DRPD
Activity Report
Transmission Report
Multi Trans. Report
PSTN
10PPS
0XXXXXXXXX
EPSON
1
Japan
5times
ON
Fax Only
10sec.
Normal
Never Output
OFF
only when an error occurs
Software Version
FAX
Ver. 0003 (BOOT1)

Ver. 0004 (BOOT2)
Ver. 0003 (User)
5K6E6E01
Modem
Corresp. Counter
Total Pages Sent
Total Pages Received
G3 Pages Sent (OK)
G3 Pages Rcvd (OK)
G3 Pages Sent (Prblm)
G3 Pages Rcvd (Prblm)
Error History
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
12443
3456
780
23
3
0
Time Occurred
03/05/04 10:33
03/05/05 21:09
03/05/05 23:45
Error Code
006-350
006-350
006-350
Figure 3-9. Sample of Fax Setting List
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
299
Revision C
PROTOCOL MONITOR LIST

Protocol Monitor
Changing a certain system parameter setting is required to print the Protocol Monitor
List.
When a fax transmitting/receiving job is performed with the list printing enabled,
control protocols (ITU-T.30 protocols) used for the jobs are monitored and printed out
for every job.Verifying the protocols (signals, commands) printed on the list enables to
analyze an error occurrence timing and status.
Date/Time
Personal Number
Personal Name
: 03/05/06 11:33
: 0XXXXXXXXX
: EPSON
Transmission Information
Start Time
05/03 11:36
Software Version
FAX
The contents of the list are as follows.

Common header
Trace Data
LAPTIME
Software version
002
010
01:6
048
051
064
074
084
100
Trace data
Lap time
Transmitted signal names
Direction (transmitting or receiving)
Received signal names
FCF (Facsimile Control Field)
FIF (Facsimile Information Field)
:
:
:
:
:
144592
TtlTime
145
Pages
1/1
Mode
SG3
Result
0000
Comm.
FCF
FIF
40
80
43
83
30323632383531323136
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
84
xxxxxxxx
Contents
Ver.0003 (BOOT1)
Ver.0003 (BOOT2)
Ver.0003 (User)
5K6E6E01
Modem
Fax job result information
Destination Station
0XXXXXXXXX
LOCAL
ANSam
CSI
DIS
CFR
REMOTE
TSI
DCS
TCF
PIN
PPS. NULL
:
:
:
:
:
DCN
BF00
The [Protocol Monitor List] can be printed out by changing the parameter setting as
follows.
The system parameter:
Maintenance code (Main-Sub):
Setting value:
REP_PROTOCOL_OUT
330-001
0 = Not print (default)
1 = Only when an error occurs
2 = Print always
Figure 3-10. Sample of Protocol Monitor List
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
300
Revision C
3.6.4.3 System Parameter Settings

When changing system parameter settings is required to print Fax Setting List or
Protocol Monitor List as described on the previous section, and when changing the
settings is required for troubleshooting as indicated in 3.6.2 Troubleshooting by
Symptoms (p291) and 3.6.3 Other Troubles and the Remedies (p293) , follow the
procedure given below.
C A U T IO N
Some of the system parameter settings are restricted according

to the regulations or standards of the country or region. To
prevent those settings from being changed by mistake,
changing system parameter settings that are not described in
this manual is prohibited.
Be sure to observe the specified setting range for the system
parameter. Setting a value out of the range is not guaranteed.
If a malfunction of the fax operation occurs due to the
improper setting, the system parameter should be initialized.
See 3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
5.
Enter the Maintenance Code; Main code and Sub code of the target parameter in
the entry screen as shown in Step 3..
6.
Confirm the setting values for the target system parameter, and enter a proper
value beside the VALUE (HEX):.
7.
After confirming OK is displayed beside the Result:, turn the product off.
8.
Reboot the product and perform required operaions.
SETTING EXAMPLE
When changing Tone level to fix frequent communication errors (Communication
errors occur (p.291)).
Corresponding parameter name:

Maintenance Code:
Setting value:
STEP
1.
Start up the product in MFP Maintenance Mode.

See 3.3 MFP Maintenance Mode (p133)
2.
Select Fax Maintenance.

See 3.3.2 Fax Maintenance (p137)
3.
Select Parameter Check and execute Write data.

See 3.3.2.3 Parameter Check (p140)
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL
MAIN = 300
SUB = 006
5 through 15
(Default = 10)
MAIN
SUB
4.
See 7.7.1 List of System Parameter (p649) to find a target system parameter
name (label).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Function
301
CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Revision C
4.1 Overview
4.1.1 Precautions
The precautions below (WARNING and CAUTION), must always be followed during
disassembly and assembly.
This section describes procedures for disassembling the main components of the
product. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure.
W A R N IN G
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described
under the heading WARNING.
CAUTION signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to
equipment.
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading CHECK POINT.
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, the
correct procedure is described under the heading REASSEMBLY.
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described under
the heading ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED.
When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer
to the exploded diagrams in the appendix.
Overview
Disconnect the power cable before disassembling or assembling

the printer. If you need to work on the printer with power
applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual.
Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid
injury from sharp metal edges.
To protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static
discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when
accessing internal components.
Never replace the fuse on the Power Supply Board in any
circumstances.
Be aware that letting the laser beam get into your eye directly
could result in loss of vision.
Never open any cover on which a Warning Label for Laser
Beam is attached.
Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone
around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature of
the laser beam.
The Fuser unit and other high-temperature parts remain at
hazardous temperature for a certain period of time even after
stop of operation and turning off of the power. To prevent
suffering a burn, be sure to wait after power turning off until
the temperature of the parts cool down to a safe level, and then
start working on the printer.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
When developer or oil stuck to your skin or clothes, wipe it off
with a dry cloth carefully and wash it off with water
immediately.
303
W A R N IN G
Revision C
Be careful not to let the developer or toner get into your eye or
mouth, and not to inhale it. And also care should be taken for
people around you to prevent them from the same thing.
(Spread a sheet of paper inside and around the printer to
prevent soiling.)
Since there are many different screws, use them in correct
positions. Be extremely careful of the difference between the
screws for resin and those for sheet metal. If the screw for resin
is mistaken for the screw for sheet metal, its threads will be
broken, leading to a crushed screw hole or trouble.
Do not pick up the spilt toner with a vacuum cleaner (for home
use). To do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire
by sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the
floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth
moistened with neural detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot
of spilt toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed
for toner.
W A R N IN G
Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or

adjusting the printer.
Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the
printer. (Refer to Chapter5 for details.)
Leg_Sec001_014EA
Overview
304
Revision C
Turn the printer OFF, and disconnect the power cord before starting work.
4.1.2 Before you start work

This chapter describes the procedures for removing and attaching the main parts of the
printer with the printer broken down into 12 main components according to the parts
list.
Category
Before disassembling the printer, remove Photoconductor Unit.

Before performing work around FUSER ASSY, allow the FUSER ASSY and its
surrounding area to sufficiently cool down.
Take sufficient care during work as exerting unnecessary force may damage parts
or cause them to malfunction.
Disassembly/Reassembly
Reference Page (Section No.)
COVER
p.311 (4.2.2)
Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet when servicing.
MSI
p.332 (4.2.3)
PH ASSY
p.352 (4.2.4)
TRANSFER
p.369 (4.2.5)
XERO
p.390 (4.2.6)
Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from the human body, whenever
possible. When must work without an antistatic wrist band or any other goods for
static protection, touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth before
getting started.
ROS
p.404 (4.2.7)
DEVE
p.407 (4.2.8)
FUSER
p.418 (4.2.9)
DRIVE
p.423 (4.2.10)
ELECTRICAL
p.431 (4.2.11)
500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER
p.445 (4.2.12)
SCANNER
C A U T IO N
After work is finished, use CLEANER ASSY to clean the window of ROS ASSY.
p.484 (4.3)
When performing work on parts controlled as spare parts

which the disassembling procedures are not given in this
manual, fully observe how they are attached before starting
work.
In principle, options must already have been removed before
starting work. However, if there is no need to remove them, it is
allowed to service with them attached.
Overview
305
Revision C
4.1.3 List of Screws

Many types of screws are used on this printer. Do not mistakenly attach them at the wrong positions. Pay special attention when handling screws for plastic and screws for metal
plates. If you mix up these screws, screw holes will be damaged. Screw threads also will be damaged, which may cause further trouble.
C A U T IO N
Positions inscribed with the letter T on the frame indicate screws

for plastic.
Printer Section
Table 4-1. List of screws (Printer)
No.
1
Type
For plastic
Screw
Silver tapping
Application
Shape
Plastic
Rough
Part, Plastic
etc.
For plastic
Screw
Silver tapping with flange
Plastic
Rough
Part, Plastic
etc.
For plastic
Screw
Silver tapping with washer
Plastic
Rough
Part, Plastic
etc.
For metal plate Screw

Metal
plate
How to Recognize Screw Type
Cautions
Silver colored
This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the screw hole, so
Screw threads are rougher than metal plate take care not to screw it diagonally.
TYPE
Screw tip is fine.
Silver colored
take care not to screw it diagonally
With flange
Screw threads are rougher than metal plate
TYPE
Screw tip is fine.
Silver colored
With washer
Screw threads are rougher than metal plate
TYPE
Screw tip is fine.
Silver colored
With flange
Screw tip is slightly fine.

Part, Metal
etc. plate
Overview
306
Revision C
Table 4-1. List of screws (Printer)
No.
5
Type
Application

Shape
How to Recognize Screw Type
Metal
plate
Cautions
Silver colored
With flange
Uniform screw diameter
Part, Metal
etc. plate

Silver
Metal
plate
Silver colored
Part, Metal
etc. plate

Silver with external toothed washer
Metal
plate
Silver colored
With external toothed washer
Part, Metal
etc. plate
Scanner Section
Table 4-2. List of screws (Scanner, ADF)
No.
Type
No.
Type
No.
Type
M3x6mm, S-type, A-head
M3x8mm, S-type, B-head
11 M2x10mm, G-type, P-head
M3x8mm, P-type, A-head
M3x6mm, G-type, C-head,

W/spring washer, W/5 flat washer
12 M3x12mm, P-type, P-head
M3x8mm, S-type, A-head
M3x10mm, B-type, F-head
13 M1.7x6mm, B-Type, F-head
M3x8mm, P-type, B-head
M2x8mm, B-type, P-head
M3x10mm, P-type, B-head
10 M3x6mm, B-type, P-head
4.1.4 Tools
Use only specified tools to avoid damaging the printer.
Name
Commercial Availability
Code
Commercial Availability
Code
Phillips screwdriver No.1
Available
B743800100
Cutting pliers
Available
B740400100
Phillips screwdriver No.2
Available
B743800500
Tweezers
Available
---
Slotted screwdriver
Available
B743000100
E-Ring holder
Available
---
Name
Overview
307
Revision C
Sections in procedures described as In the case of the specification refer to
work to be performed on printers of a specific specification. (Work is not to be
performed on printers that do not fall under this specification.)
4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures

Expressions relating to directions in procedures are defined as follows:
FRONT : Front direction facing the front side of the printer
REAR : Rear direction facing the front side of the printer
LEFT
RIGHT : Right direction facing the front side of the printer
Screws in illustrations are to be loosened and removed using a Phillips screwdriver

unless otherwise specified.
Black arrows in illustrations indicate that the part should be moved in the indicated
direction.
When black arrows are given a consecutive number, this indicates that they should
be moved in the indicated order.
: Left direction facing the front side of the printer
For details on positions of connectors (P/J), refer to APPENDIX (p567)
LEFT
REAR
RIGHT
FRONT
Leg_Sec03_001RA
Figure 4-1. Definition of Printer Orientation
Overview
308
Revision C
4.2 Printer
7)
4.2.1 SCANNER
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the accordion shaped rubber covers (HINGE COVER L, HINGE COVER
R) from the left and right hinge sections.
2.
Remove the COVER ASSY LH. (p324)
3.
Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEG
LH OUTER to the main unit, and remove the COVER LEG LH OUTER from the
main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
4.
Disconnect the five connectors (CN701 to CN705) on the PWBA ESS.
5.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secures the WIRE GROUND of
the SCANNER.
6.
Release the harnesses of the SCANNER from the clamp.
7.
Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the SPRING SC
FFC to the main unit, and remove the SPRING SC FFC from the main unit.
8.
Remove the five screws (silver-with flange-8mm x 4, silver-no flange-8mm x 1)

that secure the SCANNER to the main unit.
9.
Lift the SCANNER straight above the main unit to remove the SCANNER from
the main unit.
5)
4)
8)
Black Tape
HINGE
COVER L
7)
2)-1
2)-1
2)-2
6)-2
6)-1
6)-2
CN702
CN701
NOTE
C A U T IO N
CN705 CN704
6)-1
Be careful not to damage the cable by getting it stuck or hitting it in/

against the components inside the printer when pulling out the cable
from the printer main unit to remove the scanner.
CN704(12 pin)
CN703
FERRITE CORE
CN701(14 pin)
3)
CN702(13 pin)
Leg_03_600RD
Figure 4-2. Removal of SCANNER
Printer
309
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Install the SCANNER on the main unit.
2.
Secure the SCANNER to the main unit with five screws (silver-with flange-8mm x 4,
silver-no flange-8mm x 1).
3.
Secure the SPRING SC FFC to the main unit with the two screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
C A U T IO N
When securing the two SPRING SC FFCs, make sure that the part
of the SCANNER harnesses with black tape are located between the
two SPRING SC FFCs.
4.
Secure the harnesses of the SCANNER with the clamp.
5.
Secure the WIRE GROUND of the SCANNER with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
6.
Connect the five connectors (CN701 to CN705) to the PWBA ESS.

C H E C K
P O IN T
C A U T IO N
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model), removing the

fax module in advance make it easier to connect CN701, CN702, and
CN704 to the PWBA ESS.
The CN701, CN702, and CN704 FFCs are resemble each other
in shape as their pin numbers are so close; 14, 13, and 12
respectively. Be careful not to connect them wrongly.
When reassembling the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model), make
sure to put CN701 (14-pin) and CN702 (13-pin) FFCs through
the FERRITE CORE.
7.
Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm)
to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
8.
Attach the COVER ASSY LH.(p324)
9.
Attach the accordion shaped rubber covers (HINGE COVER L, HINGE COVER
R) to the left and right hinge sections.
Printer
310
Revision C
4.2.2 COVER
9)
4.2.2.1 COVER ASSY TOP

REMOVAL
1.
Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p324)
2.
Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p329)
3.
Remove Fuser ASSY. (p418)
4.
Loosen the two screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening the COVER LEG RH
OUTER to the main unit.
5.
Remove COVER LEG RH OUTER from the main unit.
6.
Slide COVER LEG LH INNER upward and remove it.
7.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm), and remove the STOPPER PLATE.
8.
Remove the 2 E-rings fastening the COVER ASSY TOP to the main unit.
9.
Open COVER ASSY TOP and silde it to the right to remove it.
8)
8)
6)
4)
5)
4)
7)
Leg_Sec03_002RC
Figure 4-3. Removal of COVER ASSY TOP
Printer
311
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach COVER ASSY TOP to the main unit with the COVER ASSY TOP opened.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, use the outer of the two
grooves located on the stud.
2.
Secure STOPPER PLATE to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm).
3.
Fasten COVER ASSY TOP with the 2 E-rings.
4.
Fit COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit.
5.
Secure COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
6.
Fit COVER LEG LH OUTER to the main unit.
7.
Secure COVER SIDE LH ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
8.
Install Fuser ASSY. (p418)
9.
Attach COVER ASSY RH.. (p329)
10. Attach COVER ASSY RH.. (p324)
Printer
312
Revision C
4.2.2.2 TRAY EXTENSION, COVER TRAY
3)-2
3)-1
3)-1
REMOVAL
1.
Draw out COVER TRAY until it comes to a stop.
2.
Open COVER ASSY TOP.
3.
Unhook the hook fastening COVER TRAY to COVER ASSY TOP, and remove
COVER TRAY together with TRAY EXTENSION.
4.
Open TRAY EXTENSION.

C A U T IO N
5.
When performing the following work, take care not to damage the
TRAY EXTENSION boss.
2)
Bend the TRAY EXTENSION boss with a small screw driver or similar tool, and
draw out and remove the TRAY EXTENSION boss from the hole on COVER
TRAY.
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_003EC
Figure 4-4. Removal of TRAY EXTENSION and COVER TRAY (1)

C A U T IO N
1.
TRAY EXTENSION boss.
5)-2
With TRAY EXTENSION opened, insert the boss on one side of the TRAY
EXTENSION into the hole on COVER TRAY, and attach the TRAY
EXTENSION boss on the other side into the hole on COVER TRAY while
bending down the TRAY EXTENSION boss.
2.
Close TRAY EXTENSION.
3.
Align COVER TRAY with the attachment position on COVER ASSY TOP, and
attach COVER TRAY together with TRAY EXTENSION.
4.
Close COVER ASSY TOP.
5.
Push in COVER TRAY gently until it comes to a stop.
4)
5)-1
Leg_Sec03_501EB
Figure 4-5. Removal of TRAY EXTENSION and COVER TRAY (2)
Printer
313
Revision C
4.2.2.3 COVER FUSER

REMOVAL
1.
Open COVER FUSER.
2.
Bow COVER FUSER to pull out its right and left convex potions, and remove the
COVER FUSER.
2)-1
1)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the right and left convex potions of the COVER FUSER.
2.
Close COVER FUSER.
2)-2
LEFT
Protrusion
Leg_Sec03_005EB
Figure 4-6. Removal of COVER FUSER
Printer
314
Revision C
4.2.2.4 COVER TOP SIDE L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove Fuser ASSY. (p418)
3.
Slide COVER LEG RH INNER upward and remove it.
4.
Loosen the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening the COVER LEG LH
INNER to the main unit.
C A U T IO N
5.
3)
The screw fastening the COVER TOP SIDE L is designed not to

come loose from the COVER TOP SIDE L.
4)
5)
Remove COVER TOP SIDE L together with the COVER FUSER GUIDE from
the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on the COVER TOP SIDE L with the boss on the main unit.
2.
Fasten COVER TOP SIDE L to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3.
Fit COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit.
4.
Secure COVER LEG LH INNER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8mm).
5.
Install Fuser ASSY. (p418)
6.
Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p324)
Leg_Sec03_502RC
Figure 4-7. Removal of COVER TOP SIDE L
Printer
315
Revision C
4.2.2.5 COVER TOP SIDE R

4)
REMOVAL
1.
Open the COVER FUSER. (p314)
2.
Open the COVER ASSY TOP.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER TOP SIDE R
to the main unit.
4.
Remove the COVER TOP SIDE R from the main unit.
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on the COVER TOP SIDE R with the boss on the main unit.
2.
Fasten COVER TOP SIDE R to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3.
4.
Close COVER FUSER. (p324)

Leg_Sec03_503EA
Figure 4-8. Removal of COVER TOP SIDE R
Printer
316
Revision C
4.2.2.6 SWITCH ASSY TOP

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unclamp the two clamps fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY TOP, and
remove the harness.
C A U T IO N
Intermediate
connector (Blue)
When performing the following work, leave the intermediate

connector (blue) on the harness side.
4)
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J116, blue) of SWITCH ASSY TOP.
4.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY TOP to
the main unit.
5.
Remove SWITCH ASSY TOP from the main unit.
3)
2)
(Blue)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on SWITCH ASSY TOP with the boss on the main unit, and
attach.
2.
Fasten SWITCH ASSY TOP to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J116, blue) of SWITCH ASSY TOP.
4.
Clamp the harness of SWITCH ASSY TOP with the two clamps.
5.
Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p329)
Leg_03_006EC
Figure 4-9. Removal of SWITCH ASSY TOP
Table 4-3. Symptoms when the connector is loose

Connector No.
Panel Indication
Symptom
Error Caused by Connector

Disconnection
P/J116
B Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
Printer
317
Revision C
4.2.2.7 SWITCH ASSY FRONT
REMOVAL
Connector No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
1.
P/J115
B Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
2.
Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY FRONT and remove
the harness.
P/J116
B Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY FRONT
to the main unit.
4.
Remove SWITCH ASSY FRONT from the main unit.

C A U T IO N

connector (white) on the harness side.
Intermediate
connector (White)
4)
5.
Disconnect connector (P/J115, white) and connector (P/J125) from SWITCH

ASSY FRONT.
5)
3)
2)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Connect connector (P/J115, white) and connector (P/J125) to SWITCH ASSY

FRONT.
2.
Match the hole on SWITCH ASSY FRONT with the boss on the main unit.
3.
Fasten SWITCH ASSY FRONT to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
4.
Fasten the harness of SWITCH ASSY FRONT with the clamp.
5.
5) (White)
Leg_03_504ED
Figure 4-10. Removal of SWITCH ASSY FRONT
Printer
318
Revision C
4.2.2.8 COVER RH, SLIDE BAR, COVER ROS WINDOW

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unhook the four hooks fastening GUIDE BAR to COVER RH, and remove
GUIDE BAR.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER ROS
WINDOW to SLIDE BAR.
4.
5.
5)
Slide COVER ROS WINDOW along the rib of COVER RH, and remove COVER
ROS WINDOW from the protrusion on COVER RH.
2)
Remove SLIDE BAR from COVER RH.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach SLIDE BAR at the attachment position on the rear side of COVER RH.
2)
4)
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, be sure to insert the top and
bottom of COVER ROS WINDOW inside the protrusions on
COVER RH.
2.
Match COVER ROS WINDOW with the attachment position on the rear of
COVER RH, slide COVER ROS WINDOW along the ribs on COVER RH, and
attach COVER ROS WINDOW to SLIDE BAR.
3.
Fasten COVER ROS WINDOW to SLIDE BAR with the screw (silver, with
flange, tapping, 8 mm).
4.
Match the holes on GUIDE BAR with the boss of COVER RH, attach GUIDE
BAR, and fasten by the four hooks.
C A U T IO N
3)
After performing the above work, move SLIDE BAR to make sure
that COVER ROS WINDOW can be opened/closed smoothly.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_007EA
Figure 4-11. Removal of COVER RH, SLIDE BAR and COVER ROS WINDOW
5.
Printer
319
Revision C
4.2.2.9 COVER MSI

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Slide COVER MSI in a slightly open state to the right to remove from the main
unit.
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on COVER MSI with the boss on the main unit with COVER MSI
in a slightly open state, and slide COVER MSI to the left to attach.
2.
2)-2
Leg_Sec03_008EA
Figure 4-12. Removal of COVER MSI
Printer
320
Revision C
4.2.2.10 COVER FRONT L, COVER FRONT ASSY U

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove COVER MSI. (p320)
4.
Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER FRONT L to
the main unit.
5.
Slide COVER FRONT L to the right, unhook the two hooks on the rear of COVER
FRONT L from the holes on the main unit, and remove COVER FRONT L
together with COVER FRONT ASSY U.
C A U T IO N
5)-1
4)
COVER FRONT ASSY U boss.
4)
6.
5)-2
4)
Leg_Sec03_009RB
Figure 4-13. Removal of COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U (1)
Press the bosses on the left and right of COVER FRONT ASSY U by inserting a
screwdriver, and draw out from the holes on COVER FRONT L to remove
COVER FRONT ASSY U from COVER FRONT L.
6)-1
6)-2
Leg_Sec03_010EB
Figure 4-14. Removal of COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U (2)
Printer
321
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
COVER FRONT ASSY U boss.
1.
Match the boss on COVER FRONT ASSY U with the holes on COVER FRONT
L while bending down COVER FRONT ASSY U, and attach COVER FRONT
ASSY U to COVER FRONT L.
2.
Match the two hooks on the rear of COVER FRONT L with the holes on the main
unit, and attach COVER FRONT L together with COVER FRONT ASSY U.
3.
Fasten COVER FRONT L to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
4.
Attach COVER MSI. (p320)
5.
6.
Printer
322
Revision C
4.2.2.11 OP PANEL (CONTROL, PANEL)
4)-2
3)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Open COVER FRONT ASSY U.

C A U T IO N
3)
When performing the following work, take care not to remove OP

PANEL too far as it is connected by a harness.
4)-1
3.
Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening OP PANEL to the main
unit.
4.
Remove the protrusions on the left and right of OP PANEL from COVER RH and
COVER LH while pushing them outward, and slightly remove OP PANEL from
the main unit.
5.
Disconnect connector CN1 and the terminal connected to OP PANEL to remove

OP PANEL.
3)
4)-1
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care to prevent the

harness from being caught between the main unit and OP PANEL.
Leg_Sec03_184RB
Figure 4-15. Removal of OP PANEL

1.
Connect connector CN1 and the terminal to OP PANEL.
2.
While extending COVER RH and COVER LH each to the left and right, put the
protrusions on the left and right of OP PANEL inside COVER RH and COVER
LH, and attach OP PANEL to the main unit.
3.
Fasten OP PANEL to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
4.
Close COVER FRONT ASSY U.
5.
Printer
323
Revision C
4.2.2.12 COVER ASSY LH

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Open COVER MSI.
4.
Remove COVER ESS. (p325)
5.
Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER ASSY LH
to the main unit.
6.
Lift up the COVER ASSY LH, and unhook the 4 hooks on the rear of the COVER
ASSY LH from the holes on the main unit, and remove the COVER ASSY LH.
5)
6)
5)
5)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, firmly insert the protrusion

on the front side of the COVER ASSY LH into the indent on the
COVER FRONT L.
3)
5)
1.
2.
Match the 4 hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LH with the holes on the
main unit while inserting the protrusion on the front side of the COVER ASSY LH
into the concave portion on the COVER FRONT L, and attach the COVER ASSY
LH.
Fasten the COVER ASSY LH to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
3.
Attach COVER ESS. (p325)
4.
Close COVER MSI.
5.
6.
Protrusion
5)
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_011RC
Figure 4-16. Removal of COVER ASSY LH
Printer
324
Revision C
4.2.2.13 COVER ESS

REMOVAL
1.
Loosen the screw fastening COVER ESS to the main unit.
2.
Remove COVER ESS from the main unit.
1)
EINSTALLATION
2)
1.
Match the two protrusions on the bottom side of COVER ESS with the holes on
COVER LH, and attach COVER ESS.
2.
Fasten COVER ESS to the main unit with the screw.
Leg_Sec03_188RA
Figure 4-17. Removal of COVER ESS
Printer
325
Revision C
4.2.2.14 SWITCH ASSY FUSER, SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
7.
Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm) to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY LH. (p324)
8.
Close the COVER FUSER.
9.
2.
Open COVER FUSER.
3.
Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER LEG
4.
Unclamp clamp fastening the harness of SWITCH ASSY FUSER and remove the
harness.
5.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH ASSY FUSER
to the main unit.
6.
Remove SWITCH ASSY FUSER from the main unit.

C A U T IO N

Connector No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J114
C Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
P/J117
C Open
Printing is not
possible.
---

connector on the harness side.
3)-1
7.
Disconnect the connector (P/J117, blue) from the SWITCH ASSY FUSER.
8.
Unhook the two hooks fastening the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR to BRACKET SW

FUSER, and remove the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
9.
Disconnect the connector (P/J114) from the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
7)
3)-1
3)-2
7)
9)
EINSTALLATION
1. Connect the connector (P/J114) to the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR.
2.
Match the hooks on the SWITCH-FUSER DOOR with the attachment position,
and attach to the BRACKET SW FUSER.
3.
Connect the connector (P/J117, blue) to the SWITCH ASSY FUSER.
4.
Match the hole on the SWITCH ASSY FUSER with the boss on the main unit.
5.
Fasten the SWITCH ASSY FUSER to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
6.
Fasten the harness of the SWITCH ASSY FUSER with the clamp.
5)
8)-2
6)
8)-1
Leg_Sec03_012RB
Figure 4-18. Removal of SWITCH ASSY FUSER and SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
Printer
326
Revision C
4.2.2.15 COVER INNER TOP

REMOVAL
1.
Remove OP PANEL. (p323)
2.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening COVER INNER TOP
to the main unit.
3.
2)
3)
2)
Remove COVER INNER TOP from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on COVER INNER TOP with the boss on the main unit.
2.
Fasten COVER INNER TOP to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
3.
Attach OP PANEL. (p323)
Leg_Sec03_187EB
Figure 4-19. Removal of COVER INNER TOP
Printer
327
Revision C
4.2.2.16 SWITCH-FRONT DOOR, SWITCH-INLK FRONT
5)-1
REMOVAL
C H E C K
P O IN T
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and SWITCH-INLK FRONT can each

be removed separately.
1.
2.
Remove SWITCH ASSY FRONT. (p318)
3.
Remove the screw (gold, 8 mm) fastening SWITCH-INLK FRONT to BRACKET

INLK FRONT.
4.
Remove SWITCH-INLK FRONT from BRACKET INLK FRONT.
5.
Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH-FRONT DOOR to BRACKET INLK

FRONT, and remove SWITCH-FRONT DOOR.
5)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hooks on SWITCH-FRONT DOOR with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET INLK FRONT.
2.
Match the hole on SWITCH-INLK FRONT with the boss on BRACKET INLK
FRONT.
3.
Fasten SWITCH-INLK FRONT to BRACKET INLK FRONT with the screw

(gold, 8 mm).
4.
Attach SWITCH ASSY FRONT. (p318)
5.
3)
4)
Leg_Sec03_505EB
Figure 4-20. Removal of SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Printer
328
Revision C
4.2.2.17 COVER ASSY RH

REMOVAL
5)-2
1.
2.
3.
Open COVER MSI.
4.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening the COVER ASSY RH
to the main unit.
5.
Lift up the COVER ASSY RH, and unhook the 4 hooks on the rear of the COVER
ASSY RH from the holes on the main unit, and remove the COVER ASSY RH.
5)-1
4)
4)
REINSTALLATION
3)
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, be sure to insert the

protrusion on the front side of the COVER ASSY RH into the
concave portion on the COVER FRONT L.
4)
4)
Protrusion
1.
While inserting the protrusion on the COVER ASSY RH into the concave portion
on the COVER FRONT L, place the "A" section of the COVER ASSY RH under
the COVER FRONT L as shown in Figure 4-21, and attach the COVER ASSY RH
to the COVER FRONT L with four tabs.
2.
Secure the COVER ASSY RH with the four screws (silver, with flange, 8mm).
3.
Close COVER MSI.
4.
5.
CAUTION
Section A
Leg_Sec03_185RB
Figure 4-21. Removal of COVER ASSY RH
Printer
329
Revision C
4.2.2.18 COVER INNER LOW

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p321)
5.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER INNER L to
the main unit.
6.
Unhook the hook on the rear of COVER INNER L from the hole on the main unit,
and remove COVER INNER L.
5)
REINSTALLATION
6)
1.
Match the hook on the rear of COVER INNER L with the hole on the main unit,
and attach COVER INNER L.
2.
Fasten COVER INNER L to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm).
3.
Attach COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p321)
4.
5.
6.
Printer
5)
Leg_Sec03_186RB
Figure 4-22. Removal of COVER INNER LOW
330
Revision C
4.2.2.19 SWITCH-INLK FUSER

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the COVER LEG
3.
Remove SWITCH ASSY FUSER. (p326)
4.
Remove the screw (silver, 8 mm) that secures the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the
BRACKET SW FUSER.
5.
Remove the SWITCH-INLK FUSER from the BRACKET SW FUSER.
4)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the BRACKET SW FUSER matching the

boss on the BRACKET SW FUSER with the hole of the SWITCH-INLK FUSER.
2.
Secure the SWITCH-INLK FUSER to the BRACKET SW FUSER with the screw
(silver, 8 mm).
3.
Attach SWITCH ASSY FUSER. (p326)
4.
Secure the COVER LEG LH OUTER with the two screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm) to the main unit together with the HINGE COVER L.
5.
Printer
Leg_Sec03_506RA
Figure 4-23. Removal of SWITCH-INLK FUSER
331
Revision C
4.2.3 MSI
6)
4.2.3.1 MSI ASSY

C A U T IO N
6)
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step of

reinstallation.
7)
7)
REMOVAL
9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p355)
6.
Disconnect connector (P/J408) and connector (P/J409) from PWBA MCU.
7.
Unclamp the two clamps on CHASSIS ESS, and disconnect the harness from
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1.
9)
10)-1
CAUTION
10)-2
8.
When a 500-sheet Cassette Unit is installed, turn the LOCK MC TO FDR that is
attached to the unit 90 degrees as shown in Figure 4-24 to unlock the unit from the
main unit.
9.
Remove the 6 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening MSI ASSY to
the main unit.
C A U T IO N
9)

cable tie that bundles the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1
from being caught on the holes, etc. on the main unit.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from being sandwiched between the
main unit and MSI ASSY.
9)
9)
9)
LOCK MC TO FDR
8)
Unlock
Lock
Leg_Sec03_042EC
Figure 4-24. Removal of MSI ASSY
10. Draw out MSI ASSY slightly toward you, lift up MSI ASSY slightly to avoid TIE
PLATE under the main unit, gently draw out MSI ASSY forward again and draw
out HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the hole on the main unit to remove MSI ASSY.
Printer
332
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
Connector No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J408
E Open
Printing is not
possible.
---
P/J409
Service Req E547
Printing is not
possible.
Feeder Moter error

cable tie that bundles the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1
from being caught on the holes, etc. on the main unit.
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from being sandwiched between the
main unit and MSI ASSY.
1.
Gently insert HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 along the left side of MSI ASSY together
with MSI ASSY from the front of the main unit.
2.
Insert MSI ASSY about halfway with the front of MSI ASSY lifted slightly to
avoid TIE PLATE under the main unit, and then bring out the connector of
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the hole on the main unit.
3.
After matching MSI ASSY to the main unit attachment position, gently pull
HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 from the outside to take up any slack inside the main
unit.
[2)-1]
[2)-2]
4.
Fasten MSI ASSY to the main unit with the 6 screws (silver, with flange, tapping,
8 mm).
5.
When a 500-sheet Cassette Unit is installed, turn the LOCK MC TO FDR 90

degrees to the opposite side of the arrow shown in Figure 4-24 to secure the 500sheet Cassette Unit to the main unit.
6.
Connect connector (P/J408) and connector (P/J409) to PWBA MCU.
7.
Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY P/H 1 with the two clamps on CHASSIS
ESS.
8.
Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p355)
9.
[3)]
[1)]
CAUTION
10. Attach COVER MSI. (p320)

11. Attach COVER ASSY LH. (p324)
12. Attach COVER ASSY RH. (p329)
Leg_Sec03_507EC
Figure 4-25. Reinstallation of MSI ASSY
Printer
333
Revision C
4.2.3.2 ROLL ASSY MSI

11)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove MSI ASSY. (p332)
7.
Remove SOLENOID PICK UP. (p347)

C H E C K
P O IN T
Remove the left and right SPRING-N/F MSI hooked on the left and right
BEARING MSI from MSI ASSY.
9.
Remove the E-rings fastening the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI on SHAFT
ASSY MSI from MSI ASSY.
10)
9)
9)
12)
D cut surface
CHECK POINT
When performing the following work, work can be performed more

easily by turning ROLL ASSY MSI in the direction of the arrow to
release CAM PICK UP MSI and to set PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to a raised state.
8.
11)
10)
8)
8)
10. Match the notch of CAM PICK UP MSI with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI to the inside.
Oval
side
11. Match the notch of BEARING MSI with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide the left and right BEARING MSIs to the inside from the left and
right holes of MSI ASSY.
CAUTION
12. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY MSI to the left, and draw out the shaft of ROLL
ASSY MSI from the right-side bearing of MSI ASSY to remove ROLL ASSY
MSI.
Semicircular
CAUTION side
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_054FB
Figure 4-26. Removal of ROLL ASSY MSI
Printer
334
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
1.
2.
3.
When performing the following work, attach with the retainer of

PAPER GUIDE facing down.
Insert the left side of the shaft on ROLL ASSY MSI into the left-side bearing of
MSI ASSY, and then slide ROLL ASSY MSI to the right and attach ROLL ASSY
MSI.
Match the notch of left and right BEARING MSI on ROLL ASSY MSI with the
positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI, and insert BEARING MSI into the left and
right bearings of MSI ASSY to fasten ROLL ASSY MSI in place.
When performing the following work, pay attention to the

attachment direction of SPRING-N/F MSI.
he oval side of the attachment section of SPRING-N/F MSI is
attached to BEARING MSI.
The semi-circular side of the attachment section of SPRING-N/
F MSI is attached to PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
5.
Attach SPRING-N/F MSI to the left and right BEARING MSI.
6.
Attach SOLENOID PICK UP. (p347)
7.
Attach MSI ASSY. (p332)
8.
9.
Match the notch of the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI on ROLL ASSY MSI
with the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI, and slide the left and right CAM
PICK UP MSI to the outside.
C A U T IO N
4.
C A U T IO N

The notch of CAM PICK UP MSI must be properly matched with

the positioning pin of ROLL ASSY MSI.
Fasten the left and right CAM PICK UP MSI to SHAFT ASSY MSI with E-rings
C H E C K
P O IN T

easily by turning ROLL ASSY MSI in the direction of the arrow to
release CAM PICK UP MSI and to set PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to a raised state.
Printer
335
Revision C
4.2.3.3 ROLL MSI

2)-1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unhook the hook on the right-side CORE fastening SHAFT ASSY MSI, and slide
to the right.
3.
Slide ROLL MSI to the right, and draw out the attachment groove of ROLL MSI
from the pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI to remove ROLL MSI from SHAFT ASSY
MSI.
3)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
Arrow
2)-2
Pay attention to the attachment orientation of ROLL MSI. (Attach

with the direction of the arrows indicated on ROLL MSI aligned
with the directions in the illustration.)
1.
Place the U cut section of ROLL MSI on SHAFT ASSY MSI and slide to the left,
and insert the positioning pin of SHAFT ASSY MSI into the notch of ROLL
ASSY to attach ROLL ASSY to SHAFT ASSY MSI.
2.
Slide the right-side CORE to the left, and fasten the CORE hook to the groove on
SHAFT ASSY MSI.
3.
Leg_Sec03_043EA
Figure 4-27. Removal of ROLL MSI
Printer
336
Revision C
4.2.3.4 CHUTE MSI

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Bend down CHUTE MSI, and draw out the right-side boss on CHUTE MSI from
the right-side hole on MSI ASSY to remove CHUTE MSI.
REINSTALLATION
1.
2.
Insert the left-side boss on CHUTE MSI into the left-side hole of MSI ASSY, then
bend down CHUTE MSI, insert the right-side boss of CHUTE MSI, and attach
CHUTE MSI.
2)-1

2)-2
RIGHT
Leg_Sec03_044EB
Figure 4-28. Removal of CHUTE MSI
Printer
337
Revision C
4.2.3.5 GUIDE SIDE L, GUIDE ASSY SIDE R

2)-2
2)-1
REMOVAL
2)-1
1.
Open COVER MSI.
2.
Unhook the hooks fastening the holes at the center of GUIDE SIDE COVER and
the hooks at the left and right of GUIDE SIDE COVER from the holes on FRAME
ASSY BOTTOM, and remove GUIDE SIDE COVER.
3.
Remove GEAR MANUAL from FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
4.
Slide GUIDE SIDE L to the right, remove the protrusion on GUIDE SIDE L from
the attachment section of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and remove GUIDE SIDE L.
5.
Slide the lever of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R to the left, remove the protrusion of
GUIDE ASSY SIDE R from the attachment section of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM,
and remove GUIDE ASSY SIDE R.
3)
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the protrusion of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R with the attachment section of
FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, insert the tension section of GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
into the groove of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and slide the lever of GUIDE ASSY
SIDE R to attach.
2.
Match the protrusion of GUIDE SIDE L with the attachment section of FRAME
ASSY BOTTOM, insert the tension section of GUIDE ASSY SIDE L into the
groove of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and slide GUIDE ASSY SIDE L to the left
to attach.
3.
Open GUIDE ASSY SIDE R and GUIDE ASSY SIDE L as far as possible, and
attach GEAR MANUAL to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
4.
Attach GUIDE SIDE COVER to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, fasten the hooks on
the left and right of GUIDE SIDE COVER, and fasten the hole at the center of
GUIDE SIDE COVER by the hook on FRAME ASSY BOTTOM to attach
GUIDE SIDE COVER.
5.
Close COVER MSI.
Leg_Sec03_045EA
Figure 4-29. Removal of GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R (1)
4)
5)-1
5)-2
Leg_Sec03_046EA
Figure 4-30. Removal of GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R (2)
Printer
338
Revision C
4.2.3.6 PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove SOLENOID PICK UP. (p347)
8.
Remove ROLL ASSY MSI. (p334)
9.
Remove the holes on PLATE BOTTOM 2 from the boss on PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI while extending the attachment sections on the left and right of
PLATE BOTTOM 2.
11)-1
10)-2
REMOVAL
9)
10)-1
11)-2
9)
CHECK POINT
10. Lift up PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI, and remove the holes on the left and right
of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI from the left and right shafts of MSI ASSY.
[2)]
11. Remove the right side of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI from the right-side notch
of MSI ASSY, and remove PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
Leg_Sec03_047FA
Figure 4-31. Removal of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI
Printer
339
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the left side of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI with the attachment position
on the left side of MSI ASSY, and insert the right side of PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI from the notch on the right side of MSI ASSY.
C H E C K
P O IN T

easily by slightly lifting up the rear of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI.
2.
nsert the left and right holes of PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI into the shafts on
the left and right of MSI ASSY, and attach PLATE BOTTOM ASSY MSI.
3.
Insert the holes of PLATE BOTTOM 2 into the boss on PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI to attach while extending the left and right attachment sections of PLATE
BOTTOM 2.
4.
Attach ROLL ASSY MSI. (p334)
5.
Attach SOLENOID PICK UP. (p347)
6.
7.
8.
9.

Printer
340
Revision C
4.2.3.7 HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove CHUTE MSI. (p337)
3.
Unhook the hooks of the PAPER GUIDEs on the left and right sides fastened to
SHAFT ASSY MSI, slide each PAPER GUIDE to the outside, and remove
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE.
4.
Unhook the hooks of CORE on the left and right sides fastening SHAFT ASSY
MSI, and slide each to the outside.
5.
Remove ROLL MSI. (p336)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPRING
RETARD MSI.
4)-1
6.
Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI from FRAME ASSY BOTTOM while
bending down the boss on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI.
4)-2
3)-1
3)-2
4)-2
3)-1
3)-2
4)-1
Leg_Sec03_508EB
Figure 4-32. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (1)
Printer
341
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
1.
When SPRING RETARD MSI has come off from HOLDER ASSY
RETARD MSI, attach SPRING RETARD MSI to the boss on
HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI, and then perform the following
work.
Match SPRING RETARD MSI attached to HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI with
the spring bearing of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and attach the bosses on both
sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI to FRAME ASSY BOTTOM while
bending down the bosses.
C A U T IO N
SPRING RETARD MSI must be properly matched with the boss on

the spring bearing of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
2.
Attach ROLL MSI. (p336)
3.
Slide each of the left- and right-side COREs to the inside, and fasten the CORE
hook to the groove on SHAFT ASSY MSI.
4.
Slide each of the PAPER GUIDEs on the left and right sides to inside, attach
CHUTE ASSY PAPER GUIDE, and fasten the hooks on the PAPER GUIDEs to
the grooves on the SHAFT ASSY MSI.
5.
Attach CHUTE MSI. (p337)
6.
C A U T IO N
6)
CAUTION
Make sure to install the FRAME ASSY-PH correctly by referring

the caution described in the REINSTALLATION of the 4.2.4.4
FRAME ASSY-PH (p.355).
Leg_Sec03_048EB
Figure 4-33. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI (2)
Printer
342
Revision C
4.2.3.8 PLATE ASSY RETARD

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove CHUTE MSI. (p337)
3.
Remove ROLL MSI. (p336)
4.
Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI. (p341) Bend down PLATE ASSY
RETARD, remove the holes on the left and right from the boss on FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM, and remove PLATE ASSY RETARD.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, do not fold or bend PLATE

ASSY RETARD.
5)-1
5)-2
5.
Bend down PLATE ASSY RETARD, remove the holes on the left and right from
the boss on FRAME ASSY BOTTOM, and remove PLATE ASSY RETARD.
Leg_Sec03_049EA
Figure 4-34. Removal of PLATE ASSY RETARD
Printer
343
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, do not fold or bend PLATE

ASSY RETARD.
1.
Match the left and right U grooves of PLATE ASSY RETARD with the bosses on
the front of FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
2.
Turn the bosses aligned with the U-grooves as the fulcrum while bending down
PLATE ASSY RETARD, insert the bosses on the rear side of FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM into the left and right holes of PLATE ASSY RETARD, and attach
PLATE ASSY RETARD.
3.
Attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI. (p341)
4.
Attach ROLL MSI. (p336)
5.
Attach CHUTE MSI. (p337)
6.
[1)]
[2)-1]
[2)-1]
[2)-2]
Leg_Sec03_509EA
Figure 4-35. Reinstallation of PLATE ASSY RETARD
Printer
344
Revision C
4.2.3.9 OIL DAMPER

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unhook the hook on GEAR PICK UP fastened to SHAFT ASSY MSI from MSI
ASSY, and remove GEAR PICK UP.
8.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DAMPER
BRACKET to the MSI ASSY.
9.
7)-1
9)
8)
7)-2
Remove OIL DAMPER together with DAMPER BRACKET from MSI ASSY.
10. Remove OIL DAMPER from DAMPER BRACKET.

8)
10)
Leg_Sec03_200FA
Figure 4-36. Removal of OIL DAMPER
Printer
345
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N

attachment direction of OIL DAMPER.
1.
Match the hole on OIL DAMPER with the boss on DAMPER BRACKET, and
attach OIL DAMPER to DAMPER BRACKET.
2.
Match the hole on DAMPER BRACKET with the boss on MSI ASSY, and attach
OIL DAMPER together with DAMPER BRACKET.
3.
Fasten DAMPER BRACKET to MSI ASSY with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
tapping, 8 mm).
4.
Attach GEAR PICK UP to SHAFT ASSY MSI, and fasten the hook on GEAR
PICK UP to the groove on SHAFT ASSY MSI.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Printer
346
Revision C
4.2.3.10 SOLENOID PICK UP

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unhook the hook on GEAR PICK UP fastened to SHAFT ASSY MSI from MSI
ASSY, and remove GEAR PICK UP.
7)-1
10)
C A U T IO N

9)
8.
Disconnect connector (P/J605) from SOLENOID PICK UP, and remove the
harness from the groove on MSI ASSY.
9.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) fastening SOLENOID PICK UP to MSI
ASSY.
8)
7)-2
[3)]
10. Remove SOLENOID PICK UP from MSI ASSY.
Notch
Groove
Leg_Sec03_050FA
Figure 4-37. SRemoval of SOLENOID PICK UP
Printer
347
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on SOLENOID PICK UP with the boss on MSI ASSY, and attach
SOLENOID PICK UP.
2.
Fasten SOLENOID PICK UP to MSI ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping,
8mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J605) to SOLENOID PICK UP, and route the harness in the
notch and groove on MSI ASSY.
4.
Attach GEAR PICK UP to SHAFT ASSY MSI while pulling the lever on
SOLENOID PICK UP, and fasten the hook on GEAR PICK UP to the groove on
SHAFT ASSY MSI.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Printer
348
Revision C
4.2.3.11 SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

REMOVAL
7)-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unhook the three hooks on SENSOR PAPER EMPTY fastened to FRAME ASSY
BOTTOM using a small screwdriver or similar tool, and turn ACTUATOR
EMPTY to remove SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
8.
Disconnect connector (P/J103) from SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
7)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
Connect connector (P/J103) to SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
2.
Turn ACTUATOR EMPTY to align the three hooks on SENSOR PAPER

EMPTY to the attachment position, and attach SENSOR PAPER EMPTY to
FRAME ASSY BOTTOM.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
7)-3
8)
Leg_Sec03_051FA
Figure 4-38. Removal of SENSOR PAPER EMPTY
Printer
349
4.2.3.12 ACTUATOR EMPTY

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
Revision C
11. Remove the groove on the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY from the hook
on MSI ASSY, and draw out the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY from
the hole on MSI ASSY.
12. Slide ACTUATOR EMPTY to the left, slide the shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY
along the notch of MSI ASSY, and remove ACTUATOR EMPTY.
REMOVAL
9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R. (p338)

C H E C K
P O IN T
10)
9)
When performing the following work, connectors need not be

disconnected from SENSOR PAPER EMPTY.
8.
emove SENSOR PAPER EMPTY. (p349)
9.
Remove the holes on PLATE BOTTOM 2 from the boss on PLATE BOTTOM
ASSY MSI while extending the attachment sections on the left and right of
PLATE BOTTOM 2.
10. Turn PLATE BOTTOM 2, remove the bosses on the left and right of PLATE
BOTTOM 2 from the notches of MSI ASSY, and remove PLATE BOTTOM 2.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to fold

ACTUATOR EMPTY.
Leg_Sec03_052FB
Figure 4-39. Removal of ACTUATOR EMPTY (1)
Printer
350
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
11)-1
1.
Slide the actuator of ACTUATOR EMPTY into the clearance of MSI ASSY, slide
the shaft on ACTUATOR EMPTY along the notch on MSI ASSY, and attach
ACTUATOR EMPTY.
2.
Insert the right-side shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY into the hole on MSI ASSY,
and fasten the groove on the left-side shaft of ACTUATOR EMPTY to the hook
on MSI ASSY.
11)-2
[2)]
CAUTION
C A U T IO N
Make sure that ACTUATOR EMPTY is firmly fastened to the

hook.
3.
Insert the left and right bosses into the notch on MSI ASSY with PLATE
BOTTOM 2 raised 90, and attach PLATE BOTTOM 2.
4.
Insert the holes of PLATE BOTTOM 2 into the boss on PLATE BOTTOM ASSY
MSI while extending the left and right attachment sections of PLATE BOTTOM
2.
5.
Attach SENSOR PAPER EMPTY. (p349)
6.
Attach GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE ASSY SIDE R. (p338)
7.
8.
9.
12)

Leg_Sec03_053FB
Figure 4-40. Removal of ACTUATOR EMPTY (2)
Printer
351
Revision C
4.2.4 PH ASSY
4.2.4.1 COVER-PH
2)-1
1)
REMOVAL
1.
Open COVER-PH.
2.
Unhook the hooks on both the left and right sides fastening COVER-PH to
CHUTE ASSY-REAR, and remove COVER-PH.
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the two hooks under COVER-PH with CHUTE ASSY-REAR, attach
COVER-PH, and fasten with the hooks on both the left and right sides.
2.
Close COVER-PH.
2)-2
Leg_Sec03_142EA
Figure 4-41. Removal of COVER-PH
Printer
352
Revision C
4.2.4.2 CHUTE ASSY-REAR

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove COVER-PH. (p352)
2.

C A U T IO N
3.
Be careful not to damage the boss on the CHUTE ASSY-REAR

when performing the next procedure.
4)-2
Press the attaching portion on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY-REAR inward
with a flat-blade screwdriver or a similar tool, and remove the boss on the
attaching portion from the hole on the FRAME-PH to remove the CHUTE ASSYREAR.
REINSTALLATION
4)-1
C A U T IO N
1.
[1)]
Be careful not to damage the boss on the CHUTE ASSY-REAR

when performing the next procedure.
After inserting the boss on the left side of the CHUTE ASSY-REAR into the hole
on the left side of the FRAME-PH, insert the right boss on the CHUTE ASSYREAR into the hole on the right side of the FRAME-PH by sliding the right boss
from the obliquely upward.
2.
Close CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
3.
Attach COVER-PH. (p352)
Printer
Leg_Sec03_055EA
Figure 4-42. Removal of CHUTE ASSY-REAR
353
Revision C
4.2.4.3 CHUTE-REAR UP, CHUTE-REAR LOW

C A U T IO N
2)

reinstallation.
3)-2
2)
REMOVAL
1.
Remove CHUTE ASSY-REAR. (p353)
2.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTEREAR LOW to CHUTE-REAR UP.
3.
Remove the concave portion on CHUTE-REAR LOW from the protrusion on

CHUTE-REAR UP, and remove CHUTE-REAR LOW from CHUTE-REAR UP.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on CHUTE-REAR LOW with the boss on CHUTE-REAR UP, and
insert the protrusion on CHUTE-REAR UP into the concave portion on CHUTEREAR LOW to attach.
C A U T IO N
The protrusion on CHUTE REAR UP must be inserted firmly into

the concave portion on CHUTE-REAR LOW.
[1)]
3)-1
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_056FA
Figure 4-43. Removal of CHUTE-REAR UP and CHUTE-REAR LOW

2.
Fasten CHUTE-REAR LOW to CHUTE-REAR UP with the 2 screws (silver, with

3.
Attach CHUTE ASSY-REAR. (p353)
Printer
354
Revision C
4.2.4.4 FRAME ASSY-PH

C A U T IO N
2)

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove COVER-PH. (p352)
2.
3.
Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the FRAME
ASSY-PH to the main unit.
4.
3)
3)
3)

3)
C A U T IO N
5.
Be careful not to pull the FRAME ASSY-PH too much when

removing it as it is connected with harnesses.
Place the FRAME ASSY-PH a little away from the main unit together with the
CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
6.
Disconnect P/J603 and P/J604 connectors and remove the FRAME ASSY-PH
together with the CHUTE ASSY-REAR.
7.
5)
7)
6)
Leg_Sec03_057EA
Figure 4-44. Removal of FRAME ASSY-PH
Printer
355
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
2.
Connect P/J603 and P/J604 connectors with the FRAME ASSY-PH open 90
degrees as shown in the figure.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following procedure, be careful not to let the

harness caught between the main unit and the FRAME ASSY-PH.
[2)]
3.
4.
While pushing down the film part of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD MSI, match
FRAME ASSY-PH with the attachment position of the main unit.
[4)-2]
[4)-1]
C A U T IO N
Leg_03_510EB
Make sure to confirm that the film part of the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD MSI is located lateral to the FRAME ASSY-PH after
installing the FRAME ASSY-PH to the main unit. If the film part
gets through the inside of the FRAME ASSY-PH, a paper jam is
occurred by blocking a paper feeding path. (See Figure 4-46)
5.
Fasten FRAME ASSY-PH to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange,
8 mm).
6.
7.
Attach COVER-PH. (p352)
Figure 4-45. Reinstallation of FRAME ASSY-PH
OK
Film part
NG
Figure 4-46. Check point after installing FRAME ASSY-PH
Printer
356
Revision C
4.2.4.5 CLUTCH ASSY REGI

C A U T IO N
[3)-2]

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
[3)-1]
1.
2.
Remove MOTOR-PH. (p365)
3.
Remove DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p368)

4)
C A U T IO N
6)

4.
Disconnect the connector (P/J203) from CLUTCH ASSY REGI, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5.
Remove the E-ring fastening CLUTCH ASSY REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH.
6.
Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
5)
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_058FA
Figure 4-47. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY REGI
1.
Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY REGI with the D cut surface on the
shaft of ROLL-REGI METAL, and attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI so that the
protrusion of FRAME ASSY-PH enters the concave portion on CLUTCH ASSY
REGI.
2.
Fasten CLUTCH ASSY REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH with the E-ring.
3.
Route the harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI in the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH,
and connect the connector (P/J203) to CLUTCH ASSY REGI.
4.
Attach DRIVE ASSY-PH. (p368)
5.
Attach MOTOR-PH. (p365)
6.
Printer
357
Revision C
4.2.4.6 ROLL-REGI METAL
7)
8)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p357)
5.
Remove the two E-rings fastening GEAR-REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove the two GEAR-REGIs.
6.
Remove the left and right BEARING METALs fastening ROLL-REGI METAL
from FRAME ASSY-PH.
7.
8.
Temporarily slide ROLL-REGI METAL to the left, draw out the shaft on ROLLREGI METAL from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove
ROLL-REGI METAL.
6)
6)
5)-1
5)-2
Leg_Sec03_059FB
Figure 4-48. Removal of ROLL-REGI METAL

REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the shaft left side on ROLL-REGI METAL into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL-REGI METAL to the right to attach.
2.
3.
Match the double D cut surface of BEARING METAL with the left and right
bearings of FRAME ASSY-PH, attach BEARING METAL, and fasten ROLLREGI METAL.
4.
Attach GEAR-REGI to the right side of the shaft on ROLL-REGI METAL and the
right side of the shaft on ROLL REGI RUBBER, and fasten with the E-ring.
5.
Attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p357)
6.
7.
8.
Printer
358
Revision C
4.2.4.7 ROLL REGI RUBBER

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p357)
5.
Remove the E-ring fastening GEAR-REGI on ROLL REGI RUBBER from

FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove GEAR-REGI.
6.
Remove the right-side BEARING RUBBER and SPRING-REGI R (METAL)

fastening ROLL REGI RUBBER from FRAME ASSY-PH.
7.
Remove the E-ring fastening ROLL REGI RUBBER from FRAME ASSY-PH,
and BEARING RUBBER and SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) on the left side.
8.
8)
(BLACK)
7)-2
D cut surface
(METAL)
Temporarily slide ROLL REGI RUBBER to the left, draw out the shaft on ROLL
REGI RUBBER from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
7)-1
6)-2
6)-1
5)-2
5)-1
RIGHT
Leg_Sec03_060FB
Figure 4-49. Removal of ROLL REGI RUBBER
Printer
359
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
Attach ROLL REGI RUBBER to FRAME ASSY-PH so that the D

cut surface of the shaft comes to the right side.
1.
Insert the shaft left side on ROLL REGI RUBBER into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL REGI RUBBER to the right to attach.
2.
Fasten ROLL REGI RUBBER to FRAME ASSY-PH by the left and right
BEARING RUBBER.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to attach

SPRING-REGI R (METAL) and SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) to
the wrong side (not to confuse left and right).
3.
Attach SPRING-REGI R (METAL) to the boss on the right-side BEARING

RUBBER and the boss on the right-side bearing of FRAME ASSY-PH fastening
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
4.
Attach SPRING-REGI L (BLACK) to the boss on the left-side BEARING

RUBBER and the boss on the left-side bearing of FRAME ASSY-PH fastening
ROLL REGI RUBBER.
C A U T IO N
Make sure that SPRING-REGI R (METAL) and SPRING-REGI L

(BLACK) are inserted in the boss on the left and right BEARING
RUBBER and the bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5.
Attach GEAR-REGI to the right side of the shaft on ROLL REGI RUBBER, and
fasten with the two E-rings on the left and right of the shaft.
6.
Attach CLUTCH ASSY REGI. (p357)
7.
8.
9.
Printer
360
4.2.4.8 ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI. (p366)
5.
Remove the E-rings fastening the right side of the shaft on ROLL ASSY-PRE
REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
6.
Remove the left and right BEARING METALs fastening ROLL ASSY-PRE
REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH.
7.
8.
Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to the left, draw out the shaft on
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI from the right-side bearing on FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI.
Revision C
6.
7.
8.

7)
D cut surface
8)
6)
6)
5)
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_061FB
C A U T IO N
Attach ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH so that the

D cut surface of the shaft comes to the left side.
1.
Insert the shaft left side on ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI into the left-side bearing on
FRAME ASSY-PH, and slide ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI to the right to attach.
2.
3.
Match the double D cut surface of BEARING METAL with the left and right
bearings of FRAME ASSY-PH, attach BEARING METAL, and fasten ROLL
ASSY-PRE REGI.
4.
Fasten the shaft right side of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI with an E-ring.
5.
Attach CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI. (p366)
Figure 4-50. Removal of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
Printer
361
Revision C
4.2.4.9 SENSOR OHP
3)
2)
5)
6)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening BRACKETSENSOR OHP to FRAME ASSY-PH.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to remove

FRAME ASSY-PH and BRACKET-SENSOR OHP too far as they
are connected by harnesses.
3.
Remove BRACKET-SENSOR OHP together with SENSOR OHP from FRAME

ASSY-PH.
4.
Disconnect connector (P/J101) from SENSOR OHP.
5.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR OHP to

BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
6.
Remove SENSOR OHP from BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
4)
Leg_Sec03_062FA
Figure 4-51. Removal of SENSOR OHP
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on SENSOR OHP with the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR OHP,
and attach SENSOR OHP to BRACKET-SENSOR OHP.
2.
Fasten SENSOR OHP to BRACKET-SENSOR OHP with the screw (silver,

tapping, 8 mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J101) to SENSOR OHP.
4.
Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR OHP with the boss on FRAME ASSYPH, and attach BRACKET-SENSOR OHP together with SENSOR OHP.
5.
Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR OHP to FRAME ASSY-PH with the screw (silver,

with flange, tapping, 8 mm).
6.
Printer
362
Revision C
4.2.4.10 ACTUATOR-REGI
C A U T IO N
CAUTION
2)

reinstallation.
3)
4)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI from the hook on FRAME

ASSY-PH.
3.
Draw out the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI from the hole on FRAME
ASSY-PH, and remove ACTUATOR-REGI together with SPRING-ACTUATOR.
4.
Remove SPRING-ACTUATOR from ACTUATOR-REGI.
[3)]
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach SPRING-ACTUATOR to ACTUATOR-REGI.
2.
Insert the right-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI into the hole on FRAME ASSYPH, and hook SPRING-ACTUATOR onto the notch on FRAME ASSY-PH.
Leg_Sec03_064FA
Figure 4-52. Removal of ACTUATOR-REGI

C A U T IO N
SPRING-ACTUATOR must be hooked firmly on ACTUATORREGI and FRAME ASSY-PH.
3.
Fasten the left-side shaft on ACTUATOR-REGI by the hook on FRAME ASSYPH.
4.
Printer
363
Revision C
4.2.4.11 SENSOR REGI
4)-3
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH, down
ACTUATOR-REGI with your fingers press and remove SENSOR REGI.
5.
Disconnect connector (P/J102) from SENSOR REGI.
5)
4)-1
4)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
Connect connector (P/J102) to SENSOR REGI.
2.
Press down ACTUATOR-REGI with your fingers, match the hooks on SENSOR
REGI with the attachment position, and attach to FRAME ASSY-PH.
3.
4.
5.
Leg_Sec03_065FB
Figure 4-53. Removal of SENSOR REGI
Printer
364
Revision C
4.2.4.12 MOTOR-PH
5)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unhook the two hooks fastening COVER-HARNESS to FRAME ASSY-PH, and

remove COVER-HARNESS.
3.
Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH, and remove the harness of MOTORPH from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening MOTOR-PH to

FRAME ASSY-PH.
5.
Front side
3)
4)
4)
Remove MOTOR-PH from FRAME ASSY-PH.
3)
2)-1
2)-2
REINSTALLATION
2)-1
C A U T IO N

attachment direction of MOTOR-PH.
Leg_Sec03_066FB
1.
Attach MOTOR-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the harness of MOTOR-PH

facing the front.
2.
Fasten MOTOR-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
3.
Route the harness of MOTOR-PH in the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH, and fasten
with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH.
4.
Match the boss and protrusion of COVER-HARNESS with the hole on FRAME
ASSY-PH, attach and fasten with the 2 hooks.
5.
Figure 4-54. Removal of MOTOR-PH
Printer
365
Revision C
4.2.4.13 CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
4.
Route the harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI in the groove on FRAME
ASSY-PH, and connect the connector (P/J202) to CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI.
5.
6.
7.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, do not disconnect the relay

connectors.
[4)]
4)
4.
Disconnect the connector (P/J202) from CLUTCH ASSY REGI, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY REGI from the groove on FRAME ASSY-PH.
6)
5.
Remove the E-rings fastening CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH.
6.
Remove CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI from FRAME ASSY-PH, and remove the
harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI from the hole on FRAME ASSY-PH.
5)
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_067FA
1.
Insert the harness of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI into the hole on FRAME ASSYPH.
2.
Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI with the D cut surface on
the shaft of ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI, and attach CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI so
that the protrusion on FRAME ASSY-PH enters the concave portion on CLUTCH
ASSY PRE REGI.
3.
Fasten CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI to FRAME ASSY-PH with an E-ring.
Printer
Figure 4-55. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
366
Revision C
4.2.4.14 SWITCH-PH DOOR

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J100) from SWITCH-PH DOOR.
3.
4.
Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH-PH DOOR to FRAME ASSY-PH, and
remove SWITCH-PH DOOR.
4)-1
REINSTALLATION
2)
1.
2.
Match the hooks on SWITCH-PH DOOR with the attachment position, and attach
to FRAME ASSY-PH.
3.
Connect connector (P/J100) to SWITCH-PH DOOR.
4.
4)-2
3)
Leg_Sec03_068FC
Figure 4-56. Removal of SWITCH-PH DOOR
Printer
367
Revision C
4.2.4.15 DRIVE ASSY-PH

REMOVAL
5)
1.
2.
3.
Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH, and remove the harness.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DRIVE
ASSY-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH.
5.
Remove DRIVE ASSY-PH from FRAME ASSY-PH.
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
3)
4)
4)
Leg_Sec03_069FA
REINSTALLATION

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, make sure that the gears on
CLUTCH ASSY REGI and CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI are
correctly engaged.
1.
Match the hole on DRIVE ASSY-PH with the boss on FRAME ASSY-PH, and
attach DRIVE ASSY-PH.
2.
Fasten DRIVE ASSY-PH to FRAME ASSY-PH with the 2 screws (silver, with
3.
Fasten the harness with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY-PH.
4.
5.
Figure 4-57. Removal of DRIVE ASSY-PH
Printer
368
Revision C
4.2.5 TRANSFER
4.2.5.1 CHUTE ASSY-FSR, COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
REMOVAL
1)
CHUTE ASSY-FSR
1.
2)-2
Open CHUTE ASSY-FSR.

C A U T IO N

CHUTE ASSY-FSR too far as it is connected by a harness.
3)
2)-1
2.
C A U T IO N
3.
2)-1
Press the hinge on CHUTE ASSY-FSR to the inside with a flat-blade screwdriver
or a similar tool, and remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR from the main unit.
Produsion
Disconnect the connector (P/J620) from CHUTE ASSY-FSR connected to the

main unit.
Produsion
Leg_Sec03_511RA
Figure 4-58. Removal of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
Printer
369
C H E C K
P O IN T
Revision C
When HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW need not be removed in the

following procedure, COVER ASSY-RR 2ND can be removed
without removing COVER ASSY LH by disconnecting connector
(P/J113) from SWITCH 2BTR COVER instead of connector (P/
J621).
6)-1
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND

4.
5.
Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND, and remove
the harness.
C A U T IO N
6.
5)

7.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER ASSY-RR
2ND to the main unit.
8.
Remove COVER ASSY-RR 2ND from the main unit.
6)-2
7)
Disconnect connector (P/J621) connected to the main unit, and insert the
connector inside through the hole on the main unit.
7)
8)
CHECK POINT
Leg_Sec03_143RB
Figure 4-59. Removal of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
Printer
370
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
C A U T IO N

harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and COVER
ASSY-RR 2ND.
1.
Lead out the connector of the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND from the hole on
the main unit.
2.
Match the boss on COVER ASSY-RR 2ND with the hole on the main unit, and
attach COVER ASSY-RR 2ND.
3.
Lead out the relay connector connected to the connector on CHUTE ASSY-FSR to
the outside from the left-side notch on COVER ASSY-RR 2ND.
4.
Fasten COVER ASSY-RR 2ND to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
5.
Connect connector (P/J621) on the harness of COVER ASSY-RR 2ND to the

main unit, and fasten the harness by the clamp.
CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after replacing both the

CHUTE ASSY FSR and the FRAME ASSY 2ND with new ones at a
time.
Refer to Section 6.3.1.2 Lublication (p554).
6.
Attach the connector (P/J620) on CHUTE ASSY-FSR connected to the main unit,
and insert the connector into the main unit from the left-side notch on COVER
ASSY-RR 2ND.
7.
Fit the U groove on the both the left- and right-side hinges of CHUTE ASSY-FSR
into the shaft on CAM ASSY-2ND, and attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR to the main
unit.
8.
Close CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
9.
Printer
371
Revision C
4.2.5.2 SENSOR FUSER IN

2)
REMOVAL
3)
1.
Remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR. (p369)
2.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening DIODE
FUSER to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
3.
Remove DIODE FUSER from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
4.
Remove the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE-FSR
and PLATE DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
5.
Remove PLATE DIS 2ND from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6.
Remove CHUTE-FSR from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
7.
Disconnect connector (P/J111) from SENSOR FUSER IN.
8.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening SENSOR FUSER IN to

CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
9.
Remove SENSOR FUSER IN from CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
8)
9)
2)
5)
4)
6)
7)
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_144FB
Figure 4-61. Removal of SENSOR FUSER IN (1)

Leg_Sec03_145FA
Figure 4-60. Removal of SENSOR FUSER IN (2)
Printer
372
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on SENSOR FUSER IN with the hole on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach SENSOR FUSER IN.
2.
Fasten SENSOR FUSER IN to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver,

tapping, 6 mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J111) to SENSOR FUSER IN.
4.
Insert the three protrusions on CHUTE-FSR into the holes on CHUTE ASSYFSR, match the holes on CHUTE-FSR with the boss on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach CHUTE-FSR.
5.
Attach PLATE DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR.
6.
Tighten and fasten both CHUTE-FSR and the right side of PLATE DIS 2ND to
CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
C A U T IO N
7.

attachment direction of DIODE FUSER.
Attach so that the white painted side of DIODE FUSER is on the
side where DIODE FUSER is screwed together with CHUTE-FSR.
Match DIODE FUSER with the concave portion on CHUTE ASSY-FSR, and
attach.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, the terminal on DIODE

FUSER must be attached between the washer and the plate.
8.
Fasten the right-side terminal of DIODE FUSER to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the
screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
9.
Fasten both the left-side terminal of DIODE FUSER and the left side of PLATE
DIS 2ND to CHUTE ASSY-FSR with the screw (silver, with washer, tapping, 8
mm).
10. Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR. (p369)
Printer
373
Revision C
4.2.5.3 FRAME ASSY-2ND

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p369)
3.
Remove 2ND BTR ASSY. (p377)
4.
Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p387)
5.
Remove CAM ASSY-2ND. (p379)
6.
Remove SPRING-2ND fastening both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY2ND to the main unit.
6)
6)
CAUTION
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_146RB
Figure 4-62. Removal of FRAME ASSY-2ND (1)
Printer
374

7.
Revision C
Remove the E-ring fastening the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND to the
main unit, and slide BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the left.
C A U T IO N
7)-2
When performing the following work, take care not to drop or lose
BEARING-BRUSH CAM.
8.
Temporarily slide FRAME ASSY-2ND to the right, and draw out the shaft on
FRAME ASSY-2ND from the left-side bearing on the main unit, and remove
FRAME ASSY-2ND together with BEARING-BRUSH CAM.
9.
Remove BEARING-BRUSH CAM from FRAME ASSY-2ND.
7)-1
9)
9)
8)
[3)]
[1)]
Leg_Sec03_147RB
Figure 4-63. Removal of FRAME ASSY-2ND (2)
Printer
375
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after replacing both the

CHUTE ASSY FSR and the FRAME ASSY 2ND with new ones at a
time.
1.
Attach BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the left-side bearing on the main unit.
2.
Attach BEARING-BRUSH CAM to the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND.
3.
Insert the right-side shaft on FRAME ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing on
the main unit, slide FRAME ASSY-2ND to the left, insert the flange of GEAR 27
on FRAME ASSY-2ND as far as possible into the gear of DRIVE ASSY BTR,
and attach FRAME ASSY-2ND.
4.
Insert the right-side BEARING-BRUSH CAM on FRAME ASSY-2ND into the

right-side bearing on the main unit, and fasten with an E-ring.
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, firmly hook SPRING-2ND

onto the concave portion on FRAME ASSY-2ND.
(Refer to Figure 4-63)
5.
Fasten both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-2ND to the main unit with
SPRING-2ND.
6.
Attach CAM ASSY-2ND. (p379)
7.
Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p387)
8.
Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p377)
9.
Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p369)
Printer
376
Revision C
4.2.5.4 2ND BTR ASSY

C A U T IO N
Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands.

3)
CAUTION
REMOVAL
3)
1.
2.

4)-2
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY on

LATCH ASSY ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSYROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent
it from contacting MAG ROLL.
3.
Turn the levers on both the left and right sides of 2ND BTR ASSY towards you,
and unlock the lever lock from FRAME ASSY-2ND.
4.
Hold the lever on 2ND BTR ASSY, draw out the right side of 2ND BTR ASSY
from FRAME ASSY-2ND, and then draw out the left side to remove 2ND BTR
ASSY from the main unit.
4)-3
4)-1
Leg_Sec03_070RB
Figure 4-64. Removal of 2ND BTR ASSY
Printer
377
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
1.
When performing the following work, press LATCH ROTARY

on LATCH ASSY ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
to prevent it from contacting MAG ROLL.
When performing the following work, the right-side shaft on
2ND BTR ASSY must be inserted into the bottom side of the
terminal on PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
Insert the left-side gear on 2ND BTR ASSY into the main unit, and then fit the left
and right bearings on 2ND BTR ASSY into FRAME ASSY-2ND to attach 2ND
BTR ASSY.
C A U T IO N
After attaching 2ND BTR ASSY, make sure that the levers on both
the left and right sides move smoothly up and down.
2.
Turn the levers on both the left and right sides of 2ND BTR ASSY down, and
make FRAME ASSY-2ND lock the lever.
3.
Attach Photoconductor Unit.
4.

C A U T IO N
When replaced 2ND BTR ASSY with a new one, clear the life
counter to zero. (Refer to 6.4.1.1Maintenance Menu Items (p556))
Printer
378
Revision C
8.
4.2.5.5 CAM ASSY-2ND
Remove BEARING from CAM ASSY-2ND.

6)-2
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

C A U T IO N
4.
6)-1
7)-1
CHECK POINT
7)-1
CHECK POINT
When performing the following work, there is no need to remove

WIRE ASSY 2BTR from PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p387)

C A U T IO N

SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT from BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO.
8)
5.
Remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p385)

7)-2
C A U T IO N
8)
When performing the following work, take care not to drop or lose
BEARING.
CAUTION
RIGHT
6.
Remove the E-ring fastening the right-side shaft on CAM ASSY-2ND to the main
unit, and slide BEARING to the left.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_148RB
C H E C K
P O IN T
7.
Figure 4-65. Removal of CAM ASSY-2ND

easily by pressing FRAME ASSY-2ND in the direction of the arrow,
and releasing FRAME ASSY-2ND from the cam on CAM ASSY2ND.
Temporarily slide CAM ASSY-2ND to the right, and draw out the shaft on CAM
ASSY-2ND from the left-side bearing on the main unit, and remove CAM ASSY2ND together with BEARING.
Printer
379
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach BEARING to the left-side bearing on the main unit.
2.
Attach BEARING to the right-side bearing on CAM ASSY-2ND.

C H E C K
P O IN T

easily by pressing FRAME ASSY-2ND in the direction of the arrow,
and releasing FRAME ASSY-2ND from the cam on CAM ASSY2ND. (Refer to Figure 4-65)
3.
Insert the right-side bearing on CAM ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing on
the main unit, slide CAM ASSY-2ND to the left, and attach CAM ASSY-2ND
together with BEARING.
4.
Insert the right-side BEARING on CAM ASSY-2ND into the right-side bearing
on the main unit, and fasten with an E-ring.
C A U T IO N
Make sure that the cam on CAM ASSY-2ND is matched with the
cam receptacle on FRAME ASSY-2ND. (Refer to Figure 4-65)
5.
6.
Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY. (p387)
7.
8.
9.
Printer
380
Revision C
4.2.5.6 SWITCH 2BTR COVER
3)
REMOVAL
5)-1
2)
1.
2.
Disconnect the connector (P/J113) from SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND to

COVER-RR 2ND.
4.
Remove BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND from COVER-RR 2ND together with

SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
5.
Unhook the two hooks fastening SWITCH 2BTR COVER to BRACKETSWITCH 2ND, and remove SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
5)-2
4)
REINSTALLATION
Leg_Sec03_071FA
1.
Match the hooks on SWITCH 2BTR COVER with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND.
2.
Match the hole on BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND with the boss on COVER-RR 2ND,
and attach together with SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
3.
Fasten BRACKET-SWITCH 2ND to COVER-RR 2ND with the screw (silver,

tapping, 6 mm).
4.
Connect the connector (P/J113) to SWITCH 2BTR COVER.
5.
Figure 4-66. Removal of SWITCH 2BTR COVER
Printer
381
Revision C
4.2.5.7 SENSOR ASSY ADC

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR
ASSY ADC to the main unit.
4)
C A U T IO N

SENSOR ASSY ADC too far as it is connected by a harness.
2)
3)
2)
3.
Remove SENSOR ASSY ADC from the main unit.
4.
Disconnect connector (P/J431) from SENSOR ASSY ADC.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Connect connector (P/J431) to SENSOR ASSY ADC.
2.
Match the boss on SENSOR ASSY ADC with the hole on the main unit, and
attach SENSOR ASSY ADC.
3.
Fasten SENSOR ASSY ADC to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
washer, tapping, 8 mm).
4.
Leg_Sec03_072RB
Figure 4-67. Removal of SENSOR ASSY ADC
Printer
382
Revision C
4.2.5.8 HOLDER-ADC 2ND

14)
C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove COVER ASSY RH.(p329)
2.
Remove COVER FUSER. (p314)
3.
4.
5.
Remove PLATE BIAS-2ND.(p387)
6.
7.
Remove CAM ASSY-2ND. (p379)
8.
Remove SPRING-2ND fastening both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY2ND to the main unit. (p374)
9.
Remove FUSER ASSY. (p418)
13)
13)
11)
11)
12)
10. Disconnect connector (P/J431) from SENSOR ASSY ADC.

10)
11. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secure the HOLDER-ADC
2ND to the main unit.
12. Remove the HOLDER-ADC 2ND from the main unit together with the SENSOR ASSY
ADC.
13. Remove the two screws (silver with washer, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the SENSOR
ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
[3)]
14. Remove the SENSOR ASSY ADC from the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
Leg_Sec03_512RA
Figure 4-68. Removal of HOLDER-ADC 2ND
Printer
383
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND matching the
boss on the SENSOR ASSY ADC with the hole on the HOLDER-ADC 2ND.
2. Secure the SENSOR ASSY ADC to the HOLDER-ADC 2ND with the two
screws (silver, with washer, tapping, 8 mm).
3. Route the harness on the HOLDER-ADC 2ND as shown in Figure 4-67, and
attach the HOLDER-ADC 2ND to the main unit together with the SENSOR
ASSY ADC matching the protrusion of the HOLDER-ADC 2ND with the hole
on the main unit.
4.
Secure the HOLDER-ADC 2ND to the main unit with the two screws (silver, with
flange, 8 mm).
5.
Connect P/J431 to the SENSOR ASSY ADC.
6.
Attach FUSER ASSY. (p418)
7.
Fasten both the left and right sides of FRAME ASSY-2ND to the main unit with
SPRING-2ND. (p374)
8.
Attach CAM ASSY-2ND. (p379)
9.
Attach SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT. (p385)
10. Attach PLATE BIAS-2ND. (p387)

11. Attach 2ND BTR ASSY. (p377)
12. Attach CHUTE ASSY-FSR and COVER ASSY-RR 2ND. (p369)
13. Attach COVER FUSER. (p314)
Printer
384
Revision C
4.2.5.9 SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J112) from SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening BRACKET-SENSOR

PHOTO to the main unit.
4.
5.
5)-2
2)
Remove BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO from the main unit together with

SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
4)
Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT to BRACKETSENSOR PHOTO, and remove SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
3)
5)-1
REINSTALLATION
CAUTION
1.
Match the hooks on SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO.
2.
Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO with the boss on the main unit,
and attach BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO together with SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT.
Leg_Sec03_073RB
3.
Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR PHOTO to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 8mm).
4.
Connect connector (P/J112) to SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.

C A U T IO N
5.
Figure 4-69. Removal of SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
The shutter of CAM ASSY-2ND must be inserted inside the sensor

on SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT.
Printer
385
Revision C
4.2.5.10 SENSOR IBT RETRACT
6)-1
4)
REMOVAL
5)
1.
2.
Remove COVER INNER TOP. (p327)
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J107) from SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
4.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-SENSOR

CLN to the main unit.
5.
Remove BRACKET-SENSOR CLN from the main unit together with SENSOR
IBT RETRACT.
6.
Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR IBT RETRACT to BRACKETSENSOR CLN, and remove SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
6)-2
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hooks on SENSOR IBT RETRACT with the attachment position, and
attach to BRACKET-SENSOR CLN.
2.
Match the hole on BRACKET-SENSOR CLN with the boss on the main unit, and
attach BRACKET-SENSOR CLN together with SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
C A U T IO N
The shutter of CAM ASSY-IBT CL must be inserted inside the

sensor on SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
3.
Fasten BRACKET-SENSOR CLN to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
4.
Connect connector (P/J107) to SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
5.
Attach COVER INNER TOP. (p327)
6.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_074FA
Figure 4-70. Removal of SENSOR IBT RETRACT
Printer
386
Revision C
4.2.5.11 PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY

E ring
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE BIAS2ND ASSY to the main unit.
C A U T IO N
4)
4)

PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY too far as it is connected by WIRE ASSY
2BTR.
5.
Unclamp the clamp fastening WIRE ASSY 2BTR, and slightly release PLATE
BIAS-2ND ASSY from the main unit.
6.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm) fastening the terminal of WIRE ASSY
2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
7.
Remove WIRE ASSY 2BTR from PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY, and remove
PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
SHAFT-CENT 2ND
7)
6)
5)-2
5)-1
Leg_Sec03_150RB
Figure 4-71. Removal of PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
Printer
387
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach WIRE ASSY 2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
2.
Fasten the terminal of WIRE ASSY 2BTR to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY with the
screw (silver, tapping, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, route WIRE ASSY 2BTR

connected to PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY so that it does not come into
contact with CAM ASSY-2ND.
C H E C K
P O IN T
When the E-ring on FRAME ASSY-2ND is contacting the PLATE

BIAS-2ND ASSY and is difficult to attach, turn SHAFT-CENT
2ND to facilitate attachment.
3.
Match the boss on PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and
attach PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY.
4.
Fasten PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, tapping, 6 mm), and fasten WIRE ASSY 2BTR with the clamp.
5.
6.
7.
Printer
388
Revision C
4.2.5.12 CAM ASSY-IBT CL

The shutter of CAM ASSY-IBT CL must be inserted inside the
sensor on SENSOR IBT RETRACT.
C A U T IO N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
5.
Attach PWBA MCU. (p435)
3.
6.
4.
7.
5.
Remove PWBA MCU. (p435)
8.
9.
C A U T IO N

SENSOR IBT RETRACT from BRACKET-SENSOR CLN.
9)
6.
Remove SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p386)
7.
Remove the left and right E-rings fastening CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit.
8.
Remove the left and right BEARING-BRUSH CAMs fastening CAM ASSY-IBT
CL to the main unit.
9.
Temporarily slide CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the left, and draw out the shaft of CAM
ASSY-IBT CL from the right-side bearing on the main unit to remove CAM
ASSY-IBT CL.
7)
8)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the shaft left side of CAM ASSY-IBT CL into the left-side bearing of the
main unit, slide CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the right, and attach CAM ASSY-IBT CL.
2.
Fasten CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit by the left and right BEARINGBRUSH CAMs.
3.
Fasten CAM ASSY-IBT CL to the main unit by the left and right E-rings.
4.
Attach SENSOR IBT RETRACT. (p386)
8)
7)
Leg_Sec03_075EB
Figure 4-72. Removal of CAM ASSY-IBT CL
Printer
389
Revision C
4.2.6 XERO
4.2.6.1 SENSOR TR-0
REMOVAL
1. Open COVER ASSY TOP.
2.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 10mm) fastening SENSOR TR-0 to
PLATE-TR-0.
4.
Remove SENSOR TR-0 from PLATE-TR-0.
5.
Disconnect connector (P/J108) from SENSOR TR-0.
4)
3)
5)
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect connector (P/J108) to SENSOR TR-0.
2.
Match the hole on SENSOR TR-0 with the boss on PLATE-TR-0, and attach
SENSOR TR-0.
3.
Fasten SENSOR TR-0 to PLATE-TR-0 with the screw (silver, with flange,
10mm).
4.
Attach Photoconductor Unit.
5.
Leg_Sec03_076EA
Figure 4-73. Removal of SENSOR TR-0
Printer
390
Revision C
4.2.6.2 GUIDE CRU ASSY D
6)
7)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

C H E C K
P O IN T
6)
When performing the following work, connectors need not be

disconnected from PWBA ESS.
4.
Remove CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p443)
5.
6.
Remove FUSER LOCK SWITCH. (p420)
7.
Remove SENSOR TR-0. (p390)
8.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE-TR-0
to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9.
Remove PLATE-TR-0 from GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
Leg_Sec03_077RA
Figure 4-74. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY D (1)
Printer
391
Revision C
10. Unclamp the clamp fastening HARNESS-ASSY XERO on the left side of the
main unit.
10)
11. Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening GUIDE CRU
ASSY D to the main unit.
12. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert HARNESS-ASSY XERO into the hole on the left side of the main unit, and
match the boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY D into the hole on the main unit to attach
GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
2.
Fasten GUIDE CRU ASSY D to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with
MOT ASSY P/R
3.
Fasten HARNESS-ASSY XERO on the left side of the main unit with the clamp.
4.
Attach PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
5.
Fasten PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with
the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N
9)
Lightly open/close COVER ASSY TOP, and check operation of the

coupling on MOT ASSY P/R.
9)
9)
9)
9)
8)
6.
Attach SENSOR TR-0. (p390)
7.
Attach FUSER LOCK SWITCH. (p420)
8.
9.
Attach CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p443)
10. Attach PWBA MCU. (p435)

Leg_Sec03_078RC
Figure 4-75. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY D (2)
Printer
392
4.2.6.3 LATCH ASSY D

REMOVAL
Revision C
6.
7.
8.

1.
9.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p391)
7.
Remove ANTENNA ASSY. (p394)
8.
Unhook SPRING-TORSION D from the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
9.
Slightly rotate LATCH ASSY D together with SPRING-TORSION D in the

direction of the arrow so that they escape the notch on GUIDE CRU ASSY D to
remove.
8)
10. Remove SPRING-TORSION D from LATCH ASSY D.

10)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach SPRING-TORSION D to LATCH ASSY D.
2.
Attach LATCH ASSY D to GUIDE CRU ASSY D together with SPRINGTORSION D, and insert the bottom front side of LATCH ASSY D into the notch
on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
3.
Hook SPRING-TORSION D onto the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY D.

C A U T IO N
4.
5.
9)
SPRING-TORSION D must be firmly attached onto the hooks on

LATCH ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
CAUTION
Attach ANTENNA ASSY. (p394)
Leg_Sec03_201FA
Figure 4-76. Removal of LATCH ASSY D
Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p391)
Printer
393
Revision C
4.2.6.4 ANTENNA ASSY

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unhook the hook fastening ARM-COUPLING to GUIDE CRU ASSY D, and

remove ARM-COUPLING from the shaft on GUIDE CRU ASSY D together with
SPRING-TORSION ARM.
8.
Turn ARM-COUPLING 90, and remove ARM-COUPLING.
8)-2
8)-1
7)
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_079FB
Figure 4-77. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY (1)
Printer
394
C A U T IO N
9.
Revision C
When unhooking the hook fastening ANTENNA ASSY, take care

not to damage the hook.
9)-1
Unhook the hook fastening ANTENNA ASSY to GUIDE CRU ASSY D, and
remove ANTENNA ASSY.
10. Disconnect connector (P/J109) from ANTENNA ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Connect connector (P/J109) to ANTENNA ASSY.
2.
Match the boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY D with the hole on ANTENNA ASSY,
attach ANTENNA ASSY, and fasten with a hook.
3.
Attach SPRING-TORSION ARM to ARM-COUPLING, and insert the shaft on

LINK-COUPLING into the long oblong hole on ARM-COUPLING.
4.
Turn ARM-COUPLING 90, attach ARM-COUPLING to the shaft on GUIDE

CRU ASSY D, fasten with a hook, and hook SPRING-TORSION ARM onto the
notch of GUIDE CRU ASSY D.
C A U T IO N
10)
SPRING-TORSION ARM must be firmly hooked onto the shaft of

ARM-COUPLING and LATCH ASSY D.
9)-2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Leg_Sec03_080FA
Figure 4-78. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY (2)
Printer
395
Revision C
4.2.6.5 GUIDE CRU ASSY AD
6)
7)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p402)
5.
6.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening PLATE-TR-0
to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
7.
Remove PLATE-TR-0 from GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
6)
Leg_Sec03_081RA
Figure 4-79. Removal of GUIDE CRU ASSY AD (1)
Printer
396
Revision C
8.
Remove WIRE ASSY BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY BCR from
GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
13. Remove the 7 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening GUIDE CRU
ASSY AD to the main unit.
9.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening WIRE ASSY
DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
14. Draw out the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD from the hole on the main
unit, and remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
10. Remove WIRE ASSY DTN from GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
14)
11. Remove SPRING-LATCH hooked onto the main unit and the stud of GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
12. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening both PLATEASSY GND and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD to the main unit, and remove PLATEASSY GND.
10)
13)
13)
13)
13)
9)
12)-2
13)
8)
12)-1
13)
8)
13)
11)
8)
Leg_Sec03_082RB
Leg_Sec03_083RB
Printer
397
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the protrusion and boss on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with the hole on the
main unit, and attach GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
2.
Fasten GUIDE CRU ASSY AD to the main unit with the 7 screws (silver, with
3.
Attach PLATE-ASSY GND to the main unit, and tighten together with GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
C H E C K
P O IN T
Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
A (508)
Ready
FIP-P18
D (504)
Ready
Uneven Density/ThinSpot
FIP-P16
G (506)
Ready
Normal printing
---

easily with LEVER-LATCH PR on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD closed.
4.
Attach SPRING-LATCH onto the main unit and the stud on GUIDE CRU ASSY
AD.
5.
Attach WIRE ASSY DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
6.
Fasten WIRE ASSY DTN to GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with the screw (silver, with
7.
Attach WIRE ASSY BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY BCR to GUIDE
CRU ASSY AD.
8.
Attach PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
9.
Fasten PLATE-TR-0 to GUIDE CRU ASSY D and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD with
the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm).
10. Attach SENSOR TR-0. (p390)

11. Attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p402)
12. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p355)
Printer
398
Revision C
4.2.6.6 LEVER-LATCH PR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p396)
7.
Turn LEVER-LATCH PR in the direction of the arrow, match the notch on

LEVER-LATCH PR with the protrusion on the boss of GUIDE CRU ASSY AD,
and remove LEVER-LATCH PR.
7)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the notch on LEVER-LATCH PR with the protrusion on the boss of

GUIDE CRU ASSY AD, and attach LEVER-LATCH PR.
2.
Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p396)
3.
4.
Attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p402)
5.
6.
7.

Leg_Sec03_202FA
Figure 4-82. Removal of LEVER-LATCH PR
Printer
399
Revision C
9.
4.2.6.7 CAP-PLATE PR, PLATE-ASSY PR
REMOVAL
9)-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove LEVER-LATCH PR. (p399)
8.
Turn PLATE-ASSY PR in the direction of the arrow, match the notch on PLATEASSY PR with the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD, and remove PLATEASSY PR together with CAP-PLATE PR.
9.
Unhook the hook on CAP-PLATE PR, and remove CAP-PLATE PR from

PLATE-ASSY PR.
9)-1
REINSTALLATION
8)
C A U T IO N

attachment direction of CAP-PLATE PR.
1.
Attach CAP-PLATE PR to PLATE-ASSY PR.
2.
Match the notch on PLATE-ASSY PR with the protrusion on GUIDE CRU ASSY
AD, and attach PLATE-ASSY PR together with CAP-PLATE PR.
3.
Attach LEVER-LATCH PR. (p399)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Leg_Sec03_203FA
Figure 4-83. Removal of CAP-PLATE PR and PLATE-ASSY PR
Printer
400
Revision C
4.2.6.8 LATCH ASSY AD

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unhook SPRING-TORSION AD from the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
8.
Remove LATCH ASSY AD together with SPRING-TORSION AD from GUIDE

CRU ASSY AD.
9.
Remove SPRING-TORSION AD from LATCH ASSY AD.
8)
REINSTALLATION
7)
1.
Attach SPRING-TORSION AD to LATCH ASSY AD.
2.
Attach LATCH ASSY AD together with SPRING-TORSION AD to GUIDE CRU

ASSY AD.
3.
Hook SPRING-TORSION AD onto the hook on GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.

C A U T IO N
9)
SPRING-TORSION AD must be firmly attached onto the hooks on

LATCH ASSY AD and GUIDE CRU ASSY AD.
(Do not attach SPRING-TORSION AD in the reverse direction)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_204FA
Figure 4-84. Removal of LATCH ASSY AD
Printer
401
Revision C
4.2.6.9 BCR CLN XERO ASSY
3.
Take out the harness of BCR CLN XERO ASSY to the outside from the hole on
the right side of the main unit, and connect connector (P/L617) for BCR CLN
XERO ASSY to the harness.
4.
Fasten the harness on BCR CLN XERO ASSY with the clamp on the right side of
the main unit.
5.
6.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J617) from BCR CLN XERO ASSY on the right side of
the main unit.
4.
Unclamp the clamp on the right side of the main unit, and move the harness on
BCR CLN XERO ASSY to inside the main unit from the hole on the right side of
the main unit.
C A U T IO N
5.
6.
6)
5)
5)

LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn FRAME ASSYROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to prevent
contact with MAG ROLL.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BCR CLN XERO
ASSY to the main unit.
4)
Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY from the main unit.

4)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on BCR CLN XERO ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and
attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY.
3)
C A U T IO N
2.

Leg_Sec03_084EB
Figure 4-85. Removal of BCR CLN XERO ASSY
Fasten BCR CLN XERO ASSY to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm).
Printer
402
Revision C
4.2.6.10 SENSOR TNER FULL

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J126) from SENSOR TNER FULL.
3.
Unhook the two hooks fastening SENSOR TNER FULL to the main unit, and
remove SENSOR TNER FULL.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hook on SENSOR TNER FULL with the attachment position, and
attach to the main unit.
2.
Connect connector (P/J126) to SENSOR TNER FULL.
3.
2)
3)-1
3)-1
3)-2
Leg_Sec03_183EB
Figure 4-86. Removal of SENSOR TNER FULL
Printer
403
Revision C
4.2.7 ROS
4.2.7.1 ROS ASSY
9)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove COVER INNER LOWOW. (p330)
6.
Remove FRAME ASSY-PH.(p355)
7.
Remove CLEANER ASSY. (p406)
8.
Disconnect P/J601 and P/J602 connectors of the ROS ASSY.

C A U T IO N
9.
9)
8)
FRONT
REAR
When performing the subsequent procedures, be sure to perform

the followings to avoid touching the MAG ROLL; Unlock the
LATCH ROTARY of the LATCH ASSY-ROTARY and turn the
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY with your hand to move the Housing
ASSY-DEVE.
Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) that secure the ROS ASSY to
the main unit.
10. Lift the ROS ASSY a little to remove the boss of the assy. from the hole of the
main unit, and remove the ROS ASSY toward rear of the main unit.
10)
Leg_Sec03_086RC
Figure 4-87. Removal of ROS ASSY
Printer
404
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on ROS ASSY with the hole on the main unit, and attach ROS
ASSY.
C A U T IO N

2.
Fasten ROS ASSY to the main unit with the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 10mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J601) and connector (P/J602) to ROS ASSY.
4.
Attach CLEANER ASSY. (p406)
5.
6.
Attach COVER INNER L. (p330)
7.
8.
9.
Printer
405
Revision C
4.2.7.2 CLEANER ASSY

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 10mm) fastening GUIDE-ROS CLN to
the main unit.
3.
Remove GUIDE-ROS CLN from the main unit.
4.
Remove CLEANER ASSY from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
4)
1.
Align CLEANER ASSY with the rails on the main unit, and insert.
2.
Match the boss on GUIDE-ROS CLN with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
3.
Fasten GUIDE-ROS CLN to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
10mm).
4.
3)
2)
2)
Leg_Sec03_087RA
Figure 4-88. Removal of CLEANER ASSY
Printer
406
Revision C
4.2.8 DEVE
4)-1
4.2.8.1 LATCH ASSY-ROTARY

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove LV/HVPS. (p438)
3.
Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening LATCH
ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit.
4.
Unhook the three hooks fastening LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit, and
remove LATCH ASSY-ROTARY.
CAUTION
3)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
3)
Pay attention to the levers and springs inside LATCH ASSYROTARY as they easily come loose.
When a part on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY comes off, referring to
the assembly drawing, assemble the part, and attach LATCH
ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit.
1.
Match the hook on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY with the attachment position, and
2.
Fasten LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with
3.
Attach LV/HVPS. (p438)
4.
3)
4)-2
Leg_Sec03_088RA
Figure 4-89. Removal of LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
Printer
407
Revision C
4.2.8.2 ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove ANTENNA CTRG. (p410)
3.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening ANTENNA
ASSY-CTRG to the main unit.
4.
Press the boss fastening ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG to the main unit, and remove
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG.
[3)]
3)
4)-2
REINSTALLATION
3)
1.
Remove the toner cartridge overlaying the attachment position of ANTENNA

ASSY-CTRG.
2.
Match the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG with the attachment position, and
3.
Press ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG from the inside of the main unit (hole on FRAME
ASSY-ROTARY), and firmly insert the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG into
the hole on the main unit.
4.
Fasten ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
5.
Attach ANTENNA CTRG. (p410)
6.
4)-1
4)-1
Leg_Sec03_089RA
Figure 4-90. Removal of ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
Printer
408

7.
Revision C
Attach the ET Cartridges.

C A U T IO N
When installing the ET Cartridge, be careful not to sandwich the

LEVER LATCH between the cartridge and the main unit as shown
in the left figure below. Install the ET cartridges correctly as shown
in the right figure below.
Figure 4-91. LEVER LATCH Position
C A U T IO N
Be sure to clean the ROS ASSY window with the CLEANER ASSY
after installing the ET Cartridges.
Printer
409
Revision C
4.2.8.3 ANTENNA CTRG

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J106) from ANTENNA CTRG.
3.
Unhook the hook fastening ANTENNA CTRG to ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG, and

remove ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG with the hole on ANTENNA CTRG,
attach ANTENNA CTRG, and fasten with a hook.
2.
Connect connector (P/J106) to ANTENNA CTRG.
3.
2)
3)-2
3)-1
Leg_Sec03_091EC
Figure 4-92. Removal of ANTENNA CTRG
Printer
410
Revision C
4.2.8.4 HOLDER ASSY-BIAS

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove WIRE ASSY DEVE connected to HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
3.
Unhook the hook on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS from the main unit, and slide down,
match the protrusion on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS with the notch on the main unit,
and remove HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the protrusion on HOLDER ASSY-BIAS with the notch of the attachment
hole on the main unit, and attach, and slide HOLDER ASSY-BIAS upwards and
fasten with a hook.
2.
Attach WIRE ASSY DEVE to HOLDER ASSY-BIAS.
3.
3)-2
2)
3)-1
Leg_Sec03_092RA
Figure 4-93. Removal of HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
Printer
411
Revision C
4.2.8.5 SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET SENSOR to
the main unit.
4.
Remove BRACKET SENSOR from the main unit together with SENSOR
ROTARY HOME POSI.
5.
Disconnect connector (P/J105) from SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
6.
Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI to

BRACKET SENSOR, and remove SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
REINSTALLATION
1.
6)-1
Match the hooks on SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI with the attachment
position, and attach to BRACKET SENSOR.
6)-2
4)
2.
Connect connector (P/J105) to SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
3.
Match the hole on BRACKET SENSOR with the boss on the main unit, and attach
BRACKET SENSOR together with SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI.
4.
Fasten BRACKET SENSOR to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
5.
6.
3)
5)
Leg_Sec03_093RA
Figure 4-94. Removal of SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
Printer
412
Revision C
4.2.8.6 HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y,

HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M, HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N
W A R N IN G
When removing the Toner Cartridge, put several sheets of copy

paper on COVER FRONT ASSY U and other parts to prevent
them from getting dirty.
Before removing HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, be sure to wipe off
any residual toner on it.
When wiping off the residual toner on HOUSING ASSYDEVE, take care to prevent any toner from static cling to the
sensors on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
Do not vacuum off spilled toner using an usual vacuum cleaner

because there is a possibility of taking fire.
9)-1
1.
Remove the Toner Cartridge.
2.
3.
Remove COVER ASSY TOP. (p311)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press LATCH ROTARY on LATCH ASSY-ROTARY to release the latch, turn

FRAME ASSY-ROTARY by hand, and move HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to a
position where is easy to work.
9)-2
Leg_Sec03_094EB
Figure 4-95. Removal of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (1)

C A U T IO N
After moving HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, make sure that FRAME

ASSY-ROTARY is firmly locked by LATCH ROTARY.
Printer
413
Revision C
10. Unhook the hook on PIVOT AD fastening the right side of HOUSING ASSYDEVE to FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, and remove PIVOT AD.
10)-2
11. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8mm) fastening PIVOT ASSY
fastening the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE to FRAME ASSY-ROTARY,
and remove PIVOT ASSY.
11)-2
11)-1
12. Lift up the right side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, remove the gear on the left side
of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE from the gear on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, and
remove HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
10)-1
12)
Thin
CAUTION
Thick
CHECK POINT
Leg_Sec03_095RB
Figure 4-96. Removal of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE (2)
Printer
414
Revision C
9.
REINSTALLATION
Attach COVER ASSY TOP. (p311)

C A U T IO N
1.
Holes are provided in the protrusion portion on FRAME ASSYROTARY for preventing mis-insertion of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
The attachment positions of each color of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
is indicated as K, Y, M, and C on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
11. Attach the Toner Cartridge.

C A U T IO N
Match the gear on the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE of the same color as
the indicated color on FRAME ASSY-ROTARY with the gear on FRAME ASSYROTARY, and attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
C A U T IO N
The spring under both sides of the bottom of HOUSING ASSYDEVE must be placed firmly on the spring receptacle of
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
A spring having a thick right side and a thin left side is used as
the spring under HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
2.
Match the hole on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the attachment hole on the left
side of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, insert the shaft on PIVOT ASSY, and fasten
the left side of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the screw (silver, with flange,
tapping, 8 mm).
3.
Match the hole on HOUSING ASSY-DEVE with the attachment hole on the right
side of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY, insert the shaft of PIVOT AD, and fasten the
hook on PIVOT AD to attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE.
C A U T IO N
When installing the ET Cartridge, be careful not to sandwich the

LEVER LATCH between the cartridge and the main unit as shown
in the left figure below. Install the ET cartridges correctly as shown
in the right figure below.
Figure 4-97. LEVER LATCH Position
5.
6.
7.
8.
Removed PIVOT ADs should not be re-used; only new PIVOT ADs
in the KIT should be used.
4.
C A U T IO N
Printer
Be sure to clean the ROS ASSY window with the CLEANER

ASSY after installing the ET Cartridges.
Be sure to reset the life counter of the Housing ASSY-DEVE
after replacing it with a new one.
(See 6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items (p556))
415
Revision C
4.2.8.7 FRAME ASSY-ROTARY

18)
REMOVAL
1. Remove COVER ASSY RH. (p329)
2.
3.
4.
Remove COVER ASSY TOP. (p311)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
22)
22)
22)
28)
28)
10. Remove LV/HVPS. (p438)

11. Remove CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p443)
12. Remove DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p424)
27)
13. Remove MOT ASSY MAG. (p426)

14. Remove LATCH ASSY-ROTARY. (p407)
15. Remove SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI. (p412)
25)
16. Remove FRAME ASSY-PH. (p355)
25)
26)
17. Remove BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p402)

18. Remove SENSOR TR-0. (p390)
26)
19. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p391)
24)
20. Remove GUIDE CRU ASSY AD. (p396)
24)
21. Remove HOUSING ASSY-DEVE. (p413)

22. Remove the three screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the BRACKET
ASSY 2ND GEAR to the main unit.
Leg_Sec03_096RA
Figure 4-98. Removal of FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
Printer
416
Revision C
23. Remove the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR and the GEAR 2ND from the main
unit.
10. Attach GUIDE CRU ASSY D. (p391)
24. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the SHAFT ASSYROTARY to the right side of the main unit.
12. Attach BCR CLN XERO ASSY. (p402)
11. Attach SENSOR TR-0. (p390)
25. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the SHAFT ASSYROTARY to the left side of the main unit.
13. Attach FRAME ASSY-PH. (p355)

14. Attach SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI. (p412)
15. Attach LATCH ASSY-ROTARY.(p407)
26. Remove the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY from the both sides of the main unit.
16. Attach MOT ASSY MAG. (p426)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following procedure, be careful not to lose the

BEARING BALL as it may come off.
17. Attach DRIVE ASSY PRO. (p424)

18. Attach CHASSIS ASSY ESS. (p443)
19. Attach LV/HVPS. (p438)
27. Remove the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY upward together with the BEARING
BALL.
20. Attach PWBA MCU. (p435)

21. Attach COVER INNER TOP. (p327)
28. Remove the BEARING BALL from the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
22. Attach COVER FRONT L and COVER FRONT ASSY U. (p321)

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the BEARING BALL to the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY.
2.
3.

25. Attach COVER ASSY TOP. (p311)
Attach the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit placing its gear side to the
left.
26. Attach FUSER ASSY. (p418)

Attach the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY to the main unit inserting its shaft into the
hole of the FRAME ASSY-ROTARY (both right and left).
4.
Secure the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY attached to the left side of the main unit with
the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
5.
Secure the SHAFT ASSY-ROTARY attached to the right side of the main unit
with the two screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
6.
Attach the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR and the GEAR 2ND to the main unit.
7.
Secure the BRACKET ASSY 2ND GEAR to the main unit with the three screws
(silver, with flange, 6 mm).
8.
Attach HOUSING ASSY-DEVE . (p413)
9.
Printer
417
Revision C
4.2.9 FUSER
COVER FUSER GUIDE
4.2.9.1 FUSER ASSY

C A U T IO N
COVER TOP
SIDE L
Be extremely careful not to burn your hand when handling the

FUSER section.
Hook
2)
3)-1
REMOVAL
3)-1
FUSER ASSY
1.
Open COVER FUSER.
2.
Release the COVER TOP SIDE L from the hook of the COVER FUSER GUIDE,
and turn the COVER FUSER GUIDE 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow.
3.
Move the levers on both sides of the FUSER ASSY upward to unlock and remove
the FUSER ASSY.
3)-2
Actuator
4.
Pull out the shaft of the Actuator with the Chute of the FUSER ASSY opened, and
remove the Actuator together with the Spring.
5.
Remove the Spring from the Actuator.
Figure 4-99. Removal of FUSER ASSY
Printer
418
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
Actuator
1.
Attach the Spring to the Actuator.
2.
Insert the shaft of the Actuator with the Chute of the FUSER ASSY opened, and
attach the Actuator together with the Spring.
5)
FUSER ASSY
3.
Attach the FUSER ASSY to the main unit matching the connector and boss of the
FUSER ASSY with the connector and the hole of the main unit, and push the
levers on the both sides of the FUSER ASSY to secure it to the main unit.
4.
Return the COVER FUSER GUIDE to its original position, and secure the
COVER TOP SIDE L with the hook of the COVER FUSER GUIDE.
5.
Close COVER FUSER.

C A U T IO N
4)-1
4)-2
Be sure to reset the life counter of the FUSER ASSY after replacing
it with a new one.
(See 6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items (p556))
Leg_Sec03_160EA
Figure 4-100. NIP Release Lever Fixing Parts
Printer
419
Revision C
4.2.9.2 FUSER LOCK SWITCH

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

C A U T IO N
5)-1

4)
4.
Disconnect the connector (P/J128, blue) from FUSER LOCK SWITCH.
5.
Unclamp the two clamps fastening the harness on FUSER LOCK SWITCH to
remove the harness, and put the connector of FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the
inside the main unit from the hole on the main unit.
6)
5)-1
C A U T IO N
When performing the following, take care not to damage FUSER

LOCK SWITCH by falling or dropping it.
7)
6.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6 mm) fastening FUSER LOCK
SWITCH to the main unit.
7.
Slide FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the right, unhook the hook on FUSER LOCK
SWITCH from the hole on the main unit, and remove FUSER LOCK SWITCH.
5)-2
Leg_Sec03_519RB
Figure 4-101. Removal of FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Printer
420
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following, take care not to damage FUSER

LOCK SWITCH by falling or dropping it.
1.
Match the protrusion and hook on FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the hole on the
main unit, slide FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the left, and attach FUSER LOCK
SWITCH.
2.
Putting your hand beneath FUSER LOCK SWITCH to prevent it from dropping,
fasten FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 6
mm).
3.
Bring out the connector on FUSER LOCK SWITCH to the outside from the hole
on the main unit.
4.
Attach the connector (P/J128, blue) to FUSER LOCK SWITCH, and fasten the
harness on FUSER LOCK SWITCH with the two clamps.
5.
6.
7.
Printer
421
Revision C
4.2.9.3 HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L

REMOVAL
7)-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the connector (black-and-white) from PWBA FUSER CONT.
5.
Disconnect connector (P417) from PWBA MCU.
6.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET-RIZ to the
main unit, remove the harness from the clamp, and remove BRACKET-RIZ from
the main unit.
7.
7)-1
6)-2
5)
Draw out HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L from BRACKET-RIZ while pressing the
claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L.
C A U T IO N
The claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L is easily broken. Take

care not to press it too much.
6)-1
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the claw on HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L into the hole on BRACKET-RIZ
to attach.
2.
Fasten BRACKET-RIZ to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm), and fasten each harness with the clamps.
3.
Attach the harness (yellow) to the connector (P417) on PWBA MCU.
4.
Connect the harness (black-and-white) to PWBA FUSER CONT.
5.
6.
7.
6)-2
4)
Leg_Sec03_520RB
Figure 4-102. Removal of HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
Printer
422
Revision C
4.2.10 DRIVE
4.2.10.1 DRIVE ASSY BTR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY BTR to
the main unit.
9.
Remove DRIVE ASSY BTR from the main unit.
8)
9)
8)
Leg_Sec03_098RB
REINSTALLATION
Figure 4-103. Removal of DRIVE ASSY BTR
1.
Match the shaft on DRIVE ASSY BTR with the hole on the main unit, and attach
DRIVE ASSY BTR.
2.
Fasten DRIVE ASSY BTR to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
6mm).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Printer
423
Revision C
4.2.10.2 DRIVE ASSY PRO
7)
5)
REMOVAL
6)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect connector (P/J411,P/J414) from the PWBA MCU.
5.
Unclamp the harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO on the left side of the main unit from
the clamp. If the harness is difficult to remove, remove PWBA MCU. (p435)
6.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY PRO to
the main unit.
7.
Remove DRIVE ASSY PRO from the main unit.
6)
6)
6)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Inset the motor section and harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO into the hole on the
main unit, match the hole on DRIVE ASSY PRO with the boss on the main unit,
and attach DRIVE ASSY PRO.
2.
Fasten DRIVE ASSY PRO to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
3.
Fasten the harness on DRIVE ASSY PRO with the clamp on the left side of the
main unit.
4.
Connect connector (P/J411,P/J414) to the PWBA MCU.
5.
6.
7.
Leg_Sec03_099EA
Figure 4-104. Removal of DRIVE ASSY PRO
Printer
424
Revision C
4.2.10.3 MOT ASSY FSR

2)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J404) from the PWBA MCU.
3.
Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness on MOT ASSY FSR and remove the
harness.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 4mm) fastening MOT ASSY FSR to the
main unit.
5.
Remove MOT ASSY FSR from the main unit.
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach MOT ASSY FSR to the main unit.
2.
Fasten MOT ASSY FSR to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
4mm).
3.
Connect the (P/J404) to the PWBA MCU.
4.
Fasten the harness of MOT ASSY FSR with the clamp.
5.
5)
4)
4)

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J404
Ready Jam E, F
Paper Jam at 2nd BTR

section
---
Leg_Sec03_100RA
Figure 4-105. Removal of MOT ASSY FSR
Printer
425
Revision C
4.2.10.4 MOT ASSY MAG

REMOVAL
1.

C H E C K
P O IN T
3)
When performing the following work, the connector of PWBA ESS

does not need to be removed.
3)
2.
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J405) and connector (P/J406) from PWBA MCU.
4.
Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) fastening MOT ASSY MAG to
the main unit.
5.
Remove MOT ASSY MAG from the main unit.
4)
4)
4)
5)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on MOT ASSY MAG with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
2.
Fasten MOT ASSY MAG to the main unit with the 3 screws (silver, with flange,
10 mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J405) and connector (P/J406) to PWBA MCU.
4.
5.
Leg_Sec03_102RA
Figure 4-106. Removal of MOT ASSY MAG

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J405
P/J406
Ready
Entirely Faint
FIP-P17
Ready
Normal printing
---
Printer
426
Revision C
4.2.10.5 MOT ASSY ROT
CAUTION
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unclamp the clamp fastening WIRE ASSY DEVE, and remove WIRE ASSY
DEVE.
7.
Disconnect connector (P/J433) from PWB ASSY ROT.
8.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening MOT ASSY ROT to
the main unit.
9.
Remove MOT ASSY ROT from the main unit.
FFC-ASSY
ESS
WIRE ASSY
BTR
WIRE ASSY
DEVE
6)
FFC-ASSY
ESS
9)
8)
8)
8)
7)
8)
Leg_Sec03_101EB
Figure 4-107. Removal of MOT ASSY ROT
Printer
427
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When doing the following work, take care so that WIRE ASSY
DEVE, WIRE ASSY BTR, and FFC-ASSY ESS are not sandwiched
between the main unit and MOT ASSY ROT.
1.
Match the boss on MOT ASSY ROT with the hole on the main unit, and attach.
2.
Fasten MOT ASSY ROT to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J433) to PWB ASSY ROT.
4.
Fasten WIRE ASSY DEVE with the clamp.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J433
Service Req E527
All LEDs flash
---
Printer
428
Revision C
4.2.10.6 MOT ASSY P/R

C A U T IO N

reinstallation.
[1)-1]
2)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J200) and connector (P/J201) from MOT ASSY P/R.
3.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 10 mm) fastening MOT ASSY P/R to
the main unit.
4.
Remove MOT ASSY P/R from the main unit.
4)
3)
3)
3)
[1)-2]
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach MOT ASSY P/R to the main unit while lightly pressing LINKCOUPLING.
2.
Fasten MOT ASSY P/R to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 10
mm).
C A U T IO N
Lightly open/close COVER ASSY TOP, and check operation of the

coupling on MOT ASSY P/R.
Leg_Sec03_103RC
Figure 4-108. Removal of MOT ASSY P/R

3.
Attach connector (P/J200) and connector (P/J201) to MOT ASSY P/R.
4.
Printer
429
Revision C
4.2.10.7 MOT ASSY MICRO

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness on MOT ASSY MICRO.
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J600) from MOT ASSY MICRO.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 4mm) fastening MOT ASSY MICRO to
the main unit.
5.
Remove MOT ASSY MICRO from the main unit.
3)
5)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
4)

attachment direction of MOT ASSY MICRO.
4)
2)
1.
Attach MOT ASSY MICRO to the main unit with the harness on MOT ASSY
MICRO facing the rear side.
2.
Fasten MOT ASSY MICRO to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with flange,
4mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J600) to MOT ASSY MICRO.
4.
Fasten the harness on MOT ASSY MICRO with the clamp.
5.
Leg_Sec03_104RB
Figure 4-109. Removal of MOT ASSY MICRO
Printer
430
Revision C
4.2.11 ELECTRICAL
4.2.11.1 SENSOR HUM & TEMP
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J104) from SENSOR HUM & TEMP.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening SENSOR HUM
& TEMP to the main unit.
4.
Remove SENSOR HUM & TEMP from the main unit.
3)
2)
4)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach SENSOR HUM & TEMP to the main unit.
2.
Fasten SENSOR HUM & TEMP to the main unit with the screw (silver, with
3.
Connect the connector (P/J104) to SENSOR HUM & TEMP.
4.
Leg_Sec03_107EA
Figure 4-110. Removal of SENSOR HUM & TEMP

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom
P/J104
Service Req E533
All LEDs flash

Disconnection
Sensor HUM & TEMP error
Printer
431
4.2.11.2 PWBA HVPS

C A U T IO N
Revision C
8.
Avoid staticky places such as on a carpet especially when removing

or inserting a Board. Before starting work with the Board, make
sure to touch metallic portion of the printer connected to the earth
to let your body come out free of static electricity.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove COVER INNER L. (p330)
6.
Disconnect connector (P/J516) from PWBA HVPS, and remove WIRE ASSY
2BTR, WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY DTN (white).
7.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA HVPS to the
main unit.
8.
Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
Entirely Faint
FIP-P17
P/J516
Ready
F (505)
Ready
Entirely Thin
FIP-P19
G (506)
Ready
Normal printing
---
H (507)
Ready
Normal printing
---
8)
Remove PWBA HVPS from the main unit.
7)
7)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach PWBA HVPS to the main unit.
2.
Fasten PWBA HVPS to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J516) to PWBA HVPS, and attach WIRE ASSY 2BTR,
WIRE ASSY IBT and WIRE ASSY DTN (white).
4.
Attach COVER INNER L. (p330)
5.
6.
7.
7)
7)
6)
6)
6)
6)
Leg_Sec03_105EB
Figure 4-111. Removal of PWBA HVPS
Printer
432
Revision C
4.2.11.3 PWB ASSY ROT

C A U T IO N

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J430
Service Req E527
All LEDs flash
---
P/J432
Service Req E527
All LEDs flash
---
P/J433
Service Req E527
All LEDs flash
---
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect connector (P/J430), connector (P/J432) and connector (P/J433) from

PWB ASSY ROT.
6.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWB ASSY ROT to
the main unit.
7.
Remove PWB ASSY ROT from the main unit.
7)
6)
REINSTALLATION
6)
1.
Attach PWB ASSY ROT to the main unit.
6)
2.
Fasten PWB ASSY ROT to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6
mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J430), connector (P/J432) and connector (P/J433) to PWB

ASSY ROT.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6)
5)
Leg_Sec03_106FA
Figure 4-112. Removal of PWB ASSY ROT
Printer
433
Revision C
4.2.11.4 PWBA CRUM

C A U T IO N
When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA

MCU or the PWBA CRUM, the information that specific to each
printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced circuit
board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to specific
printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on another printer
unit. Do not reuse the board that previously installed on another
printer unit.
7.
8.
9.

C A U T IO N
Do not replace both PWBA CRUM and PWBA MCU at a time.

(Replace one of them first and turn the product ON and OFF, and
then replace the other one if both of them should be replaced.)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove MOT ASSY ROT. (p427)
7.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening PWBA CRUM to the main
unit.
8.
Disconnect connector (P/J429) from PWBA CRUM.
9.
Remove PWBA CRUM from the main unit.
7)
9)
8)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach PWBA CRUM to the main unit.
2.
Connect connector (P/J429) to PWBA CRUM.
3.
Fasten PWBA CRUM to the main unit with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping,
8mm).
4.
Attach MOT ASSY ROT. (p427)
5.
6.
Leg_Sec03_108FA
Figure 4-113. Removal of PWBA CRUM
Printer
434
Revision C
4.2.11.5 PWBA MCU

C A U T IO N

When using the old PWBA MCU
4)
3)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA MCU.
3.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening PWBA MCU to the
main unit.
4.
Remove PWBA MCU from the main unit.
3)
3)
3)
403
404
417
418
422
416
414
405
415
408
REINSTALLATION
412
409
421
411
1.
Attach PWBA MCU to the main unit.
2.
Fasten PWBA MCU to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
3.
Connect all connectors to the PWBA MCU.
4.
406 407
2)
410
420
413
400
(Unused)
401
Leg_Sec03_110RB
Figure 4-114. Removal of PWBA MCU
Printer
435
Revision C
When replacing PWBA MCU with a new one
REMOVAL
The life information of the replacement parts, correction parameters, etc are stored in
EEPROM on the MCU board (PWBA MCU). The EEPROM was mounted in IC
socket of the MCU board on previous models, whereas the EEPROM of this product is
soldered directly on the MCU board and it is quite difficult to replace it. Therefore,
when the PWBA MCU is replaced with a new one, the data in the EEPROM must be
backed-up and re-stored to the EEPROM on the new MCU board.
C A U T IO N
When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA

MCU or the PWBA CRUM, the information that specific to each
printer unit is automatically stored on a memory of replaced
circuit board. Due to this reason, the board becomes unique to
specific printer unit, and the board is no longer usable on
another printer unit. Do not reuse the board that previously
installed on another printer unit.
When replacing the PWBA MCU, verify that the version of
firmware on new PWBA MCU matches the version of previous
PWBA MCU. If not, be sure to make them matches each other
by either upgrading or downgrading the firmware. Make sure to
execute [MCU Data Restore] in the MAINTENANCE menu only
after matching the firmware version.
1.
To enter the maintenance mode, while holding down the [Left(

[Down( )] and [Right( )] buttons, turn the printer on.
2.
Execute the "MCU DATA BackUp" in the maintenance menu to temporarily store
the data stored in the old EEPROM on PWBA MCU.
C A U T IO N
)], [Up(
)],
When printer is in the following condition, [MCU DATA

BackUp] and [MCU DATA Restore] cannot be executed.
During power-save mode
During warming up
During printing
During adjustment
Once the backup has started, do not turn the printer's power off
until the engine stops.
3.
4.
Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA MCU.
5.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6mm) fastening PWBA MCU to the
main unit.
6.
Remove PWBA MCU from the main unit.
Printer
436
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
Fasten PWBA MCU to the main unit with the 4 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
P/J412
Service Req E513
All LEDs flash
NVM error
3.
Connect all connectors to the PWBA MCU.
P/J413
Service Req E533
All LEDs flash
Sensor HUM & TEMP error
4.
P/J414
Ready Service Req

E542
All LEDs flash
---
5.
To enter the maintenance mode, while holding down the [Left(

[Down( )] and [Right( )] buttons, turn the printer on.
P/J415
EPSON
The display does not

change from "EPSON"
---
6.
Execute the MCU DATA Restore in the maintenance menu to write the data
onto a new PWBA MCU.
P/J416
Printing is not possible.
Photocondctr error
P/J417
Service Req E537
All LEDs flash
Fuser error
P/J418
F Open
---
P/J421
Ready
The main unit prints

normally. 500-sheet
Cassette is not recognized.
Paper Feeder error
P/J422
Service Req E526
All LEDs flash
---
1.
Attach PWBA MCU to the main unit.
2.
C A U T IO N
)], [Up(
)],
Once the restoring has started, do not turn the printer's power off
until the engine stops.
Do not replace both PWBA CRUM and PWBA MCU at a time.
(Replace one of them first and turn the product ON and OFF, and
then replace the other one if both of them should be replaced.)

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J400
Service Req C0998
---
P/J401
Ready Service Req

E537
Fuser error
P/J403
C Open
The Cover Fuser is open.
P/J404
Ready Jam E, F
Paper Jam at 2nd BTR
---
P/J405
Ready
Entirely Faint
---
P/J406
Ready
Normal printing
---
P/J407
Ready Service Req

E510
All LEDs light
ROS Motor error
P/J408
E Open
---
P/J409
Service Req E547
Feeder Moter error
P/J410
Service Req C0998
---
P/J411
Ready
Normal printing
---
Printer
437
Revision C
4.2.11.6 LV/HVPS
2)
C A U T IO N

515
502 501
500
510
D
(1BTR)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect all connectors from the LV/HVPS.
3.
Remove the 6 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening LV/HVPS to the main
unit.
4.
Remove the top part of LV/HVPS from the protrusion of the bracket attached to
the main unit while taking out the front side of LV/HVPS from between the main
unit and COVER FRONT L, and remove LV/HVPS.
A
(BCR)
C
(DEVE)
(Blue)
503
4)-1
3)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Put the top part of LV/HVPS inside the protrusion of the bracket while inserting
the front side of LV/HVPS in between the main unit frame and COVER FRONT L
to attach LV/HVPS.
2.
Fasten LV/HVPS to the main unit with the 6 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
3.
Connect all connectors to the LV/HVPS.
4.
3)
3)
4)-2
3)
3)
Leg_03_111RC
Figure 4-115. Removal of LV/HVPS
Printer
438
Revision C

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J500
Ready Service
Req E537
All LEDs flash
---
P/J501
---
---
P/J502
Service Req C0998
All LEDs light
---
P/J503
---
Printed light and faint
---
P/J510
Release Cariage
Lock
Printed light and faint
---
P/J515
Ready
Entirely Faint
FIP-P17
A (508)
Ready
FIP-P18
C (509)
Ready
Entirely Faint
FIP-P17
Ready
Uneven Density/ThinSpot
FIP-P16
D (504)
Printer
439
Revision C
4.2.11.7 PWBA ESS (BOARD ASSY., MAIN)

C A U T IO N

REMOVAL
6)
1.
C A U T IO N
2.
6)

The following Step 2 to 4 are for the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model).
The AcuLaser CX11 (base model) does not have PWBA FAX, and
four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) are attached instead of the
four SPACERs. Remove the four screws when disassembling the
base model.
3)
4)
6)
4)
7)
6)
6)
6)
CN410
Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA FAX to
the PWBA ESS.
3.
Disconnect the connector from the PWBA ESS and remove the PWBA FAX.
4.
Remove the four SPACERs on the PWBA ESS.
5.
Disconnect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
6.
Remove the four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA ESS to
the CHASSIS ESS, and remove the three screws that secure the connectors for the
interface.
7.
Remove the PWBA ESS taking out the interface connector from the hole on the
CHASSIS ESS.
4)
2)
4)
6)
2)
2)
2)
CN705 CN502 CN704 CN702 CN405
CN701
CN703
CN602
CN501
CN601
5)
CAUTION
CN704(12 pin)
FERRITE CORE
CN701(14 pin)
CN702(13 pin)
Leg_03_109RC
Figure 4-116. Removal of PWBA ESS
Printer
440
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
CN405
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.
Put the interface connector of the PWBA ESS into the hole of the CHASSIS ESS,
and attach the PWBA ESS.
2.
Secure the PWBA ESS to the CHASSIS ESS with the four screws (silver, with
flange, 6 mm) and secure the interface connector with the three screws.
CN501
Connect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
CN601
Service Req C0998
All LEDs light
---
CN602
Ready
Blank Print
FIP-P2
3.
C A U T IO N
CN502
the FERRITE CORE as shown in the figure. The following Step
4 to 6 are for the AcuLaser CX11F (fax model).
The AcuLaser CX11 (base model) does not have PWBA FAX,
and four screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) are attached instead
of the four SPACERs. Attach the four screws when
reassembling the base model.
4.
Attach the four SPACERs to the PWBA ESS.
5.
Connect the PWBA FAX to CN410 on the PWBA ESS.
6.
Secure the PWBA FAX to the SPACER with the four screws (silver, with flange,
6 mm).
7.
CN701
CN702
Printer
Release Cariage Lock Printing is not possible.

Ready Printing
---
---
---
CN703
---
CN704
Service Req C0998

Ready
Printing is performed
normally except the
ADF is not recognized.
---
CN705
Ready
Printing is performed
normally except the
ADF is not recognized.
---
441
Revision C
4.2.11.8 PWBA FUSER CONT

C A U T IO N

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J1
Ready Service Req

E537
All LEDs flash
---
P/J3
Service Req E537
All LEDs flash
---
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect all connectors from the PWBA FUSER CONT.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) fastening PWBA FUSER CONT
to the main unit.
5.
Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) fastening PWBA
FUSER CONT to the main unit.
6.
Remove PWBA FUSER CONT from the main unit.
3)
4)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
6)
Match the boss and protrusion on PWBA FUSER CONT with the hole on the main
unit, and attach PWBA FUSER CONT.
2.
Fasten PWBA FUSER CONT to the main unit with the screw (silver, with external
toothed washer, 5 mm).
3.
Fasten PWBA FUSER CONT to the main unit with the 2 screws (silver, with
flange, 8mm).
4.
Connect all connectors to the PWBA FUSER CONT.
5.
6.
3)
4)
5)
Leg_Sec03_113FB
Figure 4-117. Removal of PWBA FUSER CONT
Printer
442
Revision C
4.2.11.9 CHASSIS ASSY ESS (REFERENCE ONLY)

C A U T IO N
4)

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.
3.
Pull out the disconnected connectors through the hole on the CHASSIS ESS.
4.
Release the harnesses from the clamp on the CHASSIS ASSY ESS.
5.
Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) that secure the CHASSIS
ASSY ESS to the main unit.
6.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secures the HARNESS ASSY
PANEL.
7.
Remove the CHASSIS ASSY ESS from the main unit.
6)
5)
5)
5)
5)
[1]
7)
5)
CAUTION
CN705 CN502 CN704 CN702 CN405
CN704(12 pin)
CN701(14 pin)
CN701
CN702(13 pin)
CN703
FERRITE CORE
CN602
CN501
CN601
2)
Leg_03_114RC
Figure 4-118. Removal of CHASSIS ASSY ESS
Printer
443
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N

harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and
CHASSIS ESS.
1.
Attach the CHASSIS ASSY ESS to the main unit matching the protrusion of the
CHASSIS ASSY ESS with the hole of the main unit.
2.
Secure the HARNESS ASSY PANEL with the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm).
3.
Secure the CHASSIS ASSY ESS with the five screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm).
4.
Put the connectors inside through the hole on the CHASSIS ESS.
5.
Connect the all connectors on the PWBA ESS.

C A U T IO N
the FERRITE CORE as shown in the figure.
6.
Secure the harnesses with the clamp on the CHASSIS ASSY ESS.
7.

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
CN405
---
---
---
CN501
---
---
---
CN601
Service Req C0998
All LEDs light
---
CN602
Ready
Blank Print
FIP-P2
Printer
444
Revision C
4.2.12 500 PAPER CASSETTE & 500 PAPER FEEDER

4.2.12.1 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
REMOVAL
1.
Draw out 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY until it comes to a stop, then slightly lift
up the front side, and remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY from 500 PAPER
FEEDER.
REINSTALLATION
1.
1)
Insert the front side of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY into 500 PAPER FEEDER
with the front side of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY slightly lifted up, then hold
it horizontal and insert it all the way seated in 500 PAPER FEEDER.
Leg_Sec03_013EA
Figure 4-119. Removal of 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY
Printer
445
Revision C
4.2.12.2 GUIDE END ASSY

3)
C A U T IO N
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step during

attachment.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p445)
2.
Remove PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p447)
3.
Slide GUIDE END ASSY to the rear, match the 4 protrusions on GUIDE END
ASSY with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to remove.
[2)]
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the 4 protrusions on GUIDE END ASSY with the notches on CASSETTE
500, and attach.
2.
Slide GUIDE END ASSY to the front, and insert the protrusion on GUIDE END
ASSY into the groove on PAPER SLIDE 500.
3.
Attach PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p447)
4.
Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p445)
Leg_Sec03_014EA
Figure 4-120. Removal of GUIDE END ASSY
Printer
446
Revision C
4.2.12.3 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500

3)-1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Slide LOCK LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L, and unlock the locks.
3.
Unhook the hooks on ROLL LINK fastened to the shaft of PLATE ASSY
BOTTOM 500 on both the left and right sides, and remove ROLL LINK, LOCK
LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L.
3)-2
4.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 6 mm) (2 each on left and right) fastening
the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPER 500s to 500 PAPER CASSETTE
ASSY.
5.
Remove the protrusion on PLATE ROLL STOPPER from the hole on 500 PAPER
CASSETTE ASSY, and remove the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs.
6.
Press the two hooks on CASSETTE 500, and release the front side of PLATE
ASSY BOTTOM 500.
7.
Remove the protrusion of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 from the indent on
PAPER SLIDE 500.
8.
Draw out the shaft on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 from the oblong hole on
CASSETTE 500 while pushing the side of CASSETTE 500 outward, and remove
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
3)-2
3)-1
2)
2)
Leg_Sec03_015EA
Figure 4-121. Removal of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 (1)
Printer
447
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on the rear of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 with SPRING NF.
C A U T IO N
7)
Make sure that the boss on the rear of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
500 is inserted into SPRING NF.
2.
Insert the shaft on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 into the oblong hole on
CASSETTE 500 while pushing the side of CASSETTE 500 outward, and attach
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
3.
Fasten the front side of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 with the two hooks on
CASSETTE 500 while inserting the protrusion on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500
into the concave portion on PAPER SLIDE 500.
C A U T IO N
6)
6)
8)-2
The protrusion on PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 must be inserted

into the concave portion on PAPER SLIDE 500.
8)-1
4.
Match the protrusion on PLATE ROLL STOPPER with the hole on 500 PAPER
CASSETTE ASSY, and attach the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs.
5.
Fasten the left and right PLATE ROLL STOPPERs to 500 PAPER CASSETTE
ASSY with the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 6 mm) (2 each on left and right).
6.
4)
4)
Attach LOCK LIFT R, LOCK LIFT L and ROLL LINK to the bearing on PLATE
ASSY BOTTOM 500 on both the left and right sides, and fasten the hook on
ROLL LINK to the groove on the shaft of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500.
7.
Press PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 to lock LOCK LIFT R and LOCK LIFT L.
8.
5)
8)-1
4)
5)
4)
Leg_Sec03_016EA
Figure 4-122. Removal of PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500 (2)
Printer
448
Revision C
4.2.12.4 GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500AGUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
3)-1
4)
REMOVAL
3)-2
1.
2.
Remove PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p447)
3.
Unhook the hook on CASSETTE 500 fastening PINION 12, and remove PINION
12.
4.
Slide GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 to the right, match the 3 protrusions on
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to
remove.
5.
Slide GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 to the left, match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE
PAPER R ASSY 500 with the notches on CASSETTE 500, and lift up to remove.
5)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 with the notches on
CASSETTE 500, and attach.
2.
Match the 3 protrusions on GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 with the notches on
CASSETTE 500, and attach.
3.
Set GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500 to their
maximum open states, attach PINION 12 to CASSETTE 500, and fasten with the
hooks.
4.
Attach PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 500. (p452)
5.

Leg_Sec03_515EA
Figure 4-123. GRemoval of GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500 and GUIDE PAPER R
ASSY 500
Printer
449
Revision C
4.2.12.5 COVER FRONT CST 500

3)-1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER
FRONT CST 500 to 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY.
3.
Unhook the hook on the base of COVER FRONT CST 500 using a small
screwdriver or a similar tool, pull down COVER FRONT CST 500 towards you to
release the three protrusions on the rear of COVER FRONT CST 500 from the
hole on the 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY, and remove COVER FRONT CST
500.
2)
REINSTALLATION
3)-2
1.
Match the three protrusions on the rear of COVER FRONT CST 500 with the hole
on 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY, attach COVER FRONT CST 500, and fasten
the hook on the base of COVER FRONT CST 500.
2.
Fasten COVER FRONT CST 500 to 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY with the 2
screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm).
3.
2)
3)-3
Leg_Sec03_018EA
Figure 4-124. Removal of COVER FRONT CST 500
Printer
450
Revision C
4.2.12.6 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Turn LOCK MC TO FDR on both the left and right sides CW by 90 to unlock
from the main unit.
3.
Holding the pitted area on the lower side of both the left and right sides of the main
unit, lift up the main unit, and remove from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, the lengthwise direction of

the oval shape (section that enters the attachment hole on the main
unit) on the top of LOCK MC TO FDR must be facing left and
right.
3)
1.
Match the attachment holes on the main unit with the three bosses on 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and attach the main unit to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2.
Turn LOCK MC TO FDR on both the left and right sides CCW by 90 to lock with
the main unit.
3.
2)
Unlock
Lock
Leg_Sec03_019RA
Figure 4-125. Removal of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
Printer
451
Revision C
4.2.12.7 COVER LEFT 500

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER LEFT 500 to
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3.
Remove COVER LEFT 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY while pulling the
rear side of COVER LEFT 500 outward.
3)-1
2)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the boss on COVER LEFT 500 with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting the metal plate section of the frame at the front and rear of
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the clearance between the rib sections on the
front and rear of COVER LEFT 500, and attach COVER LEFT 500.
2.
Fasten COVER LEFT 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws
3.
2)
3)-2
2)
2)
2)
Leg_Sec03_020EA
Figure 4-126. Removal of COVER LEFT 500
Printer
452
Revision C
4.2.12.8 CHUTE FDR ASSY 500

REMOVAL
C A U T IO N
boss on CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
1.
2.
Remove COVER RIGHT 500. (p454)
3.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE FDR
ASSY 500.
4.
Open CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
5.
Press the attachment section on the right side of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 with
your finger to bend down, draw out the boss on the right side from the hole on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
3)
5)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
With CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 slightly open, insert the boss on the left side into
the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, then attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 to
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY while bending down the boss on the right side.
2.
Close CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
3.
Fasten CHUTE FDR ASSY 500 with the screw (silver, with flange, tapping, 8
mm).
4.
Attach COVER RIGHT 500. (p454)
5.
5)-1
Leg_Sec03_021EA
Figure 4-127. Removal of CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
Printer
453
Revision C
4.2.12.9 COVER RIGHT 500

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the 5 screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm) fastening COVER RIGHT 500 to
3.
Remove COVER RIGHT 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.

2)
REINSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
2)
Match the boss on COVER RIGHT 500 with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting the metal plate section of the frame at the front and rear of
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the clearance between the rib sections on the
front and rear of COVER RIGHT 500, and attach COVER RIGHT 500.
2)
Fasten COVER RIGHT 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws
2)
3)
2)
Attach 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p445)

Leg_Sec03_022EA
Figure 4-128. Removal of COVER RIGHT 500
Printer
454
Revision C
4.2.12.10 PWBA TRAY 500

C A U T IO N

REMOVAL
1.
Remove COVER LEFT 500. (p452)
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J435), connector (P/J436) and connector (P/J437) from

PWBA TRAY 500.
3.
Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA TRAY 500 to
4.
Remove PWBA TRAY 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.

3)
3)
4)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the notch at the bottom right of PWBA TRAY 500 with the protrusion on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2.
Fasten PWBA TRAY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 3 screws
3.
Connect connector (P/J435), connector (P/J436) and connector (P/J437) to PWBA

TRAY 500.
4.
Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p452)
3)
Leg_Sec03_030EA
Figure 4-129. Removal of PWBA TRAY 500

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J435
Ready
The main unit prints

normally. 500-sheet
Cassette is not recognized.
The 500-sheet Cassette

cannot be recognized.
P/J437
G Open
---
Printer
455
Revision C
4.2.12.11 PWBA MOT

C A U T IO N

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect connector (P/J440) and connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT.
3.
Remove the 3 screws (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening PWBA MOT to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
4.
Remove PWBA MOT from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
4)
3)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the notch at the bottom right of PWBA MOT with the protrusion on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2.
Fasten PWBA MOT to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 3 screws (silver,
with flange, 6 mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J440) and connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT.
4.
3)
Leg_Sec03_029EA
Figure 4-130. Removal of PWBA MOT

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
CN1
Ready Paper Jam

LC, G
Paper Jam
---
CN2
Ready Paper Jam

LC, G
---
Printer
456
Revision C
4.2.12.12 DRIVE ASSY FEED
REMOVAL
1.
COVER LEFT 500OB (p452)
2.
CLUTCH ASSY FEEDOB (p460)

C A U T IO N
Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
CN2
Ready Paper Jam

LC, G
Paper Jam
---
P/J610
Paper Jam LC, G
Does not perform paper No paper is loaded in the 500feeding

sheet Cassette

connector of the connector (P/J610) on SOLENOID FEED on the
harness side.
5)-1
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT and connector (P/J610) from
SOLENOID FEED.
C A U T IO N
The screws to be removed in the following work are those fastening

the four corners (marked by ) on DRIVE ASSY FEED. Other
screws must not be removed.
4)
4.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, 6 mm) fastening DRIVE ASSY FEED to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
5.
Remove the protrusion on the top right of DRIVE ASSY FEED from 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and remove DRIVE ASSY FEED.
4)
4)
5)-2
4)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Hook the protrusion on the top right of DRIVE ASSY FEED onto the notch on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and match the hole on DRIVE ASSY FEED with
the boss on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY to attach.
2.
Fasten DRIVE ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 4 screws
(silver, 6 mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT and connector (P/J610) to

SOLENOID FEED.
4.
Attach CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p460)
5.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_023EA
Figure 4-131. Removal of DRIVE ASSY FEED
Printer
457
Revision C
4.2.12.13 SOLENOID FEED

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED. (p460)
3.
Remove DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p457)
4.
Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) fastening SOLENOID FEED to DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
5.
Remove SOLENOID FEED from DRIVE ASSY FEED.
3)
REINSTALLATION
4)
1.
Match the hole on SOLENOID FEED with the boss on DRIVE ASSY FEED.
2.
Fasten SOLENOID FEED to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the screw (silver, 6 mm).
3.
Attach DRIVE ASSY FEED. (p457)
4.
5.
5)
Leg_Sec03_024FA
Figure 4-132. Removal of SOLENOID FEED
Printer
458
Revision C
4.2.12.14 MOTOR ASSY FEEDER

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY FEED, and remove the harness on MOTOR
ASSY FEEDER.
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J446) from PWBA MOT.
4.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, 6 mm) fastening MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to

DRIVE ASSY FEED.
5.
Remove MOTOR ASSY FEEDER from DRIVE ASSY FEED.
5)
4)
2)
4)
REINSTALLATION
3)
C A U T IO N
1.

attachment direction of MOTOR ASSY FEEDER.
Attach MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the harness of
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER facing up.
Leg_Sec03_516EA
Figure 4-133. Removal of MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
2.
Fasten MOTOR ASSY FEEDER to DRIVE ASSY FEED with the 2 screws
(silver, 6 mm).
3.
Connect connector (P/J446) to PWBA MOT.
4.
Fasten the harness on MOTOR ASSY FEEDER with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
5.

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
CN2
Ready Paper Jam

LC, G
Paper Jam
---
Printer
459
Revision C
4.2.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY FEED

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unclamp the clamp on DRIVE ASSY FEED, and remove the harness on
CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
3.
Disconnect connector (P/J609) from CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
4.
Remove the KL ring fastening CLUTCH ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY.
5.
5)
4)
Remove CLUTCH ASSY FEED from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole position of CLUTCH ASSY FEED with the D cut surface on the
shaft of ROLL ASSY TURN 500, and attach CLUTCH ASSY FEED so that the
protrusion of DRIVE ASSY FEED enters the concave portion on CLUTCH ASSY
FEED.
2.
Fasten CLUTCH ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the KL ring.
3.
Connect connector (P/J609) to CLUTCH ASSY FEED.
4.
Fasten the harness on CLUTCH ASSY FEED with the clamp on DRIVE ASSY
FEED.
5.
3)
Leg_Sec03_025EA
Figure 4-134. Removal of CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Table 4-23. Symptoms when the connector is Loose

Connector
No.
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
P/J609
Ready Paper Jam E
Paper Jam
No paper is loaded in the 500sheet Cassette
Printer
460
Revision C
4.2.12.16 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
5)-1
5)-2
REMOVAL
1.
Remove 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p451)
2.
3.
Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1.
4.
Disconnect connector (P/J435) from PWBA-TRAY 500.
5.
Unhook the 2 hooks fastening HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 to 500 PAPER

FEEDER ASSY, and remove HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1.
3)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Pass the connector (P/J43) on HARNESS-ASSY FEED through the hole on 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2.
Attach HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and fasten

with the hook.
3.
Connect connector (P/J435) to PWBA-TRAY 500.
4.
Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1 with the clamp.
5.
6.
4)
Leg_Sec03_026FA
Figure 4-135. Removal of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1

Connector
No.
P/J435
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
Ready
Printing using the 500sheet Cassette cannot be

made. The main unit
prints normally.
The 500-sheet Cassette

cannot be recognized.
Printer
461
Revision C
4.2.12.17 ROLL ASSY TURN 500

REMOVAL
6.
7.
8.
1.
Remove CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p453)
9.
2.
10. Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p453)
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p475)
7.
Remove CHUTE ASSY 500. (p465)
8.
Remove the E-rings fastening both sides of the shaft on ROLL ASSY TURN 500
from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9.
Remove the left and right BEARING FEEDs fastening ROLL ASSY TURN 500
from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
8)
9)
10. Temporarily slide ROLL ASSY TURN 500 to the left, and draw out the shaft of
ROLL ASSY TURN 500 from the right-side bearing on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY to remove ROLL ASSY TURN 500.
8)
9)
10)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the shaft left side on ROLL ASSY TURN 500 into the left-side bearing on
500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and slide ROLL ASSY TURN to the right to attach.
2.
Match the double D cut surface of BEARING FEED with the left and right
bearings of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, attach BEARING FEED, and fasten
ROLL ASSY TURN 500.
3.
Fasten the shafts on both sides on ROLL ASSY TURN to 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY with the E-rings.
4.
Attach CHUTE ASSY 500. (p465)
5.
Attach HOUSING ASSY FEED. (p475)
Leg_Sec03_027EA
Figure 4-136. Removal of ROLL ASSY TURN 500
Printer
462
Revision C
4.2.12.18 SWITCH FEEDER DOOR

C A U T IO N

Connector
No.
Step numbers with [ ] in the figure indicate the step during

attachment.
P/J121
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
G Open
Printing using the 500sheet Cassette cannot be

made. The main unit
prints normally.
500-sheet Cassette Rear

Cover is opened
REMOVAL
[3)]
1.
2.
3.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
4.
Remove CAP FEEDER from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
5.
Unhook the 2 hooks fastening SWITCH FEEDER DOOR to 500 PAPER

FEEDER ASSY, and remove SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
6.
Disconnect connector (P/J121) from SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
5)-1
REINSTALLATION
1.
Connect connector (P/J121) to SWITCH FEEDER DOOR.
2.
Match the hook on SWITCH FEEDER DOOR with the attachment position, and
attach to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3.
Pull the harness of the connector on SWITCH FEEDER DOOR from the outside
of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and take up any slack from the harness on the
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR side.
4.
Match the boss on CAP FEEDER with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY,
and attach CAP FEEDER.
5.
Fasten CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
6.
7.
Attach CHUTE FDR ASSY 500. (p453)
6)
5)-2
4)
3)
Leg_Sec03_028FA
Figure 4-137. Removal of SWITCH FEEDER DOOR
Printer
463
Revision C
4.2.12.19 HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2

REMOVAL
1.
Remove 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY. (p451)
2.
3.
Unclamp the clamp fastening the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2.
4.
Disconnect connector (P/J436) from PWBA-TRAY 500.
5.
Unhook the 2 hooks fastening HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 to 500 PAPER

FEEDER ASSY, and remove HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2.
3)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and fasten

with the hook.
2.
Connect connector (P/J436) to PWBA-TRAY 500.
3.
Fasten the harness of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2 with the clamp.
4.
5.
5)-2
3)
4)
5)-1
Leg_Sec03_031FA
Figure 4-138. Removal of HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
Printer
464
Revision C
4.2.12.20 CHUTE ASSY 500

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9.
Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) fastening BRACKET MAG R to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
8)
8)
10)
10. Remove BRACKET MAG R from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.

9)
11. Remove the right-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 from the bearing on GUIDE
CST R.
12. Remove the left-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 from the bearing on GUIDE
CST L, and remove CHUTE ASSY 500 from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
Leg_Sec03_041EA
Figure 4-139. Removal of CHUTE ASSY 500 (1)
Printer
465
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the left-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 into the bearing on GUIDE CST L.
2.
Insert the right-side shaft on CHUTE ASSY 500 into the bearing on GUIDE CST
R, and attach CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
3.
Match the hole on BRACKET MAG R with the boss on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY while inserting BRACKET MAG R into the notch on 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY, and attach BRACKET MAG R.
4.
Fasten BRACKET MAG R to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
6 mm).
5.
Fasten CHUTE ASSY 500 to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 2 screws
(silver, tapping, 8 mm).
6.
7.
8.
9.
12)
11)
10. Attach COVER RIGHT 500. (p454)

Leg_Sec03_517EA
Figure 4-140. Removal of CHUTE ASSY 500 (2)
12. Attach 500 PAPER CASSETTE ASSY. (p445)
Printer
466
Revision C
4.2.12.21 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
10)-1
10)-1
10)-2
C A U T IO N
9.
9)-3
9)-1
When performing the following work, take care not to damage

the LEVER 500 boss.
When performing the following work, take care not to lose
SPRING LEVER 500.
9)-2
9)-1
Remove LEVER 500 and SPRING LEVER 500 from CHUTE ASSY 500 while
bending down the bosses on both sides of LEVER 500.
C A U T IO N

the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 boss.
When performing the following work, take care not to lose
SPRING RETARD.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_038FA
10. Remove HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 from CHUTE ASSY 500 while bending
down the bosses on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
Printer
Figure 4-141. Removal of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500
467
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N
1.
boss of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
Match SPRING RETARD with the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500, and attach
HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500 to CHUTE ASSY 500 while bending down the
bosses on both sides of HOLDER ASSY RETARD 500.
C A U T IO N
2.
Make sure that SPRING RETARD is in the boss on HOLDER

ASSY RETARD 500 and the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500.
the boss of LEVER 500.
attachment direction of LEVER 500.
Attach LEVER 500 to CHUTE ASSY 500 while attaching SPRING LEVER 500
to the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500 and bending down the bosses on both sides of
LEVER 500.
C A U T IO N
Make sure that SPRING LEVER 500 is in the boss on LEVER

500 and the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500.
The protrusion on LEVER 500 must be firmly inserted into the
concave portion on the bottom of HOLDER ASSY RETARD
500.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Printer
468
Revision C
4.2.12.22 FILM ASSY FDR

REMOVAL
1.
Open CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
2.
Remove the 4 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening FILM ASSY FDR to
CHUTE ASSY 500.
3.
Remove FILM ASSY FDR from CHUTE ASSY 500.
1)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hole on FILM ASSY FDR with the boss on CHUTE ASSY 500, and
attach FILM ASSY FDR while inserting the film base on FILM ASSY FDR to the
inside of CHUTE ASSY 500.
2.
Fasten FILM ASSY FDR to CHUTE ASSY 500 with the 4 screws (silver, tapping,
8 mm).
3.
Close CHUTE FDR ASSY 500.
3)
2)
Leg_Sec03_205FB
Figure 4-142. Removal of FILM ASSY FDR
Printer
469
4.2.12.23 STOPPER CST R

REMOVAL
Revision C
4.
5.
6.
1.
7.
2.
8.
3.
9.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove GUIDE CST R. (p471)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPG
LOCK CST LL.
10. Remove STOPPER CST R and SPG LOCK CST LL from GUIDE CST R.
10)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
10)-1
Attach SPG LOCK CST LL to the boss on STOPPER CST R, and attach
STOPPER CST R to GUIDE CST R.
Leg_Sec03_181FA
C A U T IO N
Make sure that SPG LOCK CST LL is inserted into the boss on
STOPPER CST R and the boss on GUIDE CST R.
2.
Attach GUIDE CST R. (p471)
3.
Figure 4-143. Removal of STOPPER CST R
Printer
470
4.2.12.24 GUIDE CST R

REMOVAL
Revision C
8.
9.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the 5 screws (silver, tapping, 6mm) fastening GUIDE CST R to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9)
9)
10. Remove GUIDE CST R from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY together with SPG
LOCK CST LL and STOPPER CST R.
9)
9)
10)
11. Remove STOPPER CST R. (p470)
9)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach STOPPER CST R. (p470)
2.
Match the boss on the GUIDE CST R with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER
ASSY, and attach GUIDE CST R.
3.
Fasten GUIDE CST R to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws (silver,
tapping, 6mm).
4.
5.
6.
7.
Leg_Sec03_039EA
Figure 4-144. Removal of GUIDE CST R
Printer
471
Revision C
4.2.12.25 GUIDE CST L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER
FEEDER ASSY.
10)
9)
11)
11)
11)
12)
10. Remove CAP FEEDER from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.

11)
11. Remove the 5 screws (silver, tapping, 6mm) fastening GUIDE CST L to 500
PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
11)
12. To remove GUIDE CST L from SWITCH FEEDER DOOR, slide GUIDE CST L
slightly to the right, and remove GUIDE CST L from 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
together with SPG LOCK CST LL and STOPPER CST L.
13. Remove STOPPER CST L. (p474)
Leg_Sec03_040EA
Figure 4-145. Removal of GUIDE CST L
Printer
472
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach STOPPER CST L. (p474)
2.
Match the boss on GUIDE CST L with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY
while inserting SWITCH FEEDER DOOR into the hole on the rear of GUIDE
CST L, and attach GUIDE CST L.
3.
Fasten GUIDE CST L to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the 5 screws (silver,
tapping, 6mm).
4.
Match the boss on CAP FEEDER with the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY,
and attach CAP FEEDER.
5.
Fasten CAP FEEDER to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p452)

11. Attach COVER RIGHT 500. (p454)
Printer
473
4.2.12.26 STOPPER CST L

REMOVAL
Revision C
5.
6.
7.
1.
8.
2.
9.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove GUIDE CST L. (p472)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, take care not to lose SPG
LOCK CST LL.
10. Remove STOPPER CST L from GUIDE CST L.

10)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach SPG LOCK CST LL to the boss on STOPPER CST L, and attach
STOPPER CST L to GUIDE CST L.
10)-1
Leg_Sec03_182FA
Figure 4-146. Removal of STOPPER CST L

C A U T IO N
Make sure that the boss of STOPPER CST and that of GUIDE CST
L are inserted into SPG LOCK CST LL.
2.
Attach GUIDE CST L. (p472)
3.
4.
Printer
474
Revision C
4.2.12.27 HOUSING ASSY FEED
6)
REMOVAL
1.
9)-1
9)-1
5)-1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unhook the hook on GEAR FEED fastened to the shaft on HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove GEAR FEED.
6.
Disconnect connector (P/J618) from HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7.
Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 6 mm) fastening HOUSING ASSY FEED
to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
8.
Insert both hands from the front side of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, pull the 2
levers on HOUSING ASSY FEED towards you, and remove the boss on
HOUSING ASSY FEED from the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
9.
Slide HOUSING ASSY FEED to the front side, unhook the 4 hooks at the top
fastened to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, remove the hole on HOUSING ASSY
FEED from the protrusion at the front side of 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and
push down HOUSING ASSY FEED to remove.
5)-2
ROLL ASSY
TURN 500
9)-2
CAUTION
ACTUATOR
T/R
7)
8)-2
8)-1
8)-2
8)-1
Leg_Sec03_032EB
Figure 4-147. Removal of HOUSING ASSY FEED
Printer
475
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N

ACTUATOR T/R attached to HOUSING ASSY FEED. Also, make
sure that ACTUATOR T/R locates at the position above ROLL
ASSY TURN 500.
1.
Match the 4 hooks on HOUSING ASSY FEED with the attachment positions, and
attach to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY.
2.
Slide HOUSING ASSY FEED to the rear side, insert the boss on HOUSING
ASSY FEED into the hole on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY, and insert the
protrusion on 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY into the hole at the front side of
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
3.
Fasten HOUSING ASSY FEED to 500 PAPER FEEDER ASSY with the screw
4.
Connect connector (P/J618) to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
5.
Attach GEAR FEED to the shaft on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and fasten the hook
on GEAR FEED to the groove on the shaft of HOUSING ASSY FEED.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Connector
No.
P/J618
Panel Indication
Symptom

Disconnection
Printing using the 500sheet Cassette cannot be No paper is loaded in the 500Ready Paper Out
sheet Cassette
made. The main unit
prints normally.
Printer
476
Revision C
4.2.12.28 SENSOR NO PAPER

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) fastening COVER FEED to

HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7.
Remove COVER FEED from HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8.
Unhook the 3 hooks fastening SENSOR NO PAPER to HOUSING ASSY FEED,

and remove SENSOR NO PAPER.
9.
Disconnect connector (P/J119) from SENSOR NO PAPER.
6.
7.
8.
9.

6)
6)
7)
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N

positional relationship between SENSOR NO PAPER and
ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST.
8)-1
1.
Connect connector (P/J119) to SENSOR NO PAPER.
2.
Match the hook on SENSOR NO PAPER with the attachment position while
inserting ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST into the sensor on SENSOR NO PAPER,
and attach to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
3.
Attach COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED.
4.
Fasten COVER FEED to HOUSING ASSY FEED with the 2 screws (silver,
tapping, 8 mm).
5.
9)
8)-2
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_033FA
Figure 4-148. Removal of SENSOR NO PAPER
Printer
477
Revision C
4.2.12.29 ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST
7)
REMOVAL
7)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unhook the 3 hooks fastening CAP ACTUATOR to HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
remove CAP ACTUATOR.
7.

HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8.
9.
Draw out the shaft of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST from the hook on HOUSING
ASSY FEED, slide along the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and remove
6)-2
8)
6)-1
9)-2
9)-1
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_034FA
Figure 4-150. Removal of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST (2)
Leg_Sec03_206FA
Figure 4-149. Removal of ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST (1)
Printer
478
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N

positional relationship between SENSOR NO PAPER and
1.
Insert the shaft on ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST from the notch on HOUSING
ASSY FEED.
2.
Fit the shaft on ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST onto the hook on HOUSING
ASSY FEED while inserting ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST into the sensor on
SENSOR NO PAPER, and attach.
3.
4.
tapping, 8 mm).
5.
Match the hole on CAP ACTUATOR with the boss on HOUSING ASSY FEED,
and attach CAP ACTUATOR.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Printer
479
Revision C
4.2.12.30 ACTUATOR T/R
9)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p482)
7.
Remove SPRING ACTUATOR from the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED.
8.
Draw out the shaft on ACTUATOR T/R from the hook on HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove ACTUATOR T/R together with SPRING ACTUATOR.
9.
Remove SPRING ACTUATOR from ACTUATOR T/R.
7)
8)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach SPRING ACTUATOR to ACTUATOR T/R.
2.
Fit the shaft on ACTUATOR T/R into the hook on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
attach ACTUATOR T/R together with SPRING ACTUATOR.
3.
Hook SPRING ACTUATOR onto the notch on HOUSING ASSY FEED.

C A U T IO N
SPRING ACTUATOR must be firmly hooked onto the notch on

ACTUATOR T/R and HOUSING ASSY FEED.
4.
Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p482)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION
Leg_Sec03_035FA
Figure 4-151. Removal of ACTUATOR T/R
Printer
480
Revision C
4.2.12.31 SENSOR T/R

9)-1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p482)
7.
Remove ACTUATOR T/R. (p480)
8.
Disconnect connector (P/J120) from SENSOR T/R.
9.
Unhook the three hooks fastening SENSOR T/R to HOUSING ASSY FEED, and
remove SENSOR T/R.
8)
9)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the hooks on SENSOR T/R with the attachment positions, and attach to
HOUSING ASSY FEED.
2.
Connect connector (P/J120) to SENSOR T/R.
3.
Attach ACTUATOR T/R. (p480)
4.
Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500. (p482)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Leg_Sec03_036FA
Figure 4-152. Removal of SENSOR T/R
Printer
481
Revision C
4.2.12.32 ROLL ASSY FEED 500
6)
REMOVAL
6)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

HOUSING ASSY FEED.
7.
8.
Remove the E-rings fastening both sides of SHAFT FEED from HOUSING ASSY
FEED, and remove the left and right BEARING SLEEVEs.
9.
Temporarily slide SHAFT FEED to the right, draw out SHAFT FEED from the
left-side bearing on HOUSING ASSY FEED, and remove together with ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL SUPPORT 500.
7)
9)
8)-1
8)-2
10. Unhook the hook on ROLL SUPPORT 500 on the right side fastened to SHAFT
FEED, and remove ROLL SUPPORT 500.
8)-1
11. Unhook the hook on ROLL ASSY FEED 500 fastened to SHAFT FEED, and
remove ROLL ASSY FEED 500.
8)-2
11)-2
11)-1
10)-1
10)-2
Leg_Sec03_037FA
Figure 4-153. Removal of ROLL ASSY FEED 500
Printer
482
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N

attachment direction of ROLL ASSY FEED 500.
1.
Attach ROLL ASSY FEED 500 to SHAFT FEED so that the hook on ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 is facing the right side, and fasten the hook on ROLL ASSY
FEED 500 to the groove on SHAFT FEED.
2.
Attach ROLL SUPPORT 500 to SHAFT FEED, and fasten the hook on ROLL
SUPPORT 500 to the groove on SHAFT FEED.
3.
Insert the right side of SHAFT FEED into the right-side bearing on HOUSING
ASSY FEED, then slide SHAFT FEED to the left, and attach together with ROLL
ASSY FEED 500 and ROLL SUPPORT 500.
4.
Match the double D cut surface of BEARING SLEEVE with the left and right
bearings of HOUSING ASSY FEED, attach BEARING SLEEVE, and fasten both
sides of SHAFT FEED with the E-rings.
5.
6.
tapping, 8 mm).
7.
8.
9.
10. Attach COVER LEFT 500. (p452)

Printer
483
Revision C
4.3 Scanner Section

4.3.1 ADF Unit
REMOVAL
2)
1.
Remove the Scanner. (p309)
2.
Disconnect the cable of the ADF Unit from the IR A Assy.
3.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, P-head) that secure the ADF Unit
to the IR A Assy.
4.
Open the ADF Unit and remove it toward upward.
CABLE
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the ADF HINGE of the ADF Unit into the hole on the IR A Assy, and close
the ADF Unit.
2.
Secure the ADF Unit to the IR A Assy with the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type,
P-head).
3.
Connect the cable of the ADF Unit to the IR A Assy.
4.
Install the Scanner. (p309)
ADF Unit
4)
IR A ASSY
4)
ADF HINGE
ADF HINGE
3)
3)
Figure 4-154. Removal of ADF Unit
Scanner Section
484
Revision C
4.3.2 COVER
Obverse Side
3)
IR COVER A ASSY
4.3.2.1 IR COVER A ASSY

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the ADF Unit. (p484)
3.
Remove the screw (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the both left and
right HINGE HOLDER 2s to the IR COVER A ASSY.
4.
Turn the Scanner over and remove the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head)
that secure the left and right HINNGE HOLDER 2s to the IR BASE A ASSY to
remove the two HINGE HOLDER 2s from the assy.
5.
Remove the seven screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the IR
COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY.
Figure 4-155. Removal of IR COVER A ASSY (1)
Reverse Side
IR BASE A ASSY
5)
4)
HINGE HOLDER 2
Scanner Section
485

6.
Revision C
Turn the Scanner back to normal orientation, and remove the IR COVER A ASSY
from the IR BASE A ASSY. There are two hooks on left and right shorter sides of
the IR BASE A ASSY to secure the IR COVER A ASSY, so push the shorter side
of the IR BASE A ASSY while pulling the IR COVER A ASSY upward to
remove it (do the procedure for both left and right side one by one).
C H E C K
P O IN T
7.
Remove a piece of tape that bundles the harness and FFC of the IR COVER A ASSY.
8.
Pull out the IR COVER A ASSY harness through the hole on the IR BASE A ASSY.
The two hooks of the IR BASE A ASSY that secure the IR

COVER A ASSY are indicated on the picture below.
6)
Hooks
IR BASE A ASSY
IR COVER A ASSY

IR BASE A ASSY
If the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY and the ADF IR LOCK ASSY

prevent the IR COVER A ASSY from separating from the IR
BASE A ASSY, access them from the bottom of the IR BASE A
ASSY to set them in position so that they do not interfere the IR
COVER A ASSY.
Through-hole for the Harness
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY

ADF IR LOCK ASSY
Harness
Bottom of the IR BASE A ASSY
IR COVER A ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
8)
ADF IR LOCK ASSY
Scanner Section
486
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
Through-hole for the Harness
1.
Draw the IR COVER A ASSY harness through the hole on the IR BASE A ASSY.
2.
Bundle the harness and the FFC of the IR COVER A ASSY with a piece of tape.
3.
Attach the IR COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY inserting the IR

ENGINE LOCK ASSY and the ADF IR LOCK ASSY into the holes on the
reverse side of the IR COVER A ASSY.
C H E C K
P O IN T
ADF IR LOCK ASSY

Harness
IR COVER A ASSY
The IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY may fall off the IR BASE A ASSY
while attaching the IR COVER A ASSY. In such case, reattach it
following the procedure given below.
1. Pass the pintle through the center hole on the IR ENGINE
LOCK ASSY, and hitch one end of the spring to the oblong
hole on the assy.
2. Attach the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY
with the pintle placed on the bearing of the IR BASE A ASSY.
3. Hitch the other end of the spring to the protrusion on the IR
BASE A ASSY.
1)
2)
Pintle
Attach the two HINGE HOLDER 2s to left and right grooves on the IR BASE A
ASSY respectively, and secure them with the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, Bhead) (one screw for one HINGE HOLDER 2).
6.
Turn the Scanner back to normal orientation, and secure the left and right HINGE
HOLDER 2s to the IR COVER A ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 10 mm, Ptype, B-head) respectively.
IR BASE A ASSY
Groove on
the IR BASE A ASSY
Bottom of the IR BASE A ASSY
5.
8.
Figure 4-159. Reinstallation of IR COVER A ASSY
Groove on
the IR BASE A ASSY
Turn the Scanner over and secure the IR COVER A ASSY to the IR BASE A
ASSY with seven screws (M3 x 10 mm, P-type, B-head).
Attach the ADF Unit. (p484)
Through-hole for the IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
Protrusion
4.
7.
Through-hole for the ADF IR LOCK ASSY
3)
Spring
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
IR ENGINE LOCK ASSY
Scanner Section
HINGE HOLDER 2
Figure 4-160. Reinstallation of HINGE HOLDER 2
487
Revision C
4.3.3 IR A Assy
CCD MODULE ASSY
4.3.3.1 CCD MODULE ASSY
FFC CLIP
6)-1
6)-2
REMOVAL
FFC CR
1.
2.
3.
Remove the IR COVER A ASSY. (p485)
4.
Slide the PULLEY ASSY in the direction of an arrow shown in Figure 4-161 to
release the tension of the IR TIMING BELT, and remove the IR TIMING BELT
from the pulley of the PULLEY ASSY.
5.
Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the center.
6.
Turn the CCD MODULE ASSY upward upon the IR SHAFT, and hold it to
remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, B-type, P-head) that secure the FFC CR to
the CCD MODULE ASSY.
5)
7.
Disconnect the FFC CR from the connector on the CCD MODULE ASSY.
8.
Release the left end of the IR SHAFT from the bearing of the IR BASE ASSY, and
remove the CCD MODULE ASSY together with the IR SHAFT.
9.
Figure 4-162. Removal of FFC CLIP
CCD MODULE ASSY
Pull out the IR SHAFT from the CCD MODULE ASSY.

IR SHAFT
8)-1
8)-2
4)
IR TIMING BELT
Figure 4-163. Removal of CCD MODULE ASSY
PULLEY ASSY
Figure 4-161. Releasing the Tension of IR TIMING BELT
Scanner Section
488
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Put the IR SHAFT through the shaft hole of the CCD MODULE ASSY.
2.
Insert the right end of the IR SHAFT into the right bearing of the IR BASE ASSY,
and then push the left end into the left bearing of the assy. See Figure 4-163.
3.
Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the center.
4.
Attach the PULLEY ASSY to the IR BASE ASSY.
5.
Draw the FFC CR through the FFC CLIP, and turn the CCD MODULE ASSY
upward upon the IR SHAFT and hold it to secure the FFC CLIP to the CCD
MODULE ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, B-type, P-head). See Figure
4-162.
6.
Connect the FFC CR to the connector on the CCD MODULE ASSY.
7.
Hitch the IR TIMING BELT to the gear of the MOTOR ASSY, and to the pulley
of the PULLEY ASSY by sliding the PULLEY ASSY leftward. See Figure 4-161.
8.
Attach the IR COVER A ASSY. (p485)
9.
10. Install the Scanner. (p309)
Scanner Section
489
Revision C
4.3.3.2 MOTOR ASSY
Harnesses
Harness Tie
IR BASE A ASSY
5)-2
REMOVAL
5)-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p488)
5.
Pull the harnesses and the grounding wire of the MOTOR ASSY to the inner side
of the IR BASE A ASSY, and release the MOTOR ASSY harnesses from the
groove on the IR BASE A ASSY.
6.
Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the harness tie.
7.
Cut the harness tie, and remove the ferrite core from the harnesses.
8.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the MOTOR
ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the MOTOR ASSY from the IR
BASE A ASSY.
C A U T IO N
6)
Grounding Wire
HP Flag
MOTOR ASSY
8)
Ferrite Core
Figure 4-164. Removal of MOTOR ASSY
When removing/reinstalling the MOTOR ASSY, be careful not to

displace or remove the carriage home position detection flag.
Scanner Section
490
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Wind the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY around the ferrite core once, and secure
them with the harness tie.
2.
Draw the grounding wire through the hole of the IR BASE A ASSY.
3.
Install the MOTOR ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY matching the guide pins of
the IR BASE A ASSY with the positioning holes of the MOTOR ASSY.
4.
Secure the bottom-right corner of the MOTOR ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm,
P-type, B-head), and secure the upper-left corner of the assy. together with the
grounding terminal with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head).
5.
Secure the harness tie to the IR BASE A ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, Ptype, B-head).
6.
Put the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY through the hole of the IR BASE A
ASSY, and secure the harnesses on the groove of the IR BASE A ASSY.
C H E C K
P O IN T
When securing the harnesses of the MOTOR ASSY on the groove of

the IR BASE A ASSY, arrange them in the prescribed order; brown,
orange, black, and yellow from the top as shown in Figure 4-165.
7.
Attach the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p488)
8.
9.
Place the harnesses in the order of brown,

orange, black, and yellow from the top.
Wind harnesses once around the ferrite core
6)
5)
Grounding Wire
Ferrite Core
MOTOR ASSY
4)
Positioning Holes and Guide Pins
Figure 4-165. Reinstallation of MOTOR ASSY
Scanner Section
491
Revision C
4.3.3.3 PCB ASSY
IR BASE A ASSY
CCD MODULE ASSY
6)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Move the CCD MODULE ASSY to the left side (home position side).
5.
Disconnect the FFC BOARD from the connector on the PCB ASSY.
6.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the PCB ASSY
to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the PCB ASSY from the IR BASE A
ASSY.
Positioning Holes
and Guide Pins
FFC BOARD
5)
PCB ASSY
4)
Figure 4-166. Removal of PCB ASSY

REINSTALLATION
1.
Match the positioning holes of the PCB ASSY and the guide pins of the IR BASE
A ASSY, and secure the PCB ASSY to the IR BASE A ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head).
2.
Connect the FFC BOARD to the P201 connector on the PCB ASSY.
3.
4.
5.
Scanner Section
492
Revision C
4.3.3.4 FFC CR
IR BASE A ASSY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p488)
5.
Remove the MOTOR ASSY. (p490)
6.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secure the PLATE
HARNESS 2 to the IR BASE A ASSY, and remove the PLATE HARNESS 2
from the IR BASE A ASSY.
8)
Ferrite Core
PLATE HARNESS2
7.
PLATE HARNESS
7)-2
6)
7)-1
Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) that secures the PLATE
HARNESS to the IR BASE A ASSY, and slide the PLATE HARNESS in the
direction of an arrow shown in the figure to remove it from the IR BASE A ASSY.
See Figure 4-167.
Figure 4-167. Removal of FFC CR (1)
Tape
8.
Disconnect the FFC BOARD from the connector on the PCB ASSY.
9.
Remove the sponge adhered to the FFC CR, and pull the FFC CR to the inner side
of the IR BASE A ASSY through the hole of the assy.
Sponge
10. Remove the piece of tape that bundles the FFC CR, and remove the FFC CR from
the ferrite core of the CORE ASSY.
11. Remove the FFC CR from the IR BASE A ASSY.
IR BASE A ASSY
C H E C K
P O IN T
The FFC CR is secured on the IR BASE A ASSY with two-sided

tapes. Remove the FFC CR slowly and carefully.
9)
10)
FFC CR
11)
Figure 4-168. Removal of FFC CR (2)
Scanner Section
493
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
Sponge
1.
Put the FFC CR through the ferrite core of the CORE ASSY, and bundle the FFC
CR with a piece of tape.
2.
Pull out the FFC CR outward through the hole of the IR BASE A ASSY, and
secure the FFC CR to the IR BASE ASSY with the sponge.
C H E C K
P O IN T
3.
Attach the sponge, which secures the FFC CR, to the IR BASE A
ASSY with a two-sided tape.
Draw the FFC CR under the PLATE-HW, and secure the FFC CR to the IR BASE
A ASSY with two-sided tapes aligning the FFC CR with the reference line on the
IR BASE A ASSY.
4.
Hitch the hook of the PLATE HARNESS to the IR PLATE FFC, and secure the
PLATE HARNESS to the IR BASE A ASSY with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type,
B-head).
5.
Secure the PLATE HARNESS 2 to the IR BASE A ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, B-head) matching the positioning holes of the PLATE
HARNESS 2 with the guide pins of the IR BASE A ASSY.
6.
Connect the FFC BOARD to the connector on the PCB ASSY.
7.
Install the MOTOR ASSY. (p490)
8.
Attach the CCD MODULE ASSY. (p488)
9.
Ferrite Core
PLATE-HW
Two-sided Tapes Attaching Positions
Reference Line for attaching the FFC CR

FFC CR
Figure 4-169. Reinstallation of FFC CR (1)

PLATE HARNESS2
10. Attach the ADF Unit. (p484)
Positioning Holes and Guide Pins
Hook of the PLATE HARNESS
PLATE HARNESS
IR PLATE FFC
Figure 4-170. Reinstallation of FFC CR (2)
Scanner Section
494
Revision C
4.4 ADF Section
ADF COVER C
4.4.1 COVER
4)-2
4.4.1.1 ADF COVER R
4)-1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ADF Unit over, remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that
secure the HOOK FIX PLATE to the SDH COVER, and remove the HOOK FIX
PLATE from the SDH COVER. See Figure 4-171.
Figure 4-172. Removal of ADF COVER R (1)
4.
Turn the ADF Unit back to the normal orientation, open the ADF COVER C, and
remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, S-type, A-head) that secures the ADF COVER R.
See Figure 4-172.
5.
Release the seven tabs of the ADF COVER R from the SDH COVER in the order
shown in , and remove the ADF COVER R. See Figure 4-173.
Obverse Side
ADF COVER R
Notch
C H E C K
P O IN T
To release the seven tabs, push them with a flat-blade screwdriver or

similar tool toward the direction shown in Figure 4-173.
Notch
7
3
Tab
Tab
Reverse Side
ADF HINGE
Tab
ADF HINGE
HOOK FIX PLATE
3)
SDH COVER
Figure 4-173. Removal of ADF COVER R (2)

Figure 4-171. Removal of HOOK FIX PLATE
ADF Section
495
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
Positioning Hole and Guide Pin
1.
Open the ADF COVER C.
2.
Put the cable of the ADF Unit into the notch of the ADF COVER R, and attach the
ADF COVER R to the SDH COVER inserting the seven tabs of the ADF COVER
R in the order shown in Figure 4-173.
3.
Secure the ADF COVER R to the SDH COVER with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, Stype, A-head). See Figure 4-172.
4.
Match the positioning hole of the HOOK FIX PLATE with the guide pin of the
SDH COVER, and secure the HOOK FIX PLATE to the SDG COVER with the
two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-174.
5.
6.
HOOK FIX PLATE
SDH COVER
3)
Figure 4-174. Reinstallation of HOOK FIX PLATE
ADF Section
496
Revision C
4.4.1.2 CABLE
Grounding Wire
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the ADF COVER R. (p495)
4.
Disconnect P301 connector from the ADF PCB ASSY.
5.
Remove the screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secures the grounding wire
of the CABLE, and remove the CABLE.
4)
5)
CABLE
REINSTALLATION
1.
Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE with the screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, Ahead).
2.
Connect the CABLE connector to P301 connector on the ADF PCB ASSY.
3.
Attach the ADF COVER R. (p495)
4.
5.
ADF Section
Figure 4-175. Removal of CABLE
497
Revision C
4.4.1.3 PCB COVER

REMOVAL
The Longer Lateral Side
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the PCB
COVER, and remove the PCB COVER.
PCB COVER
Gap
SDH COVER
ADF PCB ASSY
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the longer lateral side of the PCB COVER into the gap between the ADF
PCB ASSY and the SDH COVER, and secure the PCB COVER with the two
screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-176.
2.
3.
4.
4)
Figure 4-176. Removal of PCB COVER
ADF Section
498
Revision C
4.4.1.4 ADF COVER C
ADF COVER C
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p518)
5.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF
COVER C.
5)
6.
Close the ADF COVER C.
7.
Lift the paper feeding side of the ADF COVER C, and remove it from the ADF
BASE ASSY toward the direction shown in Figure 4-178.
Figure 4-177. Removal of ADF COVER C (1)

7)-1
7)-2
REINSTALLATION
1.
Close the ADF BASE ASSY, and attach the ADF COVER C to the ADF BASE
ASSY matching the hooks of the ADF COVER C with the holes on the ADF
BASE ASSY. See Figure 4-179.
2.
Secure the ADF COVER C to the ADF BASE ASSY with the two screws (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head).
3.
4.
5.
ADF COVER C
Figure 4-178. Removal of ADF COVER C (2)
ADF COVER C
Hooks
Hooks
Figure 4-179. Reinstallation of ADF COVER C
ADF Section
499
Revision C
4.4.1.5 ADF HINGE
Obverse Side
REMOVAL
4)-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 12 mm, P-type, P-head) that secure the left and
right ADF HINGEs to the SDH COVER, and remove the two ADF HINGEs.
SDH COVER
ADF HINGE
Figure 4-180. Removal of ADF HINGE (1)

REINSTALLATION
1.
Secure the left and right ADF HINGEs to the SDH COVER with the two screws
(M3 x 12mm, P-type, P-head).
2.
3.
4.
Reverse Side
4)-2
SDH COVER
ADF HINGE
Figure 4-181. Removal of ADF HINGE (2)
ADF Section
500
Revision C
4.4.2 ADF BASE ASSY
7)
4.4.2.1 ADF BASE ASSY

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the ADF COVER C. (p499)
6.
Disconnect the all connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY.
7.
Remove the four screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF
FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER, remove the COVER SPRING ASSY, and
then remove the ADF FRAME ASSY together with the ADF BASE ASSY.
COVER SPRING ASSY
Figure 4-182. Removal of ADF BASE ASSY (1)
ADF Section
501
Revision C
8.
Cut the tie that secure the ferrite core to the harness of the ADF BASE ASSY, and
remove the ferrite core from the harness.
9.
Release the two harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY from the two CABLE TIEs.
Ferrite Core
Tie
Harnesses
10)
10. Release the harnesses of the ADF FRAME ASSY from the notch on the ADF
BASE ASSY.
11. Open the ADF BASE ASSY.
12. Viewed from the direction as shown in Figure 4-184, push the right frame of the
ADF FRAME ASSY outward to remove the right pintle of the ADF BASE ASSY
from the bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY.
CABLE TIE
13. Pull out the left pintle of the ADF BASE ASSY from the left bearing of the ADF
FRAME ASSY, and remove the ADF BASE ASSY.
ADF FRAME ASSY
12)-2
12)-1
ADF BASE ASSY
ADF Section
502
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Viewed from the direction as shown in Figure 4-184, insert the left pintle of the
ADF BASE ASSY into the left bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY, and push the
right frame of the ADF FRAME ASSY outward to insert the right pintle into the
right bearing of the ADF FRAME ASSY. See Figure 4-184.
2.
Secure the harnesses of the ADF FRAME ASSY into the notch of the ADF BASE
ASSY. See Figure 4-183.
3.
Secure the harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY with the two CABLE TIEs. See
Figure 4-183.
4.
Bundle the harnesses of the ADF BASE ASSY, wind them around the ferrite core
once, and then secure the ferrite core to the harnesses with the tie.
5.
Install the ADF FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER matching the positioning
hole of the ADF FRAME ASSY with the guide pin of the SDH COVER.
6.
Attach the COVER SPRING ASSY to the ADF FRAME ASSY matching the
positioning hole of the COVER SPRING ASSY with the guide pin of the ADF
FRAME ASSY, and secure them to the SDH COVER with the four screws (M3 x
8 mm, P-type, A-head).
7.
Connect the CABLE connector of the ADF FRAME ASSY and the ADF BASE
ASSY to the ADF PCB ASSY.
8.
Attach the ADF COVER C. (p499)
9.
C H E C K
P O IN T
When attaching the ADF FRAME ASSY to the SDH COVER,

make sure to match the positioning hole and the guide pin.
Guide Pin of the SDH COVER and Positioning
Hole of the ADF FRAME ASSY
COVER SPRING ASSY
Guide Pin of the ADF FRAME ASSY and

Positioning Hole of the COVER SPRING ASSY

ADF Section
503
Revision C
4.4.2.2 E CLUTCH UNIT
CLUTCH FIX PLATE
REMOVAL
8)
10)
9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the ADF BASE ASSY. (p501)
7.
Release the hook of the GEAR 20T, and remove the GEAR 20T.
8.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the CLUTCH
FIX PLATE.
9.
Release the CLUTCH FIX PLATE from the guide pin of the ADF BASE, and
slide the CLUTCH FIX PLATE leftward.
GEAR 20T
Positioning Hole
and Guide Pin
TRANSFER SHAFT
ADF BASE
CLUTCH SHAFT
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
Figure 4-185. Removal of E CLUTCH UNIT (1)
10. Pull out the TRANSFER SHAFT leftward from the hole on the ADF BASE.
11. Pull out the CLUTCH SHAFT from the MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
12. Release the harnesses of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH from the notch of the ADF
BASE, and remove the MAGNETIC CLUTCH. See Figure 4-186.
Notch
Figure 4-186. Removal of E CLUTCH UNIT (2)
ADF Section
504
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach the CLUTCH SHAFT to the bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE, and
insert the CLUTCH SHAFT to the MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
C H E C K
P O IN T
C H E C K
P O IN T
Attach BUSH D4, GEAR 33T M0.8, and BUSH D6 to the CLUTCH
SHAFT before attaching the CLUTCH SHAFT to the bearing of
the CLUTCH FIX PLATE.
Attach BUSH D4, GEAR 12T, E RETAINING RING, and BUSH

D6 to the TRANSFER SHAFT before attaching the shaft to the
bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE.
TRANSFER SHAFT
BUSH D4
GEAR 20T
GEAR 12T
BUSH D6
BUSH D6
CLUTCH SHAFT
GEAR 33T M0.8
E RETAINING RING
BUSH D4
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
2.
Insert the antirotation tab of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH into the hole of the ADF
BASE, and secure the MAGNETIC CLUTCH to the ADF BASE. See Figure
4-187.
C H E C K
P O IN T
3.
Antirotation Tab
After securing the MAGNETIC CLUTCH, make sure that the

antirotation tab is properly inserted into the hole of the ADF BASE.
Attach the TRANSFER SHAFT to the bearing of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE, and
put the TRANSFER SHAFT through the hole of the ADF BASE.
Figure 4-187. Reinstallation of E CLUTCH UNIT
ADF Section
505

4.
Revision C
Attach the CLUTCH FIX PLATE to the ADF BASE matching the positioning
hole of the CLUTCH FIX PLATE with the guide pin of the ADF BASE, and
secure the CLUTCH FIX PLATE with the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, Ahead). See Figure 4-188.
5.
Secure the harnesses of the MAGNETIC CLUTCH into the notch of the ADF
BASE. See Figure 4-186.
6.
Attach the GEAR 20T to the TRANSFER SHAFT. See Figure 4-185.
7.
Attach the ADF BASE ASSY. (p501)
8.
9.
CLUTCH FIX PLATE
Positioning Hole and Guide Pin

Figure 4-188. Reinstallation of E CLUTCH UNIT
ADF Section
506
Revision C
4.4.2.3 PICK UP ASSY
ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE
TENSION SPRING
PICK UP ASSY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p504)
8.
Release the TENSION SPRING from the hook of the PICK UP ASSY and the
ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE.
9.
Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the ADF ROLLER
FIX PLATE, and remove the ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE.
9)
Figure 4-189. Removal of PICK UP ASSY (1)
10. Lift the left shaft of the PICK UP ASSY, and pull out the right shaft of the PICK
UP ASSY from the bearing of the ADF BASE, and then remove the PICK UP
ASSY from the ADF BASE.
10)-2
10)-1
Figure 4-190. Removal of PICK UP ASSY (2)
ADF Section
507
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the right shaft of the PICK UP ASSY into the bearing of the ADF BASE,
and insert the left shaft of the PICK UP ASSY into the bearing of the ADF BASE.
2.
Place the left ADF SHAFT with its flat surface facing upward, and attach the ADF
ROLLER FIX PLATE matching the positioning hole of the ADF ROLLER FIX
PLATE with the guide pin on the ADF BASE.
3.
Secure the ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE to the ADF BASE with the screw (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head).
4.
Hitch the both ends of the TENSION SPRING to the hook of PICK UP ASSY and
the hook of ADF ROLLER FIX PLATE respectively.
5.
Attach the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p504)
6.
7.
8.
9.
C H E C K
P O IN T
Before attaching the ADF Roller FIX PLATE, make sure that the
flat surface of the ADF SHAFT faces upward.
OK
NG
ADF SHAFT
Positioning Hole
and Guide Pin
ADF Section
508
Revision C
4.4.2.4 AS SENSOR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Release the harnesses of the AS SENSOR from the three hooks, two holes, and
three notches of the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-191.
8.
Turn the ADF BASE ASSY over, and remove the AS SENSOR releasing its two
tabs from the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-192.
AS SENSOR
ADF BASE
7)
Figure 4-191. Removal of AS SENSOR (1)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach the AS SENSOR to the ADF BASE inserting the two tabs of the AS
SENSOR into holes on the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-192.
2.
Route the harnesses of the AS SENSOR as shown in the figure, and secure them
with three hooks and three notches of the ADF BASE. See Figure 4-191.
3.
4.
5.
Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p529)
6.
7.
8.
8)
Figure 4-192. Removal of AS SENSOR (2)
ADF Section
509
Revision C
4.4.2.5 SENSOR LEVER

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the left shaft of the SENSOR LEVER from the bearing and pull out the
other shaft from the bearing to remove the SENSOR LEVER from the ADF
BASE. See Figure 4-193.
SENSOR LEVER
7)-2
7)-1
ADF BASE
Figure 4-193. Removal of SENSOR LEVER

REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the right shaft of the SENSOR LEVER into the right bearing of the ADF
BASE, and push the other shaft into the left bearing of the ADF BASE. See Figure
4-193.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ADF Section
510
Revision C
4.4.2.6 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU

REMOVAL
9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p504)
8.
Remove the SENSOR LEVER. (p510)
9.
Release the harnesses of the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU from the notch of the
ADF BASE.
10)
10. Release the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU from the tab of the ADF BASE to
remove the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU.
CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
ADF BASE
Figure 4-194. Removal of CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
REINSTALLATION
1.
Push the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU into the place on the ADF BASE and
secure it with the tab of the ADF BASE.
2.
Route the harnesses of the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU as shown in the figure,
and secure them with the notch on the ADF BASE.
3.
Attach the SENSOR LEVER. (p510)
4.
Attach the E CLUTCH UNIT. (p504)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ADF Section
511
Revision C
4.4.3 ADF FRAME ASSY
MOTOR
MOTOR CUSHION
4.4.3.1 MOTOR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Cut off the tie wrap that bundles the harnesses and the grounding wire of the
MOTOR.
8.
Cut the tie wrap that secure the ferrite core to the harnesses of the MOTOR, and
remove the ferrite core from the harnesses.
9. Remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
CUSHION to the ADF FRAME ASSY, and remove the MOTOR CUSHION
together with the MOTOR. See Figure 4-195.
10. Remove the two screws (M3 x 6 mm, G-type, C-head, W/spring washer, 5 flat
washer) that secure the MOTOR to the MOTOR CUSHION. See Figure 4-196.
11. Move the MOTOR toward the relief hole on the MOTOR CUSHION, and remove
the MOTOR taking the pinion gear out through the hole. See Figure 4-197.
7)
8)
Figure 4-196. Removal of MOTOR (2)
MOTOR CUSHION
Pinion Gear
MOTOR CUSHION
Harnesses
Relief Hole
Grounding Wire
Ferrite Core
MOTOR

Tie wrap
MOTOR
ADF Section
512
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Secure the MOTOR to the MOTOR CUSHION with the two screws (M3 x 6 mm,
G-type, C-head, W/spring washer, W/5 flat washer).
C A U T IO N
Make sure to attach the MOTOR CUSHION to the ADF FRAME

ASSY positioning the MOTOR CUSHION as shown in Figure 4-195.
2.
Secure the MOTOR CUSHION to the ADF FRAME ASSY with the two screws
(M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head).
3.
Wind the harnesses of the MOTOR around the ferrite core once, and secure the
ferrite core to the harness with a tie wrap.
4.
Bundle the harnesses and the grounding wire of the MOTOR with a tie wrap.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ADF Section
513
Revision C
4.4.3.2 GUIDE FRONT ASSY

LOCKING CABLE CLIPS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the MOTOR. (p512)
8.
of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE, and remove the grounding wire of the
CABLE.
9.
Grounding Wire
8)
9)
MOTOR FIX PLATE
Figure 4-198. Removal of GUIDE FRONT ASSY (1)
Remove the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
FIX PLATE to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the two LOCKING CABLE
CLIPs, and then remove the MOTOR FIX PLATE from the ADF BASE ASSY.
FIX PLATE R
GEAR 60T 18T
GEAR 33T M0.5
10. Remove the five gears attached on the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GEAR 60T 18T

GEAR 48T
GEAR 40T 18T
GEAR 30T
GEAR 33T M0.5
GEAR 48T
C H E C K
P O IN T
GEAR 33T M0.5 is secured with a hook. When removing GEAR

33T M0.5, release it from the hook with a pair of tweezers or
similar tool.
ADF Section
GEAR 40T 18T
GEAR 30T
514
Revision C
11. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FIX PLATE
R to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the FIX PLATE R from the ADF
FRAME UNIT.
12. Remove BUSH D6 from the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER and the shaft of the
EXIT ROLL ASSY respectively.
11)
FIX PLATE R
12)
Shaft of EXIT ROLL ASSY
Shaft of TURNING ROLLER
ADF Section
515
Revision C
13. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FIX PLATE
ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the FIX PLATE ASSY.
14)
14. Remove BUSH D6 from the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER and the shaft of the
EXIT ROLL ASSY respectively.
15. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the GUIDE
FRONT ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the GUIDE FRONT
ASSY.
Shaft of TURNING ROLLER
Shaft of EXIT ROLL ASSY

FIX PLATE ASSY
GUIDE FRONT ASSY
13)
15)
ADF Section
516
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling GEAR

40T 18T, GEAR 48T, GEAR 60T 18T.
7.
Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE with the
screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure 4-198.
8.
Attach the MOTOR. (p512)
9.
10. Attach the ADF COVER C. (p499)

11. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p529)
1.
Secure the GUIDE FRONT ASSY to the ADF FRAME ASSY with the two
2.
Attach BUSH D6 to the both ends of the TURNING ROLLER and the EXIT
ROLL ASSY respectively. See Figure 4-201 and Figure 4-203.
C H E C K
P O IN T
12. Attach the ADF COVER R. (p495)

When attaching BUSH D6, match it with the groove of the ADF
FRAME UNIT, and insert it until it clicks.
3.
Secure the FIX PLATE ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws
(M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-204.
4.
Secure the FIX PLATE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws (M3 x 8
mm, P-type, A-head). See Figure 4-200.
5.
Attach the five gears to the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below. See Figure
4-199.
6.
1. GEAR 33T M0.5

2. GEAR 30T
3. GEAR 40T 18T
4. GEAR 48T
5. GEAR 60T 18T
Secure the MOTOR FIX PLATE and the two LOCKING CABLE CLIPS to the
FIX PLATE with the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure
4-198.
ADF Section
517
Revision C
4.4.3.3 PAPER GUIDE R

REMOVAL
9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p514)
9.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the PAPER
GUIDE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT, and remove the PAPER GUIDE R from the
ADF FRAME UNIT.
PAPER GUIDE R
Figure 4-205. Removal of the PAPER GUIDE R

REINSTALLATION
1.
Secure the PAPER GUIDE R to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two screws (M3
x 8 mm, P-type, A-head).
2.
Attach the GUIDE FRONT ASSY. (p514)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ADF Section
518
Revision C
4.4.3.4 FRAME COVER ASSY

FRAME COVER ASSY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the PAPER GUIDE R. (p518)
10)
Figure 4-206. Removal of FRAME COVER ASSY (1)
10. Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the FRAME
COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT.
11. Open the FRAME COVER ASSY from the NEUTRALIZING BRUSH side, and
remove the FRAME COVER ASSY from the ADF FRAME UNIT.
11)
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
Figure 4-207. Removal of FRAME COVER ASSY (2)
ADF Section
519
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
1.
Couple the FRAME COVER ASSY (NEUTRALIZING BRUSH attached side) to

the ADF FRAME UNIT positioning them as shown in Figure 4-208.
C H E C K
P O IN T
2.
3.
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH Side
When attaching the TURNING ROLLER to the ADF FRAME

UNIT, make sure to place the shaft of the TURNING ROLLER so
that one end of the shaft with D-shaped cross-section is at the right
side as shown in Figure 4-209.
Insert the two STOPPER UPs of the EXIT ROLL ASSY into the holes of the
FRAME COVER ASSY as shown in Figure 4-208.
STOPPER UP
Figure 4-208. Reinstallation of FRAME COVER ASSY (1)
Secure the FRAME COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT by inserting six
tabs of the FRAME COVER ASSY in the order shown in Figure 4-209.
4.
Secure the FRAME COVER ASSY to the ADF FRAME UNIT with the two
5.
Attach the PAPER GUIDE R. (p518)
6.
7.
8.
9.
D-shaped Cross-section of
TURNING ROLLER Shaft
2)
TURNING ROLLER
ADF FRAME UNIT
10. Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (p529)

2
4
6
5
3
EXIT ROLL ASSY
1
FRAME COVER ASSY
Figure 4-209. Reinstallation of FRAME COVER ASSY (2)
ADF Section
520
Revision C
4.4.3.5 EXIT ROLL ASSY
REINSTALLATION
REMOVAL
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C H E C K
P O IN T
10. Remove the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p519)

11. Slide the EXIT ROLL ASSY rightward to pull out its left shaft, and then pull out
its right shaft from the ADF FRAME UNIT to remove the EXIT ROLL ASSY.
C H E C K
P O IN T
First insert the one end of the EXIT ROLL ASSY shaft with longer cut surface
into the right shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT, and then insert the other end
into the left shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT.
When sliding the EXIT ROLL ASSY rightward, lift it upward so

that its roller does not hit the ADF FRAME UNIT.
Make sure to position the EXIT ROLL ASSY with its longer cut
surface side on the right when attaching the EXIT ROLL ASSY to the
ADF FRAME UNIT. See Figure 4-210.
2.
Attach the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p519)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

EXIT ROLL ASSY

11)-1
11)-2
ADF FRAME UNIT
The cut surface is longer than the other end
Figure 4-210. Removal of EXIT ROLL ASSY
ADF Section
521
Revision C
4.4.3.6 TURNING ROLLER
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
TURNING ROLLER
11)-1
11)-2
ADF FRAME UNIT
Figure 4-211. Removal of TURNING ROLLER
10. Remove the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p519)

11. Slide the TURNING ROLLER rightward to pull out its left shaft, and then pull out
its right shaft from the ADF FRAME UNIT to remove the TURNING ROLLER.
REINSTALLATION
1.
First insert the one end of the TURNING ROLLER shaft with longer cut surface
into the shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT, and then insert the other end into
the shaft hole of the ADF FRAME UNIT.
2.
Attach the FRAME COVER ASSY. (p519)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ADF Section
522
Revision C
4.4.3.7 COVER SENSOR
LOCKING CABLE CLIPS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE, and remove the grounding wire of the
CABLE.
9.
Grounding Wire
8)
9)
MOTOR FIX PLATE
Figure 4-212. Removal of COVER SENSOR (1)
FIX PLATE R
Remove the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the MOTOR
FIX PLATE to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the two LOCKING CABLE
CLIPs, and then remove the MOTOR FIX PLATE from the ADF BASE ASSY.
10. Remove the three gears attached on the FIX PLATE R in the order shown below.
1.
2.
3.
GEAR 60T 18T

GEAR 48T
GEAR 40T 18T
GEAR 48T
GEAR 60T 18T
GEAR 40T 18T
ADF Section
523
Revision C
11. Release the COVER SENSOR from the two clamps of the FIX PLATE R.
COVER SENSOR
12. Remove the screw (M2 x 10 mm, G-type, P-head) that secure the COVER
SENSOR to the FIX PLATE R, and remove the COVER SENSOR from the FIX
PLATE R.
12)
11)
FIX PLATE R
ADF Section
524
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling GEAR

40T 18T, GEAR 48T, GEAR 60T 18T.
1.
Secure the COVER SENSOR to the FIX PLATE R with the screw (M2 x 10 mm,
G-type, P-head). See Figure 4-214.
2.
Secure the harnesses of the COVER SENSOR with the two clamps of the FIX
PLATE R.
3.
Secure the three gears to the FIX PLATE R in the order given below. See Figure
4-213.
1.
2.
3.
GEAR 40T 18T

GEAR 48T
GEAR 60T 18T
4.
Secure the MOTOR FIX PLATE and the two LOCKING CABLE CLIPS to the
FIX PLATE with the three screws (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure
4-212.
5.
Secure the grounding wire of the CABLE to the MOTOR FIX PLATE with the
screw (M3 x 6 mm, S-type, A-head). See Figure 4-212.
6.
7.
8.
9.

ADF Section
525
Revision C
4.4.3.8 CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn the ADF FRAME ASSY over, release the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU
from the tab of the ADF FRAME ASSY to remove the CONNECTOR UNIT
ACEMU.
7)-2
7)-1
ADF FRAME ASSY
Figure 4-215. Removal of CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU

REINSTALLATION
1.
Insert the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU into the place on the ADF FRAME
ASSY and secure the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU with the hook of the ADF
FRAME ASSY.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ADF Section
526
Revision C
4.4.3.9 SENSOR ARM

REMOVAL
1.
SENSOR ARM
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. (p526)
8.
Remove the shaft of the SENSOR ARM from the bearing of the PAPER GUIDE
F, and remove the SENSOR ARM.
PAPER GUIDE F
REINSTALLATION
1.
8)
Figure 4-216. Removal of SENSOR ARM
Insert the shaft of the SENSOR ARM into the bearing of the PAPER GUIDE F.
See Figure 4-216.
C H E C K
P O IN T
A spring is attached to the SENSOR ARM.If the spring falls off the
SENSOR ARM, reattach it referring to the figure below.
SENSOR ARM
Spring
2.
Attach the CONNECTOR UNIT ACEMU. (p526)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ADF Section
527
Revision C
4.4.4 ADF PCB ASSY

5)
4.4.4.1 ADF PCB ASSY

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the PCB COVER. (p498)
5.
Disconnect the nine connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY.
6.
Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secures the ADF PCB ASSY
to the SDH COVER, and remove the ADF PCB ASSY.
6)
Figure 4-217. Removal of ADF PCB ASSY

REINSTALLATION
1.
Secure the ADF PCB ASSY to the SDH COVER with the screw (M3 x 8 mm, Ptype, A-head).
2.
Connect the all harnesses to the nine connectors on the ADF PCB ASSY. See
Figure 4-218.
3.
Attach the PCB COVER. (p498)
4.
5.
6.
P301
CABLE
P305
COVER SENSOR
P309
P306
AS SENSOR
P308
PAPER GUIDE
ASSY
P307
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
P302
(ADF BASE)
P303
MOTOR
P301
(ADF FRAME ASSY)
Figure 4-218. Connector Layout
ADF Section
528
Revision C
4.4.5 PAPER GUIDE ASSY

4.4.5.1 PAPER GUIDE ASSY
P308 Connector
Hook
REMOVAL
P309 Connector
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the ADF COVER and remove the KNOB from the ADF FRAME ASSY.
5.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, S-type, A-head) that secure the PAPER
GUIDE ASSY to the SDH COVER.
6.
Disconnect P308 and P309 connectors of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY from the
ADF PCB ASSY.
7.
Release the hook of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY to remove the PAPER GUIDE
ASSY from the SDH COVER ASSY.
5)
REINSTALLATION
1.
Attach the PAPER GUIDE ASSY to the SDH COVER matching the protrusion on
the PAPER GUIDE ASSY with the hole on the SDH COVER, and secure the
PAPER GUIDE ASSY with its hook.
C H E C K
P O IN T
When attaching the PAPER GUIDE ASSY, match the rib on the
PAPER GUIDE ASSY with the hole on the SDH COVER.
Hook
Rib
KNOB
5)
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
PAPER GUIDE ASSY

SDH COVER ASSY
Holes on the SDH

COVER ASSY
2.
Open the ADF COVER and attach the KNOB to the ADF FRAME ASSY.
3.
4.
5.
4)
Figure 4-219. Removal of the PAPER GUIDE ASSY
ADF Section
529
Revision C
4.4.5.2 GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC. ADJUST L/R
TRAY GEAR 24T
GEAR PLATE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the TRAY
COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
6.
Release the hook and remove TRAY GEAR 24T.
7.
Release the hook and remove the two GEAR PLATEs.
8.
Release the hook and remove the DOC.ADJUST L and R.
Hooks
Figure 4-221. Removal of GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC.ADJUST L/R
(2)
DOC. ADJUST L
DOC. ADJUST R
5)
TRAY COVER
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
(3)
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
(1)
ADF Section
530
Revision C
REINSTALLATION
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D
Be sure to lubricate the specified locations after reinstalling the

DOC.ADJUST L/R and TRAY GEAR 24T, or replacing them with
new ones.
1.
Put the DOC. ADJUST L through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE and attach
the DOC. ADJUST L to the groove on the GEAR PLATE.
2.
Put the DOC. ADJUST R through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE and
attach the DOC. ADJUST R to the groove on the GEAR PLATE.
3.
Move the two GEAR PLATEs so that the gap between them becomes smallest,
and attach TRAY GEAR 24T to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
4.
Secure the TRAY COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the two screws (M3
5.
6.
7.
8.
GEAR PLATE
Attach TRAY GEAR 24T

with the smallest gap
between two GUIDE
PLATEs.
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
TRAY GEAR 24T
Figure 4-223. Reinstallation of GEAR PLATE, TRAY GEAR 24T, DOC.ADJUST L/R
ADF Section
531
Revision C
4.4.5.3 PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L, PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R

Hole for the Harness of the PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH L/R
REMOVAL
PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH R
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the two screws (M3 x 8 mm, P-type, A-head) that secure the TRAY
COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
6.
Remove the two screws (M2 x 8 mm, B-type, P-head) that secure the PAPER
SENSOR SWITCH L and PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R to the DOC. PAPER
GUIDE.
7.
PAPER SENSOR
SWITCH L
Pull out the harnesses from the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE, and remove the
PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R.
6)
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
Figure 4-224. Removal of PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L/R
REINSTALLATION
1.
Pull the two harnesses for the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and PAPER
SENSOR SWITCH R outward through the hole of the DOC. PAPER GUIDE.
2.
Secure the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L and the PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R to
the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the screw (M2 x 8 mm, B-type, P-head)
respectively.
3.
Secure the TRAY COVER to the DOC. PAPER GUIDE with the two screws (M3
4.
5.
6.
7.
ADF Section
532
CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
Revision C
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the adjustment procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts in the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F.
There is no required adjustment for the Scanner/ADF.
5.1.1 Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions before starting adjustments.
C A U T IO N
Refer to 5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items (p534), always confirm the adjustment items and the orders for the replaced/removed parts and
units in advance.
Start adjustment after fully checking the Caution given in the explanation area of each adjustment item. Incorrect work may interfere with the product
operations and/or functions.
5.1.2 Part/Unit-based Adjustment Items

The following table indicates the adjustment items and life counter clear items necessary when the specific unit is replaced or removed.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Item List
Repaired Part
Adjustment Item
Execution Timing
Adjustment Execution Means
Reference
FUSER ASSY
Life counter clear
After replacement With the control panel, execute Reset Fuser Counter in Maintenance Menu.
with a new one
p556
2ND BTR ASSY
Life counter clear
After replacement With the control panel, execute Reset 2ndBTRCounter in Maintenance Menu.
with a new one
p556
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
Life counter clear
After replacement With the control panel, execute Reset X* DvopCounter in Maintenance Menu.
with a new one
p556
PWBA ESS
Writing USB ID
After replacement Execute by the dedicated program

with a new one
p535
---
Controller Firmware Update
---
Start up the product in Program ROM update mode by performing special

operation, and send the firmware data from the PC.
p538
---
MCU Firmware Update
---
Start up the product in Engine Firmware Update mode by performing special

operation, and send the firmware data from the PC.
p540
---
Color table update
---
Start up the product in normal mode, and send the program data from the PC.
p543
---
Fax unit Firmware Update
---
Start up the product in normal mode, and send the program data from the PC.
p544
Note : Updating the firmware does not initialize the setup data stored on the EEPROM.To initialize the setup data, execute Factory Setting from the control panel.
"*" : X = Y, M, C, K
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
534
Revision C
5.2 Printer Section
INSTALLATION METHOD AND BASIC OPERATION

1.
5.2.1 Writing USB ID

AcuLaser CX11/CX11F are equipped with a USB interface as a standard feature. The
PC connected to the product via the USB interface identifies the product by referring to
the USB ID information specific to each product. AS the USB ID information is stored
in the EEPROM on the main board, writing the USB ID on the new main board is
required after replacing the board.
Copy all the Main Board Initialization Tool files in a folder onto a computer.
C A U T IO N
All the files of Main Board Initialization Tool should be copied in

one folder.
The procedure to write the USB ID is given below.

2.
Double-click on the [
] icon to start up the program and select AcuLaser CX11
or AcuLaser CX11F in the Select Model.
REQUIRED TOOL
3.
The following shows the name of the program to write the ID, and the operating
environment.
Select the port used to connect the printer at the [Interface].

C H E C K
P O IN T
Program
Main Board Initialization Tool
Operating Environment
(OS)
Windows95/OSR2.0 or later, Windows98, Windows Me, Windows 2000/XP
Port
LPT, USB
If you select Auto, connected products are detected and

communication with the first detected one start automatically.
When connecting with 2 or more products, specify the target port to
avoid unexpected connection since the auto detection varies
depending on the connection state.
Figure 5-1. Basic Operation
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Section
535
Revision C
WRITING METHOD
The method of writing USB ID differs, according to the condition of the main board. Referring to the following table, figure out what to do depending on the conditions.
Follow the instructions shown in the program to do the writings.
Table 5-2. Writing Method
Condition of Main Board
Writing Method
(Button Name)
Check of the previous ID
Communication is impossible between PC The previous ID can be confirmed by a status sheet Store optional ID
and the Main Board
or something else that has been already printed out.
Communication is possible between PC

and the Main Board
Explanation
Enter the previous ID to write it into the new Main Board.
There is no way to confirm the previous ID.
Store auto-generated The program automatically creates the new ID from the serial number of the
NEW ID
product and write it into the new Main Board.
(Can retrieve the previous ID from the previous

Main Board)
OLD ID Retrieval/
Restore
Store optional ID
Figure 5-2. Store optional ID Screen
Retrieve the ID from the old board, and then enter the retrieved ID value into
the new board.
OLD ID Retrieval/Restore
Figure 5-3. OLD ID Retrieval/Restore Screen
Store auto-generated NEW ID
Figure 5-4. Auto-generated NEW ID Screen
CONFIRMING THE WRITING

When completed to write USB-ID, print a status sheet to confirm that the serial number printed on the sheet is identical to that on the label attached on the product. (Refer to 1.4
Status Sheet (p71))
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Section
536
Revision C
5.2.2 Firmware Update

This section explains how to update the firmwares.
Unit
Data Format
Updating Method
Panel Operation
Tool
RCC
NR
Required
CRB
Required
Required
MCU (p540)
BIN
Required
Required
Color table (p543)
RCC
NR
Required
Controller (p538)
REQUIRED TOOL
The firmware for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F can be updated by transferring the
program update data from the PC to the product via USB using a dedicated tool. The
dedicated tool is shown below.
Name
Firmware Update Tool
Note:
Make sure to install the USB driver when you use this tool.
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Section
537
Revision C
5.2.2.1 Controller Firmware Update

The procedure to update the controller firmware is given in the following table.
Table 5-3. Controller Firmware Update
Procedure
1
Check the current

version.
Method 2
(RCC)
(CRB)
Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware version.
Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable.

Connect the printer with Confirm that the Ready is displayed on the LCD.
the computer.
After turning the power off for both the printer and computer,
connect them with a USB cable.
C A U T IO N
Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to
disconnect other interface cables from the
product.
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the
Prepare the update data.
extension is RCC) onto the computer.
extension is CRB) onto the computer.
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start],
[Reset], and [Down] buttons.The product will start up in
Program ROM update mode.
Start up the Printer.
Prepare to send the data.
Method 1
---
Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the

program update file on the selection window of the tool.
Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and the

program update file on the selection window of the tool.
Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
---
---
---
Program Device
Version XX.XX
Please Send Data
---
Program Device
Version XX.XX
OLD: XXXX NEW: XXXX
Transmit the data.
ADJUSTMENT
LCD Panel
Printer Section
538
Revision C
Table 5-3. Controller Firmware Update
Procedure
Method 1
Method 2
(RCC)
Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on the
printer side, the data LED flashes and the message "ROM P
Writing" is displayed on the LCD panel.
When the transfer is complete, "completed" window pops up.
Click [OK].
(CRB)
Confirm that both the old and new firmware versions are
displayed on the LCD, and press the [Right ] button on the
control panel.
Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the
data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
LCD Panel
Program Device
Version XX.XX
Erasing Device
Execute the update.
Program Device
Version XX.XX
PRG XXXXXXXX
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be

indicated on the LCD panel.
Confirm the checksum.
8
---
After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned

off and the LCD panel displays "Ready", turn the printer
power off and turn back on again.
Prints the status sheet.
10 Print the status sheet.
Confirm that the program firmware version has been
Check the version on the updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that
11
status sheet.
printed in step 1. Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet (p71)
9
Reboot the product.
ADJUSTMENT
Pressing the [Right

the product.
Code=
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
Total=
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
] button on the control panel reboots

Confirm that the program firmware version has been
updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that
printed in step 1. Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet (p71)
Printer Section
Program Device
Version XX.XX
-------
539
Revision C
5.2.2.2 MCU Firmware Update

The procedure to update the MCU firmware (engine firmware) is given in the following tables.
Table 5-4. MCU Firmware Update
Procedure
1
Check the current version.
Connect the printer with the

computer.
Method
LCD Panel
Print a status sheet or engine status sheet, and check the current firmware version.
After turning the power off for both the printer and computer, connect them with a USB cable.
C A U T IO N
Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to disconnect other interface cables from the product.
---
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is MOT) onto the computer.
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color Start], [Reset], [Up], and [Down] buttons. The product will start
up in Engine Firmware Update mode.
---
---
Engine Firmware Update
EFU Ver. XXX

4
Please send EFU data
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Section
540
Revision C
Procedure
Method
Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool.
LCD Panel
---
Click the [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
send size=XXX
SENT SIZE=XXX
6
Transmit the data.
Type: XXX sum=XXX
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Section
541
Revision C
Procedure
Method
Press the [Right ] button on the control panel of the product.
Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
LCD Panel
Writing : Erasing
Execute the update.
Writing: Size=XXX
When the program update is finished, the checksum will be indicated on the LCD panel.
TYPE: XXX SUM: XXX
WAIT RESET
9 Reboot the Printer.

10 Print the status sheet.
11 Check the version on the status
sheet.
ADJUSTMENT
Turn the printer off and back on.

Prints the status sheet or engien status sheet.
Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status or engine status sheet
with that printed in step 1. (Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet (p71) , 6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet (p558))
Printer Section
-------
542
Revision C
5.2.2.3 Color Table Update

The procedure to update the Color Table is given below.
Table 5-5. Color Table Update
Procedure
1
Check the current version.
Connect the printer with the

computer.
3
4
5

Method
C A U T IO N
Turn the computer on and copy the program update file (the extension is RCC) onto the computer.
Start up the product in normal mode.
Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool.
Click the [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Transmit the data.

Completion pop-up window will be displayed when the data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
7
8
Print the status sheet.

Check the version on the status Confirm that the program firmware version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1.(Refer to 1.4 Status Sheet
sheet.
(p71))
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Section
543
Revision C
5.3 Fax Function
REQUIRED TOOL
5.3.1 Fax unit Firmware Update
Program
EPSON MFP Maintenance Utility
The procedure to update the Fax unit firmware is the same with that of the color table.
(Refer to 5.2.2.3 Color Table Update (p543))
5.3.2 Retrieving/Writing User Data
Operating Environment
OS Windows 98, Windows 98 Second Edition,

Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
PC/AT compatible machine with a USB port (USB 1.1)
The Fax Maintenance Tool is an application that operates under Windows. Retrieving/
writing the user-established data, retrieving received fax jobs and backup data (for
collecting information on fax troubles) can be made by connecting the product with the
computer on which the tool is installed with a USB cable.
C H E C K
P O IN T
It is not necessary to install AcuLaser CX11/CX11F printer driver

to run or execute this utility.
CPU
Intel Pentium II 233 MHz or higher
Memory:
128 MB or more
Display
Resolution: 800 x 600 dots or more Color

number: 256 colors or more
Printer driver
Driver for AcuLaser CX/CX11F
Note : It is necessary to install the printer driver when using Windows 98 or Windows ME. (In
case of Windows 2000 or Windows XP, this utility can be run or executed if the printer
driver is not installed.)
USB Cable
C A U T IO N
The tool does not allow multiple products to be connected to the

computer at a time.
And connecting using a USB hub is not supported.
INSTALLING AND STARTING UP THE SOFTWARE

Install
Execute the Setup.EXE.
Start up
Start up the MFP Maintenance Utility from the Windows menu.
ADJUSTMENT
Fax Function
544
Revision C
Speed Dial Information
5.3.2.1 Retrieving the User Data

With this function, the user-established data stored in the fax unit can be retrieved and
stored onto the computer by information type specifying the folders to save them.
File Name
File Name
BackUpDataYY-MM-DD
XXH
Stored name and fax number

(77 bytes)
XXH
Stored name and fax number

(77 bytes)
Description
SysParam.Txt
System Parameter Information
G3-ID.Bin
G3-ID information
TxHeader.Bin
SpeedDial.Bin
Speed Dial information
GroupDial.Bin
Group Dial information
OneTuch.Bin
One-Touch button information
Speed-dial code (1 through 60) (1 byte)
Group Dial Information
XXH
Information assigned to the

group-dial code (65 bytes)
XXH
Information assigned
group-dial code (65 b
System Parameter Information

Group-dial code (1 through 20) (1 byte)
Relative addresses and the corresponding parameter settings are written in hexadecimal
onto the computer as shown below.
....
Relative Address
0x0000 = 08
0x0001 = 00
0x0002 = 00
0x0003 = 00
G3-ID Information/Header Information

The binary parameters are stored onto the computer without changing the format.
Parameter Setting
0x013E = 01
0x013F = 00
Figure 5-5. System Parameter Information

C A U T IO N
Do not shuffle the order or delete the settings. Only changing the
setting values is allowed.
ADJUSTMENT
Fax Function
545
Revision C
RETRIEVING METHOD
Procedure
Connect the printer with the computer.
2
3
Start up the computer and the product.

Start up the tool
Method
C A U T IO N
Turn the power ON for both the computer and the product.
Start up the Fax Maintenance Tool.
Click on the User Data tab, and select the Read user data, then click the [Start] button.
Select the destination to save the user data in the selection window, and click the [OK] button.
4-1
4-3
4
Retrieve the user data
4-4
4-2
C A U T IO N
Once the communication and the transaction are started when the MFP Maintenance Tool is executed, the message "Using Fax
Tool" is displayed on the LCD panel.
Note : When the folder already exists in the selected destination, a confirmation message about whether or not to overwrite will appear.
When retrieving the user data is finished, a completion message will appear.
5
Completion of user data read
ADJUSTMENT
Fax Function
546
Revision C
5.3.2.2 Writing the User Data

The function enables the user data stored onto the computer to be written into the fax unit. Corresponding memory sections in the fax unit are completely overwritten.
WRITING METHOD
Procedure
Connect the printer with the computer.
2
3
Start up the computer and the product.

Start up the tool
Method
C A U T IO N
Turn the power ON for both the computer and the product.
Start up the Fax Maintenance Tool.
Click on the User Data tab, and select the Write user data, then click the [Start] button.
Select the folder in which the user data is stored in the selection window, and click the [OK] button.
4-1
4
4-3
Write the user data
4-4
4-2
Note : When the [OK] is clicked, the tool searches the files in the folder and starts writing them to the fax unit upon finding them. If the
corresponding files cannot be found, the writing is not performed.
When writing the user data is finished, a completion message will appear.
5
Completion of user data write
ADJUSTMENT
Fax Function
547
CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
Revision C
6.1 Overview
W A R N IN G
This chapter provides information necessary for maintaining the AcuLaser CX/CX11F
in its optimum condition.
Before starting the work, be sure to observe the following precautions.
W A R N IN G
To prevent an electric shock, burn, injury, etc., always turn the

product off and unplug it from power outlet before starting
maintenance work.
When the power supply cable must be connected to measure
voltage or for any other task, use extreme caution in working
on electronic components.
While the product is operating, never inspect the drive areas
such as the motor, sprockets and gears.
Since the product is heavy in weight (approx. 25 kg,
consumables not included), two or more personnel are required
to transfer the product. On this occasion, make sure to lay
hands on the specified places.
Special care must be taken to maintain safety devices such as
fuse, INTERLOCK S/W, which are provided to prevent the
product from malfunction and accidents, and also carefully
check the parts such as panel, covers, which are directly
operated by the user.
Do not touch the FUSER ASSY immediately after using the
product, or you may burn your hand. Allow the assy to cool
enough to work with it.
Pay attention to the following when turning the product back
on after servicing.
Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught up in the
rotating parts (various rollers and cooling fans) of the
product.
Never touch the electrical terminals and high-voltage
components such as the HVPS and LVPS unit.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring the
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
C A U T IO N
MAINTENANCE
Overview
Take extra care not to let the laser beam get into your eye, or it
could cause loss of sight.
While servicing the laser printer, never open any cover on
which a Warning Label for Laser beam is attached.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
When you need to work on the hot part or unit (Fuser Assy, for
example), make sure to unplug the product from power outlet
in advance, and do not start the work basically until the part or
unit cool down sufficiently to avoid burn injury.
This printer produces a laser beam when the following
conditions are all satisfied.
The printer is in ready status.
The interlock switches are OFF (TOP COVER and FRONT
COVER are closed).
Do not use a general vacuum cleaner to clean spilt toner. To do
so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire by sparks
of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the floor, etc.,
clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth moistened with
neutral detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot of spilt toner
with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed for toner.
Always wear gloves when servicing to avoid injury from sharp
metal edges.
Do not disassemble the Toner Cartridge.
Do not expose the Photoconductor Unit to direct sunlight.
Do not disassemble the ROS ASSY.
Do not touch the onboard components with bare hands to
prevent the ICs and other electrical components from being
damaged by static electricity. (When necessary, wear a wrist
strap.)
To ensure safety and workability, use the specified tools.
Do not turn the product off until all motors stop completely.
Should the printer be transported, use the special packing
material, pallet, etc.
Do not use alcohol, paint thinner, or any other such solvents.
549
Revision C
6.2 On-site Service
ON-SITE SERVICING FLOWCHART
This section describes about on-site servicing procedures.To prevent possible accidents
during servicing, strictly observe the warnings and cautions given in this section and
Section 6.1.Never perform dangerous operations.
C A U T IO N
When it is necessary to transport the main unit, use the special

packing material, pallet, etc.
Be sure to bring back trash created during the work and old
parts or consumables that are replaced, and not to leave them
on the site.
Before starting your work, spread a sheet of cloth or paper
over the working place to prevent the site from getting dirt with
spilt toner.
What to Do First
1.
Ask the user about the printer conditions.
2.
Ensure safety.
3.
Grasp the printer conditions from the status sheet.
4.
Grasp how the printer has been used from the engine status sheet.
Trouble Repeatability Check
Which is the Purpose of Visit?
Perform troubleshooting according

to the procedure given in Chapter 3.
Repair
Maintenance
Image Quality Check
Cleaning
Preventive maintenance
Replacement of regular replacement

parts and main after-sales service parts
General operation checks
What to Do Last
1.
Check the printer appearance.
2.
Train the user as necessary
Figure 6-1. On-site Servicing Flowchart
MAINTENANCE
On-site Service
550
Revision C
6.2.1 Details of On-site Servicing
IMAGE QUALITY CHECK
This section explains the details of on-site servicing.
1.
Image quality check items
WHAT TO DO FIRST
1.
Ask the user about the printer conditions.
Frequency of paper feeding errors (jams)
How the product has been used (paper type, printing frequency, environment,
etc.)
Print the status sheet and confirm the image quality.
Image quality status (front and back, separately)
2.
Check how the power cord is plugged, damage to the cord and plug, etc. to ensure
safety.
3.
Print and check several status sheets to grasp the printer conditions.
4.
Print the engine status sheet, and grasp the lives of the consumables, regular
replacement parts and how the product has been used.
2.
Color balance
Color shift
Density (color) unevenness
Poor color reproducibility with low density
Others
If any of the image quality problem described above is shown:
Take corrective action with reference to Section 3.4.5 Printing Qualityrelated Trouble (p249).
TROUBLE REPEATABILITY CHECK

Perform troubleshooting according to the procedure given in Chapter 3.
1.
Refer to Section 3.4.3 FIP (p145) and confirm the trouble conditions and
execute troubleshooting.
2.
If a fatal image quality problem (all white, all black, etc.) has occurred due to
engine failure, perform troubleshooting with reference to Section 3.4 Image
Quality-related Troubles 3.4.5 Printing Quality-related Trouble (p249).
MAINTENANCE
On-site Service
551
Revision C
Cleaning the Exposure Window
CLEANING
There is no part to be cleaned regularly in the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F. The following
describes the procedure to clean certain parts which should be cleaned on an as-needed
basis.
C A U T IO N
1.
Open the cleaner cover on the right side of the product, and open Cover A.
2.
Pull the lever placed right inner side of the product in the direction of the arrow.
Do not use chemical solvent such as thinner, benzine, acetone

to clean the housing or any other exterior part of the product.
Doing so may deteriorate or deform those parts.
Be careful not to get the internal components wet when
cleaning.
Lever
Cleaning the Pick Up Roller
Cover A
1.
Open the MP Tray Cover and take out the loaded papers.
2.
Wipe the rubber part of the Pick Up Roller using a clean soft cloth moistened with
water.
C A U T IO N
Cleaner Cover
3.
When cleaning the Pick Up Roller, be careful not to damage the

actuator placed in front of the Feed Roller
Figure 6-3. Cleaning the Exposure Window (1)

Slowly pull the cleaner outward and push it back. (1 cycle)
C A U T IO N
To clean the printhead properly, pull the cleaner until it do not

move anymore, and push it back as far as it will go.
Feed Roller
Actuator
Cleaner
Figure 6-2. Cleaning the Pick Up Roller

4.
MAINTENANCE
Figure 6-4. Cleaning the Exposure Window (2)

Push the lever back to its original position.
On-site Service
552

5.
Revision C
Close Cover A and then close the cleaner cover.
Cleaning the Document Table
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (CONSUMABLES/COMPONENTS

NEEDING PERIODIC REPLACEMENT)
If scanned image quality trouble occurs, clean the document table with a clean dry soft
cloth wiping off any dirt on it.
Do preventive maintenance work to maintain the product performance and prevent

failures from occurring.
1.
After completion of repair or maintenance, print several status sheets and make
sure that there are no problems.
2.
After completion of repair or maintenance, print the engine status sheet.
Cleaning the ADF Pick Up Roller

If the ADF has troubles to feed paper, open the ADF and clean the ADF Pick Up Roller
with a clean dry soft cloth and remove paper dust.
ADF Pick Up Roller
Note:
The judgement whether to replace components needing periodic

replacement can be done by the cumulative numbers of printed
sheets. Replace the components as the occasion arises.
REPLACEMENT OF CONSUMABLES AND COMPONENTS NEEDING

PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
Do the replacement with reference to 6.5 Consumables and Components needing
Periodic Replacement (p565).
GENERAL OPERATION CHECKS
After completion of servicing, make general operation checks. Print a status sheet and
perform several printjobs from the host computer testing both one-side printing and
duplex printing (if an optional unit for dupulexing is installed).
Figure 6-5. Cleaning the ADF Pick Up Roller
Simplex printing
Feed paper from the MP Tray
Feed paper from the 500-sheet Cassette
1.
Make sure that there are no image quality problems.
2.
Make sure that the paper feeding is normal and there is no abnormal noise.
WHAT TO DO LAST
MAINTENANCE
1.
Check the appearance of the product.
2.
If necessary, inform the user on how to handle the product, deal with paper jam,
and replace the consumables.
On-site Service
553
Revision C
6.3 Lubrication and Glueing
6.3.2 Scanner/ADF Section
This section explains the part required glueing and lubrication when performing the
service work, or replacing the unit or parts.
6.3.2.1 Glueing
6.3.2.2 Lublication
6.3.1.1 Glueing
The part requires lubrication for this unit is as below
There is no relevant glueing part for this unit.
There is no relevant glueing part for this unit.
Parts Name
6.3.1.2 Lublication
Types of oil
applied
Parts Name : GREASE G-45

Parts Number : 1033657
Amount of
lublicate
A little modest amount
FIX PLATE R
Lubrication Part Shaft of the [FIX PLATE R]
The part requires lubrication for this unit is as below

Parts Name
CHUTE ASSY FSR

Lubrication Part Spring attached on the [CHUTE ASSY FSR]
FIX PLATE R
Types of oil
applied
Parts Name
: GREASE G-76
Parts Number :1304691
Amount of
lublicate
About 5mm
Note
Lubrication is required when CHUTE ASSY FSR and FRAME ASSY 2ND
are replaced at the same time. When replacing only one of them, lubrication
is not necessary as the grease is remaining on the other one.
FRAME ASSY 2ND
CHUTE ASSY FSR
Lubrication Part
Lubrication Part
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication and Glueing
554
Revision C
Parts Name
DOC. PAPER GUIDE

Lubrication Part Parts of the [DOC. PAPER GUIDE] indicated in the figure
Parts Name
Types of oil
applied
Parts Name : GREASE G-31

Types of oil
applied
Parts Name
: GREASE G-31
Amount of
lublicate
Amount of
lublicate
TRAY GEAR 24T

Lubrication Part Parts of the [TRAY GEAR 24T] indicated in the figure
TRAY GEAR 24T
Lubrication Part
Lubrication Part
DOC. PAPER GUIDE
Lubrication Part
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication and Glueing
555
Revision C
6.4 Printer Maintenance Function

6.4.1 Maintenance Menu
C A U T IO N
This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform

maintenance. It must not be disclosed to the users.
This menu is displayed and selectable only when a special operation performed at
power-on to enter the maintenance mode. Basically, this menu is provided to be used
by a service personnel for maintenance.
At the time of maintenance, print the Engine Status Sheet from the Maintenance Menu
and grasp the usage conditions of various consumables and components needing
periodic replacement.
6.4.1.1 Maintenance Menu Items

This menu is displayed and selectable only when a special operation performed at
power-on to enter the maintenance mode.
When the power is then turned off once and on again, the Maintenance Menu is deleted
(the printer returns to the normal operating mode).
Engine Status Sheet (p558)
Press the [Right ] button to print the Engine Status Sheet.
Before entering the maintenance mode, make sure that an engine-related service
call error is not occurring in normal operating mode (not maintenance mode). The
sheet is printed according to the default settings, except RIT, toner save, and
resolution settings (current settings are applied for those settings), and others are
printed according to the factory settings.The user default environment (settings)
does not change after the printing. While the printing is in progress, the LCD
keeps flashing.
The contents of the engine status sheet are the counted values of each unit which
makes up the printer engine.
Reset 2ndBTRCounter
Resets the life counter of the 2nd BTR ASSY.
After executing the counter reset, open and close the Cover A, and do not turn the
printer off until the engine stops completely.
The counter must be reset after the 2nd BTR ASSY is replaced with a new one.
When resetting the counter, the number of printed pages for the previous 2nd BTR
ASSY at that point is stored in the engine.The stored value will be printed on the
Engine Status Sheet as the number of previous replacement.
Reset Y (M, C, K) DvlpCounter
Resets the life counter of the Housing ASSY-DEVE.
After executing the counter reset, open and close the Cover A, and do not turn the
printer off until the engine stops completely.
The counter must be reset after the Housing ASSY-DEVE is replaced with a new
one.
Reset Fuser Counter
Resets the life counter of the FUSER ASSY.
The counter must be reset after the Fuser unit is replaced with a new one.
When resetting the counter, the number of printed pages for the previous FUSER
ASSY is stored in the engine. The stored value will be printed on the Engine Status
Sheet as the number of previous replacement.
Clear Error Log
Clears error log list stored in the engine to print on Engine Status Sheet.
Performing this operation reboots the printer.
MCU DATA BackUp
Backups the data stored on the NVM in the engine controller.
"MCU Data BackUp" is displayed while the backup is in progress.
MCU DATA Restore
Restores the backup data made by MCU DATA Backup on the NVM in the
engine controller.
"MCU DATA Backup" is displayed while the restoring is in progress.
Print Log Report (p563)

Prints a log file of printing status.
MAINTENANCE
Printer Maintenance Function
556
C A U T IO N
Revision C
Executing MCU DATA BackUp and ,MCU DATA Restore

is not possible when the product in the following statuses:
In sleep mode
During warming-up
During printing
During adjusting the printer
Do not turn the power OFF until the engine completely stops
after executing MCU DATA BackUp and MCU DATA
Restore.
MCU DATA Restore

[Right
] button
Maintenance Menu
[Up
[Down
] button
Information Menu
[Up
[Right
] button
Print execution
Engine Status Sheet

] button
Print Log Report
Print execution
Reset 2ndBTRCounter
Clear execution
Reset C DvlpCounter
Clear execution
Reset M DvlpCounter
Clear execution
Reset Y DvlpCounter
Clear execution
Reset K DvlpCounter
Clear execution
Reset Fuser Counter
Clear execution
Clear Error Log
Clear execution
] button
Ready
6.4.1.2 Accessing the Maintenance Menu

1.
Turn the product ON while holding down the [Left

[Down ] buttons.
], [Right ], [Up
], and
When the product is turned on, all LEDs and LCD light and the following message
is then displayed.
(When MAINTENANCE MODE appears on the LCD, release the buttons.)
RAM CHECK **.*MB
2.
MAINTENANCE lODE
Ready
Refer to the Maintenance Menu flowchart, access the desired function in the menu
using the control panel.
NOTE 1: Disconnect all the Interface Cables in advance.

2: Engine-related service call errors are ignored when the Maintenance
Mode starts. Before starting the product in the Maintenance Mode and
executing printing, make sure that no errors have occurred in the normal
operating mode.
3:
4: Turn the product OFF to exit from the Maintenance Menu. Be sure not to
turn the product OFF until the engine stops operating.
MCU DATA BackUp

[Up
Command
] button
MCU DATA Restore
Command
Engine Status Sheet
Figure 6-6. Maintenance Menu Flowchart
MAINTENANCE
557
Revision C
6.4.2 Maintenance Information Output
Photoconductor Change
: Number of replacements of Photoconductor Unit.
6.4.2.1 Engine Status Sheet
Fuser
C A U T IO N
This Engine Status Sheet is used only by a service personnel for

maintenance. It must not be disclosed to the users.
: Total number of pages printed using the current FUSER ASSY
Fuser Change
: Number of replacements of FUSER ASSY. /Number of
pages printed at the time of replacing the previous one.
2nd BTR
: Total number of pages printed using the current 2nd BTR.
2nd BTR Change
: Number of replacements of 2nd BTR ASSY.
Development Unit
ENGINE STATUS SHEET ITEMS
Total Counts
C Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE C.
M Development: Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE M.
Total Pages
: Total number of pages printed to date.
Y Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE Y.
Color Pages
: Total number of pages printed in color to date.
K Development : Operating time of the motor for Housing ASSY-DEVE K.
Jam Counts
: Number of occurrence of a jam.
C Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C.
M Deve Change: Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M.
Y Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y.
K Deve Change : Number of replacements of HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K.
ET Cartridge (Toner Cartridge)
C Toner
:Amount of C toner used (dispense time)

C toner limit value, C total dots
M Toner
:Amount of M toner used (dispense time)

M toner limit value, M total dots
2nd BTR Offset
Y Toner
:Amount of Y toner used (dispense time)

Y toner limit value, Y total dots
Normal
: Setting value of the transfer voltage for plain paper.
SemiThk
: Setting value of the transfer voltage for High quality paper.
K Toner
:Amount of K toner used (dispense time)

K toner limit value, K total dots
Thick
: Setting value of the transfer voltage for thick paper.
C Toner Change :Number of replacements of C toner (for 4K),

Number of replacements of C toner (for 1.5K).
ExtraThk
: Setting value of the transfer voltage for Extra thick paper.
Card
: Setting value of the transfer voltage for postcard paper.
M Toner Change:Number of replacements of M toner (for 4K),

Number of replacements of M toner (for 1.5K).
Envelope
: Setting value of the transfer voltage for envelope.
Power On
: Number of times power is turned on.
Y Toner Change :Number of replacements of Y toner (for 4K),

Number of replacements of Y Toner (for 1.5K).
Sleep
K Toner Change :Number of replacements of K toner (for 4K),

Number of replacements of K Toner (for 1.5K).
Photoconductor
MAINTENANCE
: Number of times printer returns from standby mode.
Engine Version
MCU
: Firmware version of mechanical controller.
: Number of revolutions of photoconductor.
558
Revision C
Error LogDisplays the latest 20 errors with the following information; panel
message, EJL status code, the number of pages, jam code, paper size, paper type,
and date/time.The 20 errors are listed in the order of number of pages form largest
to smallest. Service call errors which occurred after the Ready mode and jam
errors are listed. The errors with total pages which are the same as previously
recorded errors are not included.
Jam Code
The location of the jam is indicated by 8-digit hexadecimal strings as bit data.
Table 6-1. Jam code
Bit
Location of jam
31-24
---
23
At Exit sensor
22
At Fuser In sensor
21
At Regi sensor
20
At OHP sensor
19
At Tray Path1 sensor
18
At Tray Path2 sensor
17
At Dup In sensor
16
At Dup Out sensor
15
After Exit sensor turns off, Dup In sensor does not turn off
14
After Dup In sensor turns on, Dup Out sensor stays off
13
After Duplex loading signal, Regi sensor stays off
12
After Regi sensor turns on, Exit sensor stays off.
11
After Regi Roll turns on, Exit Fuser In sensor is stays off.
10
---
The setting is for transparency, but media other than transparencies

was fed. The setting is for other than transparency, but transparencies
were fed.
MAINTENANCE
---
After Regi Roll turns on, Exit sensor stays off, Fuser In sensor off.
After Regi Roll turns on, Exit sensor is stays off, Fuser In sensor on.
After Regi Roll turns on, Regi sensor stays on.
Regi sensor signal from cassette 1 or 2 is not received.
Regi sensor signal from MP tray is not received.
Tray Path1 sensor signal from cassette 1 is not received.
(Tray Path1 sensor signal from cassette 2 is not received.)
(Tray Path2 sensor signal from cassette 2) is not received.
559
Revision C
Paper Size
Indicated same as the panel display.
Paper type:
Indicated as the specified value set for each media to control the engine.
Table 6-2. Paper Type
Paper Type
Front Side
Back Side
Plain paper
17
High quality paper
24
Thick paper
20
Extra thick paper
10
26
Coated paper
23
Transparency
---
Labels
---
Envelopes
15
---
Postcards
14
30
Note *1:
*2:
The date and time (yy/mm/dd hh:mm) are indicated in the local time when
generated.
(The date and time is not re-calculated even if the time difference is changed.)
yy are the lower two digits of the calendar year.
In the non-synchronous mode, --/--/-- --:-- is displayed.
The value of the total dot counter on ASIC is used in the dot calculation.Threshold is
128.
Figure 6-7. Engine Status Sheet
MAINTENANCE
560
Revision C
LIST OF INFORMATION MANAGED AND METHODS OF MANAGEMENT

Table 6-3. List of information managed and methods of management
Information name
Count processing and storage

location
Range
Unit
Count conditions
Clear conditions
Total Pages
Color Pages
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
Pages
Pages
During printing
During printing
When a jam occurs

When a jam occurs
Jam Counts
Controller
0 - 100,000
Times
When a jam occurred.
(EEPROM Initialization)
Engine
Engine
Controller
Engine
Engine
Controller
Engine
Engine
Controller
Engine
Engine
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
msec
msec
--msec
msec
--msec
msec
--msec
msec
--Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
Times
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
During printing
(Fixed value)
4096dots
When replaced C Toner
When replaced C Toner
When replaced M Toner
When replaced M Toner
When replaced Y Toner
When replaced Y Toner
When replaced K Toner
When replaced K Toner
New C toner detected

--(EEPROM Initialization)
New M toner detected
New Y toner detected
New K toner detected
C Toner
M Toner
Y Toner
C Toner
K Toner
C Toner Change
M Toner Change
Y Toner Change
K Toner Change
Dispense time
Limit value
Total dots
Dispense time
Limit value
Total dots
Dispense time
Dispense time
Total dots
Dispense time
Limit value
Total dots
4K only
1.5K only
4K only
1.5K only
4K only
1.5K only
4K only
1.5K only
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 2,147,483,647
0 - 99,999,999
Photoconductor
Photoconductor Change
Engine
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 255
Rotation
Times
During printing
When replaced Photo
conductor
New photoconductor detected

Fuser
Fuser Change
Fuser Change (Pages at the time of replacing the
pervious one)
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 255
0 - 99,999,999
Pages
Times
Pages
During printing
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
MAINTENANCE
561
Revision C
location
Range
Unit
Count conditions
Clear conditions
Second BTR & FUSER

2nd BTR Change
Engine
Controller
0-`
0 - 255
Pages
Times
During printing
Counter clear
Counter clear
Development Unit
C Development
M Development
Y Development
K Development
C Deve Change
M Deve Change
Y Deve Change
K Deve Change
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 13,631,488
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
msec
msec
msec
msec
Times
Times
Times
Times
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
Counter clear
2nd BTR Offset

Normal
SemiThk
Thick
ExtraThk
Card
Envelope
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
-------------
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting value)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
(Setting)
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
Times
Times
At Power on
When returning from
standby
Information name
Power On (Times power is turned on)

Sleep (Number of recoveries from standby)
Controller
Controller
MCU
Duplex
Engine
Engine
-----
-----
(Fixed value)
(Fixed value)
None
None
Panel Message 1
Error Code 1
Error Page 1
Jam Code 1
Page Size 1
Paper Type 1
Date, Time 1
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
---------------
---------------
When an error occurs

SelecType
(EEPROM initialization)
MAINTENANCE
562
Revision C
6.4.2.2 Print Log Report

PRINT LOG REPORT ITEMS
S/N
: Serial number of main unit
Date
: yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm
The date and time are indicated in the local time.
Not displayed when it is in asynchronous state.
Toner Remain
C Toner
: Remaining amount of C toner [%]
M Toner
: Remaining amount of M toner [%]
Y Toner
: Remaining amount of Y toner [%]
K Toner
: Remaining amount of K toner [%]
Print of papers [pages]

: Number of printed pages by paper size.
Total
Mono Simplex : Monochrome
Color Simplex : Color (process color) Number of printed pages by one-side printing.
Print of mode
: Number of printed pages.

Number of printed pages by one-side printing.
: Number of printed pages by print mode.
Coverage Duty [%] : Percentage of printed dots in total dots per page of each color.
It is avaraged each time one page is printed.
Dots/1% [dots]
: Number of dots when 1% of each toner is used.Updated with

every reduction of 1%.
Estimate [pages]
: Estimated number of pages that can be print with remained toner.

The estimate is made based on the Coverage Duty [%] and
Dots/1%[dots].
Figure 6-8. Print Log Report
MAINTENANCE
563
Revision C
LIST OF INFORMATION MANAGED AND METHODS OF MANAGEMENT

Information name

location
Serial Number
Date, Time
Controller
Controller
C Toner
M Toner
Y Toner
K Toner
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Print [pages]
Total
Mono Simplex
Mono Duplex
Color Simplex
Color Duplex
Dummy
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Range
Unit
Count conditions
Clear conditions
xxxxxxxxxx
---
-----
-----
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
%
%
%
%
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
New C toner detected

New M toner detected
New Y toner detected
New K toner detected
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
0 - 99,999,999
pages
pages
pages
pages
pages
pages
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
During printing
None
At Power on
0.0 - 100.0
%
During printing
Controller
Coverage Duty [%] C,M,Y,K
0
2,147,483,647
dots
During printing
Controller
Dots/1% [dots] C,M,Y,K
0 - 99,999,999
pages
During printing
Controller
Estimate [pages]
Note : Values in parentheses in the Clear Condition column are cleared as a result.If a value exceeds its range, it is not guaranteed if it is controlled by the controller.
MAINTENANCE
564
Revision C
6.5 Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement

C A U T IO N
The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The number of printable pages varies
depending on how they are printed. The number of printable pages decreases depending on the intermittent printing (where a few pages, one to several
pages, are printed each time), paper size, paper orientation, thick paper printing, printed document, frequent power-on/off, etc. Hence, the number of
printable pages of the consumables and periodical replacement parts may become less than a half depending on the operating conditions and environment
of the user.
6.5.1 Consumables
Table 6-5. Information on Consumables
Part Name
Toner Cartridge
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
Part Code
Life (Pages)
LPCA4ETC4Y
1500*1
LPCA4ETC5Y
4000*1
LPCA4ETC4M
1500*1
LPCA4ETC5M
4000*1
LPCA4ETC4C
1500*1
LPCA4ETC5C
4000*1
---
---
LPCA4ETC5K
4000*1
LPCA4KUT3
14000*2
Photoconductor Unit
Note *1:
*2:
Service life indication

Replace Toner C
Remarks
(1500 pages by the K toner is the figure for the packaged cartridge only.)
Replace Toner M
Replace Toner Y
Replace Toner K
When the error LED is flashing, the product shifts to eco-mode by pressing the
[Start] button.(Printing can be continued)
However, the print quality is not guaranteed.
A4, Print ratio=5 %

Monochrome : Color = 1:2, 2P/J, A4, Print ratio is 5%
MAINTENANCE
Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
565
Revision C
6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts

Table 6-6. Maintenance Information on Regular Replacement Parts
Part Name
Part Code
Life (Pages)
FUSER ASSY
HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE
Service life indication
Part to be replaced
at the same time
2ND BTR ASSY
Execute Reset Fuser Counter in

the Maintenance Menu to reset the
life counter.
While it can still be printed, it is

desirable to replace the unit. If
printing is continued, a paper
jam will occur at the fusing
section frequently because the
wear of the heat roller shaft
increases the torque of the heat
roller.
Execute Reset X DvlpCounter

(X=Y, M, C, or K) in the
Maintenance Menu to reset the life
counter.
After executing the counter reset,
open and close the Cover A. Do not
turn the printer off until the engine
completely stops.
While it can still be printed,
100000
1292991
100000
Worn K Dev Unit
PIVOT AD
1292994
Worn Y Dev Unit
PIVOT AD
1292996
Worn M Dev Unit
PIVOT AD
Worn C Dev Unit
PIVOT AD
1292999
2ND BTR ASSY
FUSER ASSY
1292981
MAINTENANCE
100000
Remarks
Worn Fuser
2090471
66700
Remedy after Replacement
---
it is desirable to replace the

unit.
The PIVOT AD is packed
with the ASP HOUSING
ASSY-DEVE.
Execute Reset 2ndBTRCounter in While it can still be printed after

the Maintenance Menu to reset the
the message is displayed, it is
life counter.
desirable to replace the unit.
After executing the counter reset,
open and close the Cover A. Do not
turn the printer off until the engine
completely stops.
Consumables and Components needing Periodic Replacement
566
CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
Revision C
7.1 System Connection Diagram

The following diagram shows the connection between the main board and each system.
Control Panel
CN601
Engine I/F
(16Pin)
CN405
Panel I/F
(30Pin)
CN602
Viedo I/F
(2Pin)
CN701
CCD_A I/F
(14Pin)
CN702
CCD_B I/F
(13Pin)
CN703
Motor I/F
(4Pin)
CN300 ROM/RAM DIMM P (90Pin)
CN201 RAM DIMM A (90Pin)
S0
CN202 RAM DIMM B (90Pin)
S1
CN501
Power (5V, 3.3V)
(2Pin)
CN407
Cobalt I/F
(30Pin)
CN704
ADF I/F*1
(12Pin)
CN705
Sensor I/F*2
(2Pin)
CN502
Power (24V)
(2Pin)
CN410
FAX I/F*2
(40Pin)
CN402
USB I/F
(2Pin)
Figure 7-1. Main Board Block Diagram
APPENDIX
System Connection Diagram
568
Revision C
7.2 Printer System Electrical Connection

7.2.1 Connector Summary
This section gives the connector summary for the AcuLaser CX11/CX11F and each
connectors plug and jack alignment.
7.2.1.1 Plug and Jack Layout

IOT
Table 7-1. IOT
P/J
Location
Remarks
G-156
Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
G-156
Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY AC
G-157
Connects PWBA FUSER CONT and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
100
F-122
Connects SWITCH-P/H and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
101
G-123
Connects SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
102
F-123
Connects SENSOR REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
103
D-124
Connects SENSOR PAPER ENPTY and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
104
H-110
Connects SENSOR HUM&TEMP and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
105
D-108
Connects SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI and HARNESS ASSY

MAIN
106
H-108
Connects ANTENNA CTRG and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
107
D-107
Connects SENSOR IBT RETRACT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
108
D-106
Connects SENSOR TR-O and HARNESS-ASSY XERO
109
D-106
Connects ANTENNA ASSY and HARNESS ASSY XERO
111
G-137
Connects SENSOR FUSER IN and HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS
112
H-137
Connects SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT and HARNESS ASSY ADC
113
H-136
Connects SWITCH 2BTR COVER and HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SW
114
D-104
Connects SWITCH-INLK FUSER and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
115
G-107
Connects SWITCH-INLK FRONT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
116
G-108
Connects SWITCH ASSY TOP and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
117
D-105
Connects SWITCH-INLK FUSER and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
APPENDIX
Table 7-1. IOT

P/J
Location
125
G-108
Connects SWITCH-FRONT DOOR and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
126
F-138
Connects SENSOR TNER FULL and HARNESS ASSY TNER FULL
128
G-153
Connects FUSER LOCK SWITCH and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
200
H-153
Connects MOT ASSY P/R and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
201
G-153
Connects MOT ASSY P/R and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
202
F-124
Connects CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
203
F-122
Connects CLUTCH ASSY REGI and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
204
C-109
Connection in MOT ASSY ROT
400
I-149
Connects PWBA MCU and FFC-ASSY ESS
401
I-149
Connects PWBA MCU and FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
403
H-148
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
404
H-148
Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY FSR
405
H-148
Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
406
H-149
Connects PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
407
H-149
408
H-148
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
409
H-148
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
410
I-148
411
I-148
Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
412
I-148
413
I-148
414
I-147
Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
415
J-147
416
J-147
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS-ASSY XERO
417
I-147
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
418
I-147
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ADC
420
J-148
Not used
421
J-148
422
I-147
Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ADC
429
D-109
Connects PWBA CRUM and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
Printer System Electrical Connection
Remarks
569
Revision C
Table 7-1. IOT
Table 7-1. IOT
P/J
Location
P/J
Location
Remarks
430
E-109
Connects PWB ASSY ROT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
620
H-137
Connects HARNESS ASSY 2BTR SENS and HARNESS ASSY ADC
431
F-138
Connects SENSOR ASSY ADC and HARNESS ASSY ADC
432
D-109
621
I-136
Connects HARNESS ASSY 2BTR and HARNESS ASSY ADC
CN1
B-106
Connects PWB ASSY ROT and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
433
D-109
Connects PWB ASSY ROT and PWB ASSY MOT
Connects OP PANEL and HARNESS ASSY PANEL
CN405
G-155
Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY PANEL
500
H-153
Connects LV/HVPS and FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
CN410
G-156
Connects PWBA ESS and FAX BOARD
501
I-152
502
I-153
Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CN501
G-156
Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
CN502
F-155
503
I-155
Connects LV/HVPS and HARNESS ASSY AC
CN601
G-155
Connects PWBA ESS and FFC-ASSY ESS
H-154
Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY BTR
CN602
G-155
Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY 2BTR
F-109
E-109
E-109
Remarks
CN1
I-153
Connects PWBA HVPS and WIRE ASSY IBT
CN701
G-155
Connects PWBA ESS and SCANNER
Connects PWBA HVPS and WIRE ASSY DTN
CN702
G-155
H-155
Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY BCR
CN703
G-156
H-156
Connects LV/HVPS and WIRE ASSY DEVE
CN704
G-155
510
I-108
Connects HOLDER ASSY BIAS and WIRE ASSY DEVE
CN705
G-155
512
I-107
Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY and WIRE ASSY BTR
T2
I-107
Connects PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY and WIRE ASSY 2BTR
513
H-107
Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY IBT
T4
H-107
Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY DTN
514
I-108
Connects GUIDE CRU ASSY AD and WIRE ASSY BCR
515
H-153
516
F-110
Connects PWBA HVPS and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
600
F-153
Connects MOT ASSY MICRO and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
601
H-138
Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
602
H-138
Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MAIN
603
F-124
Connects HARNESS ASSY P/H1 and HARNESS ASSY P/H2
604
F-124
Connects MOTOR-PH and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
605
E-124
Connects SOLENOID PICK UP and HARNESS ASSY P/H1
607
E-140
Not used
614
E-105
Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY MCU C/L
617
D-140
Connects HARNESS-ASSY TNER FULL and HARNESS ASSY

MAIN
APPENDIX
570
Revision C
7.2.1.2 Plug and Jack Layout
500 FEEDER
Table 7-2. 500 FEEDER
P/J
Location
Remarks
119
E-307
Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FEED3
120
D-307
Connects SENSOR T/R (P120) and HARNESS ASSY FEED3
102
121
C-308
Connects SWITCH FEEDER DOOR and HARNESS-ASSY FEED

MAIN
103
435
E-309
Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED1
436
E-309
Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED2
437
E-309
Connects PWBA TRAY 500 and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
CN1
E-308
Connects PWBA MOT and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
CN2
D-308
Connects PWBA MOT and MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
109
101
608
D-307
Connects HARNESS ASSY MAIN and HARNESS-ASSY FEED1
609
C-309
Connects CLUTCH ASSY FEED and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
610
C-308
Connects SOLENOID FEED and HARNESS-ASSY FEED MAIN
618
D-307
Connects HARNESS ASSY FEED MAIN and HARNESS ASSY

FEED3
108
117
114
614
125
115
T4 (IBT)
104
107
105
106
T2
(2BTR)
CN1
512
(1BTR)
107
4358
D-309
Not Connects
513
(IBT)
108
514
(BCR)
105
510
(DEVE)
109
204
106
110
111
429
112
113
433
432
430
516
104
116
114
115
Leg_04_001RB
Figure 7-2. Plug and Jack Layout for IOT (1)
APPENDIX
571
Revision C
116
131
117
132
118
133
119
126
431
111
620
112
113
134
100
120
135
121
203
122
123
124
102
137
101
138
202
139
602
601
125
140
126
141
127
142
128
621
136
143
103
605
603
604
617
129
144
130
145
607
Leg_04_002RA
APPENDIX
Leg_04_003RB
572
Revision C
146
301
417 418 422 414 416

147
415
412
421
420
411
413
404
403
405
409
148
406
149
302
303
304
121
608
618
120
119
CN2
CN1
408 407 410 400 401

150
151
305
200
515
201
306
502
501
152
307
510
153
500
D
600
154
155
309
128
CN405
503
CN702
CN601
CN704
156
157
308
310
CN602
CN502
311
609
CN705
CN701
608
610
4358
436
435
437
312
CN703
158
313
CN410
159
CN501
314
160
315
Leg_04_004RC
APPENDIX
Leg_Sec04_006EB
Figure 7-6. Plug and Jack Layout for 500 FEEDER
573
Revision C
Table 7-3. List of the Symbols
7.2.2 Wiring Connection Diagrams

7.2.2.1 Symbols used in the Overall Wiring Connection Diagram
Symbols
Explanation
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its name.
The table below shows how to interpret the Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams.
Symbols
Explanation
Indicates a connection between parts with a harness or wire.
Indicates a connection that differs according to the specification.
Indicates a section in 7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram

between Parts (p576), and the section No.
Indicates a connection between parts by conductive materials

such as a leaf spring.
Indicates a connection between parts with a screw.
Indicates a screw that secures conductive material such as a leaf
spring to harness.
Indicates Frame Ground.
Indicates conductive materials such as leaf spring.
Indicates a connector, and the connector No.
Indicates a connection terminal with a leaf spring or other spring

on a board, and the connector (terminal) No.
Indicates a connector attached directly to the board, and the

connector No.
Box with a part name in it indicates the part.
APPENDIX
574
APPENDIX
P/J108
P/J109
P/J104
P/J429
SENSOR TR-0
PL7.1.2
ANTENNA ASSY
PL7.1.10
SENSOR HUM & TEMP

PL12.1.6
PWBA CRUM
PL12.1.11

P/J106
P/J125
P/J204
P/J111
P/J112
P/J113
P/J431
ANTENNA CTRG
PL9.1.12
SWITCH-FRONT DOOR
PL1.1.26
MOT ASSY ROT

PL11.1.5
SENSOR FUSER IN
PL6.1.3
SENSOR 2BTR
RETRACT
PL6.1.22
SWITCH 2BTR
COVER
PL6.1.18
SENSOR ASSY ADC
PL6.1.20
MOT ASSY MICRO
PL11.1.7
P/J105
SENSOR ROTARY
HOME POSI
PL9.1.18
MOT ASSY MAG

PL11.1.4
P/J107
P/J126
SENSOR
IBT RETRACT
PL6.1.26
SENSOR TNER FULL

PL7.1.24
DRIVE ASSY PRO

PL11.1.2
P/J200
P/J201
#
P/J617
P/J600
P/J621
P/J620
P/J433
P/J432
P/J430
PWB ASSY ROT

PL12.1.10
P/J114
SWITCH-INLK
FUSER
PL1.1.34
MOT ASSY P/R

PL11.1.6
P/J417
P/J614
FUSER ASSY
PL10.1.1
P/J422
P/J418
P/J406
P/J405
P/J412
P/J416
P/J415
P/J413
P/J414
P/J411
P/J403
P/J404
MOT ASSY FSR

PL11.1.3
9-1
P/J401
P/J410
P/J400
P/J407
P/J408
P/J409
P/J421
9-2
10
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
&
&
P/J603
P/J103
P/J1
P/J117
P/J116
P/J614
SENSOR OHP
PL5.2.16
SENSOR REGI
PL5.2.19
P/J101
P/J102
SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

PL4.1.24
SWITCH-PH DOOR
PL5.2.23
CLUTCH ASSY REGI

PL5.2.2

PL5.2.22
SOLENOID PICK UP
PL4.1.23
MOTOR-PH
PL5.2.20
P/J437
P/J436
P/J510
P/J618
CN1
PWBA MOT
PL14.3.4
CN2
P/J610
P/J120
P/J119
P/J121
P/J609
J4358
Leg_007_001RA
SOLENOID FEED
PL14.3.8
SENSOR T/R (P120)

PL14.4.7
SENSOR NO PAPER
PL14.4.3
SWITCH FEEDER DOOR

PL14.3.18
CLUTCH ASSY FEED

PL14.3.12
MOTOR ASSY FEEDER

PL14.3.9
N.C.
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE PL9.2.5

IBT ASSY PL7.1.1
2ND BTR ASSY PL6.1.12
PWBA HVPS
PL12.1.9
CN1
OP PANEL
PL1.1.17
P/J602
P/J516
CN405
CN602
CN501
CN502
CN601
P/J601
P/J515
P/J501
FUSER ASSY
PL10.1.1
P/J503
P/J500
P/J100
P/J203
P/J202
P/J605
P/J604
P/J435
PWBA TRAY 500

PL14.3.3
P/J4
P/J3
P/J2
PWBA FUSER
CONT
PL12.2.12
SWITCH-INLK
FUSER
PL1.1.34
SWITCH
ASSY TOP
PL1.1.7
SWITCH-INLK
FRONT
P/J115
PL1.1.27
P/J608
P/J117
P/J116
P/J115
% FUSER LOCK SWITCH

PL10.1.6
P/J128
P/J128
P/J502
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
PWBA ESS
PL12.2.7
ROS ASSY
PL8.1.1

Revision C
7.2.2.2 Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams
Figure 7-7. Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams
575
Revision C
7.2.3 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts

Symbol
7.2.3.1 Symbols used in the Wiring Connection Diagram between

Parts
DEVE_A
The table below shows how to interpret the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
given on the following pages.
Commonly used symbols are omitted here.
REGI CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC

Symbol
Explanation
EXIT PAPER SENSED (L) +3.3VDC
Indicates a plug.
Explanation
Indicates a connection between parts with a
harness or wire, and its signal name/details.An
arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of
the signal for enabling the function. The voltage is
the value when the signal is High.An arrow
indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of
the signal when the function is detected. The
voltage is the value when the signal is High. An
arrow indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates cable-to-cable connection.
Indicates a jack.
P/JXX
Indicates a Pin YY or Jack YY of the connector P

XX and J XX.
YY
PWBA HNB DRV PL

X.Y.Z
Indicates a part.
Heater
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its

name.
Control
Indicates control inside the PWB, and a brief

outline of the control.
APPENDIX
I/L +24VDC
Indicates the DC voltage when the HNB MCU

WITH CPU internal interlock switch is ON.
+5VDC
+3.3VDC
Indicates DC voltage.
SG
Indicates a Signal Ground.
AG
Indicates Analog Ground.
RTN
Indicates a Return.
576
Revision C
7.2.3.2 Composition of the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
3.
The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into 11 sections as shown below to
indicate the detailed connection between parts.
1.
2.
DC POWER SUPPLY (p579)
FEEDER (500) (p581)
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA TRAY 500
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and CLUTCH ASSY FEED
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SWITCH FEEDER
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SENSOR NO PAPER
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SENSOR T/R
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and SOLENOID FEED
Connection between PWBA TRAY 500 and PWBA MOT
Connection between PWBA MOT and MOTOR ASSY FEEDER
Connection between PWBA MCU and LV/HVPS
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA FUSER CONTROL
Connection between LV/HVPS and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWB ASSY ROT
Connection between LV/HVPS and SWITCH-INLK FRONT
Connection between the SWITCH-INLK FRONT and SWITCH ASSY TOP
Connection between the SWITCH ASSY TOP and SWITCH-INLK FUSER
Connection between PWBA MCU and ROS ASSY
Connection between SWITCH-INLK FUSER and LV/HVPS
Connection between ROS ASSY and PWBA ESS
MSI REGI (p580)
4.
5.
ROS (p582)
XEROGRAPHIC (p583)
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOTOR-PH
Connection between PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PRO
Connection between the PWBA MCU and SOLENOID PICK UP
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR TNER FULL
Connection between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY PRE REGI
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR IBT RETRACT
Connection between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY REGI
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR TR-O
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH-PH DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA ASSY
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR OHP
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR REGI
Connection between LV/HVPS and MOT ASSY P/R
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR PAPER EMPTY

6.
APPENDIX
HIGH VOLTAGE (p584)
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA HVPS
Connection between LV/HVPS and HOUSING ASSY-DEVE, IBT ASSY,

2ND BTR ASSY
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA MCU
577

7.
8.
9.
Revision C
DEVELOPER (p585)
10. CONTROLLER (p588)
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH FRONT-DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA ESS
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR HUM&TEMP
Connection between PWBA ESS and OP PANEL
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWBA CRUM
Connection between PWBA ESS and LV/HVPS
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MAG
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR ROTARY HOME POSI
Connection between PWBA MCU and ANTENNA CTRG
Connection between PWBA MCU and PWB ASSY ROT
Connection between PWBA ASSY ROT and MOT ASSY ROT
Connection between PWB ASSY ROT and LV/HVPS
2nd BTR (p586)
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR FUSER IN
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR 2BTR RETRACT
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH 2BTR COVER
Connection between PWBA MCU and SENSOR ASSY ADC
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY MICRO
FUSER (p587)
Connection between PWBA MCU and MOT ASSY FUSER
Connection between PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY
Connection between PWBA MCU and SWITCH-FUSER DOOR
Connection between PWBA MCU and FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA FUSER CONT
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and FUSER ASSY
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and PWBA MCU
Connection between PWBA FUSER CONT and FUSER LOCK SWITCH
Connection between LV/HVPS and PWBA MCU
APPENDIX
578
Revision C
1. DC POWER SUPPLY
Overcurrent Protection
All outputs (+24VDC, +5VDC, +3.3VDC) from LV/HVPS are stopped when
short-circuiting on the way to the earth or ground. Each output is restored by
eliminating the cause of the short-circuit, and turning the printer OFF and then
back ON at specified time interval. The overcurrent protection circuit is activated
when a current exceeds 16A flows.
Overvoltage Protection
All outputs from LV/HVPS are stopped when an overvoltage is detected. The
operating voltages for overvoltage protection of each output are as follows:
+24VDC: 36VDC
+5VDC: 7VDC
+3.3VDC: 5VDC
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
P/J500
3
Power
Save
P/J502
P/J115
+5VDC
13
13
15
P/J117
I/L +5VDC
31
SWITCHINLK
FUSER
PL.1.1.34
P/J116
13
P/J117
I/L +5VDC
P/J401
18
P/J502
3
+5VDC
P/J410
3
SG
I/L +24VDC
SG
SG
5
6
7
8
+3.3VDC
+3.3VDC
SG
1
2
Remarks
---
I/L +24VDC
SG
10
The I/L +5VDC signal that arrives via Front Interlock Switch, Upper
Interlock Switch and Fuser Interlock Switch becomes the power source of the
LV/HVPS internal Relay coil. This signal opens/closes Relay contacts, and
controls INTERLOCK +24VDC and INTERLOCK +5VDC.
+5VDC
+3.3VDC
Stopping output by Interlock Switch
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
Interlock
+5VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
I/L +24VDC
Signal for turning +24VDC OFF
P/J116
13
31
P/J500
5
Remarks
+3.3VDC
Supply
P/J115
13
SWITCH
ASSY
TOP
PL.1.1.7
+24VDC
+24VDC
Supply
Name of Signal Line
I/L +5VDC
SWITCHINLK
FRONT
PL.1.1.27
+5VDC
+5VDC
Supply
Name of Signal Line
19
Power save
POWER SAVE
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J401
20
POWER SAVE
11
I/L +24VDC
SG
12
P/J503
3
1
P/J2
3
P/J201
1
MOT ASSY P/R

PL11.1.6
Interlock
+24VDC
P/J432
1
PWB ASSY
ROT
PL12.1.10
Interlock
+24VDC
PWBA FUSER CONTROL

PL12.2.12
1
Leg_Sec007_002FB
Figure 7-8. DC POWER SUPPLY Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
579
Revision C
2. MSI&REGI
Name of Signal Line

PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +5VDC
P/H MOTER ON (H) +3.3VDC
P/H MOTER PWM
P/H MOTER FG
P/H MOTER CW/CCW
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
Remarks
Paper detection signal for MSI generated by
Sensor Photo (No Paper Sensor)
P/H MOT PWM +3.3VDC

P/H MOT TG +3.3VDC
P/H MOT ON CW/CCW
SG
I/L +24VDC
P/J409
7
PREREGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
Pre-Regi Clutch ON/OFF signal
8
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J408
1
2
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
Regi Clutch ON/OFF signal
P/H DOOR SW OPEND (H) +3.3VDC
CHTE ASSY REATR open/close detection

signal generated by P/H Door Switch
3
4
OHP media detection signal generated by Sensor

Photo (OHP Sensor)
Paper detection signal at REGI section generated
by Sensor Photo (REGI Sensor)
5
6
+5VDC
7
8
9
10
+5VDC
11
12
13
14
15
P/J605
I/L +24VDC
1
2
12 1
11 2
10 3
P/J100
2
P/J101
3
3 10
P/J102
3
2 11
1 12
P/J603
I/L +24VDC
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC

I/L +24VDC
SG
P/H POOR SW OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
SG
OHP SENSED (H) +5VDC
+5VDC
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
REGI SENSED (H) +5VDC
SOLENOID
PICK UP
PL4.1.23
2
1
FEED SOL ON (L) +24VDC
PRE REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC
MOTOR-PH
PL5.2.20
P/J604
P/H MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
Solenoid Feed ON/OFF signal
REGI SENSED (H) +5VDC
2
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/H MOTOR drive control signal
OHP SENSED (H) +5VDC
P/J409
1
P/J202
CLUTCH ASSY
PRE REGI
PL5.2.22
P/J203
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +5VDC
CLUTCH ASSY
REGI
PL5.2.2
SWITCH-PH
DOOR
PL5.2.23
P/J103
3
2
1
SENSOR OHP
PL5.2.16
SENSOR REGI
PL5.2.19
SENSOR PAPER
EMPTY
PL4.1.24
Leg_Sec007_003FB
Figure 7-9. MSI&REGI Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
580
Revision C
3. FEEDER (500)
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
N.C.
Name of Signal Line

TRAY SENSOR
RXD
TXD
FEED MOTOR ON (H) +
+5VDC
8
7
DOOR SW OPEND (H) +5VDC
Rear Cover open/close detection signal generated

by Door Rear Cover Switch
SG
SG
I/L +24VDC
I/L +24VDC
Paper detection signal for Paper Tray generated

by Sensor Photo (No Paper Sensor)
P/J435
1
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
Paper feed starting signal generated by Sensor

Photo (Paper Pass Sensor)
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J436 J4358
+5VDC
N.C.
+5VDC
4
5
10
10 1
10
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
PWBA MOT
PL14.3.4
P/J437
1
PWBA TRAY
500
PL.14.3.3
PAPER PASS SENSED (L) +5VDC
+5VDC
Feed Clutch ON/OFF signal
1 10
SG
FUSER MOTOR control signal
TRAY
SENSOR
TXD
6
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J608
RXD
FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC
NO PAPER SENSED (H) +5VDC
P/J421
10
9
Remarks
PWBA TRAY CONT. control signal
PWBA TRAY 500

PL14.3.3
Tray Interface
Connector
CN1
FEED MOT ON (H)

I/L +24VDC
SG
MOTOR ASSY
FEEDER
PL14.3.9
CN2
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
N.C.
Solenoid Feed ON/OFF signal
6
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
6
7
8
+5VDC
SG
11
12
13
14
15
PULL UP +5VDC
CLUTCH ASSY FEED

PL14.3.12
P/J121
2
DOOR SW OPENED (H) +5VDC
10
P/J609
I/L +24VDC
FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC
SWITCH FEEDER
DOOR
PL14.3.18
1
P/J618
SG
NO PAPER SENSED (H) +5VDC
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
PAPER PASS SENSED (L) +5VDC
P/J119
3
P/J120
3
SENSOR NO PAPER
PL14.4.3
SENSOR T/R (P120)

PL14.4.7
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
16
17
I/L +24VDC
P/J610
2
SOLENOID FEED
PL14.3.8
Leg_Sec007_004FB
Figure 7-10. FEEDER 500 Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
581
Revision C
4. ROS
Name of Signal Line

ESS DATAESS DATA+
Remarks
PWBA ESS
PL12.2.7
Image signal from ESS
PWBA LD
CN602
1
MCU DATAMCU DATA+
Image signal from MCU
PCONT
LASER ON (L) +5VDC
VREF
PWBA LD control signal in ROS ASSY
SCANNER MOTOR ON (L) +5VDC

SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK
PWBA Scanner control signal in ROS ASSY
SOS SENSED (L) +5VDC
ROS ASSY
PL8.1.1
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
2
3
+5VDC
Reference signal for start of laser scanning
P/J407
1
4
5
+3.3VDC
6
7
8
9
DATA-
P/J602
DATA+
DATADATA+
P CONT
LASER ON (L) +5VDC
SG
VREF
SG
+5VDC
+3.3VDC
P/J427
2
16 1
P/J424
9
15 2
14 3
13 4
12 5
11 6
10 7
7 10
P/J425
5
6 11
5 12
4 13
3 14
P/J426
3
2 15
1 16
P/J601
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
10
11
12
13
I/L +24VDC
SG
SCAN MOT ON(L) +5VDC
SCAN MOT CLOCK
+5VDC
Single
Beam Laser
Diode
SCANNER PWB
SCANNER MOTOR
SOS PWB
14
15
16
SG
SOS SENSED (L) +5VDC
+5VDC
Leg_007_005RA
Figure 7-11. ROS Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
582
Revision C
5. XEROGRAPHIC
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
DRIVE ASSY PRO

PL11.1.2
P/J411
1
2
Name of Signal Line
Remarks
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
IBT BRUSH MOT ON

IBT BRUSH MOT PWM
IBT BRUSH MOT TG
IBT BRUSH MOT CW/CCW
IBT Brush Motor drive control signal
IBT CLEN RET MOT START

IBT CLEN RET MOT PWM
IBT CLEN RET MOT TG
IBT Cleaner Retract Motor drive control signal
FULL TONER SENSED (H) +5VDC
3
4
P/J414
1
Full toner detection signal generated by Sensor

Photo (Sensor Toner Full)
IBT RETRACT SENSED (L) +5VDC
IBT Cleaner retract detection signal generated by

Sensor Photo (IBT Retract Sensor)
TR0 SENSED (H) +5VDCS
Belt position detection signal generated by

Sensor Photo (TR0 Sensor)
P/R MOT GAIN

P/R MOT CLK
P/R MOT LD
P/R MOT FG
P/R MOT ON (L) +
I/L +24VDC
IBT CLEANER
RETRACT MOTOR
IBT CLEN RET MOT ON
SG
9
+5VDC
10
Crum XERO Antenna control signal
12
P/J606
I/L +24VDC
RETRACT SOL ON (L) +24VDC
P/J617
SG
FULL TONER SENSED (H) +5VDC
PULL UP +5VDC
P/J415
3
4
I/L +24VDC
P/J413
8
SG
11
ANTENNA OUT
ANTENNA IN
IBT BRUSH MOT TG

IBT BRUSH MOT CW/CCW
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
IBT BRUSH MOTOR
IBT BRUSH MOT ON

IBT BRUSH MOT PWM
N.C.
P/J126
3
1
P/J107
3
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
IBT RETRACT SENSED (L) +5VDC
SENSOR
TNER FULL
PL7.1.24
SENSOR
IBT RETRACT
PL6.1.26
+5VDC
P/J416
1
+5VDC
TRO SENSED (H) +5VDC
5
6
+5VDC
7
8
9
10
P/J109
2
ANTENNA IN
P/R MOT GAIN

P/R MOT CLK
P/R MOT LD
P/R MOT FG
P/R MOT ON (L) +
+5VDC
SG
SENSOR TR-0
PL7.1.2
ANTENNA OUT
P/J403
4
SG
P/R MOTOR drive control signal
P/J108
3
P/J200
7
ANTENNA
ASSY
PL7.1.10
MOT ASSY P/R

PL11.1.6
6
5
4
3
2
1
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J502
9
10
I/L +24VDC
SG
P/J201
1
2
Leg_Sec007_006FC
Figure 7-12. XEROGRAPHIC Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
583
Revision C
6. HIGH VOLTAGE
LV/HVPS
12.2.3
P/J500
22
IBT CLEANER H/L
21
Remarks
1st BTR Bias voltage control signal
17
IBT CLEANER H/L
IBT CLEANER Bias voltage control signal
15
13
DE-TONER CONT
DE-TONER Bias voltage control signal
11
DEVE BIAS ON
1st BTR REV ON
1st BTR DC Bias control signal
2nd BTR REV ON
2nd BTR DC Bias control signal
1st BTR ON
1st BTR Bias ON/OFF signal
2nd BTR ON
2nd BTR Bias ON/OFF signal
DEVE BIAS CLK
DEVE AC Bias cycle control signal
2nd BTR CONT

BCR CLK
P/J515
1
6
5
4
2nd BTR REV ON
2nd BTR ON
2nd BTR CONT
1
C
IBT CLEANER ON
1
DE-TONER
1st BTR
H
1
DEVE
BCR
PWBA HVPS
PL12.1.9
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
CLEANER H/L
P/J516
9
DE-TONER CONT
17
SG
16
I/L +24VDC
15
BCR CLK
BCR Bias cycle control signal
14
2nd BTR CONT
2nd BTR Bias voltage control signal
13
DEVE BIAS CLK
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
12
1st BTR ON
2nd BTR ON
Belt Cleaning Brush Bias ON/OFF signal
11
2nd BTR REV ON
IBT CLEANER ON
9
10
1st BTR REV ON
DEVE Bias voltage control signal
IBT CLEANER ON
10
DEVE BIAS CONT
DEVE BIAS CONT
12
DEVE Bias ON/OFF signal
DEVE BIAS ON
14
BCR Bias voltage control signal
DE-TONER CONT
16
BCR CONT
BCR CONT
18
1st BTR CONT
SG
19
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
SG
20
Name of Signal Line
P/J401
1
1st BTR CONT
PHOTO
CONDUCTOR
UNIT
PL7.1.1
2nd
BTR
2ND BTR
ASSY
PL6.1.12
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE
PL9.2.58
IBT CLEANER
Leg_Sec007_007FB
Figure 7-13. HIGH VOLTAGE Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
584
Revision C
7. DEVELOPER
PWBA
MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J415
10
11
Name of Signal Line
Remarks
P/J413
1
+5VDC
MAG ROLL MOT ON

MAG ROLL MOT PWM
MAG ROLL MOT TG
MAG ROLL MOT CW/CCW
TEMP.
SG
FRONT DOOR OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
Magnet Roll Motor drive control signal
SG
Data of temperature inside the printer measured

by Sensor (analog value)
HUMI.
Data of humidity inside the printer measured by

Sensor(analog value)
HOME POSITION SENSED (H) +5VDC
Deve Rotary home position detection signal

generated by Sensor Photo (Rotary Home
Position Sensor)(High:
ANTENNA OUT
ANTENNA IN
CRUM Cartridge Antenna control signal
SG
HOLD
CLOCK
ON (H) +5VDC
PWBA Rotate Motor Control control signal
+5VDC
P/J412
1
PWBA CRUM control signal
FRONT DOOR OPEN (H) +3.3VDC
Front Door open/close detection signal
MOT ASSY MAG

PL11.1.4
P/J405
1
MAG ROLL MOT TG
SG
I/L +24VDC
I/L +24VDC
DISPENSE CLUTCH
DISP CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC
P/J413
5
6
MAG ROLL MOT CW/CCW
P/J406
1
MAGNET
ROLL MOTOR
MAG ROLL MOT ON

MAG ROLL MOT PWM
2
Interlock
+24VDC
+5VDC
DATA
CLOCK
SG
PWBA CRUM
PL12.1.11
+5VDC
+5VDC
Deve Rotate Motor excitation signal
P/J429
4
DATA
DEVE ROT A, XA, B, XB
CLOCK
+5VDC
+5VDC
SENSOR HUM & TEMP

PL12.1.6
HUMI.
SWITCH-FRONT
DOOR
PL1.1.26
P/J104
4
TEMP.
P/J125
2
P/J105
3
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
HOME POSITION SENSED (H) +5VDC
P/J415
1
ANTENNA IN
1
P/J106
2
ANTENNA OUT
SENSOR ROTARY
HOME POSI
PL9.1.18
ANTENNA CTRG
PL9.1.12
PWB ASSY ROT

PL12.1.10
P/J415
6
7
8
9
SG
HOLD
CLOCK
ON (H) +5VDC
P/J430
4
MOT
ASSY ROT
PL11.1.5
3
2
1
Interlock
+24VDC
P/J433
1
2
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
Interlock
+24VDC
3
4
5
P/J502
11
12
I/L +24VDC
SG
P/J432
1
DEVE ROT A
I/L +24VDC
DEVE ROT XA
DEVE ROT B
I/L +24VDC
DEVE ROT XB
P/J204
1
3
5
7
9
11
3
Leg_Sec007_008FB
Figure 7-14. DEVELOPER Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
585
Revision C
8. 2ND BTR
Name of Signal Line
Remarks
FUSER IN SENSED (L) +5VDC
2nd BTR paper detection signal generated by

Sensor Photo (Fuser In Sensor)
RETRACT SENSED (H) +5VDC
2nd BTR retract detection signal generated by

Sensor Photo (2nd BTR Retract Sensor)
ADC SOL RELEASE ON (L) +24VDC
ADC SOL NIP ON (L) +24VDC
ADC LED BLACK ON (L) +5VDC
Lighting signal of LED for detection of Sensor

ADC internal black toner patch
RETRACT MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC

RETRACT MOT PWM
5
6
7
8
Toner patch density data measured by the sensor

(analog value)
P/J620
SG
FUSER IN SENSED (L)+5VDC
+5VDC
P/J111
3
SG
P/J422
1
2
3
4
+5VDC
2nd BTR Retract Motor control signal
5
6
7
SG
COVER OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
P/J113
2
P/J431
8
ADC SOL RELEASE ON (L) +24VDC

I/L +24VDC
SWITCH
2BTR COVER
PL6.1.18
SENSOR ASSY ADC

PL6.1.20
ADC SOL NIP ON (L ) +24VDC
SG
ADC LED COLOR ON (L) +5VDC
ADC LED BLACK ON (L) +5VDC
ADC SENSOR
+5VDC
Interlock
+24VDC
SENSOR
2BTR
RETRACT
PL6.1.22
RETRACT SENSED (H) +5VDC
P/J621
Interlock
+24VDC
SENSOR
FUSER IN
PL6.1.3
P/J112
3
PULL UP +5VDC
Sensor ADC internal Solenoid ON/OFF signal

(The shutter is placed on the position to measure
diffuse light)
Lighting signal of LED for detection of Sensor
ADC internal color toner patch
P/J418
1
2
+5VDC
Sensor ADC internal Solenoid ON/OFF signal

(The shutter is placed on the position to measure
reflection from the reference board)
ADC LED COLOR ON (L) +5VDC
ADC SENSOR
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
+5VDC
MOT ASSY MICRO

PL11.1.7
P/J403
1
2
3
RETRACT MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC

SG
I/L +24VDC
P/J600
3
Leg_Sec007_009FB
Figure 7-15. 2nd BTR Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
586
Revision C
9. FUSER
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
+5VDC
Interlock
+24VDC
Name of Signal Line
P/J404
1
FUSER MOT PWM
FUSER MOT TG
SG
I/L +24VDC
FUSER MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC

FUSER MOT PWM
FUSER MOT TG
FUSER MOT CW/CCW
Fuser Motor drive control signal

FUSER ASSY
PL10.1.1
P/J417
1
VC
Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by

Temp. Sensor for high-temperature detection
(analog value)
Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for

temperature control (analog value)
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +5VDC
Paper ejection detection signal generated by

Sensor Photo (Fuser Exit Sensor) (High:
DATA
CLOCK
CRUM control signal
FLICKER CLK +3.3VDC

LAMP ON (L) +
RELAY ON (L) +24VDC
SG
Vd
P/J615
12 2
11 3
10 4
P/J110
3
+5VDC
P/J619
PULL UP +5VDC
SG
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +5VDC
P/J403
11
P/J401
P/J500
FRIKER CLK +3.3VDC
21
2
LAMP ON (L)
22
1
Flicker countermeasure control signal (AC220V/

AC240V only)
P/J114
2
SG
FUSER DOOR SW OPENED (H) +3.3VDC
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
Fuser Lamp Relay ON/OFF signal in PWBA

Fuser Cont
Temp. Sensor
FUSER EXIT
SENSOR
12
Fuser Lamp lighting signal
Safety Temp.
Sensor
P/J616
Vc
Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for

temperature control (analog value)
VD
P/J614
RL
SG
RL
+5VDC
Remarks
MOT ASSY FSR

PL11.1.3
FUSER MOT ON (H) +3.3VDC
FUSER
RELAY
CONTROL
P/J2
4
220/240V ONLY USE
SWITCH-FUSER
DOOR
PL1.1.36
1
P/J503
4
5
6
220/240V
Thermostat
P614
PWBA FUSER CONT

PL12.2.12
3
2
5
Heater
FUSER DOOR SW OPEND (H) +3.3VDC
Cover Fuser open/close detection signal
Interlock
+24VDC
6
P/J410
10
P/J1
1
I/L +24VDC
3
RELAY ON (L) +24VDC
P/J614
3
100/115V
Thermostat
1
Heater
FUSER LOCK
SWITCH
PL10.1.6
1
P/J3
2
Leg_Sec007_010FB
Figure 7-16. FUSER Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
587
Revision C
10. CONTROLLER
PWBA ESS
PL12.2.7
CN601
1
PWBA MCU
PL12.2.1
P/J400
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CN501
1
P/J501
1
CN502
1
+5VDC
P/J510
1
CN405
LV/HVPS
PL12.2.3
+3.3VDC
CN1
OP PANEL
PL1.1.17
Leg_007_011FA
Figure 7-17. CONTROLLER Connection and Wiring Diagram
APPENDIX
588
Revision C
7.3 Packaging Specification
MAIN UNIT
Fax Model
C A U T IO N
Carrying the product should be done by two or more people

keeping it in a horizontal position.
Since the rear side of the product is heavier than its front side,
be aware of the difference when carrying the product.
Use extreme care during the installation to avoid an accident
and injury.
1.
After unpacking, make sure that there is no missing component, and check the
appearance.
2.
Then remove all tapes and protection materials.
1) Main Unit
2) Toner Cartridge (YMCK)
3) POWER CORD
4) Anticounterfeit Label (15 countries)
Note: Photoconductor unit is packed
separately.
3)
2)
1)
4)
APPENDIX
589
Revision C
Base Model
500-SHEET CASSETTE
1) Main Unit
2) IBT ASSY
3) Toner Cartridge (YMCK)
4) POWER CORD
5) CAUTION SHEET
6) Anticounterfeit Label (15 countries)
Note: Photoconductor unit is packed
separately.
1) Main Unit
4)
1)
5)
3)
2)
6)
1)
APPENDIX
590
Revision C
7.4 Parts List
Table 7-5. AcuLaser CX11

No.
AcuLaser CX11
No.
APPENDIX
Name
Name
01-01-38
COVER FUSER GUIDE
01-01-99
KIT SLIDE BAR
01-02-39
COVER LEG LH OUTER
01-01-02
TRAY EXTENSION
01-02-40
COVER HINGE;L
01-01-03
COVER TOP
01-02-41
COVER LEG LH INNER
01-01-04
COVER FUSER
01-02-42
COVER LEG RH INNER
01-01-05
COVER TOP SIDE L
01-02-44
COVER HINGE;R
01-01-06
COVER TOP SIDE R
01-02-45
COVER LEG RH OUTER
01-01-07
SWITCH ASSY TOP
01-02-47
HINGE LARGE
01-01-10
COVER CLEANER
01-02-48
HINGE LARGE;B
01-01-100
LOGO PLATE,13X54;C
12-02-01
PWBA MCU
01-01-12
FOOT REAR
12-02-02
FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
01-01-13
FOOT FRONT
12-02-03
LV/HVPS
01-01-14
COVER MSI
12-02-04
HARNESS ASSY AC
01-01-15
COVER FRONT-L
12-02-05
FFC-ASSY ESS
01-01-16
COVER FRONT ASSY-U
12-02-07
BOARD ASSY., MAIN
01-01-17
CONTROL PANEL
12-02-08
BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY
01-01-18
HARNESS
12-02-09
NETWORK BOARD
01-01-19
COVER ASSY LH
12-02-10
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
01-01-20
COVER LH
12-02-11
BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY
01-01-21
COVER ESS
12-02-12
PWBA FUSER CONT
01-01-22
SWITCH ASSY FUSER
04-01-01
MSI ASSY
01-01-23
COVER TRAY
04-01-02
ROLL ASSY MSI
01-01-24
COVER INNER TOP
04-01-08
ROLL MSI
01-01-26
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-09
CHUTE MSI
01-01-27
SWITCH INLK FRONT
04-01-11
GEAR MANUAL
01-01-28
COVER ASSY RH
04-01-12
GUIDE SIDE L
01-01-33
COVER INNER LOW
04-01-13
GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
01-01-34
SWITCH INLK FRONT
04-01-15
01-01-36
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-16
Parts List
591
Revision C

No.
APPENDIX
Name
No.
Name
04-01-17
PLATE ASSY RETARD
06-01-08
GEAR 27
04-01-20
OIL DAMPER
06-01-12
2ND BTR ASSY
04-01-22
GEAR PICK UP
06-01-13
CAM ASSY-2ND
04-01-23
SOLENOID PICK UP
06-01-15
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
04-01-24
SENSOR UPPER PASS
06-01-16
04-01-25
ACUTUATOR EMPTY
06-01-18
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-26
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
06-01-20
SENSOR ASSY ADC
05-01-01
COVER-PH
06-01-21
HOLDER-ADC 2ND
05-01-02
CHUTE ASSY-REAR
06-01-22
SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-01
FRAME ASSY-PH
06-01-26
SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-02
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
06-01-27
PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
05-02-06
GEAR-REGI
06-01-29
CAM ASSY-IBT CL
05-02-08
ROLL REGI RUBBER
06-01-30
HARNESS ASSY ADC
05-02-11
VARISTOR
07-01-02
SENSOR TR-0
05-02-12
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
07-01-04
GUIDE CRU ASSY D
05-02-16
SENSOR
07-01-12
HARNESS ASSY XERO
05-02-17
SPRING-ACTUATOR
07-01-13
GUIDE CRU ASSY AD
05-02-18
ACTUATOR-REGI
07-01-15
LEVER-LATCH PR
05-02-19
SENSOR UPPER PASS
07-01-16
CAP-PLATE PR
05-02-20
MOTOR-PH
07-01-20
BCR CLN XERO ASSY
05-02-21
HARNESS ASSY P/H2
07-01-24
SENSOR TNER FULL
05-02-22
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
07-01-27
GUIDE CRU
05-02-23
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
07-01-30
WIRE ASSY IBT
05-02-24
DRIVE ASSY PH
07-01-31
WIRE ASSY BTR
05-02-25
COVER HARNESS
07-01-32
WIRE ASSY BCR
06-01-01
CHUTE ASSY-FSR
07-01-33
WIRE ASSY DTN
06-01-03
SENSOR
08-01-01
ROS ASSY
06-01-04
08-01-02
CLEANER ASSY
06-01-06
DIODE FUSER
08-01-05
CLEANER ASSY BASE
06-01-07
FRAME ASSY-2ND
09-01-01
LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
Parts List
592
Revision C

No.
APPENDIX
Name
09-01-04
LEVER LATCH
09-01-10
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
09-01-15
LEVER CTRG SET
09-01-17
No.
Name
12-01-11
PWBA CRUM
13-02-01
IR BASE B ASSY
13-02-01-2
SHEET HOLE
HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
13-02-02
CORE ASSY
09-01-18
SENSOR UPPER PASS
13-02-03
IR TIMING BELT
09-01-20
WIRE ASSY DEVE
13-02-04
IR SHAFT
09-02-05
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
13-02-05
PLATE HW
09-02-06
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y
13-02-06
FFC CR
09-02-07
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
13-02-07
SPONGE1
09-02-08
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
13-02-08
SPONGE3
09-02-09
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
13-02-09
PLATE HARNESS
09-02-10
PIVOT ASSY
13-02-10
ASSLUG ASSY GND
09-02-11
PIVOT AD
13-02-11
ASSLUG ASSY GND 2
09-02-13
BEARING BALL
13-02-12
PULLEY ASSY
10-01-01
FUSER ASSY
13-02-13
MOTOR ASSY
10-01-02
13-02-14
CCD MODULE ASSY;B
10-01-06
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
13-02-15
IR COVER B ASSY
10-01-07
HOOK BASE;L
13-02-16
FFC CLIP
10-01-08
HOOK BASE;R
13-02-17
FERRITE BEAD
11-01-01
DRIVE ASSY BTR
13-02-18
LOCK CR
11-01-02
DRIVE ASSY PRO
13-02-24
HINGE HOLDER 1
11-01-03
MOT ASSY FSR
13-02-26
SCANNER UNIT,STD
11-01-04
MOT ASSY MAG
14-03-01
DOCUMENT COVER UNIT
11-01-05
MOT ASSY ROT
14-03-01-2
WHITE PAD ASSY
11-01-06
MOT ASSY P/R
14-03-02
HINGE HOLDER 2
11-01-07
MOT ASSY MICRO
14-03-05
DOCUMENT COVER
11-01-09
GEAR 2ND
12-01-06
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
12-01-09
PWBA HVPS
12-01-10
PWB ASSY ROT
Parts List
593
Revision C
AcuLaser CX11F
Table 7-6. AcuLaser CX11F

No.

No.
01-01-02
APPENDIX
Name
TRAY EXTENSION
01-01-03
COVER TOP
01-01-04
COVER FUSER
01-01-05
COVER TOP SIDE L
01-01-06
COVER TOP SIDE R
01-01-07
SWITCH ASSY TOP
01-01-10
COVER CLEANER
01-01-100
LOGO PLATE,13X54;C
01-01-12
FOOT REAR
01-01-13
FOOT FRONT
01-01-14
COVER MSI
01-01-15
COVER FRONT-L
01-01-16
COVER FRONT ASSY-U
01-01-17
CONTROL PANEL
01-01-18
HARNESS
01-01-19
COVER ASSY LH
01-01-20
COVER LH
01-01-21
COVER ESS
01-01-22
SWITCH ASSY FUSER
01-01-23
COVER TRAY
01-01-24
COVER INNER TOP
01-01-26
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
01-01-27
SWITCH INLK FRONT
01-01-28
COVER ASSY RH
01-01-33
COVER INNER LOW
01-01-34
SWITCH INLK FRONT
01-01-36
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
01-01-38
COVER FUSER GUIDE
01-01-99
KIT SLIDE BAR
Parts List
Name
01-02-39
COVER LEG LH OUTER
01-02-40
COVER HINGE;L
01-02-41
COVER LEG LH INNER
01-02-42
COVER LEG RH INNER
01-02-44
COVER HINGE;R
01-02-45
COVER LEG RH OUTER
01-02-47
HINGE LARGE
01-02-48
HINGE LARGE;B
13-01-01
ADF FRAME ASSY
13-01-02
ADF BASE ASSY
13-01-03
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
13-01-04
ADF COVER C
13-01-05
ADF COVER R
13-01-06
SDH COVER EXTEND
13-01-07
PCB COVER
13-01-08
ADF PCB ASSY
13-01-09
SDH COVER
13-01-10
HOOK FIX PLATE
13-01-14
WHITE PAD ASSY;B
13-01-17
MAGNETIC
13-01-19
HINGE SMALL
13-01-20
CABEL;B
13-01-22
RUBBER FOOT
13-01-23
ADF UNIT
12-02-01
PWBA MCU
12-02-02
FFC-ASSY LV/MCU
12-02-03
LV/HVPS
12-02-04
HARNESS ASSY AC
12-02-05
FFC-ASSY ESS
12-02-07
BOARD ASSY., MAIN
594
Revision C

No.
APPENDIX
Name
No.
Name
12-02-08
BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY
05-02-16
SENSOR
12-02-09
NETWORK BOARD
05-02-17
SPRING-ACTUATOR
12-02-10
HARNESS ASSY MAIN
05-02-18
ACTUATOR-REGI
12-02-11
BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY
05-02-19
SENSOR UPPER PASS
12-02-12
PWBA FUSER CONT
05-02-20
MOTOR-PH
12-02-16
FAX BOARD
05-02-21
HARNESS ASSY P/H2
04-01-01
MSI ASSY
05-02-22
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
04-01-02
ROLL ASSY MSI
05-02-23
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-08
ROLL MSI
05-02-24
DRIVE ASSY PH
04-01-09
CHUTE MSI
05-02-25
COVER HARNESS
04-01-11
GEAR MANUAL
06-01-01
CHUTE ASSY-FSR
04-01-12
GUIDE SIDE L
06-01-03
SENSOR
04-01-13
GUIDE ASSY SIDE R
06-01-04
04-01-15
06-01-06
DIODE FUSER
04-01-16
06-01-07
FRAME ASSY-2ND
04-01-17
PLATE ASSY RETARD
06-01-08
GEAR 27
04-01-20
OIL DAMPER
06-01-12
2ND BTR ASSY
04-01-22
GEAR PICK UP
06-01-13
CAM ASSY-2ND
04-01-23
SOLENOID PICK UP
06-01-15
COVER ASSY-RR 2ND
04-01-24
SENSOR UPPER PASS
06-01-16
04-01-25
ACUTUATOR EMPTY
06-01-18
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
04-01-26
HARNESS-ASSY P/H1
06-01-20
SENSOR ASSY ADC
05-01-01
COVER-PH
06-01-21
HOLDER-ADC 2ND
05-01-02
CHUTE ASSY-REAR
06-01-22
SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-01
FRAME ASSY-PH
06-01-26
SENSOR UPPER PASS
05-02-02
CLUTCH ASSY REGI
06-01-27
PLATE BIAS-2ND ASSY
05-02-06
GEAR-REGI
06-01-29
CAM ASSY-IBT CL
05-02-08
ROLL REGI RUBBER
06-01-30
HARNESS ASSY ADC
05-02-11
VARISTOR
07-01-02
SENSOR TR-0
05-02-12
ROLL ASSY-PRE REGI
07-01-04
GUIDE CRU ASSY D
Parts List
595
Revision C

No.
APPENDIX
Name
No.
Name
07-01-12
HARNESS ASSY XERO
10-01-02
07-01-13
GUIDE CRU ASSY AD
10-01-06
FUSER LOCK SWITCH
07-01-15
LEVER-LATCH PR
10-01-07
HOOK BASE;L
07-01-16
CAP-PLATE PR
10-01-08
HOOK BASE;R
07-01-20
BCR CLN XERO ASSY
11-01-01
DRIVE ASSY BTR
07-01-24
SENSOR TNER FULL
11-01-02
DRIVE ASSY PRO
07-01-27
GUIDE CRU
11-01-03
MOT ASSY FSR
07-01-30
WIRE ASSY IBT
11-01-04
MOT ASSY MAG
07-01-31
WIRE ASSY BTR
11-01-05
MOT ASSY ROT
07-01-32
WIRE ASSY BCR
11-01-06
MOT ASSY P/R
07-01-33
WIRE ASSY DTN
11-01-07
MOT ASSY MICRO
08-01-01
ROS ASSY
11-01-09
GEAR 2ND
08-01-02
CLEANER ASSY
12-01-06
SENSOR HUM & TEMP
08-01-05
CLEANER ASSY BASE
12-01-09
PWBA HVPS
09-01-01
LATCH ASSY-ROTARY
12-01-10
PWB ASSY ROT
09-01-04
LEVER LATCH
12-01-11
PWBA CRUM
09-01-10
ANTENNA ASSY-CTRG
14-02-01
FRAME COVER ASSY
09-01-15
LEVER CTRG SET
09-01-17
HOLDER ASSY-BIAS
14-02-08
CLIP
09-01-18
SENSOR UPPER PASS
14-02-09
KNOB
09-01-20
WIRE ASSY DEVE
14-02-11
COVER SENSOR
09-02-05
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE K
14-02-12
COVER HOOK
09-02-06
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE Y
14-02-13
BUSH D6
09-02-07
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE M
14-02-16
MOTOR
09-02-08
HOUSING ASSY-DEVE C
14-02-17
TURNING ROLLER
09-02-09
FRAME ASSY-ROTARY
14-02-18
PAPER GUIDE R
09-02-10
PIVOT ASSY
14-02-19
EXIT ROLLER
09-02-11
PIVOT AD
14-02-20
EXIT ROLLER SPRING
09-02-13
BEARING BALL
14-02-25
GEAR 30T
10-01-01
FUSER ASSY
14-02-26
GEAR 40T 18T
14-02-01-2
Parts List
NEUTRALIZING BRUSH
596
Revision C

No.
Name
No.
Name
14-02-27
GEAR 15T
17-04-09
AS SENSOR
14-02-28
GEAR 60T 18T
17-04-12
SENSOR LEVER
14-02-29
GEAR 33T M0.5
18-01-01
IR BASE A ASSY
14-02-30
GEAR 26T
18-01-01-2
SHEET HOLE
14-02-31
GEAR 48T
18-01-02
CORE ASSY
14-02-32
GEAR 32T 15T
18-01-03
IR TIMING BELT
14-02-33
E RING
18-01-04
IR SHAFT
15-02-02
PAD BASE ASSY
18-01-05
PLATE HW
15-02-03
CORK HOLDER ASSY
18-01-07
SPONGE1
15-02-04
GUIDE FRONT ASSY
18-01-08
SPONGE3
15-02-05
FIX PLATE ASSY
18-01-09
PLATE HARNESS
15-02-06
ADF FRAME UNIT
18-01-10
ASSLUG ASSY GND
15-02-06-7
READING SHEET
18-01-11
ASSLUG ASSY GND 2
15-02-07
EXIT ROLL ASSY
18-01-12
PULLEY ASSY
16-03-02
PAPER GUIDE EXTEND
18-01-13
MOTOR ASSY
16-03-03
DOC,AJUST L
18-01-14
CCD MODULE ASSY;B
16-03-04
DOC,AJUST R
18-01-15
IR COVER A ASSY
16-03-05
GEAR PLATE
18-01-16
FFC CLIP
16-03-06
TRAY GEAR 24T
18-01-17
FERRITE BEAD
16-03-08
PAPER SENSOR SWITCH L
18-01-18
LOCK CR
16-03-09
PAPER SENSOR SWITCH R
18-01-23
FFC BOARD
17-04-01
PICK UP ASSY
18-01-26
PLATE HARNESS 2
17-04-01-1
ADF ROLLER
18-01-27
PCB ASSY
17-04-01-2
PICK UP ROLLER
18-01-29
SCANNER UNIT,ADF
17-04-02
E CLUTCH UNIT
17-04-03
GEAR 20T
17-04-04
TENSION SPRING
17-04-05
GEAR 12T
17-04-06
E RETAINING RING
17-04-07
APPENDIX
Parts List
597
Revision C
Option cassette unit
Table 7-7. Option cassette unit

No.
Table 7-7. Option cassette unit

No.
01-01-01
APPENDIX
Name
01-01-02
GUIDE END ASSY
01-01-04
GUIDE PAPER L ASSY 500
01-01-05
PINION 12
01-01-06
GUIDE PAPER R ASSY 500
01-01-09
LOCK LIFT R
01-01-10
ROLL LINK
01-01-12
COVER FRONT CST 500
01-01-14
LOCK LIFT L
01-02-01
COVER LEFT 500
01-02-02
CHUTE FDR ASSY 500
01-02-10
COVER RIGHT 500
01-03-02
01-03-03
PWB TRAY 500
01-03-04
PWBA MOT
01-03-08
SOLENOID FEED
01-03-09
MOT ASSY FSR
01-03-10
GEAR ASSY DRIVE
01-03-11
GEAR FEED
01-03-12
CLUTCH ASSY FEED
01-03-14
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 1
01-03-16
ROLL ASSY TURN 500
01-03-18
EXIT CHUTE SWITCH
01-03-20
FOOT FEEDER
01-03-21
BLOCK CST
01-03-22
HARNESS-ASSY FEED 2
01-03-23
CHUTE ASSY 500
01-03-24
01-03-26
FILM ASSY FDR
Parts List
Name
01-03-29
LEVER 500
01-03-32
GUIDE CST R
01-03-34
GUIDE CST L
01-04-01
HOUSING ASSY FEED
01-04-03
SENSOR UPPER PASS
01-04-04
ACTUATOR NO PAPER CST
01-04-05
SPRING ACTUATOR
01-04-06
ACTUATOR T/R
01-04-07
SENSOR UPPER PASS
01-04-11
ROLL ASSY FEED 500
01-04-14
HARNESS ASSY FEED 3
01-04-15
CAP ACTUATOR
598
Revision C
7.5 Exploded Diagram

AcuLaser CX11
APPENDIX
Exploded Diagram
599
C588-CASE-001
The parts to which no reference number

is assigned will not be available as
after-sale service parts.
01-01-04
01-01-02
01-01-03
01-01-23
01-01-19
01-01-21
01-01-24
01-01-38
01-01-05
01-01-20
01-01-22
01-01-34
01-01-07
01-01-06
01-01-36
01-01-26
01-01-33
01-01-18
01-01-27
A
01-01-17
01-01-12
01-01-12
01-01-16
01-01-13
01-01-13
01-01-100
01-01-15
01-01-99
01-01-10
01-01-28
01-01-14
Front
Leg_005_001RC
FOR LP-A500/EPSON AcuLaserCX11N/CN11/CX11/N NO.1-1 Rev.01 C588
C588-CASE-002

01-02-47
01-02-48
01-02-40
01-02-44
01-02-39
01-02-41
01-02-42
01-02-45
Leg_005_031RA

C588-ELEC-001
12-02-01
12-02-02
Front
12-02-03
12-02-04
12-02-06
12-02-11
12-02-05
12-02-08
12-02-07
12-02-12
12-02-09 (Only the spec with the Network Card)
12-02-13
12-02-10
Leg_005_013RC
C588-MECH-001

04-01-01
04-01-09
04-01-02
04-01-08
04-01-15
04-01-11
04-01-12
04-01-13
A
04-01-26
04-01-24
B
04-01-25
04-01-16
04-01-17
04-01-23
04-01-22
04-01-20
A
B
Front
Leg_Sec005_002EB
C588-MECH-001DOC
14-03-05

(All this page)
14-03-01
14-03-02
14-03-02
14-03-01-2
C588-MECH-001IR-B

13-02-26 (All this page)
13-02-24
13-02-18
13-02-24
13-02-17
13-02-14
13-02-16
13-02-15
13-02-10
13-02-04
13-02-13
13-02-03
13-02-08
13-02-02
13-02-09
13-02-06 13-02-05
13-03-07
13-02-12
13-02-11
13-02-01
13-02-01-2 13-02-01-2
13-02-01-2
13-02-01-2
C588-MECH-002

05-01-01
05-01-02
[Ref PL5.2.1]
Front
Leg_Sec005_003RA
C588-MECH-003

05-02-02
A
05-02-06
05-02-23
05-02-24
05-02-08
B
05-02-06
05-02-25
05-02-22
05-02-11
05-02-18
05-02-19
B
05-02-20
05-02-16
05-02-17
E
05-02-21
05-02-12
Front
Leg_Sec005_004EB
C588-MECH-004

06-01-01
06-01-03
06-01-04
06-01-06
06-01-07
06-01-08
06-01-12
06-01-13
06-01-30
06-01-15
06-01-18
06-01-16
E
C
D
06-01-26
06-01-20
06-01-21
06-01-27
06-01-22
A
B
E
06-01-29
Front
Leg_Sec005_005RA
C588-MECH-005

07-01-04
07-01-02
07-01-13
07-01-15
07-01-16
C
07-01-12
07-01-33
B
D
07-01-31
07-01-30
07-01-24
07-01-32
07-01-20
07-01-27
07-01-27
Front
Leg_Sec005_006RA
C588-MECH-006

08-01-01
08-01-02
Front
08-01-05
Leg_Sec005_007RB
C588-MECH-007

09-01-01
09-01-10
09-01-04
09-01-15
09-01-17
09-01-18
09-01-20
Front
Leg_Sec005_008RA

C588-MECH-008
09-02-05 (with 11)
09-02-10 09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-09
09-02-08 (with 11)
09-02-06 (with 11)
09-02-13
09-02-13
09-02-10
09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-07 (with 11)
Front
Leg_Sec005_009RA
10-01-01
C588-MECH-009

10-01-02
10-01-07
10-01-08
10-01-06
Front
Leg_005_010RA
C588-MECH-010

11-01-02
11-01-03
Front
11-01-09
11-01-01
11-01-04
11-01-05
11-01-06
11-01-07
Leg_005_011RA
C588-MECH-011

12-01-11
12-01-10
12-01-06
12-01-09
Front
Leg_Sec005_012RA
Revision C
AcuLaser CX11F
APPENDIX
Exploded Diagram
616
C588-CASE-001A

01-01-04
01-01-02
01-01-03
01-01-23
01-01-19
01-01-21
01-01-24
01-01-38
01-01-05
01-01-20
01-01-22
01-01-34
01-01-07
01-01-06
01-01-36
01-01-26
01-01-33
01-01-18
01-01-27
A
01-01-17
01-01-12
01-01-12
01-01-16
01-01-13
01-01-13
01-01-100
01-01-15
01-01-99
01-01-10
01-01-28
01-01-14
Front
Leg_005_001RC
FOR LP-A50F/EPSON AcuLaserCX11NF/CN11F/CX11F/NF NO.1-1 Rev.01 C588
C588-CASE-001ADF

13-01-03
13-01-04
13-01-02
13-01-05
13-01-06
13-01-01
13-01-07
13-01-20
13-01-19
13-01-08
13-01-17
13-01-19
13-01-14
13-01-10
13-01-09
13-01-22
C588-CASE-002A

01-02-47
01-02-48
01-02-40
01-02-44
01-02-39
01-02-41
01-02-42
01-02-45
Leg_005_031RA

C588-ELEC-001A
12-02-01
12-02-02
Front
12-02-03
12-02-04
12-02-06
12-02-11
12-02-05
12-02-08
12-02-07
12-02-16
12-02-12
12-02-09 (Only the spec with the Network Card)
12-02-13
12-02-10
Leg_005_013RC
C588-MECH-001A

04-01-01
04-01-09
04-01-02
04-01-08
04-01-15
04-01-11
04-01-12
04-01-13
A
04-01-26
04-01-24
B
04-01-25
04-01-16
04-01-17
04-01-23
04-01-22
04-01-20
A
B
Front
Leg_Sec005_002EB
C588-MECH-001ADF

14-02-01-2
14-02-01
14-02-33
14-02-27
14-02-33
14-02-26
14-02-32
14-02-16
14-02-30
14-02-11
14-02-25
14-02-28
14-02-08
14-02-29
14-02-12
14-02-31
14-02-17
14-02-20
14-02-13
14-02-08
14-02-12
14-02-20
14-02-09
14-02-13
14-02-18
C588-MECH-001IR-A

18-01-18
18-01-15
18-01-17
18-01-10
18-01-14
18-01-16
18-01-04
18-01-13
18-01-26
18-01-09
18-01-03
18-01-08
18-01-02
18-01-05
18-01-07
18-01-23
18-01-27
18-01-12
18-01-11
18-01-01-2
18-01-01-2
18-01-01
18-01-01-2
18-01-01-2
C588-MECH-002A

05-01-01
05-01-02
[Ref PL5.2.1]
Front
Leg_Sec005_003RA
C588-MECH-002ADF

15-02-03
15-02-02
15-02-04
15-02-05
15-02-06
15-02-07
C588-MECH-003A

05-02-02
A
05-02-06
05-02-23
05-02-24
05-02-08
B
05-02-06
05-02-25
05-02-22
05-02-11
05-02-18
05-02-19
B
05-02-20
05-02-16
05-02-17
E
05-02-21
05-02-12
Front
Leg_Sec005_004EB
C588-MECH-003ADF

16-03-04
16-03-03
16-03-08
16-03-02
16-03-09
16-03-06
16-03-05
C588-MECH-004A

06-01-01
06-01-03
06-01-04
06-01-06
06-01-07
06-01-08
06-01-12
06-01-13
06-01-30
06-01-15
06-01-18
06-01-16
E
C
D
06-01-26
06-01-20
06-01-21
06-01-27
06-01-22
A
B
E
06-01-29
Front
Leg_Sec005_005RA
C588-MECH-004ADF

17-04-06
17-04-03
17-04-07
17-04-05
17-04-12
17-04-02
17-04-09
17-04-01
17-04-04
17-04-01-1
17-04-01-2
C588-MECH-005A

07-01-04
07-01-02
07-01-13
07-01-15
07-01-16
C
07-01-12
07-01-33
B
D
07-01-31
07-01-30
07-01-24
07-01-32
07-01-20
07-01-27
07-01-27
Front
Leg_Sec005_006RA
C588-MECH-006A

08-01-01
08-01-02
Front
08-01-05
Leg_Sec005_007RB
C588-MECH-007A
09-01-01

09-01-10
09-01-04
09-01-15
09-01-17
09-01-18
09-01-20
Front
Leg_Sec005_008RA

C588-MECH-008A
09-02-05 (with 11)
09-02-10 09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-09
09-02-08 (with 11)
09-02-06 (with 11)
09-02-13
09-02-13
09-02-10
09-02-10
09-02-11
09-02-11
09-02-07 (with 11)
Front
Leg_Sec005_009RA
10-01-01
C588-MECH-009A

10-01-02
10-01-07
10-01-08
10-01-06
Front
Leg_005_010RA
C588-MECH-010A

11-01-02
11-01-03
Front
11-01-09
11-01-01
11-01-04
11-01-05
11-01-06
11-01-07
Leg_005_011RA
C588-MECH-011A

12-01-11
12-01-10
12-01-06
12-01-09
Front
Leg_Sec005_012RA
Revision C
Option cassette unit
APPENDIX
Exploded Diagram
637

C802-OPTI-053A
01-01-05 All this page including
01-01-02
01-01-04
01-01-05
01-01-06
01-01-10
01-01-14
01-01-10
01-01-09
01-01-12
Leg_Sec005_018EA
Front
FOR 500-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit NO.1-1
Rev.01
C802-OPTI-054A

01-02-02
01-02-01
01-02-10
[Ref PL1.3.1]
[Ref PL1.1.1]
Leg_Sec005_019EA
Front
Rev.01

C802-OPTI-055A
01-03-12
01-03-08
01-03-09
01-03-10
D
E
01-03-11
01-03-14
01-03-16
01-03-18
F
C
01-03-04
01-03-03
E
F
01-03-02
A
01-03-21
01-03-20
01-03-22
01-03-20
01-03-20
01-03-21
01-03-20
01-03-23
01-03-26
01-03-24
[Ref PL1.4.1]
01-03-29
01-03-34
Front
01-03-32
Leg_Sec005_020EA
Rev.01

C802-OPTI-056A
01-04-01
All this page including
01-04-15
01-04-14
01-04-03
01-04-04
01-04-05
01-04-06
01-04-07
01-04-11
Front
Leg_Sec005_021EB
Rev.01
Revision C
7.6 Schematic Circuit Diagram

C588 MAIN
APPENDIX
Schematic Circuit Diagram
642
Board
Model
Sheet
Rev.
: C588MAIN BOARD
: Aculaser CX11/CX11F
: 1 of 6
:A
Board
Model
Sheet
Rev.
: C588MAIN BOARD
: 2 of 6
:A
Board
Model
Sheet
Rev.
: C588MAIN BOARD
: 3 of 6
:A
Board
Model
Sheet
Rev.
: C588MAIN BOARD
: 4 of 6
:A
Board
Model
Sheet
Rev.
: C588MAIN BOARD
: 5 of 6
:A
Board
Model
Sheet
Rev.
: C588MAIN BOARD
: 6 of 6
:A
Revision C
7.7 Fax Unit System

7.7.1 List of System Parameter
C A U T IO N
Some of the system parameter settings are restricted according

to the regulations or standards of the country or region. To
prevent those settings from being changed by mistake,
changing system parameter settings that are not described in
this manual is prohibited.
Be sure to observe the specified setting range for the system
parameter. Setting a value out of the range is not guaranteed.
If a malfunction of the fax operation occurs due to the
improper setting, the system parameter should be initialized.
See 3.3.2.1 Memory Clear (p138)
The list of system parameter is given on the following pages.

System (p650)
Print (p653)
Scan (p654)
Phone Line (p655)
Communication Control (p662)
Report (p671)
Image Data Processing (p672)
See the pages given below for information on how to check and overwrite the system parameter.
3.3.2.3 Parameter Check (p140)
3.6.4.3 System Parameter Settings (p301)
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
649
Revision C
SYSTEM
Table 7-8. List of System Parameter (System)
Label
SYS_COUNTRY
APPENDIX
Maintenance
Code
Main
Sub
300
009
User Internal
Access Address
{
001
Description
Country setting
Phone line-related system parameter settings are changed
automatically according to the selected country.
Fax Unit System
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
0x00 ~ 0xFF (ITU-T T.35 Country Code)

0x00 = Japan
0x04 = Germany
0x07 = Argentine
0x09 = Australia
0x0A = Austria
0x0F = Belgium
0x16 = Brazil
0x20 = Canada
0x26 = China
0x2E = Czechoslovakia
0x31 = Denmark
0x3C = Finland
0x3D = France
0x46 = Greece
0x50 = Hong Kong
0x51 = Hungary
0x57 = Ireland
0x59 = Italy
0x61 = Korea
0x69 = Luxembourg
0x6C = Malaysia
0x73 = Mexico
0x7B = Holland
0x7E = New Zealand
0x82 = Norway
0x8A = Poland
0x8B = Portugal
0x9C = Singapore
0xA0 = Spain
0xA5 = Sweden
0xA6 = Swiss
0xA9 = Thailand
0xB4 = England
0xB5 = America
0xB8 = Russia
0xFD = CTR (*1)
0xFE = Taiwan(*1)
0xFF = Common (*1)
Common
(0xFF)
Original codes are

assigned to countries
or areas that are not
defined in T.35
650
Revision C
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Default
Remarks
0 = ORIGINAL
1 = OEM
ORIGINAL
(0)
Fixed to 0
(for expansion)
Language setting to be used for printing fax reports
0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = US English
3 = Germany
4 = French
5 = Spanish
6 = Portuguese
7 = Italian
8 = Dutch
9 = Russian
10 = Chinese
11 = Korean
12 = Taiwanese
13 = Danish
14 = Swedish
15 = Finnish
Japanese
(0)
---
004
Operating Mode
0 = Normal mode1 = Maintenance mode
Normal
(0)
---
---
005
Enables or disables the line monitor function

When this is set to disable, the speaker volume setting (300003) becomes invalid. (The speaker does not sound)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
Fixed to 1
003
006
Speaker volume setting
1 = OFF
2 = Minimum
3 = Medium
4 = Full
Medium
(3)
---
004
---
007
Enables or disables the notification function
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
Not used
Main
Sub
SYS_OEM_MODE
300
010
---
002
OEM setting
SYS_LANGUAGE
300
011
003
SYS_MACHINE_MODE
300
028
---
SYS_SPEAKER_ENABLE
300
002
SYS_SPEAKER_VOLUME
300
SYS_INFORMATION_SERVICE
300
Setting Value
SYS_FILE_MEM_SIZE
300
008
---
008
Total memory size (SDRAM) for a file
1 to 4 Mbytes
4Mbytes
Not used
SYS_FORCED_POLLING
300
012
---
009
Enables or disables the forced polling function
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
Not used
SYS_DRPD_ENABLE
300
029
---
00A
Enables or disables the DRPD setting

0 = Disable
When this is set to disable, the DRPD setting (100-013) becomes 1 = Enable
invalid.
Disable
(0)
---
SYS_RX_RESTRICT
310
005
---
00B
0 = Disable
Enables or disables the fax receiving restriction function
When the function is enabled, the fax unit does not accept faxes 1 = Enable
from sources whose numbers are not stored in the speed-dial
memory.
Disable
(0)
Not used
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
651
Revision C
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
0 ~ 100 % (1step = 1%)100% = Rejects to

receive all faxes.
0%
(0)
---
20%
(20)
---
0 ~ 100 % (1step = 1%)
0%
(0)
---
Source information (fax header) setting
0 = OFF
1 = ON
OFF
(0)
---
010
Year-month-day format
0 = YY_MM_DD
1 = MM_DD_YY
2 = DD_MM_YY
YY_MM_DD
(0)
---
---
011
Time display format
0 = Displays on a 12-hour basis

1 = Displays on a 24-hour basis
24-hour basis
(1)
---
006
---
012
[Start] button function during a call

Sets the [Start] button to receive a fax manually or performs
manual polling when it is pressed during a call.
0 = Manual receiving
1 = Manual polling
Manual
receiving
(0)
Not used
100
010
---
013
Overseas transmitting mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
OFF
(0)
Not used
SYS_OUTPUT_PAPER_SIZE
100
011
---
014
Paper size
0 = A4
1 = Letter
2 = Legal
A4
(0)
Not used
SYS_OUTPUT_PAPER_KIND
100
012
---
015
Paper type
0 = Standard paper
1 = Coated paper
2 = etc
Standard paper
(0)
Not used
SYS_DRPD_SETTING
100
013
016
DRPD setting
0 = OFF (All)
1 = ON (Normal)
OFF
(0)
---
SYS_COLOR_RX_PAGE_LIMIT
100
014
---
017
Maximum data size of one page in color for receiving

When a received one page exceeds the set value, the product
causes an insufficient memory error.
0 ~ 4MB (1step = 64KB)
1MB
(16)
---
Main
Sub
SYS_RX_LIMIT_MEM
310
031
---
00C
Threshold level for judging received faxes as NG

When available memory lowers the threshold level, faxes are
not received automatically.
SYS_SIFT_PRINT_LIMIT_MEM
310
032
---
00D
Threshold level for judging to print a received fax immediately 0 ~ 99 % (1step = 1%)
When available memory lowers the threshold level, a received
fax is printed out immediately without being stored into the
memory.
SYS_TX_LIMIT_MEM
310
033
---
00E
Threshold level for judging sending faxes as NG

When available memory lowers the threshold level, any more
fax jobs to be sent are rejected causing an insufficient memory
error.
SYS_TX_HEADER
100
002
00F
SYS_DATE_FORMAT
100
003
SYS_TIME_FORMAT
100
004
SYS_MANRX_POLL_SEL
100
SYS_OVERSEAS_SENDING
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
652
Revision C
PRINT
Table 7-9. List of System Parameter (Print)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
10mm
(10)
Not used
Not combine
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
100%
(0)
Not used
0 = Not rotate
1 = Rotate
Not rotate
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
Cassette 1 available/not available
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Available
(1)
Not used
025
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Available
(1)
Not used
---
026
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Available
(1)
Not used
004
---
027
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
200
005
---
028
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS6_ENABLE
200
006
---
029
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS7_ENABLE
200
007
---
02A
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS8_ENABLE
200
008
---
02B
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS9_ENABLE
200
009
---
02C
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_CAS10_ENABLE
200
010
---
02D
0 = Not available
1 = Available
Not available
(0)
For expansion
PRN_SCANDOC_OUT
200
011
---
02E
Print out of stored sending fax jobs
0 = Do not print stored sending fax jobs

1 = Print stored sending fax jobs
(Do not transmit)
Not print
(0)
Fixed to 0
For debugging
Main
Sub
PRN_SPLIT_MARGIN
320
001
---
020
Threshold value for dividing a received one page to print on multiple

sheets
When a received image exceeds the set value and valid length for one
page, it is divided into two or more pages.
0 ~ 127 mm (1step = 1mm)
PRN_PAGE_MERGE
320
002
---
021
Page combining setting for printing received faxes

Received two pages are laid out in one page and printed on one sheet.
0 = Not combine
1 = Combine (2 pages into one page)
PRN_REDUCTION
320
003
---
022
Auto reducing print setting
0 = Not reduce (100%)

1 = Reduce
PRN_ROTATE_90
320
004
---
023
Image rotating setting

Prints a received image with it rotated 90 degrees.
PRN_CAS1_ENABLE
200
001
---
024
PRN_CAS2_ENABLE
200
002
---
PRN_CAS3_ENABLE
200
003
PRN_CAS4_ENABLE
200
PRN_CAS5_ENABLE
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
653
Revision C
Table 7-9. List of System Parameter (Print)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
Delete the
data
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
1 to 20 mm (1 step = 1 mm)
2mm
(2)
Not used
Not used
Main
Sub
PRN_SAVE_FILE
200
012
---
02F
Data handling at the time of forced print interruption
0 = Delete the data

1 = Save the data
PRN_PAGE_OVERLAP
200
013
---
030
Amount of overlap space for printing divided page
PRN_OFSET_L_300DPI
200
020
---
031
Amount of left margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image
0 to 255 dots (in increments of 8 dots)
64dot
PRN_OFSET_R_300DPI
200
021
---
032
Amount of right margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image
64dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_T_300DPI
200
022
---
033
Amount of top margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image
0 to 255 dots
60dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_B_300DPI
200
023
---
034
Amount of bottom margin reduction for 300 x 300 dpi image
0 to 255 dots
60dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_L_600DPI
200
024
---
035
Amount of left margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image
120dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_R_600DPI
200
025
---
036
Amount of right margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image
120dot
Not used
PRN_OFSET_T_600DPI
200
026
---
037
Amount of top margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image
0 to 255 dots
120dot
Not used
027
---
038
Amount of bottom margin reduction for 300 x 600 dpi image
0 to 255 dots
120dot
Not used
Default
Remarks
Cut phone
line
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
PRN_OFSET_B_600DPI
200
SCAN
Table 7-10. List of System Parameter (Scan)
Label
SCN_MEMOVR_CONTINUE
Maintenance
Code
Main
Sub
100
005
User Internal
Access Address
---
040
Description
Setting Value
Handling sending fax jobs when available memory becomes insufficient 0 = Cut the phone line (delete the job)
1 = Transmit pages that can be

stored in the memory
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
654
Revision C
PHONE LINE
Table 7-11. List of System Parameter (Phone Line)
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
PB
(0)
---
Auto switch
(2)
---
0 = PSTN (Public Switched Telephone

Network)
1 = PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
PSTN
(0)
---
PSTN connection method
0 =Numbers
1 =Not numbers (earth start/flash start)
Numbers
(0)
---
054
Flash start enabling or disabling
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
---
---
055
Minimum ringer frequency
0 ~ 127.5 ms (1step = 0.5ms)
14ms
(28)
---
016
---
056
Maximum ringer frequency
0 ~ 127.5 ms (1step = 0.5ms)
100m
(200)
---
300
017
---
057
10 PPS Make time

Make time for dialing at DP (10 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms)
31.275ms
(75)
---
LIN_BREAK_10PPS
300
018
---
058
10 PPS Break time

Break time for dialing at DP (10 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms)
67.137ms
(161)
---
LIN_MAKE_20PPS
300
019
---
059
16/20 PPS Make time

Make time for dialing at DP (16/20 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms)
16.263ms
(39)
---
LIN_BREAK_20PPS
300
020
---
05A
16/20 PPS Break time

Break time for dialing at DP (16/20 PPS)
0 ~ 255 ms (1step = 0.417ms)
33.777ms
(81)
---
LIN_DP_PAUSE_TIME
300
021
---
05B
DP interdigit time
The time between output digits for DP dialing
0 ~ 5100 ms (1step = 20ms)
720ms
(36)
---
LIN_PAUSE_WAIT_TIME
300
022
---
05C
Pose wait time

Wait time for pose signal
0 to 25.5 sec(1 step = 100 ms)
4 seconds
(40)
---
LIN_BUSYTONE_DETECTION
300
023
---
05D
Enables or disables detecting busy tone at the time of dialing
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Disable
(0)
---
LIN_BLIND_TIME
300
026
---
05E
Blind time when performing blind dialing
0 to 255 sec (1 step = 1 sec)
5 seconds
(5)
---
Main
Sub
LIN_DIAL_TYPE
300
001
050
Dial type
0 = PB ( DTMF )
1 = DP ( 10 PPS )
2 = DP ( 20 PPS )
LIN_RX_MODE
300
005
051
Reception mode
0 = reserVe
1 = Fax only
2 = Auto switch
3 = Phone only
4 = TAM
LIN_LINE_TYPE
300
007
052
Line type
LIN_PBX_TO_PSTN
300
013
053
LIN_FLASH_ENABLE
300
014
---
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MIN
300
015
LIN_RING_CYCLE_MAX
300
LIN_MAKE_10PPS
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
655
Revision C
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
20 seconds
(20)
---
100 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
180ms
(18)
---
Off-hook detection time

Time limit for attached phone off-hook condition to regard it as a
shut-off signal
200 to 5100 ms (1 step = 20 ms)
1300ms
(65)
---
062
Enables or disables detection of dial tone

Select whether detect or not detect dial tone immediately after
detecting off-hook condition when the line type is set to PSTN.
When this is set to disable, blind dialing is perfomed.
0 = Enable (detect)
1 = Disable (not detect)
Disable
(1)
---
---
063
Dial tone frequency
0 = 350 to 450Hz
1 = 300 to 500Hz
2 = 450 to 650Hz
400Hz
(0)
---
034
---
064
Busy tone frequency
0 = 400Hz
1 = 350 to 450Hz
2 = 300 to 500Hz
3 = 450 to 650Hz
400Hz
(0)
---
300
035
---
065
Busy tone pattern
0 = ON 0.30 ~ 0.80S
OFF 0.30 ~ 0.80S
1 = ON 0.20 ~ 0.60S
OFF 0.30 ~ 0.60S
2 = ON 0.50 ~ 1S
OFF 0.50 ~ 1S
3 = ON 0.12 ~ 1.2S
OFF 0.12 ~ 1.2S
(0)
---
Main
Sub
LIN_DIALTONE_DETECT_TIME
300
027
---
05F
Dial tone detecting time out
LIN_RING_DETECT_TIME
300
030
---
060
Ring detecting time

The time from detecting ring until it is judged as dialing
LIN_ONHOOK_DETECT_TIME
300
031
---
061
LIN_DIALTONE_DETECTION
300
032
---
LIN_DIALTONE_FREQ
300
033
LIN_BUSYTONE_FREQ
300
LIN_BUSYTONE_PATTERN
LIN_NCU_TYPE
300
036
---
066
NCU type
0 = For Japan
LIN_20PPS_ENABLE
300
037
---
067
Enables or disables 20 PPS setting

When this is set to disable, 20 PPS setting specified in the dial
type setting (300-001) becomes invalid.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
LIN_DP_RELAY_DELAY
300
038
---
068
Waiting time until the line stabilizes when performing pulse dialing 0 to 2550 ms (1 setp = 10 ms)
LIN_DIAL_NG_NUMBER
300
039
---
069
Allows or not allows to store emergency phone number into the

speed-dial memory
Emergency phone number: XXXXX
LIN_RING_INVALID_TIME
300
040
---
06A
0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms)

Time for judging ring signal is OFF
The time limit for ring signal. The line is shut-off if the time exceeds 0 = 125 ms
the set value.
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
0 = Allows
1 = Not allows
(0)
Not used
Enable
(0)
---
10ms
(1)
---
Allows
(0)
Fixed to 0
Not used
125ms
(0)
---
656
Revision C
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
-43dBm
(0)
---
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
5.0 seconds
(50)
---
Minimum ON time of distinctive ring
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
1.6 seconds
(16)
---
06E
Maximum ON time of distinctive ring
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
2.4 seconds
(24)
---
---
06F
Minimum OFF time of distinctive ring
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
3.2 seconds
(32)
---
046
---
070
Maximum OFF time of distinctive ring
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
4.8 seconds
(48)
---
300
047
---
071
Enables or disables the off-hook alarm after finishing fax

0 = Disable
communication
1 = Enable
The alarm goes off when off-hook condition of the attached phone is
detected after finishing fax communication.
Disable
(0)
Not used
LIN_EARTH_TIME
300
048
---
072
Earth time
100 to 1000 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
Earthing time when the outside line connecting method is earth start.
300ms
(30)
---
LIN_FLASH_TIME
300
050
---
073
Flash time
100 to 1000 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
Flashing time when the outside line connecting method is flash start.
320ms
(32)
---
Main
Sub
LIN_TAM_SOUNDLESS_LEVEL
300
041
---
06B
Noiseless level at TAM setting

0 = -43dBm
According to the noiseless level, a call received by an answer phone 1 = -40dBm
(attached phone) is judged as a fax.
2 = -39dBm
3 = -38dBm
LIN_TAM_SOUNDLESS_TIME
300
042
---
06C
Noiseless time at TAM setting

When the set noiseless level continues for the time, a call received
by an answer phone (attached phone) is judged as a fax.
LIN_DRPD_ON_MIN
300
043
---
06D
LIN_DRPD_ON_MAX
300
044
---
LIN_DRPD_OFF_MIN
300
045
LIN_DRPD_OFF_MAX
300
LIN_OFFHOOK_ALARM
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
657
Revision C
Label
LIN_DAA_REG16
Maintenance
Code
Main
Sub
300
051
User Internal
Access Address
---
Description
APPENDIX
300
052
---
Default
Remarks
---
0x04
---
(bit0)
Ringer Threshold Select
0 = 11 To 22 VRMS
1 = 17 To 33 VRMS
---
(bit1)
Ringer Impedance
0 = Maximum ringer impedance

1 = Synthesize ringer impedance
---
00 = Low Voltage Mode

01 = Japan Mode
10 = FCC Mode
11 = CTR21 Mode
10
---
074
SiDAA country setting register 1
(bit3, 2) DC Termination Select
LIN_DAA_REG17
Setting Value
(bit4)
IIR Filter Enable
0 = FIR Filter Enable

1 = IIR Filter Enable
---
(bit5)
AC Termination Select
0 = Select the real impedance

1 = Select the complex impedance
---
(bit6)
On-Hook Speed
0 = fast
1 = Slow(AustraliaASouth Africa)
---
(bit7)
DC Termination Off
Fixed to 0
---
0x00
---
(bit0)
Billing Tone Detected
0 = No billing tone detected

1 = Billing tone detected
---
(bit1)
ReceiVe OVerload
0 = Normal receiVe input leVel

1 = ExcessiVe receiVe input leVel
---
(bit2)
Billing Tone Protect Enable
0 = Billing Tone Protect disabled

1 = Billing Tone Protect enabled
---
(bit3)
OVerload Protect Enable
0 = Disable oVerload protection

1 = Enable oVerload protection
---
(bit4)
Current Limit
0 = All other mode

1 = CTR21 moded
---
(bit5)
Auto-Calibration Disable
0 = Enable auto-calibration
1 = Disable auto-calibration
---
(bit6)
Manual Calibration
0 = No calibration
1 = Initiate calibration
---
(bit7)
ReserVed
Fixed to 0
---
075
Fax Unit System
---
658
Revision C
Label
LIN_DAA_REG18
LIN_DAA_MODE
APPENDIX
Maintenance
Code
Main
Sub
300
053
300
054
User Internal
Access Address
---
---
Description
Setting Value
---
Remarks
0x00
---
Fixed to 0
---
0 = Half WaVe
1 = Full WaVe
---
MODE control
dont care
---
(bit3)
Force Low Voltage DC Termination Mode
0 = Normal Gain
1 = Force Low Voltage Mode
---
(bit4)
Line Voltage Adjust
0 = Normal operation
1 = Lower DCT Voltage
---
(bit5)
Force Japan DC Termination Mode
0 = Normal Gain
1 = Force Japan Mode
---
(bit6)
DTMF Dialing Mode
1 = Increase headroom for DTMF
---
(bit7)
Full Scale
0 = Default
1 = Transmit/receiVe full scale
---
---
076
Default
(bit0)
Ring Detect Network Squelch
1 = Squelch function enabled
(bit1)
Ring Detector Full WaVe Rectifier Enable
(bit2)
077
SiDAA operating mode
---
(bit0)
Automatic adjustment of boundary value between On-hook and Off- 0 =Enable

hook
1 =Disable
(DAA base is used for the boundary
value)
---
(bit1)
Automatic adjustment of DCT mode
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
---
(bit2)
Line monitor setting at ringer check
0 = Ringer check without monitoring line

1 = Ringer check with monitoring line
---
(bit3)
Setting value of country register 16
0 =Recommended value by the manufacturer

(Refer to the manual)
1 =Value set for DAA_REG 16
---
(bit4)

---
(bit5)

---
(bit6)
Free
---
---
---
(bit7)
Free
---
---
---
Fax Unit System
659
Revision C
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Default
Remarks
1 to 30
20
(20)
---
SiDAA on-hook detection lowest level (LVCS value)
1 to 31 (LVCS value)
7
(7)
---
07A
SiDAA on-hook detection variation range (LVCS value)
1 to 31 (LVCS value)
6
(6)
---
---
07B
SiDAA ring noiseless on-hook threshold value (%)
1 to 100% (1 step = 1%)
85%
(85)
---
059
---
07C
SiDAA ringing on-hook threshold value (%)
1 to 100% (1 step = 1%)
85%
(85)
---
300
060
---
07D
Dialing end judging time
0 to 25.5 sec(1 step = 100 ms)
5.5 seconds
(55)
---
LIN_NUM_DP
300
061
---
07E
Number of pulses of DP
0 = n, "0"=10
1 = "10-n"
2 = "n+1"
n, 0=10
(0)
---
LIN_DTMF_TX_TIME
300
062
---
07F
PB (DTMF) transmitting time

Tone transmitting time at PB (DTMF) dialing
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
100 ms
(100)
---
LIN_DTMF_PAUSE_TIME
300
063
---
080
PB (DTMF) pose time

Interdigit time at PB (DTMF) dialing
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
101 ms
(101)
---
LIN_DTMF_TX_LEVEL
300
064
---
081
PB (DTMF) transmitting level

DTMF transmitting attenuator level at PB (DTMF) dialing
4 to 15 (-4 to -15 dBm)

4 = -4 dBm
5 = -5 dBm
6 = -6 dBm
:
15 = -15 dBm
-9 dBm
(9)
---
LIN_DTMF_LEVEL_GAP
300
065
---
082
PB (DTMF) level differenceDifference between the higher and

lower audio frequencies at PB (DTMF) dialing
Difference = Higher frequencies Lower frequencies
0 = 2.0 dB
1 = 2.5 dB
2 = 3.0 dB
3 = 3.5 dB
4 = 4.0 dB
5 = 4.5 dB
6 = 5.0 dB
12 = 0 dB
13 = 0.5 dB
14 = 1.0 dB
15 = 1.5 dB
2.0 dB
(0)
---
Main
Sub
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_BASE
300
055
---
078
SiDAA on-hook detection threshold value (LVCS value)
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_MIN
300
056
---
079
LIN_ONHOOK_LVCS_CHG
300
057
---
LIN_ONHOOK_RATE_NORING
300
058
LIN_ONHOOK_RATE_RING
300
LIN_DIAL_END_TIME
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
Setting Value
660
Revision C
Label
Maintenance
Code
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
5 times
(5)
---
1 minute
(1)
---
10 seconds
(10)
---
3 times
(3)
---
8 sec
(8)
---
Enable
(1)
---
60 seconds
(60)
---
CNG signal (dial tone) detecting time

Use this setting when phone-first mode is set.
If CNG signal is not detected during the set time interval, the
product starts to call the answer phone (attached phone).
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
5.5 seconds
(55)
Not used
08B
Maximum number of redialing
0 to 255 times (1 step = 1 time)
99 times
(99)
---
08C
Minimum time interval between answering and starting to receive a 0 to 10 sec (1 step = 1 sec)
fax
0 second
(0)
---
Main
Sub
LIN_REDIAL_TIMES
310
001
083
Number of redialing
When the product cannot send a fax by auto dialing because the
receiving fax machine does not answer or is busy, it performs
redialing set number of times.

0 = Does not redial
LIN_REDIAL_INTERVAL
310
002
---
084
Redialing intervals
1 to 255 min (1 step = 1 min)
LIN_RING_RESPONSE_TIME
310
004
085
Attached phone ringing time-out period

When the phone rings with the reception mode set to auto switch,
the product starts to receive a fax after a lapse of the set time period.
LIN_RESEND_TIMES
310
025
---
086
Number of refaxing
When an automatic fax sending is interrupted due to line fault or any
other external factors, the product starts to send remaining pages
after a lapse of a predetermined time interval. The attempt is made
the set number of times.
LIN_COMM_INTERVAL
310
026
---
087
Time interval between the independent communications
LIN_NUM_CHECK_ENABLE
310
027
---
088
Enables or disables calling control for identical destination
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
LIN_NUM_CHECK_INTERVAL
310
028
---
089
Calling control time for identical destination
LIN_CNG_DETECT_TIME
310
030
---
08A
LIN_REDIAL_TIMES_MAX
310
078
---
LIN_RING_TIMES_MIN
310
079
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
661
Revision C
COMMUNICATION CONTROL
Table 7-12. List of System Parameter (Communication Control)
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
COM_TX_ATT_LEVEL
300
006
---
0A0
Tone transmitting level

(decreasing amount from offset 0 dBM)
5 to 15 (-5 to -15dBm)
1step = -1dBm
Tone transmitting level = minus set dBm
COM_MANTX_CNG
300
024
---
0A1
CNG transmitting at manual sending

Set whether send or not send the CNG signal when sending a fax
manually.
COM_RX_ATT_LEVEL
300
025
---
0A2
COM_CED_DETECT_TIME
310
006
---
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_MAX
310
007
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_MAX
310
008
APPENDIX
Default
Remark
s
-10 dBm
(10)
---
0 = Not send
1 = Send
Send
(1)
---
Receiving level
Set the tone level to be detected as an incoming fax.
0 = -43 dBm
1 = -38 dBm
2 = -33 dBm
3 = -48 dBm
-43 dBm
(0)
---
0A3
CED detecting time
0 to 2550 ms (1 Step = 10 ms)
100 ms
(10)
---
---
0A4
Symbol speed maximum variation tolerance

This setting is enabled only when receiving a fax
0 = 2400 baud
1 = 2743 baud
2 = 2800 baud
3 = 3000 baud
4 = 3200 baud
5 = 3429 baud
3429 baud
(5)
---
---
0A5
Maximum bit speed
1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = 12000 bps
6 = 14400 bps
7 = 16800 bps
8 = 13200 bps
9 = 21600 bps
10 = 24000 bps
11 = 26400 bps
12 = 28800 bps
13 = 31200 bps
14 = 33600 bps
33600 bps
(14)
---
Fax Unit System
662
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_ENABLE
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_ENABLE1
APPENDIX
310
310
009
010
User Internal
Access Address
---
---
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remark
s
---
0xFF
---
0A6
Direction to enable symbol speed

Corresponds to bit 12 to 19 of INGO0c and INFO0a.
(bit0)
2743 baud symbol speed support
0 = Not support
1 = Support
Support
(1)
---
(bit1)
0 = Not support
1 = Support
Support
(1)
---
(bit2)
0 = Not support
1 = Support
Support
(1)
---
(bit3)
Low carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3000 baud symbol

speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit4)
High carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3000 baud symbol

speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit5)
Low carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3200 baud symbol

speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit6)
High carrier frequency transmitting ability at 3200 baud symbol

speed
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit7)
Transmitting at 3429 baud symbol speed
0 = Not allow
1 = Allow
Allow
(1)
---
0A7
Direction to enable bit speed 1

This setting is used during MPh sequence.
0xFF
---
(bit0)
V.34 2400 bps ability
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit1)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit2)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit3)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit4)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit5)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit6)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit7)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
Fax Unit System
---
663
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_ENABLE2
310
011
User Internal
Access Address
---
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remark
s
---
0x3F
---
0A8
Direction to enable bit speed 2

This setting is used during MPh sequence.
(bit0)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit1)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit2)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit3)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit4)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
(bit5)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable
(1)
---
1200 bps
(0)
---
0dB
(0x00)
---
COM_V34_CTRL_BIT_RATE
310
012
---
0A9
Control channel bit speed
0 = 1200 bps
1 = 2400 bps
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_THRESH1
310
013
---
0AA
Symbol speed threshold value 1

Phone line characteristic distortion permissible level
The smaller value, the more difficult it is to select higher symbol
speed.
0xFA = -6 dB Difficult to judge

0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x00 = 0 dB Standard
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB Easy to judge
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
664
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remark
s
COM_V34_SYM_RATE_THRESH2
310
014
---
0AB
Symbol speed threshold value 2

Minimum S/N permissible level
The smaller value, the easier it is to select higher symbol speed.
0xFA = -6 dB Easy to judge

0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB Difficult to judge
0dB
(0x00)
---
COM_V34_BIT_RATE_THRESH
310
015
---
0AC
Bit speed selecting threshold value

The smaller value, the easier it is to select higher communication
speed.
0xFA = -8 dB Easy to judge

0xF9 = -7 dB
0xFA = -6 dB
0xFB = -5 dB
0xFC = -4 dB
0xFD = -3 dB
0xFE = -2 dB
0xFF = -1 dB
0x01 = 1 dB
0x02 = 2 dB
0x03 = 3 dB
0x04 = 4 dB
0x05 = 5 dB
0x06 = 6 dB
0x06 = 7 dB Difficult to judge
1dB
(0x01)
---
COM_V8_ANSAM_REVERSE
310
016
---
0AD
ANSam signal phase reversing

0 = Not perform
Set whether perform phase reversing for 450 ms when transmitting 1 = Perform
ANSam.
Perform
(1)
---
COM_V8_TE_TIME
310
017
---
0AE
Te time at V.8
When this is set to more than 1 second, echo canceller is disabled.
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
1.1 seconds
(11)
---
COM_V34_CC_TIME
310
018
---
0AF
Time-out interval from when starting V.34 mode (Phase 2) to the

control channel.
30 seconds
(30)
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
665
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
COM_V34_SHIFT_G3
310
019
User Internal
Access Address
---
0B0
Description
Enables or disables shifting to G3 mode when V34_CC time-out
occurs.
Set whether shift or not to shift to usual G3 mode when
COM_V34_CC_TIME time-out occurs.
C A U T IO N
Setting Value
0 = Not allow
1 = Allow
Default
Remark
s
Not allow
(0)
---
Enable
(1)
---
If this is set to shift to G3 mode, it may happen to infringe

certain patent.
COM_V34_ENABLE
310
020
---
0B1
Enables or disables the V.34 ability

Set whether enables or disables V.34 performance regarding the
modulation method.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
COM_ANSAM_TX_TIME
310
021
---
0B2
ANSam signal maximum transmitting time
0.1 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
4.0 seconds
(40)
---
COM_ANSAM_START_DELAY
310
022
---
0B3
Time interval until ANSam signal is transmitted

Set the time interval to start transmitting ANSam signal after the
line gets disconnected.
0.1 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
2.2 seconds
(22)
---
COM_V34_FRAME_SIZE
310
023
---
0B4
Frame size when transmitting V.34
0 = 256 octets
1 = 64 octets
256 octets
(0)
---
COM_ECM_ENABLE
310
024
---
0B5
Enables or disables the ECM performance (auto resending

0 = Disable
function)
1 = Enable
When line fault occurs in the middle of sending a fax, the function
allows the fax to be resend automatically immediately after the line
is restored.
Enable
(1)
---
COM_RTN_TX_RATE
310
034
---
0B6
RTN command transmitting criterion (percentage)

RTN: Indicates that training is required because messages are not
received correctly.
5%
(5)
---
COM_RTN_TX_LINE
310
035
---
0B7
RTN command transmitting criterion (number of continuous lines) 0 to 255 lines (1 step = 1 line)
5 lines
(5)
---
COM_T1_TIME_CALL
310
036
---
0B8
T1 timer immediately after dialing
50 seconds
(50)
---
COM_T1_TIME_TX
310
037
---
0B9
T1 timer when transmitting a fax
36 seconds
(36)
---
COM_T1_TIME_RX
310
038
---
0BA
T1 timer when receiving a fax
39 seconds
(39)
---
COM_T2_TIME
310
039
---
0BB
T2 timer
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
6 seconds
(60)
---
COM_T3_TIME
310
040
---
0BC
T3 timer
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
15 seconds
(150)
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
0 to 100 % (1 step = 1%)
666
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remark
s
COM_T4_TIME_AUTO
310
041
---
0BD
T4 timer when communicating automatically

T4 timer for automatic transmitting and receiving
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
3 seconds
(30)
---
COM_T4_TIME_MANU
310
042
---
0BE
T4 timer when communicating manually

T4 timer for manual transmitting and receiving
0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
4.5 seconds
(45)
---
COM_SOUNDLESS_TIME
310
043
---
0BF
T.30 noiseless timer

Timer for noiseless time recommended by T.30.
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
75 ms
(75)
---
COM_FSK_CHK_TIME
310
044
---
0C0
FSK receiving judge timer

When the product is waiting for incoming data in high speed
receiving mode, it judges that the incoming fax is FSK within the
set time interval.
0 to 255 ms (1 step = 1 ms)
200 ms
(200)
---
COM_PIX_DELAY
310
045
---
0C1
Time interval before starting to transmit image data in G3 mode
0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
500 ms
(50)
---
COM_DROP_OUT_TIME
310
046
---
0C2
Drop-out judging timer when receiving image data

Time interval from carrier down in the middle of receiving image
data to when judging it as drop-out.
0 to 2550 ms (1 step = 10 ms)
1000 ms
(100)
---
COM_DIS_RESEND_TIME
310
047
---
0C3
NSF, DIS resend timer

NSF: Signal to indicate that the receiving fax machine supports
functions other than those given in ITU-T G3 standard.
DIS: Signal to notify the sender that the receiving fax machine
features meet the ITU-T G3 standard.
0 = 3 seconds
1 = 3.45 seconds
2 = 2.55 seconds
3 = 4.5 seconds
3 seconds
(0)
---
COM_TX_SPEED
310
048
---
0C4
Transmitting speed performance

Enabled when communicating at V.17 or lower.
0 = Fallback by best performance of the

receiving machine
1 =V.27 ter fallback mode (2400 bps) only
2 =V.27 ter fallback mode (2400, 4800 bps)
only
3 =V.29 (7200, 9600 bps) only
4 = V.33(TC12000bps,TC14400bps) only
5 = V.17(TC7200bps, TC9600bps,
TC12000bps, TC14400bps) only
(0)
---
COM_RX_SPEED
310
049
---
0C5
Receiving speed performance

Reception mode that receives a fax declaring DIS, NSF (DTC,
NSC).
Enabled when communicating at V.17 or lower.
0 =V.27ter, V.29, V.33 and V.17

1 =V.27ter fallback mode (2400 bps)
2 = V.27ter(2400bps,4800bps)
3 = V.29(7200bps,9600bps)
4 =V.27ter and V.29
5 =V.27ter, V.29 and V33
(0)
---
COM_MODEM_MODE
310
050
---
0C6
Modem mode
0 = Auto (unique mode enabled)

1 = ITU-T G3 (unique mode disabled)
ITU-T G3
(1)
Fixed to 1
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
667
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Remark
s
COM_DIS_NEGLECT_NUM
310
051
---
0C7
Number of ignoring DIS
COM_TSI_CIG_SEND
310
052
---
0C8
Transmitting TSI and CIG

0 = AUTO
TSI: Signal that notifies ID of the sending machine as a response to 1 = forced transmit
CSI signal sent from the receiving machine.
2 = not transmit
CIG :Signal that indicates identification information on the sending
machine.
AUTO
(0)
---
COM_CSI_SEND
310
053
---
0C9
Transmitting CSI
CSI :Signal that notifies the sending machine of ID code of the
receiving machine.
0 = Transmit
1 = off
transmit
(0)
---
COM_FTT_FALLBACK
310
054
---
0CA
FTT number for judging fallback

Number of FTT until the product falls back at 14400/12000/9600/
7200/4800/2400 bps.
Fallback means an operation to find out an acceptable
communication speed for the receiving machine by reestablishing
the communication at lower speed when a training check signal at
certain transmitting speed is rejected by the receiving machine.
0 = All 2 FTT Fall Back

2 = All 1 FTT Fall Back
All 2 FTT
(0)
---
COM_TCF_CHECK
310
055
---
0CB
TCF signal judging time

TCF: Training check signal consists of 0 signal for about 1.5 seconds.
0 = 1.2 seconds
1 = 1.0 second
1.2 seconds
(0)
---
COM_TX_CABLE_EQU
310
056
---
0CC
Transmitting cable equalizer
0 = 0db (equivalent to 0 Km)

1 = 4db (equivalent to 1.8 Km)
8db
(2)
---
COM_RX_CABLE_EQU
310
057
---
0CD
Receiving cable equalizer
0 = 0db (equivalent to 0 Km)

8db
(2)
---
COM_TAP_HOLD
310
058
---
0CE
Enables or disables tap hold
0 = Disable
1 = Enable (equalizer freeze)
Enable
(1)
---
COM_RX_RESO
310
059
---
0CF
Specify resolution for received fax

(for evaluation)
0 x 00 = Default
0x01 = (Not used)
0x02 = (Not used)
0x04 = R8x15.4l/mmAR8x7.7l/mmA
R8x3.85l/mm
0x08 = (Not used)
0x10 = (Not used)
0x20 = R8x7.7l/mmAR8x3.85l/mm
0x40 = (Not used)
0x80 = R8x3.85l/mm
(0x00)
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
Default
0 time
(0)
668
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remark
s
COM_V29_EPTONE
310
060
---
0D0
0 = Disable
Enables or disables superimposing V.29 EP-tone
Set whether superimpose or not superimpose EP-tone to V.29 tones 1 = Enable
based on the ITU-T G3 standard.
Disable
(0)
---
COM_BYTE_DIS_DTC
310
061
---
0D1
Number of bytes for transmitting FIF of DIS/DTC

DTC: Transmit command corresponds to DIS.
0 = 4 bytes system
1 = 5 bytes system
2 = 6 bytes system
3 = 7 bytes system
4 = 8 bytes system
5 = 9 bytes system
6 = 10 bytes system
7 = 11 bytes system
8 = 12 bytes system
9 = 13 bytes system
10 = 14 bytes system (maximum capacity)
10bytes
(6)
---
COM_CTC_NUM
310
062
---
0D2
Number of transmitting CTC
0=000 to 7=111
---
---
0D3
ECM T5 timer
Timer for RNR signal sent from the receiving machine when the
receiving machine cannot continue to receive a fax due to
insufficient memory or any other troubles.
65 seconds
(65)
---
0D4
EQU comparison value at 4800 bps
0 to 0x7F FTT transmitting criterion
0x3A
---
0D5
0x32
---
COM_T5_TIME
310
063
COM_EQM_48
310
064
-----
COM_EQM_72
310
065
COM_EQM_96
310
066
---
0D6
0x3A
---
COM_EQM_120
310
067
---
0D7
0x4F
---
COM_EQM_144
310
068
---
0D8
0x3F
---
---
0D9
EQU comparison value at TCM 7200 bps
0x48
---
COM_EQM_TCM72
310
069
COM_EQM_TCM96
310
070
---
0DA
EQU comparison value at TCM 9600 bps
0x4E
---
COM_TX_CODE
310
071
---
0DB
Encoding method for transmission

Changes the method according to the receiving machine
performance.
0 = MH
1 = MR
2 = MMR
3 = JBIG(Not used)
MMR
(2)
---
COM_RX_CODE
310
072
---
0DC
Encoding method for reception
0 = MH
1 = MR
2 = MMR
3 = JBIG(Not used)
MMR
(2)
---
COM_V34_GAIN_CHG
310
073
---
0DD
Gain switching mode when detecting V.34 tones
0 = Not switch the gain

1 = Switches the gain
Switches
(1)
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
669
Revision C
Label
Maintenanc
e Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
COM_RX_GAIN_AJST
310
074
---
0DE
Received gain correction value
COM_MANRX_CED_DELAY
310
075
---
0DF
COM_CNG_DELAY
310
076
---
COM_MANTX_CNG_DELAY
310
077
COM_COLOR_MONO_CHG
320
COM_SAVE_DECERR_PAGE
320
APPENDIX
Setting Value
Default
Remark
s
3.0dB
(6)
---
Time interval for CED signal when receiving a fax manually

0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
Time interval from when starting to receive a fax manually to when
issuing CED signal.
0 second
(0)
---
0E0
Time interval for CNG signal

0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
Time interval from when finishing dialing to when issuing the first
CNG signal.
3 seconds
(30)
---
---
0E1
Time interval for CNG signal when sending a fax manually

0 to 25.5 sec (1 step = 100 ms)
Time interval from when starting to send a fax manually to when issuing
the first CNG signal.
0 second
(0)
---
010
---
0E2
Action when the receiving machine does not support color faxing
0 = Continue by changing the data into

monochrome
1 = Cut off the line
Continue
(0)
---
011
---
0E3
Storing pages which occur decode error
0 = Not store
1 = Store
Store
(1)
---
Fax Unit System
0 = 0.0 dB
1 = 0.5 dB
2 = 1.0 dB
3 = 1.5 dB
4 = 2.0 dB
5 = 2.5 dB
6 = 3.0 dB
7 = 3.5 dB
8 = -4.0 dB
9 = -3.5 dB
10 = -3.0 dB
11 = -2.5 dB
12 = -2.0 dB
13 = -1.5 dB
14 = -1.0 dB
15 = -0.5 dB
670
Revision C
REPORT
Table 7-13. List of System Parameter (Report)
Label
Maintenance
Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
Description
Setting Value
Default
Remarks
OFF
(0)
Not used
REP_MONITOR_OUT
100
001
---
0F0
Monitor report automatic printing

Disabled (it is included in transmission report)
0 : OFF
1 : ON
REP_DOHO_OUT
100
007
0F1
Multiple transmission report automatic printing
0 = Not print
1 = Print only when failed to transmit
2 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_TX_OUT
100
008
0F2
Transmission report automatic printing
0 = Not print
1 = Print only when an error occurs
2 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_ACTIV_OUT
100
009
0F3
Activity report automatic printing
0 = Not print
1 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_PROTOCOL_OUT
330
001
---
0F4
Protocol monitor report automatic printing
0 = Not print
1 = Print only when an error occurs
2 = Print
Not print
(0)
---
REP_SEL_OPP_NAME
310
003
---
0F5
The second priority for Name of The Other End on the activity report
0 = Name
Select which to be printed at Name of The Other End column on the
1 = Phone number
activity report as the second priority, name (which sent from the other end)
or phone number.
Phone
number
(1)
Fixed to 1
REP_SEND_ALL
330
002
---
0F6
Transferring size for printing report

The ASIC transfers data for printing report so that it fits within a standard
(letter) sized paper.
Transfers all
data
(0)
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
0 = Transfers all data

1 = Transfers data so that it fits within a
standard (letter) sized paper
671
Revision C
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING

Table 7-14. List of System Parameter (Image Data Processing)
Label
Maintenance
Code
Main Sub
User Internal
Access Address
---
IMG_TX_LINE_OR
320
005
IMG_JBIG_L0
320
006
IMG_JBIG_ATMOVE
320
007
IMG_JBIG_TP
320
008
IMG_DEF_JBIG_LRLTWO
320
009
APPENDIX
Description
Setting Value
100
Sub-scanning OR setting when changing resolution

Set whether process of not process sub-scanning OR when changing
resolution to transmit a fax.
0 = Not perform OR process

1 = Perform OR process
---
101
102
Number of lines for one stripe of JBIG encoding to transmit a fax
1 to 65535 (lines)
---
103
Maximum horizontal offset allowed for AT pixels in JBIG encoding
0 to 127
104
Use or not use TP for prescribed layers in JBIG encoding
0 = Not use TP
1 = Use TP
105
LRLTWO value (number of reference lines) in JBIG encoding method
0 = 3 lines
1 = 2 lines
-----
Fax Unit System
Default
Remarks
Not perform
(0)
Not used
128 lines
(128)
Not used
Not used
Not use TP
(0)
Not used
3 lines
(0)
Not used
672
Revision C
7.7.2 Error List

The error list is given on the following pages.
Service Call Error (p674)
Operator Call Error (p676)
Other Error Codes (p684)
The following is information on the error codes.

External Error Code
This code consists of main and sub codes and displayed in that order on the fax
reports listed below.
1) Activity Report
The code is displayed as "XXX-XXX" on the "Result" column.
2) Fax Setting List
C A U T IO N
The code is displayed on the list only when the operating mode is
set to "Maintenance Mode" by the corresponding system
parameter setting.
The code is displayed as "XXX-XXX" on the "Error Code" column in the "Error
History".
(Example) "300-048"= DCN reception (During faxing, something went wrong with the
other end machine and the fax could not be completed)
Internal Error Code
This code can be checked by the backup data obtained using the "MFP
Maintenance Tool".
The code is displayed in two bytes binary form (XXXX) on the "Error Code"
column in the "Internal Error History" at the top part of the backup data (TXT
data).
(Example) "6F00" = Internal error in process of creating REPORT FILE.
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
673
Revision C
SERVICE CALL ERROR

Table 7-15. Service Call Error
External
Error Code Internal
Code
MAIN SUB
Description
Cause
SDRAM failure
Remedies
Replace the fax board
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Trigger for Stopping Operation
Notification
Message
100
000
0x1000 An error occurs in reading and writing SDRAM

during power-on sequence
100
001
0x1001 The product failed to write date information in RTC Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
002
0x1002 The product failed to read time after initializing the Not used
clock
---
---
---
---
---
100
003
0x1003 The product failed to write into the fax flash

memory
Flash memory failure Replace the fax board
*1, *2
External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices

required for a fax communication
100
004
0x1004 SUM check of the fax flash memory was not

performed correctly
Flash memory failure Replace the fax board
*1, *2
External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices End of initialization
Diagnosing job
termination
100
005
0x1005 An error occurs in reading and writing SRAM

during power-on sequence
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
*1, *2
External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices End of initialization
---
100
006
0x1006 SRAM backup failure
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
007
0x1007 Normal writing on the EEPROM was not

performed
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
008
0x1008 Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT

(An error of writing/reading image data on the
memory)
SDRAM failure
*1, *2
100
009
0x1009 Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT

(BM in the ASIC could not be cleared)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
010
0x100A Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT

(MN86064 related error)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
011
0x100B Fault of parts in the PWBA CONT

(ASIC related error)
ASIC failure
*1, *2
100
012
0x100C The ASIC could not clear buffer memory
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
013
0x100D The product failed to write into the modem flash

memory
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
100
014
0x100E Modem failure
Modem failure
*1, *2
100
900
---
---
APPENDIX
---
This code is used by the MFP

(Using for fax is prohibited)
---
Fax Unit System
External error code 34H: Something is wrong with devices Diagnosing job
termination
termination
termination
---
---
---
674
Revision C
Table 7-15. Service Call Error
External
Error Code Internal
Code
MAIN SUB
Description
Cause
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Trigger for Stopping Operation
Notification
Message
---
200
000
0x2000 Fault of parts in the PWBA MCU
Not used
---
---
---
---
200
001
0x2001 MODEM&NCU LOOPBACK TEST NG
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
200
900
---
---
---
---
---
Note *1:
*2:

---
Displays the external error code.

A message requesting to turn off and back on the product, or to call service center is
displayed.
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
675
Revision C
OPERATOR CALL ERROR

Table 7-16. Operator Call Error
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
---
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
---
---
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
Notification Message
---
---
300
000
0x3000 Sending a fax is attempted at the time of receiving a fax Not used
300
001
0x3001 NSS/DCS function used by the received fax does not

meet those of the product
It is more likely that there Confirm if the sending

is something wrong with machine is normal.
the sending machine
*1, *2
Receiving failure
300
002
0x3002 Abnormal commands are received from the other end

machine.
The other end machine

failure
Confirm the condition of

the other end machine,
and resend the fax. Or
ask the sender to resend
the fax if the error occurs
during receiving process.
*1, *2
Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is

Receiving failure
finishedReceiving a fax is
finished
---
---
300
003
0x3003 CS becomes ON in FSK method
Not used
300
004
0x3004 Overrun
Noises in the line or GND, Check the line, GND, and

or loose connection of the the modular cable, and try
modular cable, or etc.
the failed operation again
*3
Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished

Receiving failure
Receiving a fax is finished
300
005
0x3005 Underrun

*3

Receiving failure
300
006
0x3006 CS of the modem did not become ON for RS request

while training in high speed

*3
300
007
0x3007 The product received illegal commands from the other The other end machine
end machine after receiving a communication reserve failure
request signal

and try the failed
operation.
*3

Receiving failure
300
008
0x3008 The product received RTN/PIN when transmitting in

G3 mode
Line quality is not good
Ask the recipient if the

fax was sent correctly,
and resend the fax as
necessary.
*3
300
009
0x3009 The product sent RTN when receiving in G3 mode
Ask the sender to resend

the fax if necessary.
*3
Receiving failure
300
010
0x300A The product sent EOR-Q when transmitting ECM

and try the failed
operation.
*3
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
---
50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax is finished
---
---
50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is

finished
676
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
300
011
0x300B The product received EOR-Q when receiving ECM
300
012
0x300C The product terminated the communication by issuing

command reject signal
300
013
300
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)

and ask to resend the fax.
*3
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
0x300D The product terminated the communication by issuing

procedure invalid signal
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
014
0x300E The product terminated the communication because it

received a command reject signal
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
015
0x300F T1 time-out for transmitting a fax
The modular cable is

disconnected, or the other
end machine does not
answer
300
016
0x3010 DCS/NSS resending over
300
017
300
300

finished
*1, *2
The other end machine cut Check that the modular

off the line, or the modular cable is properly
cable get disconnected
connected, confirm the
condition of the other
end, and try the failed
operation.
*3
0x3011 Fallback error
Try the operation again
*3

Receiving failure
018
0x3012 Post message resending over

operation.
*3
019
0x3013 T2 time-out

operation.
*3
Receiving failure
APPENDIX
Check that the modular

cable is properly
operation.
Receiving failure
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
Fax Unit System

finished
677
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
300
020
0x3014 T1 time-out for receiving a fax

end, and ask the sender
to resend the fax.
*3
Receiving failure
300
021
0x3015 T5 time-out

runs out of paper or the
memory is full
*3
Transmitting failure 50H: Forced stop Receiving a fax job is

finished
300
022
0x3016 Carrier cut off

end, and ask the sender
to resend the fax.
*3
Receiving failure
---

and try the failed
operation.
---

finished
300
023
0x3017 The product received an illegal frame in ECM
Not used
300
024
0x3018 CTC/EOR resending over
300
025
0x3019 Not for the operator (for RX and communication

reservation)
Not used
300
026
0x301A Time-out between frames in ECM
Not used
*3
*3
Receiving failure

finished
External error code
50H: Forced stop Transmitting a fax is finished

-----
*3
-----
---

finished
---
---

---
---
---
---
---
---
300
027
0x301B PIN reception (except EOR)
300
028
0x301C The product could not detect EOL within 13 seconds

(default time) when receiving image data in G3 mode.
Line quality is not good,

or there is something
wrong with the other end
machine

and ask to resend the fax.
300
029
0x301D The product failed to detect dial tones before starting

dialing
The line type setting is

wrong, or the line is
disconnected
Correct the line type

setting. Connect the line
properly.
300
030
0x301E The product failed to detect the second dial tones

before starting dialing
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
031
0x301F The product detected busy tones before starting dialing Not used
(BT1)
---
---
---
---
---
300
032
0x3020 The product detected busy tones before starting dialing Not used
(BT2)
---
---
---
---
---
300
033
0x3021 The product failed to detect the second dial tones

during dialing operation
---
---
---
---
---
APPENDIX
Not used
Fax Unit System
678
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
300
034
0x3022 The product detected busy tones during dialing

operation (BT1)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
035
0x3023 The product detected busy tones during dialing

operation (BT2)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
036
0x3024 The product failed to detect dial tones during dialing

operation
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
037
0x3025 The product failed to detect dial tones after dialing
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
038
0x3026 The product detected busy tones after dialing (BT1)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
039
0x3027 The product detected busy tones after dialing (BT2)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
040
0x3028 The product received no reply from the other end

machine after dialing
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
041
0x3029 The product detected off-hook condition while making Not used
auto dialing
---
---
---
---
---
300
042
0x302A The product could not detect line current
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
043
0x302B The product could not detect the polarity
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
044
0x302C The other end machine backed to ready status from

busy status which was detected by busy tones while
ringing
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
045
0x302D The other end machine is not ready or available for

sending a fax
During polling faxing,

original documents were
not set on the other end
machine

and ask the sender to
resend the fax.
*4
External error code
300
046
0x302E The other end machine is not ready or available for

receiving a fax

runs out of paper or the
memory is full

and resend the fax.
*4
External error code
300
047
0x302F The product disconnect the line because it received

forced polled transmission (for maintenance) in the
middle of processing a fax job
Not used
---
---
---
300
048
0x3030 DCN reception
During the fax

communication,
something went wrong
with the other end
machine
If the error occurs when

transmitting, resend the
fax. If the error occurs
during receiving process,
ask the sender to resend
the fax
*4
External error code

300
049
0x3031 Auto dialing function is used, but no data is stored for

the function.
The speed-dial memory is Check if the number of

deleted
the speed-dial memory is
correct, and try the
operation again.
*5
External error code
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
---
---
679
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
300
050
0x3032 Invalid data exists in the dial data
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
051
0x3033 The current setting of the product does not support

caller ID display service used for the phone line.
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
052
0x3034 Even though the current product mode supports caller

ID service, the phone line is not using the service.
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
053
0x3035 JM is not detected
Line quality is not good, Check the line and the

or a GND for the product GND condition, and try
is not established properly the failed operation again
*3
300
054
0x3036 CJ is not detected

*3
Receiving failure
300
055
0x3037 V8 error

*3

Receiving failure
300
056
0x3038 Phase2(Line Probing) error

*3

Receiving failure
300
057
0x3039 Phase3(Primary Channel

Equalizer Trainning)error

*3

Receiving failure
300
058
0x303A Modem Parameter Exchange error

*3

Receiving failure
300
059
0x303B Primary channel re-synchronizing error

*3

Receiving failure
300
060
0x303C Control channel re-synchronizing error

*3

Receiving failure
300
061
0x303D Control channel re-train error

*3

Receiving failure
300
062
0x303E Control channel OFF time-out

*3
External error code

300
063
0x303F Primary channel OFF time-out

*3
External error code

APPENDIX
Fax Unit System

finished
680
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
---
---
300
064
0x3040 Receiving the fax is rejected due to the DM prevention Not used
function
300
065
0x3041 The product failed to read the original while

performing manual transmitting
The next original was not Try the operation again

set in time
300
066
0x3042 When transmitting, image data conversion was not

made in time
MFP data transferring

failure
300
100
0x3100 The product could not detect normal lines within a

minute after starting to receive the image data in G3
mode
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
101
Not used
0x3101 Decoding data without RTC at the time of ECM
reception caused the MN8604 to be disabled to perform
decode process
---
---
---
---
---
300
102
0x3102 Number of lines for received one page exceeded

acceptable level (more than 65535 lines)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
103
0x3103 Abnormal termination of MN86064
Not used
300
104
0x3104 MN8604 failed to process commands within a

prescribed time period
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
105
0x3105 File pointer that is used for writing/reading in

encoding/decoding process caused an error
There is something wrong Replace the fax board

with the fax board or the
S/W
---
300
106
0x3106 The number of lines that indicate the processed lines in

encoding/decoding process is 0
There is something wrong Replace the fax board

with the fax board or the
S/W
---
300
107
0x3107 Monitor timer for encoding/decoding by MN86064

became time-out
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
108
0x3108 Target file is empty in decoding/encoding process
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
109
0x3109 During MMR decoding, MN86064 decode error

occurred
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
110
0x310A During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, BIH/over

flow error was detected
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
111
0x310B During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, an end

marker error was detected
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
112
0x310C During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, a YD error

was detected
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
113
0x310D During decoding JBIG data at MN86064, an abort

marker error was detected
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
114
0x310E During decoding JBIG data, BIH operated abnormally Not used
---
---
---
---
---
APPENDIX
---
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Fax Unit System
---
---
*3
External error code
External error code
681
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
300
115
0x310F Forced termination of data processing
The communication was

interrupted
---
---
Forced stop

300
200
0x3200 Communication was interrupted
The communication was

interrupted
---
---
Forced stop

300
300
0x3300 The file to be opened does not exist
The file was deleted for

some reason
I f t h e e r r o r o c c u rs
frequently,
i n i t i a l i z e o r re p l a c e
t h e f a x b o a rd
*1, *2
External error code
FDH:
Uncategorizable
factors
Fax scanning job is finished

Writing pages is finished
Printing of the received fax is
finished
Reading pages is finished
Printing report is finished
300
301
0x3301 The product attempted to perform Write Open, but

could not get FCB (FCB FULL)
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
302
0x3302 Memory full (the memory for storing data is insufficient) Memory full
Pre-stored received faxes

are printed out When
sending faxes are stored,
the product waits for the
jobs to be send or delete
the jobs for starting the
latest job.
---
---
300
400
0x3400 When transferring data between PRMs, time-out error

occurred before finishing the transferring
Not used
---
---
---
---
-----
21H: Fax
memory is
insufficient

Printing of the received fax is
finished
Reading pages is finished
300
500
0x3500 The product failed to create a power-off report
Not used
---
---
---
---
300
501
0x3501 A log file for the communication result could not be made Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
502
0x3502 The product failed to read time
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
503
0x3503 When storing a two-page combined transmission data, Not used

the data exceeded 65535 lines for one page
---
---
---
---
---
300
504
0x3504 When the QM-Coder is in coding process, SC count

over error occurred
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
505
0x3505 When the QM-Coder is in decoding process, the end

marker was not detected
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
300
506
0x3506 When printing a received fax stored in the memory, the Not used
product failed to decode the top part of the page for 10
seconds
---
---
---
---
---
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
682
Revision C
External
error code
MAIN SUB
Internal
Code
Description
Cause
Remedies
Panel
Report Display
Display
(reference)
507
0x3507 Memory full status (the memory has no more space for Memory full
the new job) was detected when the product received a
sending fax job

are printed out.
When sending faxes are
stored, the product waits
for the jobs to be send or
delete the jobs for
starting the latest job.
*1, *2*
300
508
0x3508 Creating a report file and log file for a report printing
job could not be made
Memory full

are printed out.
When sending faxes are
stored, the product waits
for the jobs to be send or
delete the jobs for
starting the latest job.
1, *2
50H: Forced stop Printing report is finished
300
509
0x3509 Opening/closing a report file for a report printing job

could not be made
There is something wrong If the error occurs

with the fax board or the frequently, replace the
S/W
fax board
*1, *2
50H: Forced stop Printing report is finished
300
510
0x350A Reserving memory for creating a report or an instantfaxing job could not be made
Not used
300
511
0x350B RTC was not detected during decoding process
Not used
300
900
Note *1:
---

---
---
---
21H: Fax
memory is
insufficient
300
---
External error code
Trigger for
Stopping
Operation
---

---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Displays the external error code.
*2:
A message requesting to see the users guide is displayed
*3:
A message requesting to retry the operation is displayed
*4:
A message requesting to confirm the condition of the other end machine is displayed
*5:
A message requesting to confirm the condition of the other end machine and retry
the operation is displayed
APPENDIX
Fax Unit System
683
Revision C
OTHER ERROR CODES

Figure 7-18. Other Error Codes
Internal Error Code
Description
0x4000
0x4FFF
Fax unit
0x5000
0x500A
Internal error
(MFP I/F task)
0x50B0
0x50B5
Internal error
(Communication check task)
0x5100
0x5104
Internal error
(Communication check task (Boot))
0x5200
0x5202
Internal error
(Schedule task), Failed to write dummy data into FILE
0x5310
0x5316
Error between tasks (MFP/Others)
0x5501
0x6230
Internal error
0x6400
0x64F0
Internal error
(CODEC all-purpose function)
0x6C00
0x6DDF
Internal error
(Report task)
0x6E00
0x6E14
Internal error
(Self diagnosis report)
0x6E90
0x6EBC
Internal error
(Report common function)
0x6F00
0x6F20
Internal error
(REPORT FILE creating process)
Internal error
(ERROR CODE converting process)
0x6F88
Firmware failure (for SW debug)
(HOOK task, CODE task, DECODE task)
0x6FC2
0x6FC4
Internal error
(REPORT FILE-related)
0x7000
0x7080
Internal error
(Self diagnosis task)
0x7100
0x7140
Internal error
(Self diagnosis processing)
0x7400
0x7420
Internal error
(RTC task)
0x81B7
Internal error
(Timer interruption process related)
0x9006
Internal error
(Message I/F)
0xA000
0xA00B
Internal error
(Received fax print task)
0xF023
0xF07E
Internal error
(Protocol (ECM))
0xF303
Internal error
(G2/G3)
Internal error
(Protocol (G3))
0xF502
Internal error
(G3 task)
0xF62F
0xF63B
Internal error
(Modem process related)
0xF704
0xF77C
Internal error
(Protocol (V.34))
0x9000
0xF41C
APPENDIX
0xF485
Fax Unit System
684

Service Manual Epson Aculasercx411nf

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Service Manual Epson Aculasercx411nf

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Multi-Function Page Printer

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

About This Manual

Symbols Used in this Manual

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition

May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or

If you need to work on the printer with power applied, never

High Temperature Assembly

As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately

The laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more

Warning label for Laser Beam

Caution Label About High-temperature Surface

Cautions relating to Toner cleaning

Cautions relating to Storage of Paper

Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner. To

SWITCH ASSY TOP

SWITCH ASSY TOP

FUSER LOCK SWITCH

FUSER LOCK SWITCH

Schematic Diagram of Safety System

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES

2.2.4 Paper Feed ................................................................................................

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

5.3 Fax Function...................................................................................................... 544

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

1.1.2 Scanner Section

: 5.0 PPM (for A4 size)

: 25.0 PPM (for A4 size)

Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

1.1.1 Printer Section

: 5.0 PPM (for A4 printing)

: 25.0 PPM (for A4 printing)

Manual duplex printing supported

: 200 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m2)

Optional lower cassette

: 500 sheets (paper basic weight is 64g/m2)

Paper Eject Capacity

NOTE: Conditions for the capacity:

1.1.3 Fax Section

Supports both PSTN and PBX

Improved usability suitable for business purposes

One-touch send button

Conforms to Color FAX standards

Toner Cartridge with CSIC chip (C, M, Y, K)

Photoconductor Unit with CSIC chip

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

: Standard 128 MB (expandable up to 576 MB)

Network I/F board (Cobalt)

Ethernet (10Base/100Base-T) (standard or option)

Fax modular (The AcuLaser CX11F only)

: Text, Photos, Text/Photos, and High resolution

Push-type scan (Enables to send scanned data to another PC via network)

EPSON AcuLaser CX11/CX11F

1.2 Basic Specifications

Table 1-1. Monochrome Print Mode (Unit: PPM)

1.2.1 Whole System

1.2.1.1 Outline Specifications

A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, GLT, EXE

User defined size (lenght) 297.00 mm or less

Low speed 14 Low speed 25